CITY OF JUSTICE

NEW
ADMINISTRATIVE
CAPITAL

MECHANICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

TENDER

APRIL 2024
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTRATIVE CAPITAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE redemption

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

104400 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

210517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

210518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
210548 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
210553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
211200 FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES
211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
212200 CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
212210 CONDENSED AEROSOL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
213113 ELECTRIC–DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220548 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221123 DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
221129 MAKE UP WATER PUMPS
221316 PLUMBING WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221429 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
223200 DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT
223300 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
224100 PLUMBING FIXTURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 2

23 SPC-M-R00-TD
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTRATIVE CAPITAL

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
230516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
230518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING
230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230548 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230713 THERMAL INSULATION
230900 BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
232113 HYDRONIC PIPING
232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS
232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
233113 METAL DUCTS
233130 AIR DUCT CLEANING
233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233413 AXIAL HVAC FANS
233416 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
233420 CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM
233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
233723 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS
235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS
237313 MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
238123 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
238129 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS
238219 FAN-COIL UNITS

DIVISION 44 – APPROVED VENDOR LIST

440000 APPROVED MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 2 of 2

23 SPC-M-R00-TD
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

DIVISION 10

SPECIALTIES

April 2024 - REV. 0

 CIY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 10 44 00

FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. All public spaces are covered automatic sprinkler system in addition to fire extinguishers
types FE-1 where needed.

B. Fire extinguishers types FE-2 are provided to electrical rooms in typical floors.

C. Main escape staircases are provided with landing valves 65 mm for Civil defense use.

D. First aid hose reel 25 mm are distributed at each level as per NFPA and local code
requirements.

E. Server room, MTR room, FCC room, BMS room, UPS room, Central battery room, GSM
rooms, Security control room, DATA center, and Lift machine rooms are covered by total
flooding NOVEC 1230 fire suppression system.

F. Low voltage rooms, Generator, RMU, Medium voltage switchgear room and Transformer
room are covered by total flooding Carbon dioxide fire suppression system.

G. Electrical panels are protected from inside by Aerosol system.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Portable fire extinguishers.

2. Fire hose cabinets.
3. Fire-protection accessories.
4. Fire stopping material.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - Page 1 of 5

APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CIY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties.

1. Fire Extinguishers and Fire hose cabinets: Include rating and classification.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of
cabinet finish indicated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a
single manufacturer.

B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."

C. Fire Extinguishers and Fire hose cabinets: Listed and approved by local civil defense and
subject to acceptance by the Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that hose reels, racks, valves and fire extinguishers
indicated and provided are accommodated by the Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as

per approved vendor list.

2.2 FIRE HOSE CABINETS

A. General: Provide where indicated, fire hose cabinets as shown on the Drawings.

B. Fire hose cabinet type FHC-1: Recessed type near to escape stairs, vertically fabricated
double compartments, with steel body, trim and single door, finished with baked red enamel
on inside and red prime coat on outside. Body and trim to be 16 gauge (1.5 mm) thickness
minimum and door 20 gauge (0.9) thickness minimum. Door to be provided with quick
opening lock, with hinges enabling it to swing up to 180°, and includes two double strength
glass panels with “Hose Rack” & “Fire Extinguisher” and "Hose Reel" labels seen from
outside, surrounded by gaskets. The cabinet has two inlet holes for water feeding pipes, one
for landing valve, and the other is for hose reel. Fire cabinet to be supplied from factory
with the following equipment:

1. One 40 mm pressure restricting angle valve,

2. One 25 mm reinforced rubber hose reel, 12 bar working pressure, can be operated
regardless of full unwinding of the hose, 20 m length, complete with trigger operated
water pistol, two position (spray/jet) and flexible hose link.
3. One 65 mm angle gate valve with Morris coupling,

FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - Page 2 of 5

APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CIY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

4. One steel hose rack with rack nipple, complete with flat Nylon hose with internal
rubber lining and 100% polyester coating, 30 m length, 65 mm diameter and
complete with Morris coupling ends,
5. One discharge branch-pipe with shut off nozzle, with 65 mm Morris coupling, 250
mm long, 15 mm discharge outlet, with satin brass finish,
6. One portable fire extinguisher type FE-1.

C. Fire hose cabinet type FHC-2: Wall mounted for first aid, horizontally fabricated twin
compartments, with steel body, trim and single door, finished with baked red enamel on
inside and red prime coat on outside. Body and trim to be 16 gauge (1.5 mm) thickness
minimum and door 20 gauge (0.9) thickness minimum. Door to be provided with quick
opening lock, with hinges enabling it to swing up to 180°, with "Hose Reel" and “Fire
Extinguisher” labels seen from outside. The cabinet has one inlet hole for water feeding pipe
for hose reel. Fire station cabinet to be supplied from factory with the following equipment:

1. One 40 mm pressure restricting angle valve,

2. One 25 mm reinforced rubber hose reel, 12 bar working pressure, can be operated
regardless of full unwinding of the hose, 20 m length, complete with trigger operated
water pistol, two position (spray/jet) and flexible hose link.
3. One portable fire extinguisher type FE-1.

2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. General: Provide where indicated, portable fire extinguishers mounted on wall brackets as
shown on the Drawings. All extinguishers are to be conformed to applicable European and
Egyptian standards and approved by local Civil defense and to be provided with an
approved mechanical seal.

B. Fire Extinguisher (FE-1): portable, manual, dry chemical powder, capacity 6 kg,
extinguishing rate not less than 43A 233B C, with red enameled steel tank with high quality
polyester coating, valve head, and equipped with flexible hose with a polymer nozzle and
handle for high maneuverability and control. For installation purpose on walls, provide
electricity and corrosion proof protective base and hanging wall bracket.

C. Fire Extinguisher (FE-2): portable, manual, Carbon Dioxide, capacity 5 kg, extinguishing
rate not less than 89B, with red enameled steel tank with high quality polyester coating,
brass valve head with over pressure safety valve, and equipped with a squeeze type valve,
plastic conical snow horn and carrying handle. For installation purpose on walls, provide
electricity and corrosion proof protective base and hanging wall bracket.

D. Fire Extinguisher (FE-3): mobile foam AFFF, manual, supported on a carriage with
chemical resistance rollers for easy maneuvering, capacity 45 liters, fire class AB, stainless
steel body, equipped with chrome plated valve head with mechanical over pressure safety
valve, pressure gage, reinforced rubber hose 5 m length, and a heat and an electricity-
isolated operating pistol, and propelled with external Nitrogen cylinder.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of

sizes required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-
enamel finish.

1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.

FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - Page 3 of 5

APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CIY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Provide brackets for extinguishers located in cabinets.

B. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter
style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Engineer.

1. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"

in red letter decals applied to wall surface.
2. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"
applied to door.

2.5 COLORS AND TEXTURES

A. Colors and Textures: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range for these
characteristics.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces

are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other
contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods.

B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately
after surface preparation and pretreatment.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-

free, universal primer, selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for
compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated, and for
capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged
exposure.

C. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's

standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting
topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to
achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

D. Polyester Powder Coating: Approved type to meet the requirements of AAMA 603 or BS
6496 and BS EN 13438, consisting of powder particles of resinous material and additives
to improve performance. The coating is to be electrostatically sprayed on to produce a hard,
durable coating.

FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - Page 4 of 5

APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CIY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Minimum dry film thickness: 60 microns.

2. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
3. Surface finish: gloss.

2.8 FIRE-STOPPING MATERIAL

A. Fire-Resistant Sealant: Provide two-part, foamed-in-place, fire-stopping elastomeric

sealant formulated for use in a through-penetration fire-stop system for filling openings
around fire piping penetrations through walls and floors, having fire-resistance ratings
indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters
Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the work included, shall be K-Flex or approved similar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed
cabinets are to be installed.

B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FIRE HOSE CABINETS INSTALLATION

A. Install fire hose cabinets for free access and minimum passage restriction.

B. Install DN40 hose valves with flow-restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install DN65 hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 by DN40 reducer adapter and
flow-restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install wall-mounting, rack-type hose stations in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with
finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install
valves at angle required for connection of fire hose.

E. Install hose-reel hose stations on wall with bracket attached to substrate.

F. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties.

G. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION 104400

FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - Page 5 of 5

APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 10 55 00

IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Contractor shall submit detail description of irrigation system with shop drawing for the
approval of the Engineer.

B. Irrigation System shall be based mainly on drip systems that is suitable for smaller spaces
like planter boxes at the perimeter of 31N plot area, bubblers for shrubs, palms and trees, and
spray heads to grass areas. They generally include tubing, emitters…etc.

C. Exact location of feeders and outlets shall be coordinated with approved landscaping shop
drawings.

D. Irrigation water supply main network shown on the drawings is running in B1 level is
schematic and for guidance only. It will be supplied from ACUD irrigation network through
a valve box.

E. Actual distribution of lateral piping and valves shall be verified by the contractor based on
final approved landscape design.

F. Irrigation system shall rely on the received flow from ACUD at schedules time, to distribute
to all green areas in the project with only the possibility for manual control for each zone.

G. According to the Owner requirements, the Irrigation System should be developed to be fully
automatic by providing solenoid valves for each zone controlled by one or more irrigation
control panel(s).

H. The contractor shall submit the following based on actual water demand for the approved
landscape design.

1. Shop drawings for main and lateral irrigation piping coordinated to all disciplines and
approved landscape design.
2. Layout for spray heads and complete installation details.
3. Watering time schedule for 100% coverage of landscape areas.
4. The contractor shall verify the irrigation flow and head requirements to be
coordinated with ACUD.

I. The contractor is responsible to fulfill all the requirements of the Specification and ACUD
regulations.

IRRIGATION 10 55 00 - Page 1 of 11
APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Investigate and determine available water supply water pressure and flow characteristics.

B. All plot dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, carefully check and
verify all dimensions.

C. Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, etc., which
may be required.

D. Carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all work, and plan work
accordingly. Furnished such fittings, etc. as may be required to meet such conditions.

E. Locations of planter boxes and green areas are shown for the purpose of installing sprinkler
heads. Actual dimension of the planting areas are from the landscape plans.

F. Locations of trees, palms and shrubs are shown for the purpose of installing bubblers or
spray sprinklers. Dimension of the trees and planting areas are from the landscape plans.

G. Piping shown on the irrigation plans is schematic, actual conditions will warrant routing
piping with other services.

H. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. Conflicts
between sprinkler systems, planting, existing utilities, and architectural features shall be
avoided.

I. Work Space:

1. Upon completion of the contract, remove from the premises all remaining equipment,
leftover pipe, packaging material, trash and all other unsightly litter.

2. Make and remove upon completion, all temporary water lines and/or connections.

3. Restrict the work to the construction area indicated on the drawings.

J. Permission to shut off any water lines must be obtained from the Engineer. Keep disruptions
of existing systems to a minimum.

K. Verify size and details of stub-outs, which provides as the source of water supply to the
sprinkler system.

L. Prior to cutting into the soil, locate all cables, conduits, sewers, and other such utilities that
are commonly encountered underground and take proper precautions not to damage or
disturb such facilities. If there is a conflict between such facilities and the proposed work,
promptly notify the Engineer. Proceed in the same manner if rock layer or any condition-
encountered underground makes changes advisable.

M. Verify correctness of all finish grades within the work area in order to ensure the proper soil
coverage of the sprinkler system pipes.

N. Whenever any material is specified by name and/or number, such specification is used for
the purpose of facilitating a description of the materials and establishing quality and shall be
deemed and construed to be followed by the words “or approved equal”. No substitutions
will be permitted which have not been submitted for approval to the Engineer.

IRRIGATION 10 55 00 - Page 2 of 11
APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Main Piping: Downstream from valve box connection from ACUD irrigation network to
and including control valves. Piping is under water distribution system pressure.

B. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinkler heads. Piping is under
pressure during flow.

C. Drain Piping: Drain excess of irrigation water from soil in enclosed planting boxes to out of
them. Piping is not under pressure.

D. UPVC: Un-plasticized Poly Vinyl Chloride

1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Water Coverage: 100 percent of turf and planting areas.

B. Location of Sprinklers heads: Shall be coordinated with approved landscape layout and the
necessary adjustment shall be made to determine the penetrations in B1 slab accurately.

C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for
piping, valves, and specialties, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Main Piping : 1380 kPa.

2. Circuit Piping : 1035 kPa.
3. Drain Piping : 690 kPa.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include pressure rating, rated capacity, settings, and electrical data of selected
models for the following.

5. Valves. Include aboveground and underground; general-duty, manual and automatic

control, and quick-coupler types.
6. Valve boxes.
7. Sprinklers.
8. Specialties. Include emitters, drip tubes, and other devices.
9. Controllers. Include wiring diagrams.
10. Pipes and hoses including joining system

B. Shop Drawings: Show piping, including invert levels, plan layout and locations, types, sizes,
capacities, and flow characteristics of lawn sprinkler piping components. Include water
meters, valves, piping, sprinklers and devices, accessories, controls, and wiring. Show areas
of sprinkler spray and overspray.

C. Coordination Drawings: Show piping and major system components. Indicate interface and
spatial relationship between piping, system components, adjacent utilities, and proximate
structures.

D. Test Reports: All installations shall be treated for covering up and test records shall be
submitted to the approval of the Engineer

IRRIGATION 10 55 00 - Page 3 of 11
APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include data

for the following:

1. Control valves.
2. Sprinklers.
3. Specialties.
4. Controllers.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain valves through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of sprinkler
piping components are based on approved types and models by the Engineer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Comply with ASTM F 645, "Guide for Selection, Design, and Installation of Thermoplastic
Water Pressure Piping Systems."

E. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between
wiring and electrically operated devices.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling.
4. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then, reinstall for
storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient
dew-point temperature. Support off ground or pavement in watertight enclosures
when outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage,
and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.

D. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural
capacity of floor when storing inside.

E. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

IRRIGATION 10 55 00 - Page 4 of 11
APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as

per approved vendor list.

2.2 PIPES AND TUBES

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.

2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in
Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. UPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2665, ASTM D1785 or DIN 8061/8062.

C. UPVC Pipe Fittings: ASTM 3034/3311, ASTM 2466/2467 or BS EN 1401.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.

B. Adhesive primer for UPVC fittings: ASTM F 656.

C. Solvent cement for UPVC fittings: ASTM D 2564.

D. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure
rating at least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.

E. Flexible, Transition Couplings for Underground, Non-pressure Piping: ASTM C1173 with
elastomeric sleeve. Include ends same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-
resistant metal band on each end.

1. Sleeve Type for Plain-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless-steel
band assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of piping to be joined.
Include the following:

a. Sleeves for Plastic Piping: ASTM F477 elastomeric seal.

b. Sleeves for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.
c. Bands: Stainless steel, one at each pipe insert.

2. Gasket Type for Dissimilar-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric compression gasket,

made to match inside diameter of pipe or hub, and outside diameter of adjoining
pipe. Include the following:

a. Gaskets for Plastic Piping: ASTM F477 elastomeric seal.

b. Gaskets for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.

2.5 VALVES AND SPECIALITIES

IRRIGATION 10 55 00 - Page 5 of 11
APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Plastic Valves: PVC with 1035-kPa minimum pressure rating, ends compatible with piping,
and tee handle.

B. Quick-Couplers: Factory-fabricated, bronze or brass, two-piece assembly. Include coupler

water-seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, rubber-covered
cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and
operating key.

1. Locking Top Option: Include vandal-resistant, locking feature with two matching
keys.

C. Curb-Stop Service Boxes: Cast iron with telescoping top section of length required for
depth of bury of valve, cover with lettering "WATER," bottom section with base of size to
fit over curb stop, and 75-mm diameter barrel. Include steel tee-handle shutoff rod with one
pointed end, stem of length to operate curb stop, and slotted end fitting curb-stop head.

D. Valve Boxes: Cast iron with top section and cover with lettering "WATER," bottom section
with base to fit over valve, 127-mm diameter barrel, and adjustable cast-iron extension of
length required for depth of bury of valve. Include steel tee-handle, shutoff rod with one
pointed end, stem of length to operate valve, and end fitting valve operating nut.

E. Manual Control-Valve Service Boxes: Cast iron cabinet 300x300x200 mm to be adequate

to contain the isolating valve. It will be fixed in planter box wall, fully or semi recessed as
per the coordination with the Architect. Include box key and cover with lettering "WATER"
on the box cover.

F. Control-Valve Boxes: PE, ABS, fiberglass, polymer concrete, or precast concrete box and
cover, with open bottom, openings for piping, and designed for installing flush with grade.
Include size as required for valves and service.

1. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 75 mm maximum

to 19 mm minimum.

2.6 SPRINKLERS

A. Description: Manufacturer's standard sprinklers designed for uniform coverage over entire
spray area indicated, at available water pressure.

B. Components: Brass or plastic housing and corrosion-resistant interior parts.

C. Flush, Surface Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment.

D. Bubblers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment.

E. Shrubbery Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment.

F. Pop-up, Spray Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment and stainless-
steel retraction spring.

IRRIGATION 10 55 00 - Page 6 of 11
APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

G. Pop-up, Rotary, Spray Sprinklers: Gear drive, full-circle and adjustable part-circle types.

H. Pop-up, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full-circle and part-circle types.

I. Aboveground, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full-circle and part-circle types.

2.7 SPECIALITIES

A. Single-Outlet Emitters: Plastic body, to deliver 1.9 l/h flow at approximately 138 kPa (shall
be verified based on planter requirements). Tubing Size: 3 m long and 3-mm minimum ID,
Polyethylene.

B. Multiple-Outlet Emitters: Plastic body with multiple outlets, to deliver 3.8 l/h flow at
approximately 138 kPa (shall be verified based on planter requirements). Tubing Size: 30 m
long or more and 3-mm minimum ID, Polyethylene. Outlet Caps: Plastic, for outlets
without tubing.

C. Drip Tubes: 1/2-inch NPS (DN15) flexible PE or PVC for emitters and other devices, of
length indicated, and with plugged end.

D. Drip Tubes: 3/4-inch NPS (DN20) flexible PE or PVC for emitters and other devices, of
length indicated, and with plugged end.

E. Drip Tubes: 1-inch NPS (DN25) flexible PE or PVC for emitters and other devices, of
length indicated, and with plugged end.

2.8 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM (OPTION)

A. Exterior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4 weatherproof enclosure with locking
cover and two matching keys; and include provision for grounding.

1. Material: Enameled-steel, sheet metal.

2. Mounting: Freestanding type for concrete-base mounting.

B. Interior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12 dripproof construction with locking
cover and two matching keys.

1. Material: Enameled-steel, sheet metal.

2. Mounting: Freestanding type for concrete-base mounting.

C. Transformer: Internal; and suitable for converting 120-V, ac building power to 24-V, ac
power.

D. Controller Stations for Automatic Control Valves: Each station is variable from
approximately five to 60 minutes. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each
station.

E. Controller Schedule: Adjustable, 24-hour, 14-day clock with automatic operations to skip
operation any day in timer period; to operate every other day; or to operate two or more
times daily. Each zone shall has its independent schedule.

IRRIGATION 10 55 00 - Page 7 of 11
APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Manual or Semiautomatic Operation: Allow this mode without disturbing preset

automatic operation.
2. Nickel-Cadmium Battery and Trickle Charger: Automatically power timing device
during power outages.

F. Wiring: UL 493, Type UF, solid-copper-conductor, insulated cable, suitable for direct
burial.

1. Feeder-Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers.

2. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers
and automatic control valves and color-coded different than feeder-circuit-cable
jacket color and with jackets of different colors for multiple-cable installation in
same trench.
3. Splicing Materials: Pressure-sensitive, thermoplastic tape; waterproof sealing
packets; or other waterproof connectors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Comply with requirements of Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and
backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating
may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping only, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aboveground, main pipe: Use the following:

1. UPVC plastic pipes to DIN 8061/8062 – PN6, with socket fittings, and solvent-
cemented joints.
Or:
2. UPVC plastic pipes DWV to ASTM D2665, with socket fittings, and solvent-
cemented joints.

D. Underground, main pipe: Use the following:

1. UPVC plastic pipes to DIN 8061/8062 – PN10, with socket fittings, and solvent-
cemented joints.
Or:
2. UPVC plastic pipes to ASTM D1785 - Schedule 40, with socket fittings, and
solvent-cemented joints.

E. Circuit pipe: Use the following:

1. UPVC plastic pipes to DIN 8061/8062 – PN6, with socket fittings, and solvent-
cemented joints.
Or:
2. UPVC plastic pipes DWV to ASTM D2665, with socket fittings, and solvent-
cemented joints.

IRRIGATION 10 55 00 - Page 8 of 11
APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated,
the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate
friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as
indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

I. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping."

3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. UPVC Piping Joints: Join drainage piping according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D2665
Appendixes.

B. Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in ASTM
D402 for safe handling during joining of plastic pipe and fittings.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting, valve,
and coupling.

B. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm minimum rods.

C. Install hangers for plastic piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod diameters:

IRRIGATION 10 55 00 - Page 9 of 11
APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. DN40 and DN50 (1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm
with 10-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
2. DN100 and DN125 (4- and 5-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm
with 16- mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
3. DN150 (6-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 19-mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
4. DN200 t hr ough DN300 ( 8- t hr ough 12-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal
spacing, 1200 mm with 22-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing,
1200 mm.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior irrigation network. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.

3.8 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Flush circuit piping with full head of water and install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is
completed.

B. Install lawn sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights.

C. Locate part-circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 100 mm from walls and
50 mm from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install controllers according to manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated.

B. Install freestanding controllers on precast concrete bases not less than 950 by 600 by 100
mm thick, and not less than 150 mm greater in each direction than overall dimensions of
controller.

C. Install control wiring in same trench with piping. Install wiring with loops at control valves
and controllers, at intervals not greater than 30 m, and changes in direction to allow for
expansion. Bundle wiring in same trench at 3-m intervals.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect piping to valves, sprinklers, and specialties.

B. Connect water supplies to lawn sprinkler piping with backflow preventers at connections to
potable-water supplies.

C. Electrical components, devices and accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Ground electric – powered controllers, valves, and devices.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminal according to manufacturers published

torque tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B

IRRIGATION 10 55 00 - Page 10 of 11
APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Arrange for electric-power connections to controllers, control valves, and devices that
require power. Electric power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16
Sections.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test piping according to procedures of Engineer or, in absence of such procedures, as

follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered
or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above
operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.
Isolate test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure
constitute defects that must be repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed UPVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of water-
based latex paint.

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed
cabinets are to be installed.

B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

END OF SECTION 10 55 00

IRRIGATION 10 55 00 - Page 11 of 11
APRIL 2023 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

DIVISION 21

FIRE SUPPRESSION

May 2024 - REV. 0

 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 21 05 17

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves.
2. Stack-sleeve fittings.
3. Sleeve-seal systems.
4. Sleeve-seal fittings.
5. Grout.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and
welded steel collar; zinc coated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
coated, with plain ends.

2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include

clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 17 - Page 1 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular
space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to
match piping OD.

2.5 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide at least 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and
walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and
walls are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP
sleeves.
2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 17 - Page 2 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal
system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with an approved firestop materials.

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with
membrane waterproofing.
3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above
finished floor level.
4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if
ring is specified.
5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal
pipe penetrations with an approved firestop materials.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service
piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and
for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,
assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make a watertight seal.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 17 - Page 3 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal

system. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between
piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

2. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping
and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3. Concrete Slabs above Grade: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

4. Interior Partitions: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

END OF SECTION 210517

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 17 - Page 4 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 21 05 18

ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Escutcheons.
2. Floor plates.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

A. Section Includes:

1. ID: Internal diameter

2. OD: Outside diameter

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish

and clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge
and setscrew.

E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed hinge, and clip
fasteners.

ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 18 - Page 1 of 3

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe and with OD that completely covers
opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern

type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-
plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, steel type.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished, chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,
chrome-plated finish.

2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.
b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, steel type with concealed hinge.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting
brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting brass type with
polished, chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting brass type with polished,
chrome-plated finish.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe and with OD that completely covers
opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 18 - Page 2 of 3

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.

END OF SECTION 210518

ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 18 - Page 3 of 3

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 21 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of isolator
specified. Include load deflection curves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional engineer, for the
following:

1. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators and design of

vibration isolation bases.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor
slides and rails, and base weights.

C. Seismic Calculations: The contractor to prepare seismic calculations and submit

comprehensive report showing the requirements for seismic system for different MEP
systems and equipment for the Engineer approval. Accordingly, the contractor to obtain the
relevant items for seismic control for piping and equipment complying with the calculations
and the report outcomes. Seismic criteria shall be submitted according to the following
parameters according to ASCE, and local codes:

1. Seismic Zone
2. Site Class
3. Seismic design category
4. Importance factor
5. Risk Category
6. The mapped spectral accelerations for short periods (Ss)
7. The mapped spectral accelerations for a 1-second period (S1)

D. Seismic Requirements: Submittals are required for all equipment anchors, supports and
seismic restraints. Submittals shall include weights, dimensions, standard connections,
manufacturer's recommendations, behavior problems (vibration, thermal, expansion etc.)
associated with equipment or piping

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 48 - Page 1 of 5
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered and

qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced
in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as
those performed for installations of vibration isolation bases that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration restraints. All

selection shall be certified by manufacturer.

C. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration restraints. All

selection shall be certified by manufacturer.

D. Seismic Restraint Requirements (Shall be complying with approved calculations):

1. For equipment:

a. All mechanical equipment shall be suitable for applications requiring

equipment anchorage to resist seismic forces.

b. All mechanical equipment not supported with isolators external to the unit shall
be securely anchored to the structure. Such mechanical equipment, shall be
properly supported to resist a horizontal force of 20 percent of the weight of
the equipment furnished

c. All mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall be provided

with seismic restraints capable of resisting a horizontal force of 20 percent of
the weight of the equipment furnished.

d. Mechanical Equipment: Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected

shall include the following items to the extent required on the Drawings or in
other Sections of the Specification:

2. For piping: The following mechanical systems shall be installed as required on the
Drawings and other Sections of the Specification and shall be seismically protected in
accordance with this Specification:

a. All Piping inside the Building bigger than 150 mm in diameter (to be
confirmed by calculations).

E. Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment: Not to exceed

a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of 5 mm per second RMS, filter in, when
measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal and axial
directions or measured at equipment mounting feet if bearings are concealed.
Measurements for internally isolated fans and motors may be made at the mounting feet.

F. The contractor shall employ an Acoustic Consultant to ensure he meets the criteria.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation devices with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 48 - Page 2 of 5
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation bases. Cast
anchor-bolt inserts into base.

Coordinate installation of equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Rubber Isolator Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or

neoprene isolator elements, with encapsulated top- and baseplates. Factory-drilled and
tapped top plate for bolted equipment mounting. Factory-drilled baseplate for bolted
connection to structure. Color-code to indicate capacity range.

B. Restrained Spring Isolators: Vertically restrained freestanding, laterally stable, steel open-
spring-type isolators.

1. Housing: Welded steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension
due to wind loads or when weight is removed. Factory-drilled baseplate for bolting to
structure and bonded to a 6-mm thick, rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate
underside. Provide adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use. Hot-dip
galvanized for metal components on isolators for exterior use.

C. Snubbers: Each spring mounted base shall have a minimum of four all-directional or eight
two directional (two per side) seismic snubbers that are double acting. Elastomeric
materials shall be shock absorbent neoprene bridge quality bearing pads, maximum 60
durometer, replaceable and have a minimum thickness of 6 mm. Air gap between hard and
resilient material shall be not less than 3 mm nor more than 6 mm. Restraints shall be
capable of withstanding design load without permanent deformation.

D. Thrust Restraints (Type THR): Restraints shall provide a spring element contained in a steel
frame with neoprene pads at each end attachment. Restraints shall have factory preset thrust
and be field adjustable to allow a maximum movement of 6 mm when the fan starts and
stops. Restraint assemblies shall include rods, angle brackets and other hardware for field
installation.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES

A. Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural-steel bases and rails designed and fabricated by the
isolation equipment manufacturer. Include equipment static loadings, power transmission,
component misalignment, and cantilever loadings.

1. Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural-steel shapes, plates, and
bars conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM A 36). Include support brackets to anchor

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 48 - Page 3 of 5
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

base to isolation units. Include prelocated equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails.
2. Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height with not
less than 25-mm clearance above the floor.
3. Concrete-Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural frame. Pour
concrete into base with relocated equipment anchor bolts.
4. Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide for anchor
bolts and equipment support.
5. Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
6. Pump Bases: Size to support pump and piping elbows.
7. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.

2.3 INERTIA BASE

A. General: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of
cast-in-place concrete.

B. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch (25-mm)
clearance above the floor or as directed by the Structural engineer. Include equipment
anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.

C. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

D. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with BS EN 10163. Bases shall
have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

E. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings
and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

F. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in
place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported equipment
manufacturer.

2.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install and anchor vibration and sound control products according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates to structural floors as required.

C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates to structural supports as required.

D. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 21-MPa concrete, and trowel to a
smooth, hard finish. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Division 3.

E. Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration isolators.

2.5 EXAMINATION

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 48 - Page 4 of 5
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with
requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be
installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact
during normal operations.

B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 6 mm of movement at start and stop.

C. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.

D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.

E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

G. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations.

H. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation control devices.

Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

END OF SECTION 210548

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 48 - Page 5 of 5
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 21 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Stencils.
5. Valve tags.
6. Warning tags.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled and the

proposed content for each label.

D. Valve Schedules: Valve numbering scheme.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2. Material and Thickness: Polished brass or aluminum, 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick,
with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
3. Letter Color: Black.
4. Background Color: White.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 53 - Page 1 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-

inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing
numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule
shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: Black.

D. Background Color: White.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 122 deg F (50 deg C).

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than
24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary
lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with

lettering indicating service and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 53 - Page 2 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference
of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Self-adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

E. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to

accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow
direction.
2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

F. Pipe-Label Colors:

1. Background Color: Safety Red.

2. Letter Color: White.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils for Piping:

1. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping
3. Stencil Material: Brass.
4. Stencil Paint: Safety Red, exterior, gloss alkyd enamel, unless otherwise indicated.
Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
5. Identification Paint: White, exterior, alkyd enamel, unless otherwise indicated.
Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

B. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping-system

abbreviation and 1/2- inch (13-mm) numbers.

1. Tag Material: polished Brass or aluminum, 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, with
predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain, beaded chain or S-hook.
3. Valve-Tag Color: Safety Red.
4. Letter Color: White.

C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of
valve (room or space), normal- operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and
variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.6 WARNING TAGS

IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 53 - Page 3 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized

card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or
"DO NOT OPERATE."
4. Color: Safety Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, as
well as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that could impair bond of
identification devices.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be installed.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe-Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured

pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME
A13.1, with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

B. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible
ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts,
tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is not
obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 53 - Page 4 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Near penetrations and on through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit a view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25
feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes
including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in fire-suppression piping systems. List tagged
valves in a valve-tag schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and with captions
similar to those indicated in "Valve-Tag Size and Shape" Subparagraph below:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Fire-Suppression Standpipe: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round.

b. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round.
c. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round.
d. Foam-Water System: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round.
e. Clean-Agent Fire-Extinguishing System: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.

END OF SECTION 210553

IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 53 - Page 5 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 21 12 00

FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping, valves, components and specialties for the following building
systems:

1. Automatic wet-type, Class I, II and III standpipes systems.

2. Automatic wet-type, fire-suppression sprinkler system.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water
supply through floor control valves. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when
they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device.
Hose connections are included where indicated.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Hose Connection: Valve with threaded outlet matching fire hose coupling thread for
attaching fire hose.

B. High-Pressure Fire System (High zone): Wet-type sprinkler and standpipe systems piping,
valves and components designed to operate at working pressure higher than standard 175
psig (1200 kPa), but not higher than 300 psig (2040 kPa).

C. Standard-Pressure Fire System (Low zone): Wet-type sprinkler and standpipe systems
piping, valves and components designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig
(1200 kPa) maximum.

D. Working Plans: Documents, including drawings, calculations, and material specifications

prepared according to NFPA 13 & NFPA 14 for obtaining approval from Engineer and
authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES 21 12 00 - Page 1 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Verify the design of standpipes for compliance with NFPA 14, and obtain approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Include minimum residual pressures at
hydraulically remote outlets according to the following:

1. DN25 Hose Connections (first aid use): 450 kPa

2. DN65 Hose Connections (fire brigade use): 450 kPa

B. Verify the design of sprinkler system for conformance with NFPA 13, and obtain approval
from Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Verify the design of sprinkler piping according to the following and obtain approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Include losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: As per NFPA 13 requirements.
3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: As follows:

a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 6.3 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.10 gpm over 1500-
sq. ft.) area.
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 9.5 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.15 gpm
over 1500-sq. ft.) area.

4. Minimum Density for Deluge-Sprinkler Piping Design: As follows:

a. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 9.5 mL/s (0.15 gpm) over entire area.

5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: As per NFPA 13 requirements.

D. Include 10 percent margin of safety for available water flow and pressure

E. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 300 psi (2040 kPa)
maximum working pressure rating for high zone part, and 175 psi (1200 kPa) for low zone
part.

F. The contractor shall submit stress analysis study for piping installations more than 300 mm
diameter (12” DN) to prove safety and sustainability.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for fire suppression water piping.
2. Pipe hangers and supports.
3. Valves, including specialty valves, accessories, and devices.
4. Alarm devices. Include electrical data.
5. Fire department connections. Include type; number, size, and arrangement of inlets;
caps and chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and marking; and finish.
6. Fire department connections. Include type; number, size, and arrangement of inlets;
caps and chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and marking; and finish.
7. Hose connections. Include size, type, and finish.

B. Fire-Hydrant Flow Test Report: As specified in "Preparation" Article.

C. Welding certificates.

FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES 21 12 00 - Page 2 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA13 & NFPA 14.
Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and
"Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."

A. Shop Drawings: For fire systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For fire systems indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Coordination Drawings: fire systems pipes and components, drawn to scale, on which the
other services are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the
items involved.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of fire systems to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.

F. Fire Extinguishers:
1. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a
single manufacturer.
2. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."
3. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Provide extinguishers approved by Civil defense.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has designed, installed and obtained
approvals for fire-suppression piping similar to that indicated for this Project.

B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test

reports by a qualified professional engineer. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant
flow test.

C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of fire-suppression piping that are similar to those indicated for
this Project in material, design, and extent.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

E. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code Section IX.

F. Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a testing agency

acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.

FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES 21 12 00 - Page 3 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.

H. NFPA Standard: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying

with NFPA 13 & NFPA 14.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Automatic Wet-Type, Class I, II & III Standpipe System: has open water-supply valve with
pressure maintained and is capable of supplying water demand.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.

2.3 PIPES

A. Standard-Weight Black Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, or ASTM A 795/A
795M; Schedule 40.

2.4 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT

A. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, film,
0.20-mm minimum thickness, tube or sheet.

2.5 PIPE FITTINGS

A. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.

B. Steel, Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865/A 865M.

C. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, ASME B16.9, or ASME B16.11.

D. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.

E. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable
iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory
grooved according to AWWA C606.

2.6 JOINING MATERIALS OPTIONS

A. Option: Grooved-end connections for use with keyed couplings.

FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES 21 12 00 - Page 4 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Ductile-Iron, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, for ductile-iron pipe
dimensions. Include ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts and
nuts.

C. Ductile-Iron, Flanged Joints: AWWA C115, ductile-iron or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts.

D. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include
ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts. Include listing
for dry-pipe service for couplings for dry piping.

E. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, (3.2 mm) thick.

1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face
gaskets.
2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type
gaskets.

F. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Ductile-Iron-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use ductile-iron pipe with radius-cut-grooved ends;

ductile-iron, grooved-end fittings; and ductile-iron, keyed couplings. Assemble joints with
couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written
instructions.

I. Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved ends and
Schedule 30 or thinner steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; and
steel, keyed couplings. Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling manufacturer's written instructions. Use gaskets listed for dry-pipe
service for dry piping.

J. Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved ends and
Schedule 30 or thinner steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; and
steel, keyed couplings. Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling manufacturer's written instructions. Use gaskets listed for dry-pipe
service for dry piping.

2.7 FIRE-PROTECTION-SERVICE VALVES

A. Refer to specifications section 211313.

2.8 HOSE CONNECTIONS (Landing Valves – LV-1)

A. Description: UL 668, 2040-kPa (300-psig) minimum pressure rating, brass, hose valve for
connection of fire hose. Include 90-degree angle pattern design; female NPS inlet and male
hose outlet; and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include DN40 or DN65 as indicated, and
hose valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads.

1. Valve Operation: Pressure-regulating type.

2. Finish: Rough brass.

FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES 21 12 00 - Page 5 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
1. As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2.9 MONITORS

A. Description: UL-listed, stationary, single-waterway type for 47.3-L/s (750-gpm) water

stream. Include the following features:

1. Waterway: DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) minimum, brass tube.

2. Operation: Lever handle.
3. Horizontal Rotation: 360 degrees with locking device.
4. Vertical Rotation: 80-degree elevation and 60-degree depression with locking device.
5. Nozzle: Brass, adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or straight stream.

2.10 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Wall, Fire Department Connections: UL 405; cast-brass body with brass, wall, escutcheon
plate; brass, lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains; and brass, lugged swivel
connections. Include inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire
department sizes and threads, outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples, check devices
or clappers for inlets, and escutcheon plate with marking "FIRE DEPARTMENT
CONNECTION".

1. Type: Exposed, projecting mounting.

2. Escutcheon Plate: Round/Square/Rectangular.
3. Finish: Polished brass.

B. Recommended manufacturers:
1. As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

C. Exposed, Freestanding, Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-brass body, inlets with
threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, and
bottom outlet with pipe threads. Include brass, lugged caps, gaskets, and brass chains;
brass, lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 460-mm-
(18-inch-) high brass sleeve; and round, floor, brass, escutcheon plate with marking " FIRE
DEPARTMENT CONNECTION".

D. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome-plated.

2.11 ALARM DEVICES

A. Refer to specifications section 211313.

2.12 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 90- to 115-mm diameter dial with dial range of 0 to 1725 kPa.

2.13 CONTROL PANELS

FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES 21 12 00 - Page 6 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned type as indicated. Control

panel includes NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry
for operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby
batteries; field-wiring terminal strip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized
fire alarm bell; lamp test facility; single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and
rectifier.

1. Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A
detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 220-V ac, 50 Hz, with 24-V dc
rechargeable batteries.
2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL
CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by
breakable strut.
3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15 pipe nipple, and
bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL
STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by breakable strut.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 291. Use results for system design
calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this Section.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections to verify actual locations of piping connections
before installation.

B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-rated construction,
framing for hose cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and cabinets are to
be installed.

C. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and
semi recessed cabinets are to be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use welded joints with galvanized steel pipe.

B. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or
higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless
otherwise indicated.

C. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves (dry-type): Use galvanized,
standard-weight steel pipe with welding ends; flanged, keyed couplings; or grooved joints.

FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES 21 12 00 - Page 7 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Drain pipes: Use galvanized steel pipes.

E. Piping in pump room: Use ductile iron pipes.

3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific isolating valve types are not
indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Fire-Protection Isolating Valves: UL listed and FM approved for applications where

required by NFPA 14.

a. Fire Pump Room: Use OS&Y gate valves with integral indicating device.

b. Floor Control Valves (Zone Valves): Use OS&Y gate valves with integral
indicating device.

c. Services valves in tenants’ floors: Use butterfly valve with integral indicating
device.

B. Recommended manufacturers:
1. As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Engineer
before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.

C. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN50 and smaller. Unions are not required on
flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.

D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having DN65 and
larger connections.

E. Install drain valves at the bottom of all fire risers.

F. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check
valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.

G. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

H. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials. Install according to
NFPA 14.

I. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake

damage.

FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES 21 12 00 - Page 8 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

J. Install piping with grooved joints (where required) according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Construct rigid piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of
each risers. Include pressure gages with connection not less than DN8 and with soft metal
seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to
permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install fire-protection specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties according to
NFPA 13 and NFPA 14, manufacturer's written instructions, and authorities having
jurisdiction.

B. Gate Valves: Install fire-protection-service valves supervised-open, located to control

sources of water supply except from fire department connections. Provide permanent
identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Valves for Wall Fire Hydrants: Install gate valve with non-rising stem in supply pipe.

D. Install automatic air vent at the high point(s) on the water fire suppression systems piping to
assure evacuation of air from the system during and after filling. The automatic air vent
shall be mounted in a vertical position and shall require a minimum of 200 mm of clearance
above the fire main or branch line piping.

3.7 HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage restriction.

B. Install DN40 hose-connection valves with flow-restricting device, unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Install DN65 hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 to DN40 reducer adapter and
flow-restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install wall-mounting-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with

finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install
valves at angle required for connection of fire hose. Refer to Section "Fire-Protection
Specialties" for cabinets.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect feed water from the tank to fire pumps.

B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor
drain or outside building.

C. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections,
and accessories.

D. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 26.

FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES 21 12 00 - Page 9 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.

F. Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe valve.

G. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:

1. Pressure gages and controls.

2. Electrical power system.
3. Fire alarm system devices, including low-pressure alarm.

3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 14 and in Section "Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Flush, test, and inspect fire risers according to NFPA 13 & 14, "System Acceptance"
Chapter.

B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to
demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.

C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.11 COMMISSIONING

A. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories are installed and operate
correctly.

B. Verify that air compressors and their accessories are installed and operate correctly.

C. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.

D. Verify that hose connections and fire department connections have threads compatible with
local fire department equipment.

E. Pressurize and check dry-pipe valve air-pressure maintenance devices and air compressors.

F. Fill all fire risers piping with water.

G. Verify that hose connections are correct type and size.

H. Verify that hose connections are correct type and size.

I. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

J. Start and run air compressors.

K. Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.

L. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.

FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES 21 12 00 - Page 10 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

M. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.

3.12 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties and accessories, and train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire risers and hoses.

END OF SECTION 211200

FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES 21 12 00 - Page 11 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 21 13 13

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fire-suppression sprinklers for the following building systems:

1. Wet-pipe, fire-suppression sprinklers.

2. Automatic foam system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to section 211200 - FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to section 211200 - FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics,

mounting, finish, and other pertinent data.

B. Looking up coordination drawings penetrating finished ceiling include the following:

1. Lighting fixtures.
2. Low current devices.
3. Air outlets and inlets.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has designed, installed and obtained
approvals for fire-suppression piping similar to that indicated for this Project.

B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test

reports by a qualified professional engineer. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant
flow test.

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - Page 1 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of fire-suppression piping that are similar to those indicated for
this Project in material, design, and extent.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: As per approved vendor list or approved equal. Sprinkler

Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a testing agency
acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.

F. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying

with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

G. The contractor shall submit stress analysis study for piping installations more than 300 mm
diameter (12” DN) to prove safety and sustainability.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting steel cabinet and hinged cover, with
space for a minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include the
number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and wrench for sprinklers. Include
separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.

2.3 PIPES

A. Refer to section 211200 - FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES.

2.4 PIPE FITTINGS

A. Refer to section 211200 - FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES.

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - Page 2 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.5 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to section 211200 - FIRE SUPPERSSION PIPES.

2.6 FIRE-PROTECTION-SERVICE VALVES

A. General: UL listed and FM approved, with minimum 2000-kPa (300-psig) nonshock

working-pressure rating. Valves for grooved-end piping may be furnished with grooved
ends instead of type of ends specified.

B. Gate Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 262; cast-bronze, threaded ends; solid wedge;
OS&Y; and rising stem.

C. Gate Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper
wedge, OS&Y, and rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and
flanged ends; and integral indicating device.

D. Indicating Device: Electrical 220-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch.

E. Swing Check Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 312 or MSS SP-80, Class 150;
bronze body with bronze disc and threaded ends.

F. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted
cap, with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc ring and flanged ends.

G. Split-Clapper Check Valves, DN100 (NPS 4) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body with
rubber seal, bronze-alloy discs, and stainless-steel spring and hinge pin.

2.7 SPRINKLERS

A. General Requirements:

1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"

published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.
3. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
4. Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 250 psig (1725 kPa)
minimum.

B. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:

1. UL 199, for applications except residential.

2. UL 1626, for residential applications.
3. UL 1767, for early suppression, fast-response applications.

C. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 12.7-mm (1/2-inch) orifice with Discharge
Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating, unless otherwise
indicated or required by application.

D. Open Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element Removed: UL 199.

1. Characteristics:

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - Page 3 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

a. Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between

5.3 and 5.8.
b. Nominal 17/32-inch (13.5-mm) Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between
7.4 and 8.2.

E. Sprinkler types, features, and options include the following:

1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.

2. Extended-coverage sprinklers.
3. Flow-control sprinklers, with automatic open and shutoff feature.
4. Flush ceiling sprinklers, including escutcheon.
5. Institution sprinklers, made with small, breakaway projection.
6. Pendent sprinklers.
7. Quick-response sprinklers.
8. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.
9. Sidewall sprinklers, including escutcheon.
10. Upright sprinklers.

F. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome-plated, bronze, and painted.

G. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.

H. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified
with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

2. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, two piece, with 25-mm vertical adjustment.
3. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

I. Sprinkler Guards: UL 199, Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to
sprinkler.

2.8 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTINGS

A. Specialty Fittings: UL listed and FM approved; made of steel, ductile iron, or other
materials compatible with piping.

B. Press-Seal Fittings: UL 213, steel housing with butylene O-rings and pipe stop.

C. Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with locking-lug ends.

D. Mechanical-T Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive gasket, bolts,

and threaded or locking-lug outlet.

E. Mechanical-Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive gaskets,

bolts, and threaded or locking-lug outlets.

F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, with threaded inlet, threaded outlet, and seals; adjustable.

G. Sprinkler, Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron body; with
threaded inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - Page 4 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

H. Sprinkler, Branch-Line Test Fittings: UL-listed, brass body; with threaded inlet and capped
drain outlet and threaded outlet for sprinkler.

I. Sprinkler, Inspector's Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron housing; with threaded
inlet and drain outlet and sight glass.

2.9 SPECIALITY VALVES

A. General: Types matching piping and equipment connections.

B. Option: Grooved-end connections for use with keyed couplings.

C. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 400-psig (2760-kPa) working pressure; designed for
horizontal or vertical installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved
seat with O-ring seals, and single-hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass,
drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, water motor
operated alarm, and fill-line attachment with strainer.

1. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.

D. Shut Off Valve: Shall be UL listed and FM approved for 12.1 Bar service supplied with a
ductile iron body conforming to ASTM A-536 coated with a polyphenylene sulfide blend, a
disc of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536 with EPDM coating providing bubble tight
shut off. Sizes 65-150 mm shall have an approved weatherproof manual actuator suitable
for indoor or outdoor use with two single pole, double throw supervisory switches either
pre-wired (WRD) or unwired (UWD) monitoring the open position as specified on the
Drawings. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the latest published manufacturer's
specification. Valves shall be provided with tamper switch and connected to fire alarm
panel.

E. Test and Drain Valve: Bronze body, with chrome plated bronze ball, brass stem, steel
handle, teflon seat and sight glasses. Provide valve with three position indicator plate (off,
test, and drain), 6 mm tapping for pressure gage and various other orifice inserts to simulate
flow through 10 mm, 12 mm, 13 mm and 14 mm diameter sprinklers.

F. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, brass. Include DN40 or DN65, female NPS inlet
and outlet; adjustable setting feature; and straight or 90-degree angle pattern design as
indicated.

1. Finish: Rough chrome-plated.

G. Pressure restricting angle valve: UL approved, NPS 1-1/2 (DN40) Cast iron angle valves
with aluminum handwheel and breakable link with preset orifices which restrict the volume
of water and thereby lower the pressure to maximum 65 PSI. The breakable link serves as a
simple indication of the valve condition and status. If the valve is opened without breaking
the link, the valve will resume its previous position and no resetting is necessary

H. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, drain valve, DN20, ball check device with threaded ends.

I. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15 pipe nipple, and bronze
ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with
operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental
opening.

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - Page 5 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

J. Floor Control Valves (Zone Valves):

1. Floor control valves assembly consisting of UL listed FM approved indicating-type

floor control valve with supervisory switch, pressure gauge, water flow switch , test
drain valve assembly and check valve; installation and piping arrangement to be as
per NFPA 13 appendix A
2. Floor control valves rated for minimum of 1200 Pa (175psi) working pressure
3. Check valve is optional: check valve is used when valve is connected to combined
sprinklers/ stand by riser; if separate risers check valve may not be installed as per
NFPA 13 appendix A.
4. Floor control valve shall be provided with a drain connection having a minimum size
as determined in NFPA 13 to drain that portion of the system controlled by the
sectional valve.
5. A pressure gauge with a connection not smaller than 1∕4 in. (6 mm) shall be installed
at each main drain associated with a floor control valve.
6. Floor control valves, should be accessible to authorized persons during emergencies.

K. Automatic Air Vent (AAV):

1. Brass body construction automatic air vent FM approved and complying with UL
2573.
2. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 175-psig (1190-kPa) pressure rating at 120 deg F
(49 deg C) maximum temperature.
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15 inlet.
5. Complete with Y type strainer (40 mesh) and isolating ball valve for maintenance
purpose, without disabling the fire suppression systems.

L. Recommended manufacturers:

1. As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2.10 ALARM DEVICES

A. General: Types matching piping and equipment connections.

B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarms: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with pelton-wheel

operator with shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction and 250-mm
diameter, cast-aluminum alarm gong with red-enamel factory finish. Include DN20
(NPS 3/4) inlet and DN25 (NPS 1) drain connections.

C. Water-Flow Indicators: UL 346; electrical-supervision, vane-type water-flow detector; with

1725-kPa (250-psig) pressure rating; and designed for horizontal or vertical installation.
Include two single-pole, double-throw, circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary
contacts, 7 A, 220-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable
retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.

D. Pressure Switches: UL 753; electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard

feature. Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that
operates on rising pressure and signals water flow.

E. Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 346; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open
position.

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - Page 6 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

F. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches: UL 346; electrical; single-pole, double throw, with

normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in
other than fully open position.

2.11 AUTOMATIC FOAM SYSTEM

A. General: Preinstalled piping self-contained proportioning system consists of a bladder tank,

ratio controller, and assembled piping. It injects foam concentrate into the water supply of
the fire protection system (sprinkler system) serving fuel tank room, and automatically
adjusts correct proportions of the foam concentrate and water over design range of flow
conditions.

B. Foam Bladder Tank Material: Vertically mounted, tank shall be listed and approved for use
with the foam concentrate and is designed and constructed of steel in accordance to ASME
code section VIII U stamped for unfired pressure vessels, or equivalent EN13445 design
code with CE stamped. The rated working pressure of the tank is 175 PSI (12.1 bar), and
tested to at least 227 PSI (15.7 bar). Tank shall be externally painted by Zinc rich primer
with red enamel finish, and internally painted by Zinc rich primer with Coal Tar epoxy
paint.

C. Bladder: equipped inside the tank, flexible, manufactured of Vinyl based polymer, a
polyester reinforced hypalon-neoprene, nitrile rubber or any other accepted material as per
ASTM D412 and ASTM D624.

D. Deluge Valve: Flanged type, cast iron, complete with trim package operated by electrical
detection systems listed for releasing service. Valves shall be UL listed and FM approved
for 12.1 bar service, and shall be installed in a vertical/horizontal position as per approved
shop drawing. Deluge valve clappers shall incorporate a mechanical latching mechanism
that will not be affected by pressure changes in the water system. In addition to automatic
operation, arrange each valve for manual release at the valve. Provide pressure gages and
other accessories at the deluge valves. Provide a test detection device for each actuation
circuit adjacent to each valve which the device controls as required by NFPA 13. Deluge
systems utilizing electric release systems shall utilize a release control panel and solenoid
valve listed and approved for use with the approved deluge Valve. Detectors shall be
compatible with release control panel.

E. Concentrate Control Valve (CCV): UL, FM approved CCV with a corrosive resistant
coating is utilized in foam systems as a positive shut-off valve for the foam concentrate
supplied from the bladder tank. The CCV valve opens automatically when there is a water
flow in the sprinkler system piping and allows foam concentrate to flow to the proportioning
device. Foam CCV shall utilize either a 90° angle pattern or straight through type of deluge
valve as per manufacturer recommendations. The CCV shall have a working pressure of 175
PSI (12.1bar).

F. Ratio Controller Proportionate Device: shall be listed and approved for use with the foam
system, body constructed of cast bronze (or stainless steel as an option), flanged ends, rated
for a working pressure 175 PSI (12.1 bar), pre-piped to the bladder tank and includes outlet
port for sensing water pressure at the inlet to the ratio controller water venturi orifice which
is incorporated into the casting to adjust automatically foam proportion to water over the
operation range.

G. Foam Concentrate: SFFF (Synthetic Fluorine Free Foam) Foam concentrate shall be listed
and approved for proportioning at 3 parts (3%) concentrate to 97 parts (97%) water, and

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - Page 7 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

listed for the protection of immiscible (hydrocarbon) flammable and combustible liquids,
and matching with the proportioning device installed. Foam Concentrate shall be a fluorine
free firefighting foam totally free from fluorinated surfactants and polymers.

H. Foam Water Sprinkler: Non-aspirated fire sprinklers used in a foam/water sprinkler system
shall be UL listed and FM approved with the foam concentrate utilized with the
proportioning system suitable for suppression of fire in a generator room including Diesel
tanks (Solar). Fire sprinklers shall be closed head for use in wet system through deluge
valve.

I. Piping: all external pre-piped piping is schedule 40, stainless steel for foam concentrate and
carbon steel for water. All hook up shall be included in piping such as stop valves with
tamper switch, check valve in the foam concentrate line, pressure relief valve, sight glass,
drain and vent valves.

2.12 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 90- to 115-mm diameter dial with dial range of 0 to 1725 kPa (0
to 350 psig).

2.13 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned type as indicated. Control

panel includes NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry
for operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby
batteries; field-wiring terminal strip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized
fire alarm bell; lamp test facility; single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and
rectifier.

1. Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A
detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 220-V ac, 50 Hz, with 24-V
dc rechargeable batteries.
2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL
CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by
breakable strut.
3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15 (NPS 1/2) pipe
nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL
CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by
breakable strut.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for
system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this Section.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - Page 8 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Do not use welded joints with galvanized steel pipe.

B. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or
higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless
otherwise indicated.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ductile-Iron-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use ductile-iron pipe with radius-cut-grooved ends;

ductile-iron, grooved-end fittings; and ductile-iron, keyed couplings. Assemble joints with
couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved ends and
Schedule 30 or thinner steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; and
steel, keyed couplings. Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling manufacturer's written instructions.Press-Seal-Fitting Joints: Use
UL-listed tool and procedure and follow fitting manufacturer's written instructions. Include
use of specific equipment, pressure-sealing tool, and accessories.

C. Locking-Lug-Fitting, Twist-Locked Joints: Follow fitting manufacturer's written

instructions.

D. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings
that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.

F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus,
and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.

G. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

H. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings
before assembly.

I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for
water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

J. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.

K. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings
with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

L. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified

processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - Page 9 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for
galvanized-steel pipe.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Engineer
before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Install underground service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24 and with restrained

joints.

C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller. Unions are not
required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.

E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having DN65 (NPS 2-
1/2) and larger connections.

F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized
and located according to NFPA 13.

G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

H. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to sprinkler
risers when sprinkler branch piping is connected to sprinkler risers.

I. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check
valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.

J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

K. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials and installation.

L. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake

damage.

M. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Construct rigid piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.

N. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at each sprinkler test connection. Include
pressure gages with connection not less than DN8 (NPS 1/4) and with soft metal seated
globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit
removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

3.5 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install specialty sprinkler fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - Page 10 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties
according to NFPA 13, manufacturer's written instructions, and authorities having
jurisdiction.

B. Gate Valves: Install listed fire-protection-service valves supervised-open, located to control

sources of water supply except from fire department connections. Provide permanent
identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Specialty Valves:

1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in

main supply to system.
2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line
connection.
3. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, and in main
supply to deluge system. Install trim sets for drain, priming level, alarm
connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-
line attachment.

3.7 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use sprinklers according to the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

2. Rooms without Ceilings: Pendent sprinklers.
3. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright and pendent sprinklers, as indicated.
4. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent sprinklers.
5. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers.
6. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Flush sprinklers.
7. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.
8. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, recessed, flush, and concealed sprinklers,
as indicated.
9. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
10. Deluge-Sprinkler Systems: Upright and pendent, open sprinklers.
11. Special Applications: Use extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response
sprinklers where indicated.
12. Sprinkler Finishes: Use sprinklers with the following finishes:

a. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome-plated in finished spaces

exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax
coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.
c. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.
d. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
e. Residential Sprinklers: Dull chrome.

3.8 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in patterns indicated.

B. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical panels and tiles.

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - Page 11 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water-supply piping and sprinklers to fire pumps. Include backflow preventers.

B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor
drain or outside building.

C. Connect piping to specialty valves, specialties, fire department connections, and accessories.

D. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 26.

E. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.

F. Connect excess-pressure pumps to the following piping and wiring:

1. Sprinkler system, hydraulically.

2. Pressure gages and controls, hydraulically.
3. Electrical power system.
4. Alarm device accessories for pump.
5. Fire alarm system.

G. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:

1. Pressure gages and controls.

2. Electrical power system.
3. Fire alarm system devices, including low-pressure alarm.

3.10 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13 and in Section "Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.

B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to
demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.

C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.12 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish.

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - Page 12 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.13 PROTECTION

A. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.

3.14 COMMISSIONING

A. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories are installed and operate
correctly.

B. Verify that excess-pressure pumps and accessories are installed and operate correctly.

C. Verify that air compressors and their accessories are installed and operate correctly.

D. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.

E. Verify that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified are
replaced with new, correct type.

F. Verify that sprinklers are correct types, have correct finishes and temperature ratings, and
have guards as required for each application.

G. Verify that fire department connections have threads compatible with local fire department
equipment.

H. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler piping with water.

I. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

J. Start and run excess-pressure pumps.

K. Start and run air compressors.

L. Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.

M. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.

N. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.

3.15 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties and accessories, and train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-suppression sprinklers.

END OF SECTION 211313

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - Page 13 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 21 22 00

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes clean-agent extinguishing system NOVEC1230 and Wet chemical
suppression system for kitchen hoods in addition to the followings:

1. Piping and piping specialties.

2. Extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Extinguishing agent.
4. Detection and alarm devices.
5. Control and alarm panels.
6. Accessories.
7. Connection devices for and wiring between system components.
8. Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire alarm system.

1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. System is used for all electrical and telecom rooms where presence of personnel is expected.
Operation sequence as follows:

1. Once smoke/heat is detected in the room, an investigation/evacuation delay shall take

place. On second knock (smoke/heat is confirmed) the air conditioning unit shall be
shut down by NOVEC control panel (NOVECCP), fire suppression sequence is
activated.
2. Solenoid pilot valve shall be activated by the smoke/heat detectors though the
NOVECCP.
3. The system design can be modular, central storage, or a combination of both design
criteria. Central storage system is designed to protect multiple hazards through using
directional valves.
4. A Flashing and audible alarm will be generated upon deployment of NOVEC 1230.
5. If automatic release of NOVEC 1230 doesn't occur on event of heat/smoke detector
then gas deployment shall be done through manual pull station.
6. After the fire alarm is reset, Make-up air is provided from the door undercut, the
motorized fire smoke damper on the exhaust air duct shall open and exhaust fan will
start accordingly.

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 00 - Page 1 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. NOVEC 1230: Trade name for designation FK-5-1-12 fire-extinguishing clean agent
(chemistry component CF3CF2C(O)CF(CF3)2)

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Description: Engineered system for discharge and total flooding of hazard areas with
"NOVEC 1230," made by 3M Fire Protection Systems.

1.6 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

A. The design, equipment, installation, testing and maintenance of the suppression system
designed for use with Novec1230 fluid shall be in accordance with, but not necessarily
limited to, the applicable requirements set forth in the latest edition of the following:
 NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
 NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
 NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code
 Factory Mutual Approval Guide
 Underwriters Laboratories Fire Protection Equipment List

B. The standards and requirements listed, as well as all other applicable codes and standards
shall be used as “minimum” design standards. Also compliance with the Authority Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ) shall be required and good engineering practices must be implemented.

1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Clean-agent fire-extinguishing system shall be an engineered system for total flooding of the
hazard area including the room cavity above the ceiling, below the ceiling, and below the
raised floor. System may include separate zones above and below the ceiling and beneath
the raised floor. If smoke is detected below the raised floor, extinguishing agent shall be
discharged in the underfloor zone only. If smoke is detected below the ceiling, extinguishing
agent shall be discharged in zones above and below the ceiling and below the floor. If
smoke is detected above the ceiling, extinguishing agent shall be discharged in the zone
above the ceiling only.

B. Design clean-agent extinguishing system and obtain approval from Engineer and authorities
having jurisdiction. Design system for Class C fires as appropriate for areas being protected
and include safety factor. Use clean agent indicated and in concentration suitable for
normally occupied areas.

1. System Capabilities: Minimum 4278-kPa (620-psig) calculated working pressure and

2484-kPa (360-psig) initial charging pressure.

C. Performance Requirements: Discharge NOVEC 1230 within 10 seconds and maintain 4.7%
concentration by volume at 21 deg C (70 deg F) for 10-minute holding time in hazard areas.

1. NOVEC 1230 concentration in hazard areas greater than 10.0 percent immediately
after discharge or less than 4.7% by volume throughout holding time will not be
accepted without written authorization from Employer and authorities having
jurisdiction.

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 00 - Page 2 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. System Capabilities: Minimum 4278-kPa (620-psig) calculated working pressure and

2484-kPa (360-psig) initial charging pressure.

D. Cross-Zoned Detection: Include devices located in two separate zones. Sound alarm on
activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating single-
detection device in other zone.

E. Verified Detection: Include devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on activating
single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating second-detection
device.

F. System Operating Sequence: As follows:

1. Actuating First Detector: Give indication on detection and release panel, energize
audible alarm, shut down air-conditioning and ventilating systems serving protected
area, close motorized fire and smoke dampers to isolate the protected area, release
and close doors in protected area, and send signal to fire alarm system.
2. Actuating Second Detector: Give indication on detection and release panel, energize
audible alarm, shut down power to protected equipment, actuate time delay for
extinguishing-agent discharge for 30 seconds, and release extinguishing agent and
send signal to fire alarm system.
3. Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe lights.

G. Operating manual-release stations will discharge extinguishing agent when activated.

H. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while being activated,
and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge. Release of switch will discharge
agent.

I. EPO (Emergency Power Off): Will terminate power to protected equipment immediately on
actuation.

J. Low-Agent Pressure Switch: Initiate trouble alarm if sensing less than set pressure.

K. Power Transfer Switch: Transfer from normal to stand-by power source.

1.8 KITCHEN HOOD FIRE EXTINGUISHMENT SYSTEM

A. General: An automatic suppression system shall be provided for the kitchen hood areas (by
the tenant). In a fire situation the system shall be automatically actuated to discharge a spray
of wet chemical to suppress the fire. A supervised alarm siren shall sound in the hazard area
until manually silenced at the control panel. Warning signs outside hazard door shall be
illuminated and the local air conditioning system shall be shut down. The system shall also
be interlocked with the hood ventilation system and with the fire alarm system to indicate an
alarm both at the local fire alarm panel and at the fire station.

B. Systems shall comply with NFPA 17A and NFPA 96. Piping and accessories within the
hood shall be stainless steel. All other piping shall be chrome plated or stainless steel or
black steel painted to match the adjacent surface. Exhaust hoods with grease extractors UL
listed or FM approved are not required to have protection downstream of the grease
extractors. Wet chemical agent shall be listed for the particular system and recommended
by the manufacturer of the system.

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 00 - Page 3 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. System Control: Each system shall be mechanically actuated by fusible links and by remote
manual actuation stations connected to the extinguishing system release mechanisms by
stainless steel cables. Arrange each system to automatically shut off the flow of fuel and
electrical power to cooking appliances and to automatically actuate the building fire alarm
system. Electrical power to hood exhaust fans shall not be shut off unless specifically
required by the UL listing or FM approval. Provide operating instructions at all system
remote manual actuation stations

D. Identification Signs: Provide red rigid plastic signs with engraved 6 mm (0.25 inch) high
white lettering at each remote manual actuation station. Sign legends shall be "Fire
Extinguishing System" followed by a brief description of the equipment protected

1.9 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Extinguishing-agent containers.
2. Extinguishing agent.
3. Discharge nozzles.
4. Control panels.
5. Detection devices.
6. Manual-release stations.
7. Switches.
8. Alarm devices.
9. Pipe hangers and supports.
10. Directional valves.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include design
calculations. Include the following for hazard-area enclosure, drawn to scale:

1. Plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Indicate

dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including
analysis data.
4. Design Calculations: For weight, volume, and concentration of extinguishing agent
required for each hazard area.
5. Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show ceiling penetrations, ceiling-mounted items, and the
following:

a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping, discharge nozzles, detectors, and

accessories.
b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
c. Other ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, sprinklers, and access panels.

6. Occupied Work Area Plans: Show the following:

a. Controls and alarms.

b. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping and discharge nozzles if mounted in
space, detectors, and accessories.

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 00 - Page 4 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

c. Equipment and furnishings.

7. Access Floor Space Plans: Show the following:

a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping, discharge nozzles, detectors, and

accessories.
b. Method of supporting piping.

C. Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 2001, that have been
approved by Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Include design calculations.

D. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and "Commissioning" Articles
in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For components to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of clean-agent extinguishing systems that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain extinguishing agent and equipment through one source.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of clean-
agent extinguishing systems and are based on the specific system selected. Other
manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.

E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate piping to comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping."

F. FM Compliance: Provide components that are FM approved and are listed in FM's "Fire
Protection Approval Guide."

G. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label clean-agent extinguishing systems to comply with
NFPA 2001, "Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems."

H. UL Compliance: Provide equipment components complying with UL 1058, "Halogenated

Agent Extinguishing System Units," and are UL listed for clean-agent extinguishing system
units in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory."

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
extra materials to Employer.

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 00 - Page 5 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Detection Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
2. Container Valves: Not less than 10 percent of amount of each size and type installed.
3. Nozzles: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
4. Extinguishing Agent: Not less than 100 percent of amount installed in largest hazard
area. Include pressure-rated containers with valves.
5. Directional valve: Provide directional valves as per design drawings and in
accordance with NFPA 2001 Clauses 4.2.4.5 and 4.2.4.6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 piping applications Article retained for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.

B. Piping, Valves, and Discharge Nozzles: Comply with types and standards listed in
NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," and Appendix A, for charging pressure of system.

2.3 PIPES AND TUBES

A. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A or ASTM A 106/A 106M,
Grade A; Schedule 80, ERW steel pipe.

B. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 80, ERW steel
pipe.

2.4 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS

A. Malleable-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300.

B. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 300, unless Class 600 is indicated.

C. Forged-Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.11, Class 3000, socket pattern.

D. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: FM approved and UL listed, ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable
iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron, with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory
grooved according to AWWA C606.

2.5 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum

thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 00 - Page 6 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.

C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

D. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213, AWWA C606, approved or listed for clean-agent service,
and matching steel-pipe dimensions. Include ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber
gasket, and steel bolts and nuts.

2.6 VALVES

A. General Valve Requirements:

1. UL listed or FM Approved for use in fire-protection systems.

2. Compatible with type of clean agent used.

B. Container Valves: With rupture disc or solenoid, capable of immediate and total agent
discharge and suitable for intended flow capacity.

C. Valves in Sections of Closed Piping and Manifolds: Fabricate to prevent entrapment of

liquid, or install valve and separate pressure-relief device.

D. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve; installed to prevent loss of extinguishing agent when
container is removed from manifold.

E. Selector Valves; To be installed in the supply piping branch for the hazard being protected.
Depending on the size of the selector valve, the valve is either threaded in place, or bolted to
the piping flanges. Constructed of bronze material, the valve is a pressure differential type
that blocks the flow of agent through the piping until it is activated. Valve actuation is
accomplished either manually with the manual release lever, or by the pilot Nitrogen
Cylinder that is part of the selector valve assembly.

2.7 EXTINGUISHING-AGENT CONTAINERS

A. Description: Steel tanks complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, for unfired pressure vessels. Include minimum working-pressure rating that
matches system charging pressure, valve, pressure switch, and pressure gage.

1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color, enamel or epoxy paint.

2. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, and connections for multiple
storage containers, as indicated.
3. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, selector switch, and connections
for main- and reserve-supply banks of multiple storage containers.
4. Storage-Tank Brackets: Factory- or field-fabricated retaining brackets consisting of
steel straps and channels; suitable for container support, maintenance, and tank
refilling or replacement.

2.8 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING CLEAN AGENT

A. Clean Agent: NOVEC 1230; FK-5-1-12, Dodecaflouro-2-methylpentan-3-one.

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 00 - Page 7 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.9 DISCHARGE NOZZLES

A. Equipment manufacturer's standard one-piece brass or aluminum alloy of type, discharge

pattern, and capacity required for application.

2.10 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: FM approved or UL listed, including equipment and features required for

testing, supervising, and operating fire-extinguishing system.

B. Power Requirements: 120/240-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to system
components and fire alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as needed to produce power
at voltage required for accessories and alarm devices.

C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1, enameled-steel cabinet, for indoor applications, and Type
4 Stainless Steel cabinet for outdoor applications.

1. Mounting: Recessed flush with surface.

D. Supervised Circuits: Separate circuits for each independent hazard area.

1. Detection circuits equal to the required number of zones, or addressable devices

assigned to the required number of zones.
2. Manual pull-station circuit.
3. Alarm circuit.
4. Release circuit.
5. Abort circuit.
6. EPO circuit.

E. Provide the following control-panel features:

1. Electrical contacts for shutting down fans, activating dampers, and operating system
electrical devices.
2. Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power.
3. Storage container, low-pressure indicator.
4. Service disconnect to interrupt system operation for maintenance with visual status
indication on the fire alarm system.
5. Control interface capability with Building Control System, if applicable, and Fire
Alarm System for general alarm, control panel fault and cylinder low pressure.

F. Standby Power: Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium batteries with capacity to operate system for
72 hours and alarm for minimum of 15 minutes. Include automatic battery charger, with
varying charging rate between trickle and high depending on battery voltage, that is capable
of maintaining batteries fully charged. Include manual voltage control, dc voltmeter, dc
ammeter, electrical contacts for connection to control panel, and suitable enclosure.

2.11 DETECTION DEVICES

A. Description: Comply with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 72, and include the following types:

1. Ionization Detectors: UL 268, dual-chamber type, having sampling and referencing

chambers, with smoke-sensing element.

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 00 - Page 8 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Photoelectric Detectors: UL 268, consisting of LED light source and silicon

photodiode receiving element.

B. Signals to the Central Fire Alarm Control Panel: Any type of local system trouble is
reported to the central fire alarm control panel as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on
each system zone are individually reported to the central fire alarm control panel as
separately identified zones.

2.12 MANUAL-RELEASE STATIONS

A. Description: FM approved or UL listed, with "PULL STATION" caption, 220-V ac or low

voltage compatible with controls, and red finish. Include contacts for connection to control
panel. Unit can manually discharge extinguishing agent with operating device that remains
engaged until unlocked.

1. Mounting: Semi-recessed.

B. Abort Switch: "ABORT" caption, momentary contact, with green finish.

C. EPO Switch: "EPO" caption, with yellow finish.

2.13 SWITCHES

A. Description: FM approved or UL listed, where available, 220-V ac or low voltage

compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to control panel.

1. Low-Agent Pressure Switches: Pneumatic operation.

2. Power Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release circuit signal
from main supply to reserve supply.
3. Abort Switches: Dead-man type, requiring constant pressure, for delay of system
discharge.
4. Door Closers: Magnetic retaining and release device.

2.14 ALARM DEVICES

A. Description: FM approved or UL listed, low voltage, and surface mounting, unless

otherwise indicated.

B. Bells: Minimum 150-mm diameter.

C. Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.

D. Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "FIRE" or similar caption.

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 00 - Page 9 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.15 ELECTRICAL POWER AND WIRING

A. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 26 Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with hazard-area
leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting work
performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR 2484-kPa (360-psig) CHARGING PRESSURE

A. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties and
accessories and where required for maintenance.

B. Fittings Working Pressure: 4278 kPa (620 psig) minimum.

C. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.

D. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Galvanized steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and
threaded joints.

E. DN65 and DN80 (NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3): Galvanized steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded
fittings, and threaded joints.

F. DN65 and DN80 (NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3): Galvanized steel pipe; steel, grooved-end
fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.

G. DN100 (NPS 4) and Larger: Galvanized steel pipe; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed
couplings; and grooved joints.

3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR 15-MPa (2175-psig) CHARGING PRESSURE

A. Piping between Storage Containers and Orifice Union:

1. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties and
accessories and where required for maintenance.
2. Fittings Working Pressure: 13.8 MPa (2000 psig) minimum.
3. Flanged Joints: Class 600 minimum.
4. All Sizes: Black, Schedule 80, steel pipe; forged-steel welding fittings; and welded
joints.

B. Piping Downstream from Orifice Union:

1. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties and
accessories and where required for maintenance.
2. Fittings Working Pressure: 6900 kPa (1000 psig) minimum.

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 00 - Page 10 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.

4. All Sizes: Black, Schedule 40 or 80, steel pipe; forged-steel welding fittings; and
welded joints.

3.4 CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install clean-agent extinguishing piping and other components level and plumb and
according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Grooved Piping Joints: Groove pipe ends according to AWWA C606 dimensions.
Assemble grooved-end steel pipe and steel, grooved-end fittings with steel, keyed couplings
and lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Install extinguishing-agent containers anchored to substrate.

D. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge nozzles according to requirements listed in
NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," and related Appendix A paragraphs; and ASME B31.1.

1. Install valves designed to prevent entrapment of liquid or install pressure-relief

devices in valved sections of piping systems.
2. Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13.
3. Install control panels, detection system components, alarms, and accessories,
complying with requirements of NFPA 2001, Section "Detection, Actuation, and
Control Systems," as required for supervised system application.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following
are specific connection requirements:

B. Install piping adjacent to extinguishing-agent containers to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect electrical devices to control panel and to building's fire alarm system. Electrical
power, wiring, and devices are specified in Divisions 26 and 28.

D. Ground electrical components.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A-486B.

3.6 LABELING

A. Install labeling on piping, extinguishing-agent containers, other equipment, and panels

according to NFPA 2001 and Section "Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and
Equipment."

B. Install signs at entry doors for protected areas to warn occupants that they are entering a
room protected with a clean-agent fire extinguishing system.

C. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning of the horn(s),
bell(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 00 - Page 11 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Professional Engineer: Inspect installed clean-agent extinguishing systems, prepare

installation report, and certify that installation complies with the Contract Documents and
calculations, and comments of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section "Approval of
Installations." Include the following inspections and tests to demonstrate compliance with
requirements:

1. Check mechanical items.

2. Inspect extinguishing-agent containers and extinguishing agent, and check mountings
for adequate anchoring to substrate.
3. Check electrical systems.
4. Check enclosure integrity. Comply with NFPA 2001, Section "Enclosure
Inspection," and Appendix C, "Enclosure Integrity Procedure."
5. Perform functional predischarge test.
6. Perform system functional operational test.
7. Check remote monitoring operations.
8. Check control-panel primary power source.
9. Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.

C. Perform field-acceptance tests of each clean-agent extinguishing system when installation is

complete. Perform system testing only after hazard-area enclosure construction has been
completed and openings sealed. Comply with operating instructions and procedures of
NFPA 2001, Section "Approval of Installations." Include the following to demonstrate
compliance with requirements:

1. Perform functional predischarge test.

2. Perform system functional operational test.
3. Check remote monitoring operations.
4. Check control-panel primary power source.
5. Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.

D. Correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace

equipment that cannot be corrected or does not perform as specified and indicated, then
retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.

1. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction.

E. Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. After installing clean-agent extinguishing piping system and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
ATS, Section 7, "Inspection and Test Procedures," and Section 8, "System Function
Tests." Certify compliance with test parameters.

F. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or

replacements are made.

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 00 - Page 12 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

G. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections. Report results in writing.

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with
new units, and retest.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Each pipe section shall be cleaned internally after preparation and before assembly by
means of swabbing, using a suitable nonflammable cleaner. Pipe network shall be free of
particulate matter and oil residue before installing nozzles or discharge devices.

3.9 COMMISSIONING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and report

results in writing.

B. Verify that extinguishing system is installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.

C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with the Contract Documents.

D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions

and do the following:

1. Verify that piping system installation is completed and cleaned.

2. Verify that tests of piping system are complete.
3. Check for complete enclosure integrity.
4. Check operation of ventilation and exhaust systems.

E. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If no procedures are

prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows:

1. Fill extinguishing-agent containers with extinguishing agent and pressurize to

indicated charging pressure.
2. Install filled extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Energize circuits.
4. Adjust operating controls.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain Clean agent extinguishing system.

END OF SECTION 212200

CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 00 - Page 13 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 21 22 10

CONDENSED AEROSOL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. NFPA 2010.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes condensed aerosol extinguishing systems and the following:
1. Extinguishing agent system.
2. Detection and alarm devices.
3. Control and alarm panels.
4. Accessories.
5. Connection devices for and wiring between system components.
6. Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire alarm system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. EPO: Emergency Power Off.

C. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency (USA)

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Condensed aerosol fire-extinguishing system shall be an engineered system for total

flooding of the hazard area including the room cavity below the ceiling and below the
raised floor. Provide separate zones above and below the raised floor. If smoke is detected
below the raised floor, agent shall be discharged in the underfloor zone only. If smoke is
detected above the raised floor, agent shall be discharged in zones above and below the
floor.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design condensed aerosol extinguishing system and obtain approval from authorities
having jurisdiction. Design system for Class A, B, or C fires as appropriate for areas being

CONDENSED AEROSOL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 10 - Page 1 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

protected and include safety factor. Use condensed aerosol indicated and in concentration
suitable for normally occupied areas.

B. Performance Requirements: Discharge condensed aerosol within maximum 60 seconds and

maintain design concentration density for 10-minute holding time in hazard areas in
accordance with NFPA.

C. Cross-Zoned Detection: Devices located in two separate zones. Sound alarm on activating
single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating single-detection
device in other zone.

D. Verified Detection: Devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on activating single-
detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating second-detection device.

E. System Operating Sequence: As follows:

1. Actuating First Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize audible
alarm and visual alarms (slow pulse), shut down air-conditioning and ventilating
systems serving protected area, close doors in protected area, and send signal to fire
alarm system.
2. Actuating Second Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize audible
and visual alarms (fast pulse), shut down power to protected equipment, start time
delay for extinguishing-agent discharge for 30 seconds, and discharge extinguishing
agent. On agent discharge, release preaction valve to allow water to fill sprinkler
system.
3. Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe lights inside and
outside the protected area.

F. System Operating Sequence: System shall be cross-zoned, Rate of Rise Heat Detectors and
photoelectric detectors reporting to a fully programmable microprocessor-based control
panel programmed to operate as follows:
1. If one photoelectric detector and Rate of Rise Heat Detectors reaches the third
detection
Level (Fire 1), agent discharge will be initiated as described for the third detection
Level (Fire 1) below.
2. Rate of Rise Heat Detectors :
a. First Detection Level (Alert): Mild audible and visual indication on annunciator
panel. Strobe lights flash slowly in the protected area.
b. Second Detection Level (Action): Strong audible and visual indication on
annunciator panel. Strobe lights flash rapidly in the protected area
c. Third Detection Level (Fire 1): Strong audible and visual indication on
annunciator panel. Energize horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s) in the protected
area and outside entry doors. Shut down air-conditioning and ventilating systems
serving the protected area, and close doors in the protected area. Send signal to
fire alarm system, initiate 30-second time delay for extinguishing-agent
discharge, and discharge extinguishing agent. At agent discharge, terminate
power to equipment in the protected area.
d. Fourth Detection Level (Fire 2): Same as Fire 1.
e. Manual stations shall immediately discharge extinguishing agent when activated.

CONDENSED AEROSOL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 10 - Page 1 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

f. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while being

activated, and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge. Release of hand
pressure on the switch will cause agent discharge if the time delay has expired.
g. EPO: Will terminate power to protected equipment immediately on actuation.
h. Power Transfer Switch: Transfer from normal to stand-by power source.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Extinguishing agent units.
2. Control panels.
3. Detection devices.
4. Manual stations.
5. Switches.
6. Alarm devices.
7. Aerosol units and supports.

B. Environmental Certificate:
1. Documentation required by Environmental Protection Agency (USA) indicating that
aerosol agents comply for indoor use with personnel.

C. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include design
calculations. Include the following for hazard-area enclosure, drawn to scale:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate
dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Design Calculations: For weight, volume, and application density of extinguishing
agent required for each hazard area.
4. Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show ceiling penetrations, ceiling-mounted items, and the
following:
a. Extinguishing-agent units, detectors, and accessories.
b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
c. Other ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
and access panels.
5. Occupied Work Area Plans: Show the following:
a. Controls and alarms.
b. Extinguishing-agent units if mounted in space, detectors, and accessories.
c. Equipment and furnishings.
6. Access Floor Space Plans: Show the following:
a. Extinguishing-agent units, detectors, and accessories.
b. Method of supporting units.

CONDENSED AEROSOL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 10 - Page 1 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

c. Permit Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to latest version

of NFPA, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Include
design calculations.
d. Field quality-control test reports.
e. Maintenance Data: For components to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of condensed aerosol extinguishing systems that are similar to
those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

condensed aerosol extinguishing systems and are based on the specific system indicated.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. As per approved vendor list.

2.2 EXTINGUISHING-AGENT UNITS

A. Description: Stainless Steel 304 or 12.03 Steel zinc plated and powder coated housing :
1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color, stainless steel or epoxy paint.
2. Brackets: Factory fabricated retaining brackets; suitable for unit support, maintenance,
and replacement.

2.3 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING AGENT

A. Condensed aerosol agent should comply with the following requirements:

1. General: The firefighting system shall be based on the condensed aerosol generator
principle. The condensed aerosol generator is a firefighting system using solid material,
which on activation is transformed into a rapidly expanding fire extinguishing aerosol based
on potassium compounds. The extinguishing action is effected through physical and
chemical chain reactions, which do not alter significantly the quantity of oxygen present in
the environment.

2. Physical Action: It is implied in the chemical - physical characteristics of the alkaline

metals such as Potassium, which require the least amount of energy of ionization (lowest
ionization potential) and therefore eliminate the electrons from the atoms. The required

CONDENSED AEROSOL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 10 - Page 1 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

amount of energy is supplied from the abundance of energy present in the flame. Potassium
is therefore transformed into P+ (radical with a positive charge).
Chemical Action

During combustion, in the flame, a reaction is produced between atoms and unstable
molecular fragments (radicals), which allow the reaction to continue (chain reaction of
radicals). Potassium radicals (P) react, during combustion, with the free radicals (mainly
unstable hydroxyl radicals, OH) forming a very stable compound. Therefore the reaction is
interrupted and the flame is extinguished.

3. Physical Characteristics: The firefighting system shall satisfy with the following main
physical conditions and characteristics:
 It is non-toxic
 It is non corrosive
 The decomposition products are not acidic (they do not contain hydrogen fluoride,
hydrogen bromide, hydrogen chloride or other acids)
 It is not classified as a pyrotechnic product (The approved code is only 9.1).
 Does not contain pyrotechnic material (e.g. nitro guanidine or nitrocellulose or cyano-
guanidine (dicyandiamide) either in the solid aerosol forming compound and/or in the
cooling material) therefore there is no risk of explosion.
 The polymeric resin (binding material, part of the solid aerosol forming compound)
does not contain carcinogenic chemicals, such as Formaldehyde, Phenol Polymer or
similar.
 It is friendly to the ozone layer
 The generators are containers which are non-pressurized
 Does not deplete the oxygen content
 Fire Extinguishing Aerosol Generators must have a fully automatic and autonomous
(independent) system of fire detection using the thermocord (or a thermal actuator) or
can be activated electrically through an fire alarm extinguishing panel
 The thermocord (Thermal actuator) acts as a fail safe mechanism which will activate
the generators in the event that the generators are connected to a conventional
detection and activation system which fails to operate.
 Classes of Fire A,B,C.
 Generators must be fully autonomous and automatic when using the thermocord
(thermal actuator). The system can simultaneously be connected to any conventional
detection and activation system.
 Life time of fire extinguishing material: up to 15 years.
 Dual activation mode (the option of thermocord/thermal actuator activation must
always be available as a safety mechanism)
 It offers a safety mechanism whereby if the generator is connected to an external
detection system which fails the generator will still activate when the thermocord
detects the fire.
 Must not release cyanides in any form and/or ammonia, nitrogen oxides.

4. System Description: The condensed aerosol generator shall be contained in a metal painted
enclosures with a wire connection for the electrical ignition. On the underside of the device
must be a screen for the even distribution of the extinguishing agent.

Must be a port for the insertion of a temperature sensitive cord/thermal actuator for the
thermal ignition of the device.

CONDENSED AEROSOL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 10 - Page 1 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The screen shall be selected for the even distribution through the space protected.

The system shall be initiated electrically or thermally. The electrical initiation shall be
effected through a dedicated Fire Control Panel.

The condensed aerosol generator system shall be compatible and must be connected to
operate with an existing Fire Alarm System already installed.

The design of the system must cover total flooding of the area volume and not object
protection.

5. Technical Characteristics:

Duration of discharge Approx. From 3 to 20 sec

Basic Concentration in volume 100 gr per m3
(or higher as per method of calculation related
to the appropriate class of fire)
Duration of effectiveness 30 to 120 min
Electrical activation 6-36V DC, 08A, 2-3 sec
Testing current max. 5mA
Activation time immediate
Aerosol stream length as per technical data sheets
Temperature of use -50 C to + 150 C
Humidity up to 98%
Atmospheric life time Negligible
Ozone depletion potential 0
Global warming potential

6. Certificates/Approvals/Experience:
 The manufacturer must comply with both American and European standard or with
American standard.
 The manufacturer must have a UL Listed Certificate.
 The system must have a letter from UL to declare aerosol application density and
safety factor.
 The system must have BSI and KIWA Certificates.
 The system must have Electronic Safety test reports, Environmental certificates and
Human Safety test reports to make sure that there is no side effect on human,
environment and electronics.
 Reliability insurance to guarantee the system.
 Certificate from accredited Institutes certifying the lifetime of the product to be 15
years.

2.4 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, including equipment and features required for
testing, supervising, and operating aerosol fire-extinguishing system. UL listed as a
complete system (Extinguishing panel, Sequential activator, Aerosol generator).

B. Power Requirements: 220-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to system
components and fire alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as needed to produce power
at voltage required for accessories and alarm devices.

CONDENSED AEROSOL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 10 - Page 1 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Mounting: Surface.

C. Protection rating: IP55

D. Supervised Circuits: Separate circuits for each independent hazard area.

1. Detection circuits equal to the required number of zones, assigned to the required
number of zones.
2. Manual pull-station circuit.
3. Alarm circuit.
4. Release circuit.
5. Abort circuit.
6. EPO circuit.

E. Provide the following control-panel features:

1. Electrical contacts for shutting down fans, activating dampers, and operating system
electrical devices.
2. Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power.
3. Service disconnects to interrupt system operation for maintenance with visual status
indication on the annunciator panel.

F. Standby Power: Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium batteries with capacity to operate system for
72 hours and alarm for minimum of 15 minutes. Include automatic battery charger, with
varying charging rate between trickle and high depending on battery voltage that is capable
of maintaining batteries fully charged. Include manual voltage control, dc electrical
contacts for connection to control panel, and suitable enclosure.

2.5 DETECTION DEVICES

A. Description: Comply with NFPA 2010 and NFPA 72, and include the following types:

1. Ionization Detectors: Comply with UL 268, dual-chamber type, having sampling and
referencing chambers, with smoke-sensing element.

2. Photoelectric Detectors: Comply with UL 268, consisting of LED light source and
silicon photodiode receiving element.

3. Rate of Rise Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 268, consisting of LED light source.

2.6 MANUAL STATIONS

A. General Description: UL or EN approved low voltage compatible with controls. Include

contacts for connection to control panel.

B. Manual Release: "MANUAL RELEASE" caption and Yellow finish. Unit can manually
discharge extinguishing agent with operating device that remains engaged until unlocked.

CONDENSED AEROSOL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 10 - Page 1 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Abort Switch: "ABORT" caption, momentary contact, with Blue finish.

2.7 SWITCHES

A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, where available, 230-V ac or low voltage
compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to control panel.

1. Power Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release circuit signal
from main supply to reserve supply.

2.8 ALARM DEVICES

A. Description: UL or EN approved, low voltage, and surface mounting, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Bells: Minimum 6-inch (150-mm) diameter.

C. Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.

D. Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "Gas Release" or similar caption.

2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER AND WIRING

A. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 26.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with hazard-area
leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting work
performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect electrical devices to extinguishing control panel .Electrical power, wiring, and
devices are specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."

3.3 LABELING

CONDENSED AEROSOL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 10 - Page 1 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Install labeling extinguishing-agent units, other equipment, and panels according to NFPA
latest version.

B. Install signs at entry doors for protected areas to warn occupants that they are entering a
room protected with a condensed Aerosol fire extinguishing system.

C. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning of the horn(s),
bell(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

COMMISSIONING OF THE FIRE EXTINGUISHING PANEL

1. Before applying power to the extinguishing panel, the Aerosol Generators and any
other fire external modules, must be physically isolated from the system. This will
prevent any accidental activation of the Fire Extinguishing Aerosol Generators.

2. When power is applied, if all connections are correct, only the green Power On and
either the Automatic and Manual or Manual Only indicators should be lit. If any fault
indicators are lit the wiring to the appropriate input or output should be checked an all
faults cleared before proceeding.

3. Once the panel is fault free, it can be configured with the desired options as described
in the Operation and Maintenance manual of the panel.

4. Once the panel has been configured the system should be thoroughly tested to ensure
that the control panel responds as expected and required.

5. Connect all lamps in place of Aerosol Generators.

6. Activate the system and ensure that all lamps, light.

7. After satisfactory testing, all final connections to the fire external modules / Aerosol
Generators should be made and circuit continuity should be verified (no fault on the
Extinguishing Line)

8. Disconnect the lamps and connect the Aerosol Generators.

END OF SECTION 212210

CONDENSED AEROSOL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 21 22 10 - Page 1 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 213113

ELECTRIC–DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes axially split case, electric-drive, horizontal fire pumps and
accessories for fire-protection service.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 26 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for electrical wiring and connection
to alarm panel.
2. Division 26 Sections for power and connections to fire pump and pressure-
maintenance pump (Jockey pump) controllers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Fire Pump: Pump used to supply water at rated capacity and total rated head required
for fire-protection service.

B. Fire Pump Unit: Assembled unit consisting of fire pump, driver, controller, and
accessories.

C. Horizontal Fire Pump: Horizontal- or vertical-mounting, axially split case with its
housing split parallel to shaft, electric-drive, horizontal fire pump.

D. Vertical multistage pumps (Jockey Pumps).

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide fire pump systems that include fire pump units, pressure-maintenance pump
units (Jockey pump), accessories, and piping that comply with performance
requirements specified and are compatible with building fire-protection systems.

B. Equipment, Accessory, and Piping Pressure Rating: shall follow the normal system
pressure rating up to 2070 kPa.

ELECTRIC–DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 21 31 13 - Page 1 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract

Specification Sections.

B. Product data for fire pump units and pressure pump units. Include clearly stated rated
capacities of each selected model, performance curve with each selection point
indicated, driver, pump controller, furnished specialties, and accessories; plus weights
(shipping and installed).

C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of fire pumps, certifying that their

products comply with specified requirements.

D. Shop drawings showing layout and connections for fire pump units and pressure-
maintenance pump units (Jockey pump). Show pumps, drivers, controllers, sensing
lines, accessories, and piping. Include setting drawings with templates and directions
for installation of foundation bolts, anchor bolts, and other anchorages.

E. Field-acceptance test data showing proper performance according to provisions

specified.

F. Maintenance data for each fire pump and pressure-maintenance pump (Jockey pump)
unit to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual".

H. Compliance statement clause by clause full and detailed compliance statement of the
specification shall be submitted where a clear compliance is indicated as follows:
a. “Yes” interprets full unconditional compliance.
b. “No” interprets a deviation (to be clearly indicated as remark or note in the
dedicated column).
c. “Not Applicable” where the case is.

It should be noted that other comments like “noted” or “partial compliance” are unacceptable
and will be interpreted as a non compliance.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose fire pumps, drivers, controllers, and

accessories are listed by product name and manufacturer in the UL "Fire Protection
Equipment Directory" and FM "Approval Guide" and that comply with requirements
indicated.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain fire pump units from a single source. Include a
source with responsibility and accountability to answer and resolve problems regarding
compatibility, installation, performance, and acceptance of units.

C. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified

standards.

D. Comply with local fire department/marshal standards pertaining to material, hose

threads, and installation.

ELECTRIC–DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 21 31 13 - Page 2 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Comply with requirements of NFPA 20 "Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal

Fire Pumps" for fire pumps, drivers, controllers, accessories, and installation.

F. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for electrical

materials and installation.

G. Manufacturer's Factory Tests: Perform factory test for each fire pump. Factory tests
need to be witnessed by Owner representatives and Consultant.

H. Design Criteria: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional
requirements of fire pump and pressure-maintenance pump (Jockey pump) and are
based on specific manufacturer types and models indicated. Pump units having equal
performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered, provided that
deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design concept or intended
performance as judged by the Engineer. The burden of proof for equality of units is on
the proposer.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Preparation for Shipping: After assembling and testing fire pumps and pressure-
maintenance pumps (Jockey pump), clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with an anticorrosion compound. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and
nozzles.

B. Store fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps (Jockey pump), drivers, controllers, and
accessories in a clean, dry place.

C. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, or other foreign matter.

E. Extended Storage Greater Than 15 Days: Dry internal parts with hot air or vacuum-
producing device to prevent rusting. Upon drying, coat internal parts with protective
liquid, such as light oil. Dismantle bearings and couplings, dry and coat with acid-free
heavy oil, and then tag and store in a dry location.

F. Comply with manufacturer's rigging instructions for handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE PUMPS

A. Description: Horizontally mounted, single stage, double-suction; or multi-stage;

complying with UL 448, factory assembled and tested, UL certified, electric-drive fire
pump of capacities and characteristics indicated.

B. Characteristics: Capable of furnishing not less than 150 percent of rated capacity at
not less than 65 percent of total rated head. Shutoff head is limited to 140 percent of
total rated head.

ELECTRIC–DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 21 31 13 - Page 3 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Casing Construction: Axially split case, centrifugal design; cast-iron pump casing with
suction and discharge flanges machined to ASME B16.1 dimensions, 1035 kPa/
2070 kPa/2415 kPa pressure rating according to system requirements.

D. Impeller Construction: Statically and dynamically balanced, of construction to match

fire pump type, fabricated from cast bronze, keyed to shaft.

E. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze.

F. Pump Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.

G. Pump Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings contained in cast-iron housing.

H. Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn
and bronze packing gland.

I. Pump Couplings: Flexible and capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment. Include metal coupling guard.

J. Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory assembled and tested unit
before shipping.

K. Driver: Electric motor.

L. Nameplates: Complete with capacit, characteristics, and other pertinent data.

M. Base: Fabricated and attached to fire-pump and driver unit with reinforcement to resist
movement of pump during seismic events when base is anchored to building substrate

2.2 DRIVERS

A. Description: Open and drip proof induction motor complying with UL 1004A, and
NEMA MG 1. Include construction that complies with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70, and
wiring compatible with controller used. Motor service factor shall not be more than
1.15 as per NFPA reulations.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory assembled and tested unit
before shipping.
C. Nameplates: Complete with motor horsepower (kW), characteristics, and other
pertinent data.

2.3 PUMP CONTROLLERS, GENERAL

A. Description: Factory assembled and wired, factory tested UL certified for capacities
and electrical characteristics, and with features indicated.
B. Enclosure: Control panel enclosure shall be complyng with UL50, NEMA-4 Type 12,
IP54, installed in indoor areas, except where special-purpose enclosure is indicated.
C. Include controls, devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20 as
required for driver and controller types used, and specific items listed for each
controller type.

ELECTRIC–DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 21 31 13 - Page 4 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Nameplates: Provide nameplate complete with capacity, characteristics, approvals and

listings, and other pertinent data on enclosure door.
E. Fire-Pump-Controller Enclosure Mounting: Wall or floor-stand mounting, as
indicated, for field electrical connections.
F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled and tested unit
before shipping.
G. Controller Sensing Pipes: Fabricate pipe and fittings according to NFPA 20 with
nonferrous-metal sensing piping, 15 mm size (1/2 inch), with globe valves for testing
controller mechanism from system to pump controller as indicated. Include a bronze
check valve with a 2.4 mm orifice in the clapper or a ground-face union with a
noncorrosive diaphragm having a 2.4 mm orifice.

2.4 FIRE PUMP CONTROLLERS

A. Description: complying to UL 218 and NFPA 20; listed for electric-drive, fire-pump
service.
B. Motor Starting: Reduced-voltage soft starter or auto transformer type as per
manufacturer’s recommendation and Engineer’s approval, unless otherwise specified
or shown on the Drawings.
C. Rate controllers for scheduled horsepower. Include short-circuit withstand rating at
least equal to short-circuit current available at controller location. Take into account
cable size and distance from substation or supply transformers.
D. Fire pump controller shall be provided with surge arresters in compliance with IEEE
C62.1 or IEEE C62.11 and shall be installed in common mode to eliminate overvoltage
between each phase and earth. As an alternative, the controller shall withstand without
any damage 10 kV impulse in accordance with IEEE C62.41 or ANSI/UL 1449.
E. Method of Isolation and Overcurrent Protection: Interlocked isolating switch and
MCCB (Molded-case circuit breaker); with a common, externally mounted operating
handle, and providing locked-rotor protection. Fire pump controller circuit breaker
settings shall comply with NFPA 20 requirements. The circuit breaker shall not trip
when starting a motor from rest in the across-the-line mode, whether or not the
controller is of the reduced inrush starting type.
F. Controllers: Capable of performing or containing the following features:
1. Isolating means and circuit breaker in compliance with IEC 947-2 utilization
category B, sequence II (service capacity)
2. "Power On" pilot lamp.
3. Fire alarm system connections for indicating motor running condition, loss of
line power, and line power phase reversal.
4. Automatic and manual operation, and minimum run-time relay to prevent short
cycling.
5. Water-pressure-actuated switch having independent high and low calibrated
adjustments responsive to water pressure in fire-protection system.
6. Manual and automatic shutdown.
7. Alarm contacts for remote alarm of “power failure,” “run/stop, trip”,
“hand/off/auto”).

ELECTRIC–DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 21 31 13 - Page 5 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

G. Method of Control:
1. Pressure-switch actuated.
a. Water-pressure-actuated switch and pressure transducer with independent
high- and low-calibrated adjustments responsive to water pressure in fire-
suppression piping.
b. System pressure recorder, electric ac driven, with spring backup.

2. Emergency Start: Mechanically operated start handle that closes and retains the
motor RUN contactor independent of all electric or pressure actuators.
H. Method of Stopping: Nonautomatic.
I. Door-Mounted Operator Interface and Controls:
1. Monitor, display, and control the devices, alarms, functions, and operations
listed in NFPA 20 as required for drivers and controller types used, type NEMA
12.
2. Method of Control and Indication:

a. Microprocessor-based logic controller, with multiline digital readout.

b. Membrane keypad.
c. LED alarm and status indicating lights.

3. Local and Remote Alarm and Status Indications:

a. Controller power on.

b. Motor running condition.
c. Loss-of-line power.
d. Line-power phase reversal.
e. Line-power single-phase condition.
4. Audible alarm, with silence push button.
5. Nonautomatic START and STOP push buttons or switches.
6. Operator Interface Communications Ports: USB, Ethernet, and RS485.

2.5 SPECIALITIES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Match fire-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for fire-pump capacity
rating, and complying with NFPA-20 requirements. Include the following accessories:
1. Automatic air-release valve, complying with NFPA 20 for installation in fire-
pump casing.
2. Circulation relief valve, UL 1478, brass, spring loaded; for installation in pump
discharge piping.
3. Casing relief valve .
3. Suction and discharge pressure gages.
4. Eccentric tapered reducer at suction inlet.
5. Concentric tapered reducer (increaser) at discharge outlet.
6. Ball Drip Valve: UL 1726.

ELECTRIC–DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 21 31 13 - Page 6 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

7. Main Relief Valve: UL 1478, pilot operated, UL 1478, bronze or cast iron,
spring loaded; for installation in fire-suppression water-supply piping.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory-applied red paint.

2.6 ALARM PANELS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -wired remote panel complying with UL 508 and
requirements in NFPA 20. Include audible and visible alarms matching controller
type.
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 2, remote wall-mounting type.
2. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-
assembled and -tested unit before shipping.

B. Features: Include manufacturer's standard features and the following:

1. Motor-operating condition.
2. Loss-of-line power.
3. Phase reversal.
4. Low-water alarm.

2.7 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS

A. Description: UL-listed or FM-approved, fire-pump, flow-measuring systems that

indicate flow to not less than 175 percent of fire-pump rated capacity. Include sensor
of size to match pipe, tubing, flow meter, and fittings.
1. Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa or 2070 kPa depending on the system in which it is
installed or as per schedules.
2. Sensor: Venturi, annular probe, or orifice plate, unless otherwise indicated.
Sensor size shall match pipe, tubing, flow meter, and fittings.
3. Flow Meter: Compatible with flow sensor with dial not less than 115 mm in
diameter or manufacturer's equivalent size.
4. Permanently Mounted: Flow meter suitable for wall mounting with copper
tubing to connect to flow sensor.

B. Include complete operating instructions.

2.8 VERTICAL MULTI-STAGE JOCKEY PUMPS

A. The pump shall be of the vrtical multi-stage design with the motor directly to top the
pump. Pump shall be capable of operating of continuous temperatures of up to 110 deg
C and working pressures of 2070 kPa or 2415 kPa depending on the system in which it
is installed or as per schedules.
1. Construction:
a. The pump suction and discharge chambers, motor steel and pump shaft
coupling shall be constructed of cast iron.

ELECTRIC–DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 21 31 13 - Page 7 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

b. The impellers, pump shaft, diffuser chambers and impeller seal rings shall
be constructed of stainless steel.
c. The impellers shall be secured directly to the pump shaft by means of a
stainless steel tapered split cone and locking nut.
d. Intermediate and lower shaft bearings shall be bronze or tungsten carbide
and ceramic.
e. Pumps shall be equipped with a high temperature reversible mechanical
seal constructed of tungsten carbide mounted in a stainless steel housing.
2. Motor:
a. The pump motor shall be open drip proof, sized to insure that the pump is
non-overloading when operating on the specified pump curve.
b. Provide Nema C face design.
c. Minimum service factor of 1.15.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions present for compliance with
requirements for installation and other conditions affecting fire pump performance.

B. Examine fire-protection piping systems. Verify actual locations of piping connections

prior to installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with fire pump and pressure-maintenance pump (Jockey pump) manufacturer's
written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 20 and FM standards.
B. Install pumps in locations indicated and arrange to provide access for periodic
maintenance, including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete equipment bases. Disconnect coupling halves
before setting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been
completed.
1. Support pump base plate on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal
wedges having small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 20
to 40 mm between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check
coupling faces and pump suction and discharge flanges to verify that they are
level and plumb.
D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than the diameter of fire
pump nozzles.
E. Install valves of types and at locations indicated that are same size as the piping
connecting fire pumps, bypasses, test headers, and other piping systems.
F. Install pressure gages on fire pump suction and discharge at integral pressure gage
tappings provided.
G. Support pumps and piping separately, so that the weight of piping system does not rest

ELECTRIC–DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 21 31 13 - Page 8 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

on pumps.
H. Install accessories, hangers and supports, anchors, valves, meters and gages, and
equipment supports as indicated for complete installation.
I. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but
not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram
submittal to electrical Installer.
1. Verify that electrical wiring is installed according to manufacturer's submittal
and installation requirements of Division 26 Sections. Do not proceed with
equipment startup until wiring installation is acceptable.

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Align fire pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been leveled on foundation
and after grout has set and foundation bolts have been tightened.

B. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Fill base
plate completely with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, with metal blocks and shims or
wedges in place. After grout has hardened, fully tighten foundation bolts. Check
alignment and take corrective measures required.

C. Make piping connections, check alignment, and take corrective measures required.
1. Adjust alignment of pump and driver shafts for angular and parallel alignment
by 1 of 2 methods specified in Hydraulic Institute Standards Section
"Centrifugal Pumps--Instructions for Installation, Operation and Maintenance".
2. Alignment Tolerances: Meet manufacturer's recommendations.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water supply to fire pumps and pressure-maintenance pumps (Jockey pumps).

B. Connect fire pump and pressure-maintenance pump (Jockey pumps) discharge piping
to building fire-protection water systems.

C. Connect fire pump controllers to building fire alarm system. Refer to Division 26
Section "Fire Alarm Systems".

D. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of supplier's service representative to

supervise field assembly of components, installation of fire pump units, including piping
and electrical connections, field acceptance tests. Include the following:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Check suction line connections for tightness so no air gets into pumps.

ELECTRIC–DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 21 31 13 - Page 9 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new units, and retest.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
5. Furnish fire hoses in number, size, and length required to reach storm drain or
other acceptable location to dispose of fire-pump test water.
6. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following preventive-maintenance
operations and checks:

a. Lubricate oil-lubrication-type bearings.

b. Remove grease-lubrication-type bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene,
and clean thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
c. Disconnect coupling and check electric motor for proper rotation. Rotation
shall match direction of rotation marked on pump casing.
d. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or if it drags even
slightly, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
7. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:

a. Prime pump by opening suction valve and closing drains, and prepare pump
for operation.
b. Open sealing liquid supply valves if pump is so fitted.
c. Start motor.
d. Open discharge valve slowly.
e. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for proper
flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Do not tighten gland immediately but
let packing run in before reducing leakage through stuffing boxes.
f. Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.

B. Perform field-acceptance tests for each fire pump unit (fire pump, driver, and
controller) and system piping when fire pump unit installation is complete. Comply
with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 20 to demonstrate compliance
with requirements. Where possible, field-correct malfunctioning equipment, then
retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment that cannot be satisfactorily
corrected or that does not perform as specified and as indicated, then retest to
demonstrate compliance. Verify that each fire pump unit performs as specified and as
indicated.

C. Report test results in writing.

3.6 COMMISSIONING

A. Startup Services: Provide services of supplier's service representative to provide

startup service and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as
specified below.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and components.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to

ELECTRIC–DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 21 31 13 - Page 10 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.

3. Review data in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual".
4. Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice.
5. Provide fire hoses in number, size, and of length required to reach a storm drain
or other acceptable location to dispose of fire pump test water. These fire hoses
are for field acceptance tests only and are not intended to become property of the
Owner.

B. Final Checks Before Startup: Perform the following preventive-maintenance

operations and checks before startup:
1. Lubricate oil-lubricated bearings.
2. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers and flush bearings with kerosene and
thoroughly clean. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. Disconnect coupling and check electric motor for proper rotation direction
marked on pump casing.
4. Check that the pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate the pump if it is
bound or if it drags even slightly until cause of trouble is determined and
corrected.

C. Starting procedure for pumps:

1. Prime pump by opening suction valve and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
2. Open sealing liquid supply valve if pump is so fitted.
3. Start motor.
4. Open discharge valve slowly.
5. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for proper
flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Do not tighten gland immediately, but let
packing run in before reducing leakage through stuffing boxes.
6. Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.

END OF SECTION 21 3113

ELECTRIC–DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 21 31 13 - Page 11 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

DIVISION 22

PLUMBING

April 2024 - REV.0

 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 220513

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements;
size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and
coatings.

B. Factory Test Reports: For specified tests.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with related electrical Standards, referred to in Division 26.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

1. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender, itemized schedules of spare parts to
be provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the
manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Motors shall be of the energy efficient design.

C. Motors 0.37 kW (1/2 HP) and Larger: Three phase, up to 150 kW (200 HP) and soft starters
for 150 kW (250 HP) and larger.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 05 13 - Page 1 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Motors smaller than 0.37 (1/2 HP): Single phase.

E. Frequency Rating: 50 Hz, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected.

G. Service Factor: According to IEC 60034 and 60072, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start,
accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.

I. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled type, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Index of Protection (IP): Motors shall be [IP55] for outdoor use and [IP54] [totally enclosed
fan cooled] for indoor use.

K. Temperature Rise: Shall not exceed the permissible limit for the insulation class based on 50
deg. C (122 deg. F) ambient temperature, unless otherwise indicated.

L. Motors that utilize a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall be inverter rated and shall
comply with Division 26, Section “Motor Control Centers”.

M. Include built-in terminal blocks.

2.2 THREE PHASE MOTORS

A. Description: IEC 60034 and 60072, medium induction motor.

1. Design Characteristics: IEC Standards, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Energy-Efficient Design: Premium efficiency – Class “eff1”, unless otherwise
indicated. Classification in accordance with the definition set by the “European
Commission of Electric Machinery and Power Electronics Manufacturers”.
3. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. Multispeed motors have
separate winding for each speed.
4. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
6. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class B for motors located in air-conditioned
spaces and Class F for motors located outside or in non-air-conditioned spaces.

B. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal box to suit control
method. Maximum permissible starting current shall be 5 times the Full Load Current
(FLC).

C. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller output.
2. Temperature Rise: Match rating for Class F insulation.
3. Insulation: Class F.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 05 13 - Page 2 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

4. Thermal Protection: Where indicated, conform to IEC requirements for thermally

protected motors.

D. Rugged-Duty Motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with 1.25 minimum
service factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents.
Windings are insulated with nonhygroscopic material. External finish is chemical-resistant
paint over corrosion-resistant primer.

E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to IEC:

1. Measurement of winding resistance.

2. No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. High-potential test.
5. Alignment.

2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit starting
torque and other requirements of specific motor application.

1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
4. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class B for motors located in air-conditioned
spaces and Class F for motors located outside or in non air-conditioned spaces.
5. Energy-Efficient Design: Premium efficiency – Class “eff1”, unless otherwise
indicated. Classification in accordance with the definition set by the “European
Commission of Electric Machinery and Power Electronics Manufacturers”.

B. Shaded-Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 0.037 kW (1/20 hp).

C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens

power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to
temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically resets
when motor temperature returns to normal range, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial
forces on motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other single-phase motors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ADJUSTING

A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt-driven motors.

B. Align pulleys and install belts.

C. Tension according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install power feeders to motors in raceways. Locate raceways close to motor terminal box
and use liquidtight flex for final connection to motor terminal box.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 05 13 - Page 3 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Motors located in classified areas shall be installed in accordance with IEC

recommendations for “Hazardous (classified) Locations”.

3.2 COMMISSIONING

A. Check operating motors for unusual conditions during normal operation. Coordinate with
the commissioning of the equipment for which the motor is a part.

B. Take measurements and prepare a log of voltage, current, frequency, and power.

C. Report unusual conditions.

D. Report current deficiencies of field-installed units.

END OF SECTION 220513

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 05 13 - Page 4 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 05 16

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for plumbing piping systems.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and
temperatures.

B. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection and
design of expansion fittings and loops.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and methods
of assembly.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

D. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for each expansion
fitting and loop.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

registered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 16 - Page 1 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

services are defined as those performed for installations of expansion fittings and
loops that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating, with end
fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel, and flanged-end connections,
unless otherwise indicated.

1. Configuration: Single- and double-bellows type, with base, unless otherwise

indicated.
2. Joints for Copper Piping: Single- and two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass
shroud.
3. Joints for Stainless-Steel Waterway: Single-ply stainless-steel bellows, stainless-
steel-pipe end connections, and steel shroud.
4. Joints for Steel Piping: Single- and two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel
shroud.

B. Expansion Compensators: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating, with internal

guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for positioning.

1. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Joints for Copper Piping: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shroud.
4. Joints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shroud.

C. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber, and pressure rated
for 1200 kPa at 116 deg C (175 psig at 240 deg F) minimum.

1. Configuration: Full-faced, integral, steel-flanged-end connections; external control

rods; and steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes.
2. Types: Single and double sphere.

D. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-hose legs

joined by long-radius 180-degree return bend with inlet and outlet elbow fittings,
corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.

1. Joints for Copper Piping: Copper fittings with solder-joint end connections.

a. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths
with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and 3450 kPa at 232 deg C
(500 psig at 450 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
b. DN65 to DN100 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4): Stainless-steel hoses and double-
braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 2890 kPa at 21 deg C (420 psig at 70 deg F)
and 2170 kPa at 232 deg C (315 psig at 450 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.

2. Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings.

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 16 - Page 2 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

a. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

b. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
c. Joints for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
stainless-steel sheaths with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and
3550 kPa at 315 deg C (515 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
d. Joints for DN65 to DN150 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6): Stainless-steel hoses and
double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 1900 kPa at 21 deg C (275 psig at 70
deg F) and 1380 kPa at 315 deg C (200 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure
ratings.
e. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
stainless-steel sheaths with 1130 kPa at 21 deg C (165 psig at 70 deg F) and
830 kPa at 315 deg C (120 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.

2.2 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Slip Expansion Joints: Carbon-steel, packing-type pipe expansion joint designed for
repacking under pressure and pressure rated for 1725 kPa at 204 deg C (250 psig at 400
deg F) minimum with compound limit stops, flanged or weld ends to match piping system,
drip connection if used for steam piping systems, and flanged-end connections, unless
otherwise indicated.

1. Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene.

2. Double-Slip Type: With base.

B. Flexible Ball Joints: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition packing,

designed for 360-degree rotation and angular deflection, and 1725 kPa at 204 deg C (250
psig at 400 deg F) minimum pressure rating; comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section II, "Materials Specifications," and with ASME B31.9, "Building
Services Piping," for materials and design of pressure-containing parts and bolting.

1. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Joints for DN150 (NPS 6) and smaller: 30-degree angular deflection minimum.
4. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and larger: 15-degree angular deflection minimum.

2.3 GUIDES

A. Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment of
piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in
hardened Portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for
application.

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 16 - Page 3 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened Portland
cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin
suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.
2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 21 MPa minimum. Refer to Section "Cast-in-Place

Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.

G. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink and nonmetallic
grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.

C. Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly
absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.

1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written
instructions.

3.3 GUIDE INSTALLATION

A. Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.

B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 16 - Page 4 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.4 ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by

ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.

C. Construct concrete anchors of cast-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated, or otherwise

required, and include embedded fasteners.

D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written instructions if

expansion fittings are indicated.

E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed
on or in concrete.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.

B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section "Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 220516

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 16 - Page 5 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 05 17

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves.
2. Grout.
3. Fire stopping material.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and
welded steel collar; zinc coated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
coated, with plain ends.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube

closed with welded longitudinal joint.

2.2 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 17 - Page 1 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.3 FIRE-STOPPING MATERIAL

A. Fire-Resistant Sealant: Provide two-part, foamed-in-place, fire-stopping elastomeric sealant

formulated for use in a through-penetration fire-stop system for filling openings around
plumbing piping penetrations through walls and floors, having fire-resistance ratings indi-
cated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters La-
boratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having juris-
diction.

B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incor-
porated in the work included, shall be K-Flex or approved similar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and
walls are constructed.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal
system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for
sealants as per Architectural specifications.

3.2 FIRE BARRIER PENETRATIONS

A. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls or floors at pipe

penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire-stop materials. Comply with requirements for
fire-stopping as per Architectural specification.

3.3 SLEEVE WATER-SEAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service
piping entries into building.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 17 - Page 2 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and
for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,
assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and
sleeve. Provide sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Install sleeves for pipes passing through new constructed concrete and masonry walls and
concrete floor and roof slabs.

B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Use sleeves and sleeve seals as per the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade: Cast iron or Epoxy coated carbon-steel (layer
coating thickness 100 µm-400 µm) wall sleeves with sleeve water-seal system:

1) Select sleeve size to allow for minimum 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear
space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve water-seal system.
2) Sleeve water-seal system to be approved by Civil engineer.

3. Pits sleeves: similar to exterior concrete walls below grade.

4. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Cast iron or Epoxy coated carbon-steel (layer coating

thickness 100 µm-400 µm) slab sleeves with sleeve water-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for minimum 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear
space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve water-seal system.
2) Sleeve water-seal system to be approved by Civil engineer.

5. Concrete Slabs above Grade: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve seal system.
Sleeve seal system shall follow slab classification whether it is fire rated or not:

1) Select sleeve size to allow for minimum 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear
space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve seal system.
2) Sleeve water-seal system to be provided for non-fire rated slabs and
shall be approved by Civil engineer, or
3) Fire-stop material to be provided for fire rated slabs and shall be
approved by Architectural engineer.

6. Interior Partitions (non-fire rated): uPVC pipes sleeves PN6. Sleeve size to be one
step pipe size larger.

7. Interior Partitions (fire rated): Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve seal system:

1) Select sleeve size to allow for minimum 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear
space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system (fire-
stop material).
2) Fire-stop material to be approved by Architectural engineer.

END OF SECTION 230517

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 17 - Page 3 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 17 - Page 4 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 05 18

ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Escutcheons.
2. Floor plates.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

A. Section Includes:

1. ID: Internal diameter

2. OD: Outside diameter

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish

and clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge and
setscrew.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 18 - Page 1 of 3

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

2.3 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, and insulation of insulated piping and
with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern

type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-
plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, steel type or steel type with exposed-rivet hinge.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
steel type or steel type with concealed hinge.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, steel type
or steel type with concealed hinge.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
chrome-plated finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, steel type or steel type
with concealed hinge.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with chrome-
plated finish.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, steel type or steel type with
concealed hinge.

2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.
b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting
brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate,
steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 18 - Page 2 of 3

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, steel type

with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting brass type with
polished, chrome-plated finish.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, steel type with
concealed hinge.
i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting brass type with chrome-plated
finish.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, steel type with concealed hinge.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, and insulation of piping and with OD
that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.

END OF SECTION 220518

ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 18 - Page 3 of 3

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 05 19

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes meters and gages for plumbing and fire protection systems and water
meters installed outside the building.

B. Utility-Furnished Products: Water meters will be furnished to site, ready for installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each
meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.

B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, fittings,
and location for each meter and gage.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracies

under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.

D. Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct-mounting thermometers.

E. Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in maintenance manuals. Include data
for the following:

1. Flow-measuring systems.
2. Flowmeters.
3. Water meters.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2.2 PRESSURE RATING

A. Devices shall withstand pressure of the relevant system but not less than 16 bar and not
more than 25 bar.

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 19 - Page 1 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.3 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL

A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:

1. Domestic Hot Water: 0 to 100 deg C, with 1-degree scale.

2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions.

B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to
maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.

2.4 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Description: ASTM E1-07.

B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured,
230 mm (9 inches) long.

C. Adjustable Joint: Finish matching case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

D. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens.

E. Scale: Satin-faced non reflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit
installation.

2.5 DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. Description: Vapor-actuated, universal-angle dials type.

B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 100-mm- diameter, glass lens.

C. Adjustable Joint: Finish matching case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

D. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze bourdon pressure tube.

E. Movement: Brass, precision geared.

F. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit
installation.

2.6 REMOTE-READING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. Description: Vapor-actuated, remote-reading dial type.

B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 100-mm diameter, glass lens.

C. Movement: Brass, precision geared.

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 19 - Page 2 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

E. Tubing: Bronze, double-braided, armor-over-copper capillary; of length to suit installation.

F. Bulb: Copper with separable socket for liquids; averaging element for air.

2.7 BIMETAL DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. Description: ASME B40.200; direct-mounting, universal-angle dials type.

B. Case: Stainless steel with 100-mm diameter, glass lens.

C. Adjustable Joint: Finish matching case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

D. Element: Bimetal coil.

E. Scale: Satin-faced non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

F. Stem: Stainless steel for separable socket, of length to suit installation.

2.8 INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. Description: ASME B40.200, bimetal type.

B. Dial: 25-mm diameter.

C. Case: Stainless steel.

D. Stem: Dustproof and leak-proof 3 mm diameter, tapered-end stem with nominal length of
125 mm.

2.9 SEPARABLE SOCKETS

A. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold
fixed thermometer stem.

1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50mm, but not less than thickness of
insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not insulated.
4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.

2.10 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold test
thermometer.

1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not less than
thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not insulated.

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 19 - Page 3 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.

5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

2.11 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Description: ASME B40.100, phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom connection;

dry type, for all purpose use. Liquid-filled-case type, for booster sets and pumps.

B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 100 mm diameter, glass lens.

C. Connector: Brass, DN8 (NPS 1/4).

D. Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.

E. Accuracy: plus or minus 1 percent.

F. Range: Comply with the following:

1. Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure (30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15
psig of pressure).
2. Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.

2.12 PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS

A. Valves: DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass or stainless-steel needle type.

B. Syphons: DN8 (NPS 1/4) coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.

C. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-
metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

2.13 TEST PLUGS

A. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in DN15 (NPS 1/2) fitting.

B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.

C. Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa (500 psig) minimum.

D. Core Insert: Self-sealing valve, suitable for inserting 3-mm (1/8-inch) OD probe from dial-
type thermometer or pressure gage.

E. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to plus 93 deg C (20 to 200 deg F),
chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

F. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.

G. Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers, pressure
gage and carrying case.

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 19 - Page 4 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the system's
operating conditions.

2.14 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS

A. System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings,
and conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and system fluid.

1. Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range of

equipment or system where used.
2. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in
gallons (liters).

B. Permanent Meters: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting. Include 150-mm- (6-inch-)
diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flow element.

1. Scale: Liters per second (Gallons per minute).

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of center 60 percent of range.

C. Include complete operating instructions with each meter.

D. Venturi Flow Elements: Differential-pressure-design, flow-element fitting made for

installation in piping.

1. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel; with brass fittings and attached
tag with flow conversion data. Include ends threaded for DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller
elements and flanged or welded for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger elements.
2. Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa (250 psig).
3. Temperature Rating: 121 deg C (250 deg F).

E. Pitot-Tube Flow Elements: Differential-pressure design with probe made for insertion into
piping.

1. Construction: Stainless-steel probe of length to span inside of pipe, with brass

fittings and attached tag with flow conversion data.
2. Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa (150 psig).
3. Temperature Rating: 121 deg C (250 deg F).

2.15 TURBINE FLOWMETERS

A. Description: Insertion type; measures flow directly in liters per second (gallons per minute).

1. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body and plastic turbine or impeller, with

integral direct-reading scale.
2. Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa (150 psig) minimum.
3. Temperature Rating: 82 deg C (180 deg F) minimum.
4. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in
liters (gallons).
5. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2-1/2 percent.

2.16 FLOW INDICATORS

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 19 - Page 5 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow; made for installation in piping
systems.

1. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and plastic pelton-
wheel indicator.
2. Pressure Rating: 860 kPa (125 psig).
3. Temperature Rating: 93 deg C (200 deg F).

2.17 WATER METERS

A. Description: Water meter shall be as per local authority’s requirement and approval and to
suit installation requirements at site.

B. Description: AWWA C700-03, displacement type, bronze case. Registers flow in liters
(gallons) or cubic meters (cubic feet) as required by utility.

C. Description: ANSI/AWWA C701-07, turbine type. Registers flow in liters (gallons) or

cubic meters (cubic feet) as required by utility.

D. Description: ANSI/AWWA C702-01, compound type, bronze case. Registers flow in liters
(gallons) or cubic meters (cubic feet) as required by utility.

E. Remote Registration System (Option for tenants): Utility's standard; direct-reading type
complying with ANSI/AWWA C706-96 (R2005); modified with signal transmitting
assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly.

F. Remote Registration System (Option for tenants): Utility's standard; encoder-type

complying with ANSI/AWWA C707-05; modified with signal transmitting assembly, low-
voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly.

1. Data-Acquisition Units: Comply with utility's requirements for type and quantity.
2. Visible Display Units: Comply with utility's requirements for type and quantity.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for
applications where used.

3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION

A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

B. Install in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central
systems.
3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit.

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 19 - Page 6 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

5. Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank.

6. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.
7. Each duct thermometer support flange.

C. Install remote-reading dial thermometers in control panels with tubing connecting panel and
thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

D. Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed thermometers are
indicated.

1. Install with socket extending to center of pipe.

2. Fill sockets with oil or graphite and secure caps.

E. Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test thermometers are
indicated.

1. Install with stem extending to center of pipe.

2. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.

F. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are
indicated. Attach to duct with screws.

3.3 PRESSURE-GAGE INSTALLATION

A. Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on pipe at most
readable position.

B. Install dry-type pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Building water-service entrance.
3. Chilled-water and condenser-water inlets and outlets of chillers.

C. Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump, including
fire and booster pumps.

D. Install pressure-gage needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gages.

1. Exception: Install syphon instead of snubber in piping to steam pressure gages.

3.4 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install flowmeters in accessible and most readable positions in piping systems.

B. Install flow-measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet of each
hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Install differential-pressure-type flow elements with minimum straight lengths of pipe

upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's written
instructions.

D. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flowmeters in accessible locations.

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 19 - Page 7 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Install permanently mounted meters for flow elements on walls or brackets in accessible
locations.

F. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as prescribed
by manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION

A. Install flowmeters and components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 WATER METER INSTALLATION

A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to AWWA M6 - 1999 and utility's
requirements.

1. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water meter inlet.
Install valve on water meter outlet and valved bypass around meter, unless prohibited
by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter inlet and
outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on
brick or concrete piers.
3. Install detector-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter inlet and outlet
and on full-size valved bypass around meter. Support meter, valves, and piping on
brick or concrete piers.

3.7 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS

A. Install roughing-in piping and specialties for water meter installation are according to
utility's instructions and requirements.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance.
2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
3. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.

B. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and devices.

C. Ground electrically operated meters.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

D. Install electrical connections for power and devices.

E. Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 19 - Page 8 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked
and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touchup
paint.

END OF SECTION 220519

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 19 - Page 9 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 05 23

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general duty valves common to plumbing piping systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and
temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and
arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list
indicating valve and its application.

B. Listing of Product Installation shall be submitted for valve assemblies indicating at least 5
installed units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for a
minimum of 5 years.

C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual. Include
detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.

B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block checks valves in either closed or open position.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - Page 1 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight
enclosures.

C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES

A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.

1. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of
rising stems.

B. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves shall be factory coated
with 7.5 mm (300 micron) fusion bonded epoxy coating.

C. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.

D. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special
operator features:

1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.

2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves DN150 (6 inches) and smaller, except for
plug valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Employer with 1 wrench for
every 10 plug valves.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves DN100 (4 inches) and larger, installed 2400 mm
(96 inches) or higher above finished floor elevation.
4. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves DN200 (8 inches) and larger.

F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems

arranged to receive insulation.

G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.

H. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

I. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze
valves.

J. Solder Joint: ASME B16.18.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - Page 2 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point
below 450 deg C (840 deg F) for gate, globe, and check valves; below 216 deg C
(421 deg F) for ball valves.

K. All valves shall be in an accessible location. If not, suitable means of access shall be
provided.

2.3 GATE VALVES

A. Gate Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; 1600-kPa (235-psi) or 2500-
kPa (368-psi) cold working pressure (CWP); ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and bonnet,
solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy rising stem, teflon-impregnated packing with
bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-
iron handwheel.

B. Gate Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-70, 1600-kPa (235-psi) or 2500-kPa
(368-psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy
stem, rising stem, teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged
end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.

2.4 BALL VALVES

A. Ball Valves, DN100 (4 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, , 1600-kPa (235-psi) or 2500-
kPa (368-psi) CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-
plated brass ball, standard port for DN15 (1/2-inch) valves and smaller and conventional
port for DN20 (3/4-inch) valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon seats
and seals; threaded or soldered end connections:

1. Operator: Steel hand-wheel.

2. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
3. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel tee handle.
4. Operator: Lever operators with lock.
5. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
6. Memory Stop: For operator handles.

2.5 PLUG VALVES

A. Plug Valves: non-lubricated MSS SP-78, 1600-kPa (235-psi) or 2500-kPa (368-psi) CWP,
ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, cast-iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing,
flanged or grooved end connections:

1. Operator: Lever.
2. Operator: Square head with 1 wrench for every 10 valves.
3. Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes DN150 (6 inches) and larger, 2400
mm (96 inches) or higher above floor.

2.6 GLOBE VALVES

A. Globe Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; 1600-kPa (235-psi) or 2500-
kPa (368-psi) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - Page 3 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded
or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.

B. Globe Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-85;1600-kPa (235-psi) or 2500-kPa
(368-psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings,
renewable bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-
impregnated packing with cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron
handwheel.

2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 1600-kPa (232-psi) CWP, 1600- kPa (235-psi) or 2500-kPa
(368-psi) minimum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended
neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, lug, or
grooved style:

1. Disc Type: Epoxy-coated ductile iron.

2. Stem & Disc material: Nickel plated ductile iron.
3. Operator for Sizes DN50 (2 Inches) to DN150 (6 Inches): Lever handle with latch
lock.
4. Operator for Sizes DN200 (8 Inches) to DN600 (24 Inches): Gear operator with
position indicator and chain wheel.

2.8 CHECK VALVES

A. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; 1600-kPa (235-psi)
or 2500-kPa (368-psi) CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern, ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and
cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition seat, threaded or soldered end
connections:

B. Swing Check Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-71, 1600-kPa (235-psi) or
2500-kPa (368-psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing,
weighted non-slam, bronze disc, flanged or grooved end connections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during
shipping and handling.

C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operation.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - Page 4 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material
composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.

F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 1500 mm (60 inches) above finished floor
elevation.

H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS

A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.

B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush
to a bright finish. Clean valve socket.

C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.

D. Open ball, gate and globe valves to fully open position.

E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.

F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve.
Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.

G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder
until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once
the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.

3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - Page 5 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall
to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

B. Align threads at point of assembly.

C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry
seal threading is specified.

D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the
pipe is being threaded.

3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS

A. Align flange surfaces parallel.

B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets
as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts
gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for
proper shutoff and retention.

3.6 VALVE END SELECTION

A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

1. Copper Tube Size, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and smaller: Solder ends, except provide
threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN80 (3 Inches) and larger: Grooved end or flanged.

3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. General Application: Use gate, ball and butterfly valves for shutoff and isolating duty; ball
valves for drain lines, globe and balancing valves for throttling duty. Refer to piping system
Specification Sections for specific valve applications and arrangements.

B. Use gate valves or ball valves for sizes up to 2 “(50 DN), and butterfly valves for sizes 3”
(80DN) and above.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.

END OF SECTION 220523

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - Page 6 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

C. Design and obtain approval from Engineer for supports for piping and equipment.

1.5 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and ther-
mal-hanger shield insert indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping
supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations justifying forces, sizes, embed-
ments and characteristics of components and fabrication details.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - Page 1 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
each multiple pipe support, trapeze by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally regis-

tered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is ex-
perienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering ser-
vices are defined as those performed for installations of hangers, supports that are
similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Re-
fer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger
and support types.

1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-
applied finish.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-strength insula-

tion, encased in sheet metal shield.

1. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium sili-
cate with vapor barrier.
2. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium sili-
cate.
3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of
pipe.
4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
5. Insert Length: Extend 50 mm beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with

pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - Page 2 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic,
dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior
and exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified
in piping system Specification Sections.

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as speci-
fied in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, DN15 to DN750 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 30).
2. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, DN100 to DN900
(NPS 4 to NPS 36), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange
and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
3. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for
pipes, DN65 to DN900 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36), if vertical adjustment is required,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
4. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, DN25 to DN750 (NPS 1
to NPS 30), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and con-
traction might occur.
5. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, DN65 to
DN500 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by
expansion and contraction might occur.
6. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN1050 (NPS 2
to NPS 42), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might oc-
cur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
7. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN600
(NPS 2 to NPS 24), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contrac-
tion might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
8. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN750 (NPS 2 to NPS 30), if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might
be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - Page 3 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, DN20 to
DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
DN20 to DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
2. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types
of building attachments.
3. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 49 to 232 deg C (120 to 450 deg F)
piping installations.

F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
3. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
4. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads.
5. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
6. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 340 kg (750 lb).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 675 kg (1500 lb).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 1350 kg (3000 lb).

8. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is re-
quired.
9. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where head room is limited.

G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to pre-
vent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of
high-density, 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - Page 4 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

treated calcium silicate, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and
encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.

H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping move-
ment.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not ex-
ceed 32 mm.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger
with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variabil-
ity factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system
from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system
from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of
stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment.
Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability.
These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.

B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled channel systems.

1. Field assembles and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for indi-
vidual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricates from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being sup-
ported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space at-
tachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - Page 5 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expan-
sion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is
placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and com-
pletely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install
fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion
joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. DN8 to DN90 (NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2): 300 mm (12 inches) long and 1.22 mm
(0.048 inch) thick.
b. DN100 (NPS 4): 300 mm long and 1.52 mm (0.06 inch) thick.
c. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): 450 mm (18 inches) long and 1.52
mm (0.06 inch) thick.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - Page 6 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

d. DN200 to DN350 (NPS 8 to NPS 14): 600 mm (24 inches) long and 1.91 mm
(0.075 inch) thick.
e. DN400 to DN600 (NPS 16 to NPS 24): 600 mm (24 inches) long and 2.67 mm
(0.105 inch) thick.

5. Pipes DN200 (NPS 8) and larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equip-
ment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot
be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, ap-
pearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the
following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corro-
sion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and con-
tours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 40 mm (1-1/2 inches).

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas im-
mediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop paint-
ing. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - Page 7 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm
(2 mils).

B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abrad-
ed areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section "Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galva-
nizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 220529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - Page 8 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 05 48

VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases and vibration isolation
roof curbs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of isolator
specified. Include load deflection curves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional engineer, for the
following:

1. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators, design of

vibration isolation bases.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor
slides and rails, and base weights.

C. Seismic Calculations: The contractor to prepare seismic calculations and submit

comprehensive report showing the requirements for seismic system for different MEP
systems and equipment for the Engineer approval. Accordingly, the contractor to obtain the
relevant items for seismic control for piping and equipment complying with the calculations
and the report outcomes. Seismic criteria shall be submitted according to the following
parameters according to ASCE, and local codes:

1. Seismic Zone
2. Site Class
3. Seismic design category
4. Importance factor
5. Risk Category
6. The mapped spectral accelerations for short periods (Ss)
7. The mapped spectral accelerations for a 1-second period (S1)

D. Seismic Requirements: Submittals are required for all equipment anchors, supports and
seismic restraints. Submittals shall include weights, dimensions, standard connections,
manufacturer's recommendations, behavior problems (vibration, thermal, expansion etc.)
associated with equipment or piping

VIBRATION AND SIESMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - Page 1 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered and

qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced
in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as
those performed for installations of vibration isolation bases that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration restraints. All

selection shall be certified by manufacturer.

C. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration restraints. All

selection shall be certified by manufacturer.

D. Seismic Restraint Requirements (Shall be complying with approved calculations):

1. For equipment:

a. All mechanical equipment shall be suitable for applications requiring

equipment anchorage to resist seismic forces.

b. All mechanical equipment not supported with isolators external to the unit shall
be securely anchored to the structure. Such mechanical equipment, shall be
properly supported to resist a horizontal force of 20 percent of the weight of
the equipment furnished

c. All mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall be provided

with seismic restraints capable of resisting a horizontal force of 20 percent of
the weight of the equipment furnished.

d. Mechanical Equipment: Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected

shall include the following items to the extent required on the Drawings or in
other Sections of the Specification:

2. For piping: The following mechanical systems shall be installed as required on the
Drawings and other Sections of the Specification and shall be seismically protected in
accordance with this Specification:

a. All Piping inside the Building bigger than 150 mm in diameter (to be
confirmed by calculations).

E. Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment: Not to exceed

a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of 5 mm per second RMS, filter in, when
measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal and axial
directions or measured at equipment mounting feet if bearings are concealed.
Measurements for internally isolated fans and motors may be made at the mounting feet.

F. The contractor shall employ an Acoustic Consultant to ensure he meets the criteria.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation devices with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

VIBRATION AND SIESMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - Page 2 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation bases. Cast
anchor-bolt inserts into base.

C. Coordinate installation of equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Isolator Pads: Oil and water resistant and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of the
equipment supported.

1. Rubber Isolator Pads: Elastomer (neoprene or silicone) arranged in single or multiple

layers and molded with a nonslip pattern and steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness to
provide uniform loading over the pad area.
2. Fiberglass or Cork Isolator Pads: Molded cork or glass fiber not less than 25 mm
thick and precompressed through 10 compression cycles at 3 times the rated load.
3. Load Range: From 69 to 345 kPa (10 to 50 psig) and a deflection not less than 2 mm
per 25 mm of thickness. Do not exceed a loading of 345 kPa (50 psig).

B. Rubber Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene

isolator elements bonded to formed-steel housings with threaded connections for hanger
rods. Color-code to indicate capacity range.

C. Spring Hangers: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger with coil spring and
elastomeric insert in compression.

1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30
degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity
range.

D. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable
engagement.

E. Anchor Bolts: Drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M.

VIBRATION AND SIESMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - Page 3 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES

A. Floor Mountings:

1. Double Deflection Neoprene (Type N): Shall include neoprene covered steel support
plated (top and bottom), friction pads, and necessary bolt holes.

2. Captive Spring Mount for Seismic (Type SS):

a. Design mounts to resiliently resist seismic forces in all directions. Snubbing

shall take place in all modes with adjustment to limit upward, downward, and
horizontal travel to a maximum of 6 mm before contacting snubbers.
Mountings shall be have a minimum rating of one G as calculated and certified
by a registered structural engineer.

b. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the
equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height
of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to
solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. Mountings shall have ports
for spring inspection. Provide an all directional neoprene cushion collar around
the equipment bolt.

3. Spring Isolators with Vertical Limit Stops (Type SP): Similar to spring isolators
preceding, except include a vertical limit stop to limit upward travel if weight is
removed and also to reduce movement due to wind loads. Provide clearance around
restraining bolts to prevent mechanical short circuiting. Isolators shall have a
minimum seismic rating of one G.

4. Seismic Pad (Type DS): Pads shall be felt, cork neoprene waffle, neoprene and cork
sandwich, neoprene and fiberglass, neoprene and steel waffle, or reinforced duck and
neoprene, with steel top plate and drilled for an anchor bolt. Washers and bushings
shall be reinforced duck and neoprene. Size pads for a maximum load of 345 kPa (50
pounds per square inch).

B. Hangers: Shall be combination neoprene and springs unless otherwise noted and shall allow
for expansion of pipe.

1. Combination Neoprene and Spring (Type H): Vibration hanger shall contain a spring
and double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring shall have a diameter not
less than 0.8 of compressed oper¬ating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum
additional travel of 50 percent between design height and solid height. Spring shall
permit a 15 degree angular misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.

2. Spring Position Hanger (Type HP): Similar to combination neoprene and spring
hanger except hanger shall hold piping at a fixed elevation during installation and
include a secondary adjustment feature to transfer load to spring while maintaining
same position.

3. Neoprene (Type HN): Vibration hanger shall contain a double deflection type
neoprene isolation element. Hanger rod shall be separated from contact with hanger
bracket by a neoprene grommet.

4. Spring (Type HS): Vibration hanger shall contain a coiled steel spring in series with a
neoprene grommet. Spring shall have a diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed

VIBRATION AND SIESMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - Page 4 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent
between design height and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular
misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.

5. Hanger supports for piping 50 mm and larger shall have a pointer and scale deflection
indicator.

C. Snubbers: Each spring mounted base shall have a minimum of four all-directional or eight
two directional (two per side) seismic snubbers that are double acting. Elastomeric
materials shall be shock absorbent neoprene bridge quality bearing pads, maximum 60
durometer, replaceable and have a minimum thickness of 6 mm. Air gap between hard and
resilient material shall be not less than 3 mm nor more than 6 mm. Restraints shall be
capable of withstanding design load without permanent deformation.

D. Thrust Restraints (Type THR): Restraints shall provide a spring element contained in a steel
frame with neoprene pads at each end attachment. Restraints shall have factory preset thrust
and be field adjustable to allow a maximum movement of 6 mm when the fan starts and
stops. Restraint assemblies shall include rods, angle brackets and other hardware for field
installation.

2.3 BASES

A. Rails (Type R): Design rails with isolator brackets to reduce mounting height of equipment
and cradle machines having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary
base. To assure adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of
longest base dimension but not less than 100 mm (four-inches). Where rails are used with
neoprene mounts for small fans or close coupled pumps, extend rails to compensate
overhang of housing.

B. Integral Structural Steel Base (Type B): Design base with isolator brackets to reduce
mounting height of equipment which require a complete supplementary rigid base. To
assure adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base
dimension, but not less than 100 mm.

C. Inertia Base (Type I): This applies to diesel generators, any floor mounted pumps and as
shown on drawings. Base shall be a reinforced concrete inertia base. Pour concrete into a
welded steel channel frame, incorporating prelocated equipment anchor bolts and pipe
sleeves. Level concrete to provide a smooth uniform bearing surface for equipment
mounting. Provide grout under uneven supports. Channel depth shall be a minimum of 1/12
of longest dimension of base but not less than 150 mm. Form shall include 13 mm
reinforcing bars welded in place on minimum of 203 mm centers running both ways in a
layer 40 mm above bottom. The whole assembly shall be supported on spring isolators
carrying the base from brakets that keep the centre of gravity low. Use height saving
brackets in all mounting locations. Weight of inertia base two to three the weight of
equipment supported to provide a maximum peak-to-peak displacement of 2 mm. For
pumps use wide enough base, so that the supports for the pipe connections are made on the
base.

D. Curb Mounted Isolation Base (Type CB): Fabricate from aluminum to fit on top of standard
curb with overlap to allow water run-off and have wind and water seals which shall not
interfere with spring action. Provide resilient snubbers with 6 mm clearance for wind
resistance. Top and bottom bearing surfaces shall have sponge type weather seals. Integral
spring isolators shall comply with Spring Isolator (Type S) requirements.

VIBRATION AND SIESMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - Page 5 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.4 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT

A. Bolt pad mounted equipment, without vibration isolators, to the floor or other support using
ASTM A307 standard bolting material; or, equal.

B. Floor Mounted Equipment, With Vibration Isolators: Type SS. Where Type N isolators are
used provide channel frame lease horizontal restraints bolted to the floor, or other support,
on all sides of the equipment. Size and material required for the lease shall be as
recommended by the isolator manufacturer.

C. On all sides of suspended equipment, provide bracing for rigid supports and provide
restraints for resiliently supported equipment. The slack cable restraint method, Mason
Industries, or equal, is acceptable.

D. Neoprene Pads: Oil-resistant neoprene sheets, of manufacturer's standard hardness and

cross-ribbed or waffled pattern.

E. Vibration Isolation Springs: Wound-steel compression springs, or high-strength spring

alloy steel; with spring diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed height of spring at rated
loads. Provide minimum additional travel to solid, equal to 50% of rated deflection.
Provide spring wire with elastic limit stress exceeding at solid deflection.

F. All-Directional Anchors: Provide all-directional acoustical pipe anchor consisting of

telescopic arrangement of 2 sizes of steel tubing separated by minimum 12.7 mm thickness
of heavy-duty neoprene and duck, or neoprene isolation material. Provide vertical restraints
by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Design for
maximum 3450 kPa load on isolation materials, and provide for equal resistance in any
direction. Equip anchor with threaded hole on top and 2 holes in base plate for bolting
down; or provide welding provisions top and bottom, if indicated.

G. Thrust Restraints: Provide horizontal thrust restraints consisting of spring element in series
with neoprene pad. Select spring deflection same as for equipment loading. Design so
thrust restraints can be pre-set and adjusted in field. Attach horizontal restraints at
centerline of thrust and symmetrically on either side of unit.

H. Fabricated Equipment Bases: Where supplementary bases are indicated for use with isolator
units to support equipment (base not integral with equipment), provide welded rectangular
unit, fabricated of structural steel shapes, plates and bars complying with ASTM A36, as
shown. Provide welded support brackets at points indicated, and anchor base to spring
isolator units. Except as otherwise indicated arrange brackets to result in lowest possible
mounting height for equipment, but provide minimum of 25 mm . Provide bolt holes in
base matching anchor bolt holes in equipment.

1. Where indicated, provide for auxiliary motor slide base under motor or motor slide
rails for adjusting belt tension. Design primary base for bolting of rails or slide base
in position.

2. Where sizes of base framing members are not indicated, fabricate base with depth of
structure not less than 0.10 x longest span of base, rigidly braced to support
equipment without deflections or distortions which would be detrimental to
equipment or equipment performance.

I. Inertia Base Frames: Where inertia bases are indicated for use with pad type isolation units
to support equipment, provide rectangular structural beam channel, or complete sheet metal

VIBRATION AND SIESMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - Page 6 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

box concrete forms for floating foundations, with materials complying with ASTM A36.
Frame unit as shown or, if not shown, with minimum depth of 0.08 x longest dimension of
base, but not less than 150 mm deep. Size frame as shown or, if not shown, so that weight
of frame plus concrete fill will be greater than operating weight of equipment supported.
Provide steel reinforcing both ways with both ends of reinforcing butt welded to base
framing.

1. Provide anchor bolts, located as required for equipment anchorage and supported for
casting of concrete. Locate bolts as indicated.

2. Provide adjustable bolts in pipe sleeves; for minimum of 12.7 mm (1/2") adjustment
around anchor bolts.

J. Isolation Hangers: Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's
standard compression isolators of type indicated. Design brackets for 3 times rated loading
of units. Fabricate units to accept misalignment of 15 degrees off center in any direction
before contacting hanger box, and for use with either rod or strap type members, and
including acoustical washers to prevent metal-to-metal contacts.

1. Provide vibration isolation spring with cap in lower part of hanger and rubber hanger
element in top, securely retained in unit.

2. Provide hangers, precompressed to rated load to limit deflection during installation.

Design so hanger may be released after full load is applied.

K. Flexible Pipe Connectors:

1. For non-ferrous piping, provide bronze hose covered with copper tube ends or bronze
flanged ends, braze-welded to hose.

2. For ferrous piping, provide stainless steel hose covered with stainless steel wire braid
with NPT steel nipples or 1030 kPa ANSI flanges, welded to hose.

3. Flexible pipe connectors to have screwed ends for pipes 50 mm and under and
flanged ends for pipes over 50 mm .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with
requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install anchor vibration and sound control products according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

VIBRATION AND SIESMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - Page 7 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates to structural floors as required.

C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates to structural supports as required.

D. Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration isolators.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact
during normal operations.

B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 6 mm of movement at start and stop.

C. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.

D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.

E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

G. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation control devices.

Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

END OF SECTION 220548

VIBRATION AND SIESMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 - Page 8 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes identification for plumbing piping and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.

B. Samples: Of color, lettering style and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.

C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond paper. Tabu-
late valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on tag, room or space loca-
tion of valve, and variations for identification. Mark valves intended for emergency shutoff
and similar special uses. Furnish copies for maintenance manuals aside from mounted cop-
ies.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for lettering
size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS

A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Sections. If more than
single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Contractor's option.

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - Page 1 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or

stamped.

1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating
and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.

C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared with letter sizes conforming to recommendations of

ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 30 mm for ducts, and 20 mm for access door signs
and similar operational instructions.

1. Material: Brass.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicat-
ed. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according to
ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-coded, pres-

sure-sensitive, vinyl type with permanent adhesive.

E. Pipes, Including Insulation: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at
each location.

F. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Engineer.

1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

G. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, vinyl

tape, at least 0.08 mm thick.

1. Width: 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm; 65 mm for
larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6-mm letters for piping system abbreviation and 13-
mm sequenced numbers. Include 4-mm hole for fastener.

1. Material: 0.8-mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum.

2. Size: 40-mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain; beaded chain; or S-hooks.

J. Access Panel Markers: 2-mm thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with abbreviated
terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 3-mm center hole for at-
tachment.

K. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls
for each page of valve schedule. Include screws.

1. Frame: Extruded aluminum.

2. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5-mm, single-
thickness glass.

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - Page 2 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

L. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-

resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white
melamine sub-core, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message.
Provide holes for mechanical fastening.

1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equip-
ment identification.
2. Thickness: 3 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

M. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following

color codes:

1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.

2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:

a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving condi-
tions, and speed.

7. Size: 65 by 100 mm for control devices, and valves; 115 by 150 mm for equipment.

N. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in
mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters,
and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical sys-
tems and equipment.

1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems
of same name are indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.

B. Marker Type: Stenciled markers complying with ASME A13.1.

C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 150 mm OD by following meth-
od:

1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 20
mm wide, lapped a minimum of 40 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - Page 3 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and larger by following
method:

1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 40
mm wide, lapped a minimum of 75 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.

E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, ceilings, and plenums; and ex-
terior non-concealed locations according to the following:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or non-accessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at a maximum of 15-m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 7.5 m in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced
markers.

3.2 VALVE TAGS

A. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops, shutoff valves, faucets,
convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of
end-use fixtures. List tagged valves in valve schedule.

B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color scheme, and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following:

C. Tag Material: Brass or aluminum.

D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:

1. Cold Water: 40 mm, round.

2. Hot Water: 40 mm, round.

E. Tag Color: According to the following:

1. Cold Water: Blue.

2. Hot Water: Yellow.

F. Letter Color: According to the following:

1. Cold Water: Black.

2. Hot Water: Black.

G. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - Page 4 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:

1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units.
2. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
3. Pumps, compressors, and similar motor-driven units.
4. Heat exchangers, coils, electric water heaters, heat pumps, heat recovery units, and
similar equipment.
5. Tanks and pressure vessels.
6. Strainers, filters, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked
by work of this or other Divisions.

B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.

END OF SECTION 220553

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - Page 5 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 11 16

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water distribution piping from locations indicated to fixtures and
equipment inside building.

1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. The scope of the contractor is as indicated on the drawings from tie-in point to feed the main
water tank in level B5, and afterwards to serve the whole building including rentable areas,
public areas, retails and parking.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Water Service Piping: Water piping outside building that conveys water to building.

B. Water Distribution Piping: Water piping inside building that conveys water to fixtures and
equipment throughout the building.

C. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:

1. PE: Polyethylene.
2. PPR: Polypropylene.
3. HDPE: High density polyethylene.

1.5 Manufacturers

A. As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

1.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the
following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Water Service Piping: 1600 kPa (235 psig).

2. Water Distribution Piping: 1600 kPa (232 psig) or 2500 kPa (367 psig) as per
application.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - Page 1 of 10

APRILL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s literature and data for piping and fittings

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.

C. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified

standards.

B. Comply with ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and
installation.

C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," Sections 1
through 9 for potable-water piping and components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES AND TUBES

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.

2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.

B. PPR Pipes and Fittings:

1. PPR plastic pipe: DIN 8077, DIN 8078, DIN EN ISO 15874, rating 7.4 SDR.
2. PPR Heat-Fusion Fittings: socket or butt type made DIN 16962, PPR thermal fusion
socket weld.

C. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings

1. Ductile iron pipes and fittings to be to BS 4772, K12, with NP 16 flanges integrally
cast. Pipes to be centrifugally cast. Fittings to be double flanged of same standard
and manufacture as pipe. Pipe and fittings to be coated at factory with coal tar base
solution to BS 4l64.
2. Flanges on ductile iron pipes and fittings to have serrated finish.

D. High Density Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings

1. HPDE pipes to follow DIN 8074/8075 or ASTM D 4976.
2. HPDE pipes to follow DIN 16963 or ASTM D3261.
3. Size: ASTM F 714 (SDR) based on outside diameter

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - Page 2 of 10

APRILL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21,
nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.
2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

C. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

E. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for
general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

G. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

H. HDPE pipe and fittings; heat-fusion joint.

I. Steel, Keyed Couplings: ANSI/AWWA C606-06 for steel-pipe dimensions. Include

ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and nuts.

J. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure
rating at least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be
joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Standard: ASSE 1079.

2. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Standard: ASSE 1079.

2. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
3. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-
joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - Page 3 of 10

APRILL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

2. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
3. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
4. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:

1. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.

2. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.
3. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
4. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.5 VALVES

A. Refer to Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves.

B. Refer to Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for special-duty valves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating
may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used only for aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Water service piping: HDPE, rated 1600 kPa (232 psig). Do not use flanges or valves
buried underground.
Water Distribution Piping, in main pump room, pump room in the technical intermediate
floor and vertical risers: HDPE, rated 2500 kPa (367 psig).
Water Distribution Piping, branches from vertical risers: PPE, rated 1600 kPa (232 psig).

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Use globe or balancing valves.

B. Grooved-end butterfly valves may be used with grooved-end piping.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - Page 4 of 10

APRILL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to
AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

C. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

D. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building
occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically
indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal,
and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

G. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or
higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise
indicated.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and
packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519
"Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

L. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for

thermostats in Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps."

M. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for
thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

N. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping."

O. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping."

P. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing
Piping."

3.5 WATER SERVICE PIPING INSTALLATION

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - Page 5 of 10

APRILL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Extend service entrance piping to exterior water service piping in sizes and locations
indicated for service entrances into building.

B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, strainer, and pressure gage at domestic water-service tie-
in point with the municipality. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in
Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for valves
and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

C. Install water meter complying with municipality regulations or utility company instruction
for the domestic water-service tie-in point.

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings
before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.

D. Joint Construction for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Piping: Make joints according to

AWWA C606. Cut round-bottom grooves in ends of pipe at gasket-seat dimension required
for specified (flexible or rigid) joint. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe
and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves.
Install and tighten housing bolts.

E. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Steel Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606.
Roll groove ends of pipe as specified. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe
and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves.
Install and tighten housing bolts.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type,
and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts
according to ASME B31.9.

G. Joint Construction for Solvent-Cemented Plastic Piping: Clean and dry joining surfaces.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements. Apply primer.

H. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials
of both piping systems.

I. HDPE drainage pipe, Heat-fusion joints: Joint surfaces shall be clean and free from
moisture. All joint surfaces shall be heated to melt temperature and joined. The joint shall be
undisturbed until cool. Joints shall be made in accordance with ASTM D 2657

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - Page 6 of 10

APRILL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.7 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings, nipples or
unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.

3.8 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS

A. Rough-in water piping for water meter installation according to utility company's
requirements. Water meters will be furnished by utility.

B. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility company's requirements.
Water meters will be furnished by utility.

C. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility company's requirements.
Refer to Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water meters.

D. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility company's requirements.
Refer to Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for water meters.

3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving
plumbing fixtures or equipment, and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping
DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller. Use gate or butterfly valves for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch
NPS) and larger.

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment, on each supply to
plumbing fixtures without supply stops, and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for
piping DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller. Use gate or butterfly valves for piping DN65 (2-
1/2-inch NPS) and larger.

C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points
in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.

1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

3.10 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in
Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment":

1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.

2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs
30 m and less.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - Page 7 of 10

APRILL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs
longer than 30 m.
4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight, horizontal
runs longer than 30 m.
5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 30 m or longer.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm minimum rods.

D. Install hangers for plastic piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:

1. DN25 (1-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 900 mm with 10-
mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1500 mm.
2. DN32 to DN50 (1-1/4- to 2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with
10-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.
3. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm
with 13-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.
4. DN100 and DN125 (4- and 5-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm
with 16-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.
5. DN150 (6-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 19-mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.

E. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to ANSI/MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's written instructions.

3.11 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to
join dissimilar piping materials.

B. Connect water distribution piping to service entrance piping at shutoff valve, and extend to
and connect to the following:

1. Booster Systems: Connect cold-water suction and discharge piping.

2. Water Heaters: Connect cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes
indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but
not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
4. Equipment: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping as indicated. Provide shutoff
valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections
DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger.

C. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and
maintenance.

3.12 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and
installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - Page 8 of 10

APRILL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect water distribution piping as follows:

B. Inspect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved
by Engineer.
2. During installation, notify Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in presence of Engineer.

a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by Engineer to observe tests
specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If Engineer finds that piping will not pass test or inspection, make
required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by Engineer.

C. Test water distribution piping as follows:

D. Test service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air
bound and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in all installed piping. If testing is performed in segments,
submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping
tested.
3. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced water piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow it to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

E. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.14 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge all installed piping before using.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - Page 9 of 10

APRILL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by Engineer or, if method is not
prescribed, procedure described in either AWWA C651-05 or AWWA C652-02 or
local code or as described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear
at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least

50 mg/L (50 ppm) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for
24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
200 mg/L (200 ppm) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine is no longer in water
coming from system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Engineer. Repeat procedure if
biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.15 COMMISSIONING

A. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that
piping is full of water.

B. Perform the following steps before putting into operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.

C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not
operate water heaters before filling with water.

D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

E. Energize pumps and verify proper operation.

END OF SECTION 221116

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - Page 10 of 10

APRILL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 11 19

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 DIFINITIONS

A. The followings are the meaning of the main abbreviations in this document:

NSF: National Sanitation Foundation

ANSI: The American National Standards Institute

NSF/ANSI 61: Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects

NSF/ANSI 14: Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials

ASSE: American Sanitary Standard Engineering for Product Performance

1.3 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Water pressure-reducing valves.
4. Strainers.
5. Hose bibs.
6. Drain valves.
7. Water-hammer arresters.
8. Air vents.
9. Flexible connectors.
10. Cleaning hose cabinets
11. Concrete Water Tanks Accessories
12. Indoor Storage Tanks

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.

1. Include diagrams for installation guidance and required accessories.

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM SPECIALTIES 22 11 19 - Page 1 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 14
or equivalent as per local market. Mark certified labels on plastic piping components.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa)
unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers

1. Standard: ASSE 1001.

2. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80), as required to match connected piping.
3. Body: Bronze.
4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
5. Finish: Chrome plated.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers

1. Standard: ASSE 1011.

2. Body: Bronze, non-removable, with manual drain.
3. Outlet Connection: Irrigation-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
4. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated

C. Pressure Vacuum Breakers

1. Standard: ASSE 1020.

2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
3. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle third of flow range.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers

1. Standard: ASSE 1012.

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM SPECIALTIES 22 11 19 - Page 2 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.

3. Body: Bronze.
4. End Connections: Union, solder joint.
5. Finish: Chrome plated

B. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies

1. Standard: ASSE 1015.

2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle third of flow range.
4. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that
complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or that is FDA approved for
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
6. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.
7. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and
outlet.
b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type
with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.

C. Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers

1. Standard: ASSE 1024.

2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
3. Body: Bronze with union inlet.

D. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal
2. Standard: ASSE 1052.
3. Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure.
4. Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20).
5. Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Capacity: At least 3-gpm (0.19-L/s) flow.

E. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits

1. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with
test-procedure instructions.

2.5 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

A. Pressure rating: 1600 kPa or 2500 kPa as per system requirements.

B. Single-seated, for dead end service for 200 to 850 kPa range on low pressure side. Composi-
tion diaphragm and stainless steel springs, bronze body with threaded connections for sizes
15 to 55 mm (1/2 to 2 inch), cast iron or semi-steel body with brass or bronze trimmings and
flanged connections for sizes 15 to 50 mm (2-1/2 to 4 inch).

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM SPECIALTIES 22 11 19 - Page 3 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Operation: Diaphragm and spring to act directly on valve stem. Delivered pressure shall
vary not more than one kPa for each 10 kPa variation on inlet pressure.

D. Setting: Entering water pressure, discharge pressure, capacity, size, and related measure-
ments shall be as shown on the drawings.

E. Connections Valves and Strainers: Install shut off valve on each side of reducing valve and
full sized bypass with shut off valve. Install strainer on inlet side of, and same size as pres-
sure reducing valve. Install pressure gage on low pressure side of line.

F. Application: where pressure exceeds 4500 kPa, pressure reducing valve shall be installed.

2.6 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that
complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-
1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.
5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm).
b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): 0.045 inch (1.14 mm).
c. Strainers NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: 0.10 inch (2.54 mm).

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve

2.7 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

2. Body Material: Bronze.
3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.
4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-joint
inlet.
5. Outlet Connection: threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Isolation: complete with isolating ball valve.
7. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
8. Vacuum Breaker: Integral non-removable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum
breaker complying with ASSE 1011.
9. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
10. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated.
11. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
12. Operation: Wheel handle or operating key.
13. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
14. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

B. As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM SPECIALTIES 22 11 19 - Page 4 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.8 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 300-psig (2040-kPa) minimum CWP.
3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20), or as per design drawings.
4. Body: Copper alloy.
5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

2.9 AIR VENTS

A. As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

B. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents

1. Body: Bronze.
2. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum pressure rating at
140 deg F (60 deg C).
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-

steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa).

2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.
3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

2.11 CLEANING HOSE CABINETS

A. Cleaning hose cabinet Type CHC: Cabinet black steel 1 mm thick with three painting
coating finish, backed enamled of color as per ID requirement, exposed wall hanged with
dimension 600x600 x 300 depth.

B. Hose reel, 15 mm hose, 20 mt long rubber hose, adjustable spray brass nozzle, hose drum.
The cleaning hose shall be provided with isolating ball valve and vacuum breaker,. Drum to
retract hose after use.

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM SPECIALTIES 22 11 19 - Page 5 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.12 CONCRETE WATER TANKS ACCESSORIES

A. General: Concrete water tanks shall be constructed by Civil contractor, and shall be
provided with all necessary piping connections of sizes as shown on the plumbing design
drawings.

B. All piping penetrating the concrete tanks shall be provided by Stainless Steel 316 puddle
flanges, except for pipes above water levels, that only pipes sleeves may be provided. The
puddle flange may be round shape or square shape but shall be not less than 100 mm larger
than the outer diameter all-around the pipe penetrating the tank.

C. Overflow: The overflow for the tank shall consist of an overflow weir and outside drop pipe,
adequately supported. The overflow pipe shall be steel, ASTM A53/A53M-07 or equal, and
shall terminate 300 to 600 mm above grade and shall be fitted with a flapper valve or screen
to prevent ingress of birds and insects.

D. Vent: Vent shall be tank manufacturer's standard type, factory supplied, mushroom vent
with aluminum insect screen. The free area of the vent shall be sized 50 percent in excess of
the inflow rate.

E. Float Valves: The float valves shall be full bore, equilibrium ball type, designed to close
tight against maximum pressure when half submerged, with renewable, synthetic rubber,
valve disc and balancing piston bucket. Float valves to be all bronze construction including
levers and arms, with copper float and suitable for 1034 kPa cold water working pressure.

F. Drain Valve: iron-body, bronze-mounted, non-rising stem gate valve with indicator, suitable
for minimum working pressure of 1034 kPa, clear waterway equal to full nominal diameter,
hand wheel operated, and open by turning counterclockwise.

2.13 INDOOR STORAGE TANKS

A. Type: Type: Hot pressed GRP (glass reinforced plastic) sectional panel, complete with tank
supports, piping and accessories as specified below. All internal metal parts to be
constructed from 304 grade stainless-steel.

B. Construction: Tank to consist to an assembly of rectangular shaped, pressed GRP convex

panels bolted together in an arrangement of external flanges with a special rubber sealant to
ensure watertight joints. Tank to be provided from factory with reinforcing, supports bolts
and washers.

C. Panels: Minimum 6 mm thick GRP tested to BS EN 13280:2001, or equivalent. Panels to

resist pressures of 6 times the working pressure.

D. Components Materials:

1. Joints Sealant: 50 mm synthetic rubber.

2. Joints Bolts and Nuts: Stainless-steel.
3. Reinforcement Roof Support: Stainless-steel.
4. Reinforcement Internal Tie Rod: Stainless-steel.
5. External Reinforcing: Structural steel galvanized.
6. Corner Angle: Hot press GRP.
7. Diagonal Struts: Stainless-steel.

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM SPECIALTIES 22 11 19 - Page 6 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Insulation: when specified, all tanks panel and roof to be factory insulated with 25 mm thick
polyurethane of typical U value of 0.6 W/m2K (required only for potable water).

F. Panels and Tank Accessories: To be shipped adequately properly packed for site assembly
complete with adequate quantities of bolts, nuts, washers, rubber sealant, etc.

G. Tank Top: to be provided with 610 mm round manhole with bolted cover and one 100 mm
diameter uPVC mosquito-proof cowled ventilator.

H. Tank: To be provided with all necessary piping connections of sizes as shown on the shop
Drawings. Pipe connecting panels are to be specially designed at factory for that purpose
and shipped complete with pipe connections.

I. Ladders: 2 stainless-steel ladders are to be provided for each tank both inside and outside
the tank.

J. Tank: To be provided complete with level indicator, ball valve, level switches, flanges, and
bell mouth connection, etc.

K. Tank: To be provided with steel footing channel beams as recommended by tank

manufacturer for size and man shape. Tank to be supported on reinforced concrete plinth
supports running in one direction beneath the tank and extending beyond the edge of the
tank on either side.

L. Tank Accessories:

1. A. Overflow: The overflow for the tank shall consist of an overflow weir and outside
drop pipe, adequately supported. The overflow pipe shall be steel, ASTM A53/A53M
or equal, and shall terminate 300 to 600 mm above grade and shall be fitted with a
flapper valve or screen to prevent ingress of birds and insects.
2. Vent: Vent shall be tank manufacturer's standard type, factory supplied, mushroom
vent with aluminum bird screen. The free area of the vent shall be sized 50 percent in
excess of the pump-in rate.
3. Float Valves: The float valves shall be full bore, equilibrium ball type, designed to
close tight against maximum pressure when half submerged, with renewable,
synthetic rubber, valve disc and balancing piston bucket. Float valves to be all bronze
construction including levers and arms, with copper float and suitable for 517 kPa
minimum cold water working pressure.
4. Altitude Valve: The supply to the tank shall be controlled by a altitude valve,
automatic in operation and accurately set to prevent overflow. The valve shall be
cushioned when opening and closing to prevent water hammer or shock. Valves shall
be provided with a travel indicator.
5. Drain Valve: Robust to standard AWWA C500 or equivalent, iron-body, bronze-
mounted, non-rising stem with indicator, for minimum working pressure of 1034 kPa,
clear waterway equal to full nominal diameter, hand wheel operated, and open by
turning counterclockwise.

M. Tests: After erection, tank to be filled with water to the level of overflow and left to stand
for 72 hours. During this period, no drop in water level will be allowed. If signs of
dampness or traces of leakage are noticed, the Contractor shall repair and re-test the tank to
the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

N. Tank installation shall be certified by the manufacturer’s representative.

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM SPECIALTIES 22 11 19 - Page 7 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

O. Guarantee: Tanks are to be fully guaranteed against manufacturing defects and utility of
substandard material for a period of 10 years.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and
to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction and local codes.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-
gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two
pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached
to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this
application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

B. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

C. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure-reducing valve
solenoid valve and pump.

D. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

E. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor
drain.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water storage tanks.

B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by THE Engineer or, if method is not
prescribed, use procedure described in AWWA C652 or as described below:

1. Purge water storage tanks with potable water.

2. Disinfect tanks by one of the following methods:

a. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 mg/L (50 ppm) of
chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours.

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM SPECIALTIES 22 11 19 - Page 8 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

b. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 mg/L (200 ppm) of
chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for three hours.

3. Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine is
not present in water coming from tank.
4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Engineer. Repeat procedure if biological
examination shows evidence of contamination.

3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate

or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Pressure vacuum breakers.

2. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers.
3. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.
4. Double-check, backflow-prevention assemblies.
5. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers.
6. Reduced-pressure-detector, backflow-preventer assemblies.
7. Double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventers.
8. Calibrated balancing valves.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate

safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition
to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker double-check, backflow-prevention assembly

according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

END OF SECTION 221119

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM SPECIALTIES 22 11 19 - Page 9 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 221123

DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged booster pumps to maintain pressure in the building potable-
water distribution systems.

1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. VSD package booster pumps are installed in main pump room at level B6, to supply
domestic water to all areas in the building.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models,
furnished specialties, and accessories for each type and size of packaged booster pump
indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for packaged booster pumps. Include setting
drawings with templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and
other anchorages.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Operating And Maintenance Data: For each packaged booster pump to include in
maintenance manuals including wiring diagrams, technical data sheets and information for
ordering replaceable parts.

1. Include complete connection which indicate all components of the system.

2. Include complete diagrams of the internal wiring for each item of equipment.
3. Diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, operation and
maintenance.

D. Certificate of shop test for domestic water booster system. Provide certified performance
curves.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 22 11 23 - Page 1 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of packaged booster pumps through one source from
a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional

requirements of packaged booster pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and
models selected. Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may
be considered.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70 - 2007, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.

D. Booster pumps shall be listed and labeled as packaged pumping systems by testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Comply with Green Building regulation and specification of local authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions for handling.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

1. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender, itemized schedules of spare parts to
be provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the
manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2.2 PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS, GENERAL

A. Description: Factory-assembled, pre-wired and pre-tested, packaged booster multi-pump

system units; complying with UL 778; suitable for potable-water service including number
of pumps as shown on the drawings and schedules, isolating valves, pressure regulating
valves, check valves, vibration pads, emergency switches, flow switches, pressure switches,
power and control panels, suction and discharge manifolds, and accessories. All
components shall be furnished by a single manufacturer and the system shall be the standard
cataloged product of the manufacturer. All components shall be factory installed on a
common structural steel skid and shall be completely tested in the factory before shipment.

B. Motors: Comply with requirements in Section "Common Motor Requirements for

Plumbing Equipment."

DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 22 11 23 - Page 2 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
loads will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

C. The internal surface of the volute shall be coated with 300 micron fusion bonded epoxy
coating applied at the factory.

D. Pumps dedicated for Domestic Water System shall have Stainless-steel construction for all
parts and components in contact with water.

E. Materials:
1. Pump parts in contact with water are made of stainless steel EN DIN 1.4301.
2. Pump bases and heads are of either cast iron/stainless steel, but other parts that are in
contact with water are made of stainless steel EN DIN 1.4301.
3. Two manifolds of stainless steel EN DIN 1.4571.

F. Piping Option: Piping, including valves and other components, may have grooved ends for
grooved joints.

G. Hydropneumatic Tank: Precharged, diaphragm or bladder tank made of materials complying

with NSF 61.

H. Sensors: Pressure switches.

I. Control Panel: Factory installed in a steel cabinet connected as an integral part of booster
pump; automatic for multiple-pumps, variable-speed operation, with load control and
protection functions, IP54, Automatic, with load control and protection functions. Comply
with NEMA ICS 2 -2000(R2005) and UL 508-1999 (R2002).

1. Mounting and Wiring: Factory installed and connected as an integral part of unit.
2. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6-1993(R2006), Type 12.
3. Motor Controller: Full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with undervoltage
release feature, motor-circuit-protector-type disconnect, and short-circuit protective
device.

a. Control Voltage: / 220-V ac, using integral control power transformer.

4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.

5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of control panel, plus
pilot device for automatic control.
6. Alternating Starter: Switches the operation of pumps from lead to lag and vice versa.
7. Instrumentation: Unit suction and discharge pressure gages.
8. Alarm Signal Device: Sounds alarm when backup pumps are operating.
9. Light: Running light for pump.

J. Control Panel for variable-speed booster pumps: Factory installed and connected as an
integral part of booster pump; automatic for multiple-pump, variable-speed operation, with
load control and protection functions:

1. Control Logic: Solid-state system with transducers, programmable microprocessor,

VFC, and other devices in controller. Install VFC for pump motors larger than 25 hp
in separate panel; same type as motor control panel enclosure.
2. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, variable-frequency, solid-state type.

a. Control Voltage: 220-V ac, with integral control-power transformer.

3. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.

DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 22 11 23 - Page 3 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

4. VFC: Voltage-source, pulse-width, modulating-frequency converter for each pump.

5. Manual Bypass: Magnetic contactor arranged to transfer to constant-speed operation
upon VFC failure.
6. Instrumentation: Suction and discharge pressure gages.
7. Lights: Running light for each pump.
8. Alarm Signal Device: Sounds alarm when backup pumps are operating.
9. Thermal-bleed cutoff.
10. Low-suction-pressure, or, water-storage-tank, low-level cutout.
11. High-discharge-pressure cutout.
12. Building Automation System Interface: Provide auxiliary contacts for interface to
building automation system as required by BMS. Refer BMS design. Include
minimum following:

a. On-off status of each pump.

b. Alarm status.

K. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.

L. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembling and testing. Protect
flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles.

2.3 VARIABLE-SPEED-DRIVE, PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

A. Description: Multiplex packaged unit, with pumps, piping, valves, sensors, controls, and
adjustable-speed-drive units for variable-speed operation.

1. Pressure Rating: Minimum 2380 kPa (350 psig), and as required to suit system
pressure.
2. Pump Arrangement: Duplex, with two equal-size pumps.
3. Pump Arrangement: Triplex, with three equal-size pumps.
4. Pumps: Comply with NSI/HI 1.1‐1.2, ANSI/HI 9.8, ANSI/HI 1.3, ANSI/HI 1.4,
"Centrifugal Pumps," for close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.

a. Construction: Single stage, radially split, bronze or stainless steel fitted,

Vertical mounted.
b. Impeller: ASTM B584‐14, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced,
closed, overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.

5. Variable-Speed-Drive Controllers: Adjustable-speed-drive unit for each pump.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water distribution piping to verify actual locations of connections

before packaged booster pump installation.

3.2 CONCRETE

DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 22 11 23 - Page 4 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for packaged booster
pumps. Refer to Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete".

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install packaged booster pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions and with
access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and
accessories.

B. Support packaged booster pumps using the following vibration-control devices, unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Section "Vibration Controls for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install units with total of 7.5 hp or less, with rubber-isolator mount or spring-isolator
vibration isolators.
2. Install units with total of more than 7.5 hp, with concrete-filled, inertia-base vibration
isolation bases and spring-isolator vibration isolators.

C. Support connected piping so weight of water distribution piping is not supported by

packaged booster pumps.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section "Domestic Water Piping."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific
connection requirements:

1. Connect water distribution piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe equal
to or greater than size of unit suction and discharge headers.
2. Install flexible pipe connectors on piping connections to unit suction and discharge
headers. Install flexible pipe connectors same size as piping. Refer to Section
"Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for flexible pipe connectors.
3. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to unit suction and discharge headers.
Install valves same size as unit suction and discharge headers. Refer to Section
"General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves.

B. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.

C. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.

D. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in

Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 22 11 23 - Page 5 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections,
and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform visual and mechanical inspection.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge booster pump and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start booster pumps to
confirm proper motor rotation and booster-pump operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.

C. Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Check suction piping connections for tightness.

B. Controls: Set for automatic starting, stopping, sequential, and alarm operations.

C. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:

1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquids
is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or drags,
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
3. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.

D. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:

1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pumps for
operation.
2. Open valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
3. Start motors.
4. Open discharge valves slowly.
5. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
6. Close valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent overheating.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged booster pump units.

1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.

DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 22 11 23 - Page 6 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

END OF SECTION 221123

DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 22 11 23 - Page 7 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 11 29

MAKE-UP WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply
to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Vertical, in-line centrifugal pumps.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, initial and final impeller dimensions, accessories for
each type of product indicated and all manufacturer's part numbers and spare parts list.
Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Units presented in equipment performance shall be similar to those mentioned in Part 4.

C. Certified factory test procedures reports indicating compliance with specified performance
requirements.

D. Coordination Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with
templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in normal operation, and
maintenance manuals.

F. Warranties: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations, remedies,

limitations, and exclusions.

G. Compliance statement clause by clause full and detailed compliance statement of the
specification shall be submitted where a clear compliance is indicated as follows:
a. “Yes” interprets full unconditional compliance.
b. “No” interprets a deviation (to be clearly indicated as remark or note in the dedicated
column).
c. “Not Applicable” where the case is not available at the manufacturer.
It should be noted that other comments like “noted” or “partial compliance” are
unacceptable and will be interpreted as a non-compliance.

MAKE-UP WATER PUMPS 22 11 29 - Page 1 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product: Provide drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of pumps
and are based on the specific system indicated.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges,
pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

B. Store pumps in dry location.

C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.

D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.

E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

1.6 REFERENCES AND APPLICABLE CODES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

B. ANSI B16.1: Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.

C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

E. Hydraulic Institute Standards.

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

G. UL778: Motor Operated Water Pumps for construction requirements.

1.7 PUMP DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Select pump and impeller to meet scheduled requirements.

B. Select pump casing to accept impeller capable of 10 percent increase in head.

C. Select pump to operate slightly above midpoint of pump curve or at the highest efficiency
point on the curve.

D. Trim impeller to meet specified operating conditions, if needed, in Factory.

E. Design and fabricate pump to Hydraulic Institute Standards.

F. Pump shall be factory built and tested.

MAKE-UP WATER PUMPS 22 11 29 - Page 2 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

G. Minimum pump efficiency shall be not less than 80 %.

MAKE-UP WATER PUMPS 22 11 29 - Page 3 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.8 MOTOR DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Design standard

1. European made motors shall conform to IEC requirements;

2. American made motors shall conform to NEMA requirements.

B. Ratings and Service factor:

1. IEC motors: There must be a margin of not less than 15% between the maximum
shaft (absorbed) power of the driven machinery and the motor kW rating.

2. NEMA motors: minimum 1.15.

C. Nominal efficiency:

1. IEC motors: Motor shall be “EFF1” as per CEMEP classification scheme;

2. NEMA motors: efficiency shall equal or exceed NEMA “Premium” efficiency levels;

D. Speed: Synchronous maximum speed of 1500 rpm.

E. Enclosure:

1. IEC motors: IP55/IC411;

2. NEMA motors: Totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC).

F. Insulation: Limited to 155 deg. C (Class F).

G. Temperature rise: Limited to 80 deg. C (Class B)

H. Ambient Temperature: Motor shall be de-rated for 50 Deg. C ambient temperatures.

I. Nameplate:

1. Permanently stamped as per requirements of NEMA or IEC

2. Shall indicate data at the rated power and temperature (not motor nominal rating).

J. Select motor to be non-overloading throughout entire pump curve.

1.9 FACTORY PERFORMANCE QUARANTEE

A. Factory Performance Test:

1. The pumps manufacturer shall be responsible for conducting pump witness of

performance test to validate the head-flow curves, pump efficiency curve, motor
efficiency curve, NPSHr curve and vibration of the pump motor assembly.
2. The pump factory test shall be performed in the presence of Owner, Project
Management and Consultant Representatives and all the expenses including

MAKE-UP WATER PUMPS 22 11 29 - Page 4 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

transportation, business class airfare, hotel accommodation…etc shall be borne by the

Contactor and included in the pump cost.
3. The calibration of all instrumentation shall be traceable to the National Institute of
Standards and Technology (NIST) or equivalent.
4. A test method statement shall be forwarded to the Engineer and approval shall be
granted one month prior the test.
5. A certified test report of all data and test result shall be forwarded to the Engineer for
acceptance prior shipping. The report shall include calibration curves, test results,
pump curves as tested and information sheets for all instrumentation.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements.

B. Provide the required information about vibration isolation pads with suitable size and
thickness under pipe supports of each pump set.

C. Provide information about pumps supports and connected piping as per manufacturer
recommendations.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal for a pump.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VERTICAL, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, split coupled vertical in-line pump;
single stage, single or double suction type, with pump characteristics which provide rising
heads to shut off, with rigid spacer type coupling, designed for installation with pump and
motor shafts mounted vertically. Rate pump for 1020/2040 kPa (150/300 PSI) minimum
working pressure as per equipment schedules and a continuous water temperature of 45
deg C minimum.

B. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: radially split volute cast iron, with flanged suction and discharge
connections, with separate drilled and tapped openings for gauges, flush and drain
connections, complete with supportive ribs casted integral with the volute.

2. Casing gasket: confined casing gasket to meet stringent industrial temperature and
pressure applications.

3. Impeller: bronze; fully enclosed type, statically and dynamically balanced. If

required, trim impeller in Factory to match specified performance, with guaranteed
certificate from the manufacturer for the new trimmed impeller.

MAKE-UP WATER PUMPS 22 11 29 - Page 5 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

4. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.

5. Mechanical Seal: accessible and easily replaceable stainless steel, outside multi-
spring balanced type, covered by additional secondary seal, and equipped with
stainless steel gland plate with stainless steel trim, all are secured inside a coupling
guard fully encloses access openings.

6. Provide factory installed flush line with manual vent.

7. Pump Bearings: Oil lubricated; bronze-journal or thrust type.

C. Shaft Coupling: rigid spacer type of high tensile alloy with a lower seal chamber throttle
bushing.

D. Coupling shall be split to allow removal from pump and motor shafts, to be able to replace
all mechanical seal components without removing or dismantling pump or motor

E. Motor: constant speed, grease-lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; rigidly
mounted to pump casing with lifting eye and supporting lugs in motor enclosure.

F. Seal Flush Line Fittings: Supply in the flush line to the mechanical seal a 50 micron
cartridge filter and sight flow indicator, at the working pressure. Filters shall be changed, by
the contractor, after system is flushed and on a regular basis until turned over to the owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment supports for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 STARTUP SERVICE

A. The contractor in cooperation with the supplier shall perform startup service:

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers on suction piping.
4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
6. Start motor.
7. Open discharge valve slowly.

MAKE-UP WATER PUMPS 22 11 29 - Page 6 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain pumps.

END OF SECTION 232123

MAKE-UP WATER PUMPS 22 11 29 - Page 7 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 13 16

PLUMBING WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sanitary waste and soil drainage, condensate drainage, vent piping, and storm
drainage piping inside building and to locations indicated.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Sewerage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys sanitary sewage from
building.

B. Drainage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys storm drainage from
building.

C. Service Entrance Piping: Drainage piping at entry into building between outside building sewer
piping and inside drainage piping.

D. Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys waste water and vapors from
fixtures and equipment throughout the building.

E. Force-Main Piping: Drainage piping, under pressure.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and other piping materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene polymer, rubber.

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
3. UPVC: Un-plasticized Poly Vinyl Chloride.
4. PP: Polypropylene.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated or required to suit systems’
operating pressures:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 60 kPa (20-foot head of water).

2. Storm Drainage Systems: 60 kPa (20-foot head of water).
3. Sewage, Force-Main Piping Systems: 690 kPa (100 psig).

PLUMBING WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 13 16 - Page 1 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, storm and vent piping and support and installation shall be
capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ECP201, ASCE 7,
"Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."

C. Rain water Design intensity: 38 mm/hr

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, in Part3 of this Section.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.

B. Comply with ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and
installation.

C. Comply with International Plumbing Codes & Standards such as Uniform Plumbing Code "UPC"
and American Society of Plumbing Engineers "ASPE" data books.

D. Comply with Egyptian local code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES AND TUBES

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.

2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.

B. UPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2665, ASTM D1785 or DIN 8061/8062.

C. UPVC Pipe Fittings: ASTM 3034/3311, ASTM 2466/2467 or BS EN 1401.

D. PP Polypropylene Mineral Reinforced: DIN EN 12056 and DIN 1986‐100, complete with push fit
socket and EPDM sealing ring.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.

B. Adhesive primer for UPVC fittings: ASTM F 656.

C. Solvent cement for UPVC fittings: ASTM D 2564.

PLUMBING WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 13 16 - Page 2 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at
least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.

E. Flexible, Transition Couplings for Underground, Non-pressure Piping: ASTM C1173 with
elastomeric sleeve. Include ends same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-resistant
metal band on each end.

1. Sleeve Type for Plain-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless-steel band
assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of piping to be joined. Include the
following:

a. Sleeves for Plastic Piping: ASTM F477 elastomeric seal.

b. Sleeves for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.
c. Bands: Stainless steel, one at each pipe insert.

2. Gasket Type for Dissimilar-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric compression gasket, made to
match inside diameter of pipe or hub, and outside diameter of adjoining pipe. Include the
following:

a. Gaskets for Plastic Piping: ASTM F477 elastomeric seal.

b. Gaskets for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.

F. PP Polypropylene Mineral Reinforced: hub and spigot with push fir sockets.

2.4 VALVES

A. Refer to Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves. Use valves
specified for "Domestic Water Systems" applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Comply with requirements of Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping only, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping (except waste from kitchens): Use the following:

1. UPVC plastic pipes to DIN 8061/8062 – PN6, with socket fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints.
Or:
2. UPVC plastic pipes DWV to ASTM D2665, with socket fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints.

D. Aboveground Waste piping from Kitchens up to Grease Interceptor: Use the followings:

PLUMBING WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 13 16 - Page 3 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Polypropylene Mineral fibers, PP socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints

E. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:

1. Polypropylene Mineral fibers, PP socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

Or:
2. UPVC plastic pipe to DIN 8061/8062 - PN16, with socket fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints.
Or:
3. UPVC plastic pipes to ASTM D1785 - Schedule 80, with socket fittings, and solvent-
cemented joints.

F. Aboveground, Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following:

1. UPVC plastic pipes to DIN 8061/8062 – PN6, with socket fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints.
Or:
2. UPVC plastic pipes DWV to ASTM D2665, with socket fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints.

G. Underground, Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following:

1. UPVC plastic pipes to DIN 8061/8062 – PN10, with socket fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints.
Or:
2. UPVC plastic pipes to ASTM D1785 - Schedule 40, with socket fittings, and solvent-
cemented joints.

H. Sewage Force Mains: Use the following:

1. UPVC plastic pipes to DIN 8061/8062 – PN10, with socket fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints.
Or:
2. UPVC plastic pipes to ASTM D1785 - Schedule 40, with socket fittings, and solvent-
cemented joints.

I. Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Piping:

1. From air handling units (chilled water coil): Galvanized steel ASTM A53 Type E Schedule 10
or 40.
2. From suspended AC units: similar to above ground waste drainage application.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

PLUMBING WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 13 16 - Page 4 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices
specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."

K. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for
sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

3.5 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in sizes and locations
indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at
connections of building sanitary drains with building sanitary sewers.

B. Extend building storm drain piping and connect to storm sewer piping in sizes and locations
indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at
connections of building storm drains and building storm sewers.

C. Extend building sanitary drain, force-main piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in size and
location indicated for service entrance into building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or
equivalent, inside building.

D. Extend building storm drain, force-main piping and connect to storm sewer piping in size and
location indicated for service entrance into building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or
equivalent, inside building.

E. Force-Main, Service Entrance Piping: Comply with ANSI/AWWA C600. Install buried piping
inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sewer piping outside
building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at
vertical and horizontal offsets.

1. Encase piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A674 or ANSI/AWWA

C105/A21.5.

PLUMBING WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 13 16 - Page 5 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.6 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and
long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if
change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-
bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.
Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not make change in direction of
flow greater than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if different sizes
of piping are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

B. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and
alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.
Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,
cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as
completed.

C. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Sanitary Building Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN80 (3-inch
NPS) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN100 (4-inch NPS)
and larger.
2. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Storm Building Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
4. Horizontal, Storm Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
5. Vent Piping: 0.5 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
6. Condensate drain pipes: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.

D. Install force mains at elevations indicated.

E. Install engineered, sanitary drainage and vent systems in locations indicated and as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Install engineered, controlled-flow, storm drainage systems in locations indicated. Comply with
standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Provide concrete protection for PVC pipes installed at depth 1.2 m or less.

3.7 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. UPVC Piping Joints: Join drainage piping according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D2665
Appendixes.

B. Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in ASTM D402
for safe handling during joining of plastic pipe and fittings.

3.8 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each submersible pump discharge and where indicated.
Use gate or ball valves for piping DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller. Use gate or butterfly valves
for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger.

B. Check Valves: Install non-slam type, swing check valve on each pump discharge, downstream
from shutoff valve.

PLUMBING WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 13 16 - Page 6 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.9 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements of Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following:

1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.

2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 30 m
and less.
3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer
than 30 m.
4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight, horizontal runs
longer than 30 m.
5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 30 m or longer. Support
pipe rolls on trapeze.
6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting, valve, and
coupling.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for plastic piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:

1. DN40 and DN50 (1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with
10-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
2. DN100 and DN125 (4- and 5-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 16-
mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
3. DN150 (6-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 19-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
4. DN200 t hr ough DN300 ( 8- t hr ough 12-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200
mm with 22-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.

3.10 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior sewerage and drainage piping. Use transition fitting to
join dissimilar piping materials.

B. Connect drainage piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but
not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code.
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for
each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS)
and larger.

C. Connect force-main piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the following:

PLUMBING WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 13 16 - Page 7 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Sump Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sump-pump discharge.

2. Sewage Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sewage-pump discharge.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of
equipment.

3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste, vent and storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect drainage and vent piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
Engineer.
2. During installation, notify Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in presence of Engineer.

a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by Engineer to observe tests specified
below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Re-inspection: If Engineer finds that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required
corrections and arrange for re-inspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by Engineer.

B. Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of Engineer or, in absence of such
procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each
test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved.
3. Roughing-In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to
point of overflow, but not less than 3.m of head. Water level must not drop from 15
minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack
openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping
system equal to pressure of 250 Pa (1-inch wg). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of
water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

PLUMBING WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 13 16 - Page 8 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Test force-main piping according to procedures of Engineer or, in absence of such procedures, as
follows:

1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed
before it has been tested and approved.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source
and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be
repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.13 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed UPVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of water- based
latex paint.

END OF SECTION 221316

PLUMBING WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 13 16 - Page 9 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 13 19

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Backwater valves.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Floor drains.
4. Roof Drain
5. Side Roof drain
6. Trench drains.
7. Garage drains.
8. Air-admittance valves.
9. Roof flashing assemblies.
10. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
11. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
12. Flashing materials.
13. Oil or Grease interceptors.
14. Individual Grease Trap
15. Inspection chambers.
16. Gully traps
17. Sedimentation trap
18. Slowdown chamber

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

B. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

C. UPVC: Un-plasticized Poly Vinyl Chloride

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and accessories for the following:

1. Oil or Grease interceptors.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - Page 1 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that interceptors, relevant

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit
will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKWATER VALVES

A. Drain-Outlet Backwater Valves

1. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet.
3. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drain.
4. Check Valve: Removable ball float.
5. Inlet: Threaded.
6. Outlet: Threaded or spigot.

B. Horizontal, Plastic Backwater Valves

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - Page 2 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2. Size: Same as connected piping.
3. Body: PVC.
4. Cover: Same material as body with threaded access to check valve.
5. Check Valve: Removable swing check.
6. End Connections: Socket type.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Plastic Floor Cleanouts:

1. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2. Size: Same as connected branch.
3. Body: PVC/PP.
4. Closure Plug: PVC/PP.
5. Riser: Drainage pipe fitting and riser to clean out of same material as drainage piping.

B. Metal Floor Cleanouts (In car park):

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for heavy-duty, adjustable housing cleanout.

2. Size: Same as connected branch.
3. Type: Heavy-duty, adjustable housing.
4. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
5. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet Connection: Spigot.
7. Closure: Cast-iron plug.
8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set-screws or other device.
9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Painted cast iron as per Arch/ID.
10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round or Square as per Arch/ID.
11. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to clean out.

C. Wall Cleanouts:

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.

2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
3. Body: PVC, ABS, Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match
connected piping.
4. Closure: Countersunk, raised-head, drilled-and-threaded brass or cast-iron plug.
5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.
7. Wall Access: Round or Square, nickel-bronze or stainless-steel wall-installation frame and
cover.

2.3 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Plastic Floor Drains FD-1: Constructed of uPVC body with Integral deep trap seal (50 mm) with
pipe connection inlet of 50 mm and 75 mm pipe outlet. The cover plate and strainer shall be of
stainless steel as approved by the Interior Designer and Engineer

B. Floor Drains FD-2: 150 mm round strainer with 178 mm round nickel bronze detachable funnel, as
manufactured by Zurn No. Z-415, Z-414 or Josam No. 30000-E2 or approved equal

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - Page 3 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.4 ROOF DRAINS

A. Roof Drain RD-1: Elevated cast iron dome with epoxy-coated cast iron body with membrane
flashing clamp, gravel guard and perforated stainless steel extension. ZURN Model Z-
107Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

B. Roof Drain RD-2: Parapet Angle Roof Drain as per ZURN MODEL Z-187 Parapet angle epoxy
coated cast iron body with reversible back or bottom outlet. Oblique grate with 90 degrees or 45
degrees combination frame and membrane flashing clamp

2.5 TRENCH DRAINS

A. Trench Drains TD:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.

2. Material: Ductile or gray iron.
3. Clamping Device: Required.
4. Outlet: Bottom or Side
5. Grate Material: Ductile iron, gray iron or stainless steel,
6. Grate Finish: Painted,
7. Dimensions of Frame and Grate: As shown on drawings,
8. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty
9. Trap: built-in or by piping,
10. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap

2.6 GARAGE DRAINS

A. Garage Drain GD

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for parking garage drains.

2. Heavy duty suitable for car loading, coated cast iron,
3. Bottom outlet,
4. Seepage pan and combination flashing clamp and frame for heavy duty, deep flange slotted
grate.
5. Trap: by piping,
6. Grate finish: Painted as per Arch/ID.

2.7 AIR-ADMITTANCE VALVES

A. Fixture Air-Admittance Valves:

1. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2. Standard: ASSE 1051, Type A for single fixture or Type B for branch piping.
3. Housing: Plastic.
4. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm.
5. Size: Same as connected fixture or branch vent piping.

B. Stack Air-Admittance Valves:

1. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2. As per approved vendor list or approved equal. Standard: ASSE 1050 for vent stacks.
3. Housing: Plastic.
4. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - Page 4 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

5. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

C. Wall Box :

1. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2. Description: White plastic housing with white plastic grille (Color to be approved by the
Architect), made for recessed installation. Include bottom pipe connection and space to
contain one air-admittance valve.
3. Size: About 9 inches wide by 8 inches high by 4 inches deep (230 mm wide by 200 mm
high by 100 mm deep).

2.8 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:

1. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 20-kg/sq. m, 1.6- mm thick, lead flashing collar
and skirt extending at least 6 inches (150 mm) from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot
reinforcement and counter flashing fitting.

1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

2.9 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:

1. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal

2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene
O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap
for plug.
6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-
iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required,
increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping [with increaser fitting of size indicated].

B. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping
and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - Page 5 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

a. NPS 2 (DN 50): 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum water seal.

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 5-inch- (125-mm-) minimum water seal.

C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet.

D. Air-Gap Fittings :

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between
installed inlet and outlet piping.
2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.
3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.
4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.
5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect
waste piping.

E. Sleeve Flashing Device :

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for
pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of
fitting that will extend [1 inch (25 mm)] above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe
extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.
2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

F. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating

roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

G. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include
vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

H. Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4.

2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.
3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.
4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.

2.11 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - Page 6 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless
otherwise indicated:

1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness).

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft. (2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm thickness).

C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch
(1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip
galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-mm)
minimum thickness.

E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

2.12 OIL OR GREASE INTERCEPTORS

A. Oil or Grease Interceptors:

1. Type: Factory or site-fabricated interceptor for separating and removing oil from
wastewater.
2. Body Material: Cast iron, or steel.
3. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
4. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
5. End Connections: Flanged, Hub or Threaded.
6. Cleanout: Integral
7. Mounting: Inside a concrete pit. The pit cover is recessed with floor, with a heavy duty access
cover on runway, or medium duty access cover elsewhere.

2.13 INDIVIDUAL GREASE TRAP

1. Material: High quality durable plastic, with wall thickness 1/4".

2. Capacity: 5 gpm (10 lb) for one bowl sink, and 10 gpm (20 lb) for double bowl sinks.
3. Temperature resistant up to 100 Deg. C
4. Dimensions: suitable for fitting under sink.
5. Connection size: 2" thread, side connection.
6. Extras: Comfortable handles, durable lid and latches and high quality rubber seal.
7. Flow control device: option.

2.14 INSPECTION CHAMBERS:

A. Construction: Reinforced concrete.

B. Access: minimum 600 mm width square or rectangular opening, as shown on drawings, in top with
recess to accommodate cast iron cover and frame.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - Page 7 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Inspection Chambers covers and Frames to BS 497, Grade B, heavy duty cast iron, solid, with
square/rectangle frame and square/rectangle cover of width and thickness that fit recesses in frame
section, coated at factory with tar or bitumen base composition.

D. Covers are to fit frames. Replace if found to rattle under traffic. Plugging, burning in or filling to
obtain tight covers will not be allowed.

E. Inspection chambers- Covers and frames recommended manufacturers As per approved vendor list
or approved equal

F. Floors: form by hand with cement mortar to size and shape of sewer. Changes in sewer size to be
gradual and even. Floors to have gradual slope from side walls to central channel. Half pipe inverts
may be used in straight through manholes.

G. Inlets and Outlet: difference in elevation between the lowest inlet and outlet is to be 50 mm.

H. Walls: plaster internally with two coats cement and sand (1:3) to total thickness of 15 mm.

I. Steps: galvanized pipe steps set in place during construction, properly embedded, beginning 600 mm
above bottom and spaced at approximately 350 mm centers.

J. Leaks: caulk and repair if approved or remove entire work and rebuild at no extra cost.

K. Groundwater Level: keep below bottom of inspection chamber until concrete has obtained adequate
set.

2.15 GULLY TRAP

A. Cast in place gully trap constructed of brick masonry walls of 115 mm thick resting on 100 mm
thick concrete. Inside and outside face of masonry walls shall be plastered with cement mortar with
cement finish.

B. Size: 300 mm x 300 mm x 600 mm minimum depth (internal), actual depth shall be identified as per
local code as per the coordination to maintain the required slope of connected waste pipes.

C. Cover: heavy duty cast iron grating, and shall be approved by the Engineer.

D. Trap water seal: not less than 100 mm.

2.16 SEDIMENTATION TRAP

A. Type: Factory or site fabricated solid interceptor made for removing and retaining solids from
wastewater.

B. Body Material: Cast iron or steel.

C. Interior Separation Device: Baffles.

D. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel.

E. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel.

F. Cover: Heavy duty access cover on runway, or medium duty access cover elsewhere.

G. Mounting: Recessed, flush with floor unless otherwise indicated in design.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - Page 8 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.17 SLOWDOWN CHAMBER

A. Cast-in-Place Concrete chambers: Construct of reinforced-concrete bottom, walls, and top; designed
according to ASTM C 890 for A-16, heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and
dimensions as indicated and as per local code.

B. Grade Rings: Include two or three brick or reinforced-concrete rings, of 150 to 225 mm total
thickness, that match 610 mm diameter frame and cover.

C. Chamber Frames and Covers: Heavy duty on roads, and Light duty for side walk.

2.18 MOTORS

A. General requirements for motors are specified in Section "Common Motor Requirements for
Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will
not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are
specified in Division 26 Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck
plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove
valve cover for servicing.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger
drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller and
100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated,
with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set
with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less
than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - Page 9 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope.

c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not
greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.

F. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Assemble and install ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage systems according to
ASME A112.3.1. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with surface.

H. Assemble non-ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage system components according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with
adjacent surface.

I. Assemble plastic channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with adjacent surface.

J. Install fixture air-admittance valves on fixture drain piping.

K. Install stack air-admittance valves at top of stack vent and vent stack piping.

L. Install air-admittance-valve wall boxes recessed in wall.

M. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

N. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

O. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic [conductors] [and] [stacks] at floor

penetrations.

P. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch (25 mm) above floor.

Q. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

R. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer
connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

S. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.

T. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.

U. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

V. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch (25-
mm) clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - Page 10 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

W. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.

X. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch (25-mm)
clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

Y. Install oil interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to
authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.

Z. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

AA. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to drainage network.

D. Ground equipment according to Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm)
thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch
(1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and
roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches (250
mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - Page 11 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 WATER TANK CLEANING AND DISINFECTION

A. Clean and disinfect water storage tanks.

B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by Engineer or, if method is not prescribed, use
procedure described in AWWA C652-02 or equivalent in local code or as described below:

1. Purge water storage tanks with potable water.

2. Disinfect tanks by one of the following methods:

a. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 mg/L (50 ppm) of
chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 mg/L (200 ppm) of
chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for three hours.

3. Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine is not
present in water coming from tank.
4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Engineer. Repeat procedure if biological
examination shows evidence of contamination.

C. Prepare written reports for purging and disinfecting activities.

3.5 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign
on or near each of the following:

1. Oil or Grease interceptors.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and
emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying
unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field-assembled interceptors devices and their installation, including piping and electrical
connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - Page 12 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to
prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain interceptors devices.

END OF SECTION 221319

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - Page 13 of 13

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 14 29

SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes submersible pumps for the building waste drainage systems, which
shall be installed in concrete pit in B4 & B5, in addition to packaged lifting station pumps
that will be supplied with pumps, container…etc. that will be installed inside a room in B3.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include performance curves, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type and size of pump indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps. Include setting drawings with
templates, directions for installing foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Maintenance Data: For each type and size of pump specified to include in maintenance
manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional

requirements of pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models selected.
Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions for handling.

SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 22 14 29 - Page 1 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, as per approved vendor

list.

2.2 SUMP PUMPS, GENERAL

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction sump

pump units complying with UL 778. Include motor, operating controls, and construction for
permanent installation.

B. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available
only with flanged-end discharge pipe may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.

C. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.

D. Motors: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, and non-overloading through
full range of pump performance curves.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.

F. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembling and testing. Protect
flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

2.3 WET-PIT-MOUNTED, VERTICAL SUMP PUMPS

A. Description: Vertical, separately coupled, suspended sump pump complying with HI 1.1-
1.5 for wet-pit-volute sump pumps.

1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.

2. Casing: Cast iron, with cast-iron inlet strainer.
3. Impeller: ASTM A 48, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically and dynamically
balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft,
and secured by locking cap screw.
4. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, open or
semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by
locking cap screw.
5. Impeller: ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron; statically and
dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction,
keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
6. Pump Shaft and Sleeve Bearings: Stainless-steel shaft with bronze sleeve bearings.
Include oil-lubricated, intermediate sleeve bearings at 1200-mm maximum intervals
if basin depth is greater than 1200 mm, and grease-lubricated, ball-type thrust
bearings.
7. Pump and Motor Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration
and shaft misalignment.
8. Pump Discharge Piping: Manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel or bronze pipe.

SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 22 14 29 - Page 2 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

9. Basin Cover: Multiple sections, steel, and suitable for supporting pumps, motors, and
controls. Refer to "Sump Pump Basins" Article for other requirements.
10. Cover Shaft Seal: Stuffing box, with graphite-impregnated braided-yarn rings and
bronze packing gland.
11. Motor: Mounted vertically on cast-iron pedestal.

a. Thermal Overload Protection: Built into pump motors or starters, as

appropriate, according to size.

12. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1, pedestal-mounted float switch; with floats, float rods,
and rod buttons. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on
successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot handle load.
13. Float-Guide Pipe: Guide pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth
greater than 1500 mm.
14. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric bell;
220-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless battery
operation is indicated.

2.4 SUMP PUMP PITS

A. Description: Cast-in-place concrete with steel curb frames and covers.

B. Curb Frames: Galvanized steel or steel with bitumastic coating of dimension to fit cover.

1. Pattern: Angle-cross-section shape with flat top surface.

2. Pattern: Z-cross-section shape with raised outer rim of height matching cover for
recessed mounting that will have installed cover flush with top of floor slab.

C. Pit Cover: Fabricate with openings with gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access, pumps,
pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.

1. Material: Steel, with bitumastic coating.

2. Reinforcement: Steel or cast-iron reinforcement capable of supporting foot-traffic
areas.

2.5 PACKAGED LIFTING STATION PUMPS

A. Description: Packaged, factory assembled lifting station unit, comply with EN12050-1&-2
standards complete of two pump (one operating and one stand-by), motors, collecting
container, valves, sensors and control panel.

B. Pumps with Vortex impeller fit with waste and soil handling and a maintenance free
submersible motors, oil chamber with physiological harmless oil filling between two shaft
seals. Direction of rotation can be observed from outside over the shaft below the eye bolt.

C. Collecting Container: constructed from corrosion free polyethylene, gas and odour proof,
watertight, and fabricated to provide less sedimentation by chamfered bottom design.

D. Controller with microprocessor is equipped with display for full monitoring possibilities.
The controller provides thermal motor protection and monitoring of pump operation. The
thermal motor protection consists of thermal switches in the winding. The control shall be
applicable to be connected to BMS.

SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 22 14 29 - Page 3 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.6 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

A. Refer to Division 22 Section 220523 for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check
valves. Use valves specified for domestic water, unless otherwise indicated. Include
features and devices indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before pump installation.

3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Civil work specifications.

3.3 CONCRETE

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for sump pumps.

B. Concrete for pits and sumps is specified in Civil works specifications.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance, including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.

D. Wet-Pit-Mounted, Vertical Sump Pumps: Suspend pumps from basin covers. Make direct
connections to storm drainage piping.

E. Submersible Sump Pumps: Set pumps on basin, pit, or sump floor. Make direct
connections to storm drainage piping.

F. Sump Pump Basins: Install basins and connect to storm drainage piping. Brace interior of
basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse
during concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install so top
surface of cover is flush with finished floor.

G. Sump Pump Pits: Construct concrete pits and connect to storm drainage piping. Set basin
cover and fasten to top edge of concrete pit. Install so top surface of cover is flush with
finished floor.

H. Packaged Drainage Pump Units: Install and make direct connections to storm drainage
piping.

SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 22 14 29 - Page 4 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drainage piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section 221316.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific
connection requirements:

1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles, and
connect to storm drainage piping.
2. Install non-slam swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each sump pump
discharge. Include spring-loaded or weighted-lever check valves for piping DN65
(NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
3. Install non-slam swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each automatic,
packaged pump discharge.

B. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.

C. Electrical power and control components, wiring, and connections are specified in
Division 16 Sections.

D. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as required
for system application.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:

1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
3. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump if it is bound or
drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
4. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.

B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as
follows:

1. Start motors.
2. Open discharge valves slowly.
3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sump pump units.

SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 22 14 29 - Page 5 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.

END OF SECTION 221429

SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 22 14 29 - Page 6 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 32 00

DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Freestanding cartridge filters.

2. Multimedia sand filters.

3. Ultra violet sterilizing unit

B. Related Sections:

Division 22 Section 220519 for water meters, thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings.

Division 22 Section 221116 for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings.

Division 22 Section 221119 for water distribution piping specialties.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: freestanding cartridge filters, carbon filters, multimedia sand filters, and
ultra violet sterilizing units shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to structural specifications and design requirements.

1. The term "withstand" means that "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for filters and
separators. Include also rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics,
and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For water filtration equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.

DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 22 32 00 - Page 1 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For freestanding cartridge filters, , multimedia sand

filters, ultra violet sterilizing units, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1 Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2 Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3 Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.

B. Certificates of Shop Inspections and Data Reports: For products required to have ASME
label, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water filtration equipment to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Cartridge-Filter Elements: Elements for cartridge filters equal to 200 percent of amount
installed for each size and media indicated.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of water filtration equipment through one source from
a single manufacturer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for all
components that will be in contact with potable water.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Feed water Analysis: To be carried out by contractor to obtain data for the following

DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 22 32 00 - Page 2 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

characteristics:
1. Alkalinity.
2. Arsenic.
3. Calcium.
4. Chlorine.
5. Color.
6. Hydrogen-Ion Concentration.
7. Hardness.
8. Hydrogen Sulfide.
9. Iron.
10. Lead.
11. Magnesium.
12. Manganese.
13. Potassium.
14. Sand.
15. Silt.
16. Sodium.
17. Total Dissolved Solids.
18. Turbidity.

B. Feedwater temperature and pressure: As applicable to design.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARTRIDGE FILTERS

A. Freestanding Cartridge Filters:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Campbell Manufacturing, Inc.
b. Cycron Corporation.
c. Diamond Water Conditioning; a Griesbach company.
d. Eden Equipment Company.
e. Filter Specialists, Inc.

DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 22 32 00 - Page 3 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

f. Filterspun.
g. Filtrine Manufacturing Co.
h. General Electric Company; GE Water & Process Technologies.
i. Siemens AG Water Technologies.
j. Watts Regulator Company; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
k. Pentair
2. Description: floor-mounted housing with replaceable element(s) for removing
suspended particles from water
a. Housing: Corrosion resistant; designed to separate feedwater from filtrate and to
direct feedwater through water filter element(s); with element support(s) and base,
feet, or skirt.
1) Fabricate supports and base, feet, or skirt and attachment to housing with
reinforcement strong enough to resist filter movement during a seismic event
when filter base is anchored to building structure.
2) Pipe Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to
ASME B1.20.1.
3) Steel Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class
150 flanges according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA
C606. Provide stainless-steel flanges if housing is stainless steel.
4) Plastic Housing Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 150-psig
(1035-kPa) plastic flanges.
b. Element(s): Replaceable; of shape to fit housing.
3. Capacity and Characteristics:
a. Filtrate Design Concentrations: To suit project design requirement
b. Filter Design:
1) Filtration Efficiency: 98 percent retention of suspended particles 5
micrometers and larger from feedwater of listed filtrate design
concentrations.
2) Pressure Drop: Not to exceed 2 psig (14 kPa) at filter design flow rate when
clean and 15 psig (105 kPa) when dirty.
c. Housing:
1) Material: Stainless steel.
2) Pressure Rating: to suit system’s operating pressure.
3) Seals: NBR.
d. Elements:
1) Number Required: As needed for application outlet quality water.
2) Media: Pleated polyester or pleated PP.

2.2 SAND FILTERS

A. Multimedia Sand Filters:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 22 32 00 - Page 4 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
AMTROL, Inc.; WaterSoft Products.
Aquion Water Treatment Products; RainSoft Division.
Aries; a division of ResinTech, Inc.
Columbia Water; a division of R & M Manufacturing, Inc.
CSI Controls.
Culligan International Company.
CUNO Incorporated.
Diamond Water Conditioning; a Griesbach company.
Water & Power Technologies Incorporated.; a Tyco International Ltd. company.
Water King.
Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Alamo Water.
Pentair
2. Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, duplex or triplex as per design requirements,
multimedia, sand-filter system of filter tank(s), media, piping, and controls for removing
sediment particles from water.
a. Tank Construction:
1) Fabricate and label steel filter tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
2) Fabricate supports and base and attachment to tank with reinforcement strong
enough to resist filter movement during a seismic event when filter base is
anchored to building structure.
b. Pipe Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to ASME
B1.20.1.
c. Steel Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150
flanges according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606.
d. Service Valve(s): Diaphragm type hydraulically or pneumatically operated.
e. Piping: Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized cast-iron fittings, and flanged, grooved, or
threaded joints.
f. Safety Valves: Automatic air vent.
g. Controls for Duplex or Triplex Tank System: Automatic, electric time clock for
control of filter system flow and backwash cycles; factory-wired for single, external
electrical connection. System operation shall be continuous with bypass piping and
not more than one tank in backwash cycle at same time
h. Support: Skid mounting.

3. Capacity and Characteristics:

a. Filtrate Design Concentrations: to suit project design requirements
b. Filter Design:
1) Filtration Efficiency: 98 percent removal of suspended particles 20
micrometers and larger from feedwater of listed filtrate design
concentrations.
2) Unit design flow rate range is 25 m3 /hr
c. Media Tanks: Two or Three with manifolded inlet, outlet, and drain piping and
controls.

DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 22 32 00 - Page 5 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

d. Each Media Tank:

1) Material: Carbon steel with NSF 61 lining material.
2) Pressure Rating: to suit system operating pressure.
e. Filter Media:
1) 200mm x 0.45mm - 0.55mm U.C. 1.5 (Filter sand)
2) 450mm x 0.85mm - 0.95 mm U.C. 1.6 (Anthracite).

All filtration media to be shipped in bags on pallets.

All filter media is to be field installed by the Contractor.

2.3 ULTRA VIOLET STERELIZING UNIT:

A. Unit: to include 304 stainless steel sterilizing chambers with removable head. UV lamps to
slide into high purity sleeves. Sleeves are attached to chamber head so they may be easily
removed as a bundle for inspection or cleaning. Flow regulator on discharge line to maintain
flow to ensure an exposure dosage of 30000 micro watt-sec/cm2. Sterilizer to include high
powered ballast, fuse, power safety switch, all inside white enamel housing with stainless steel
cover and electrical cord.

B. Unit: to include UV intensity sensor and meter with safe/unsafe zones to indicate UV below
effective range, mounted on sterilizer housing

C. Unit pressure rating to be 1.5 times the system operating pressure.

D. The unit is suitable to be interfaced and connected to BMS for monitoring.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Before shipping, hydrostatically test multimedia sand filters to minimum of one and one-half
times pressure rating.

B. Prepare test reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of filters.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before equipment installation.

C. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where filters will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING

A. Equipment Mounting: Install filters, except wall-mounted cartridge filters, on concrete

DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 22 32 00 - Page 6 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

bases. Comply with requirements for concrete bases

B. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of concrete base.
1. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
2. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3.3 CARTRIDGE-FILTER INSTALLATION

A. Install cartridge filters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install freestanding cartridge filters on concrete base.

1. Exception: Omit concrete bases if installation directly on floor is indicated.

C. Attach wall brackets for off-floor, wall-mounted, cartridge filter to vertical surface. Attach
housing(s), and base if any, to wall bracket.

D. Install housings for off-floor, in-line, cartridge filters in piping.

E. Install filter elements in cartridges.

F. Install seismic restraints for freestanding cartridge-filter housings and anchor to building
structure.

3.4 SAND-FILTER INSTALLATION

A. Install sand-filter tanks on concrete base.

B. Prepare sand-filter tank distribution system and underbed for filter media and place specified
sand and other media into tanks.

C. Install seismic restraints for sand-filter tanks and accessories and anchor to building structure.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Make piping connections between water filtration equipment and dissimilar-metal water piping
with dielectric fittings. Comply with requirements for dielectric fittings specified in Section
221116.

D. Install shutoff valves on feedwater-inlet and filtrate-outlet piping of each water filtration
equipment and on inlet and outlet headers.
1. Comply with requirements for metal general-duty valves specified in Section 220523.

DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 22 32 00 - Page 7 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Exception: Water filtration equipment with factory-installed shutoff valves at locations

indicated.

E. Install pressure gages on feedwater-inlet and filtrate-outlet piping of each water filtration
equipment. Comply with requirements for pressure gages specified in Section 220519.
1. Exception: Water filtration equipment with factory-installed pressure gages at locations
indicated.

F. Install valved bypass water piping around each water filtration equipment.

G. Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.

D. Domestic water filtration equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service for Water

Filtration Equipment.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. Sample filter filtrate after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total of four
samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance characteristics.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain Water Filtration Equipment.

END OF SECTION 223200

DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 22 32 00 - Page 8 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 22 32 00 - Page 9 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 33 00

ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for water systems:

1. Storage type electric water heaters.

2. Accessories.

1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Residential apartments are served with household electric water heaters. Heaters are
installed either in the laundry rooms or the kitchens.

B. Commercial heaters serving the gym are installed in rooms dedicated for the heaters.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater. Include rated capacities; shipping,
installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer’s proposed warranty, stating obligations,

remedies, limitations, and exclusions.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail water heater assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between

manufacturer- installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water heaters certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.

ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 22 33 00 - Page 1 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

G. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single
manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water
heaters and are based on specific units selected. Other manufacturers' products
complying with requirements may be considered.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to Engineer.

D. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following:

1. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-

Rise Residential Buildings," for commercial water heaters.
2. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Low-Rise
Residential Buildings," for household water heaters.

E. Local Certification: Heaters should be certified by local authorities as applicable.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to

repair or replace components of water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include heating elements and storage tanks.

2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:

a. Heating Elements: 5 years.

b. Storage Tanks: 10 years.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

1. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender, itemized schedules of spare parts to
be provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the
manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 22 33 00 - Page 2 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.2 STORAGE TYPE ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. Description: Comply with UL 174, internally glass lined with heating element
suitable for operating on voltage, phase and cycle, shown in the schedule on the Electrical
Drawings.

B. Storage Tank Construction: Steel with 1035-kPa (150-psig) working-pressure rating.

1. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping

connections, relief valve, drain, anode rod, and controls as required. Attach
tappings to tank before testing and labeling.
2. Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier
materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings
and outlets.
3. Insulation: Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 90.2. Surround entire storage tank
except connections and controls.
4. Jacket: Steel, with enameled finish.

a. Color: White, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Heating Elements: Two electric, screw-in, immersion type.

1. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat for each element with wiring

arrangement for non-simultaneous operation.

D. Anode Rod: Factory installed, magnesium.

E. Dip Tube: Factory installed. Not required if cold-water inlet is near bottom of storage tank.

F. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal, factory installed.

G. Heat Trap: Factory-installed, integral piping arrangement or cold-type inlet and hot-type
outlet fittings complying with ANSI/ASHRAE 90.2.

2.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as
great as heat input and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure
rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into tank.

1. Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of
combination relief valve.

B. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure
rating.

C. Vacuum Relief Valves: Furnish for installation in piping.

1. Exception: Omit if water heater has integral vacuum-relieving device.

D. Water Regulators: water-pressure reducing valve. Set at 172.5-kPa- (25-psig-)

maximum outlet pressure.

E. Shock Absorbers: ANSI/ASSE 1010 or PDI WH201, Size A water hammer arrester.

ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 22 33 00 - Page 3 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

F. Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 450-mm

high, enclosed-base stand. Include integral or separate drain pan with raised edge and
DN25 (NPS 1) drain outlet with standard pipe thread.

G. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel stand for floor
mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include dimension that will
support bottom of water heater a minimum of 450 mm above the floor.

H. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel

bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.

I. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than
base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than DN20 (NPS 3/4).

J. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet
piping arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field
assembly that is capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow
through each water heater.

K. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, “Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings” or ANSI/ASHRAE 90.2.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Submit certificated for Testing and inspection domestic-water heaters for
Engineer approval.

B. Hydrostatically test domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times pressure
rating before shipment.

C. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass visual
inspections and commissioning, and shall be replaced by new one.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.

B. Anchor water heaters to substrate.

C. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief
valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with
water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.

D. Install pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters without storage. Extend relief
valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest
floor drain.

ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 22 33 00 - Page 4 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.

F. Install vacuum relief valves in water heater storage tanks that have copper lining.

G. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor
drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do
not have tank drains. Refer to Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain valves.

H. Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Section "Meters and
Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.

1. Exception: Omit thermometers for the following:

a. Household, water heater inlet and outlet piping.

b. Commercial, point-of-use, water heater inlet piping.
c. Water heater with thermometer outlet piping.

I. Install pressure gages on water heater piping. Refer to Section "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.

J. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters.
Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water
heater. Include shutoff valve, and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and
throttling valve in each water heater outlet. Refer to Section "General-Duty Valves for
Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves and Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing
Piping" for thermometers.

K. Install water regulator, with integral bypass relief valve, in booster-heater inlet piping and
water hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping.

L. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks
without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

M. Fill water heaters with water.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-water-
circulating piping with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.

D. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.

E. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 26
Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit service.

ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 22 33 00 - Page 5 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

F. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification

specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the following:

1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
2. Verify that piping system tests are complete.
3. Check for piping connection leaks.
4. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping.
5. Check operation of circulators.
6. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices.
7. Energize electric circuits.
8. Adjust operating controls.
9. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 60 deg C (140 deg F)
unless piping system application requires higher temperature.
10. Balance water flow through manifolds of multiple-unit installations.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water heaters.

1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.

END OF SECTION 223300

ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 22 33 00 - Page 6 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 22 41 00

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Lavatories.
2. Pantry sink.
3. Water closets.
4. Showers.
5. Supply fittings.
6. Waste fittings.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted

plumbing fixtures.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures and faucets to include in
emergency, operation, and operation and maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 - Page 1 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
3. Flushometer-Tank Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than two of each type.
4. Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures of unit shell.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period for Shells: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General: all specified products are for guidance only for the tender purpose, actual
specifications shall be given and approved by the Architect.

2.2 All sanitary fixtures with that need water connection shall conform to LEED regulations,
and shall be WaterSense labeled, or similar that meet EPA's criteria for efficiency and
performance (EPA: Environmental Protection Agency).

2.3 LAVATORIES

A. Type LAV-1: Oval type for installation under marble counter tops, white vitreous china,
self-rimming, approximately 600 mm width, with one punch and two semi punched faucet
holes. Lavatory to be similar to model no. “Manta R4163” as manufactured by “Ideal
Standard” or approved equal and to be complete with the following accessories from the
same manufacturer or approved equal:

1. Location: toilets.
2. Mixer: Single lever, with 47 mm ceramic cartridge with cast chrome body, complete
with two flexible hoses 12.7 mm, and with pop-up drain. Mixer to be similar to model
no. “Ceramix A1247AA” as manufactured by “Ideal Standard” or approved equal.
3. Water saver: adjustable flow restricters to 5.7 lpm.
4. Isolation: two angle stop valves 12.7 mm, similar to Ideal Standard G4303.
5. Drain: 32 mm Lava chrome P-Trap, similar to Ideal Standard G8105.

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 - Page 2 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Type LAV-2: Oval type for wall mounted installation, white vitreous china, self-rimming,
approximately 620 mm width, with one punch and two semi punched faucet holes. Lavatory
to be similar to model no. “Manta R3133” as manufactured by “Ideal Standard” or approved
equal and to be complete with the following accessories from the same manufacturer or
approved equal:

1. Location: toilets - Handicapped.

2. Mixer: Single lever, with extended lever handle ceramic cartridge with cast chrome
body, complete with two flexible hoses 12.7 mm, and with pop-up drain. Mixer to be
similar to model no. “Ceramix A1245AA” as manufactured by “Ideal Standard” or
approved equal.
3. Water saver: adjustable flow restricters to 5.7 lpm.
4. Isolation: two angle stop valves 12.7 mm, similar to Ideal Standard G4303.
5. Drain: 32 mm Lava chrome P-Trap, similar to Ideal Standard G8105.
6. Cover: either floor standing pedestal similar to model no. “Manta R3363”, or wall
hung pedestal similar to model no. “Manta 3334” as manufactured by “Ideal
Standard”, as directed by the ID engineer.

C. Type LAV-3: Oval type for wall mounted installation, white vitreous china, self-rimming,
approximately 500 mm width, with one punch. Lavatory to be similar to model no. “Manta
R4263” as manufactured by “Ideal Standard” or approved equal and to be complete with the
following accessories from the same manufacturer or approved equal:

1. Location: waste room.

2. Mixer: Single lever, wall mounted, with 47 mm ceramic cartridge with cast chrome
body, including bottom shower connection, with built in wall water piping and with
pop-up drain. Mixer to be similar to model no. “Ceramix G2500AA” as manufactured
by “Ideal Standard” or approved equal.
3. Water saver: adjustable flow restricters to 5.7 lpm.
4. Drain: 32 mm Lava chrome P-Trap, similar to Ideal Standard G8105.
5. Shower set: wall hung shower head complete with hose and hung, similar to Ideal
Standard Idealspary model B0011AA.

D. Type LAV-4: Oval type for wall mounted installation, white vitreous china, self-rimming,
approximately 620 mm width, with one punch and two semi punched faucet holes. Lavatory
to be similar to model no. “Manta R3133” as manufactured by “Ideal Standard” or approved
equal and to be complete with the following accessories from the same manufacturer or
approved equal:

1. Location: clinics.
2. Mixer: Single lever, with extended lever handle ceramic cartridge with cast chrome
body, complete with two flexible hoses 12.7 mm, and with pop-up drain. Mixer to be
similar to model no. “Ceramix A1245AA” as manufactured by “Ideal Standard” or
approved equal.
3. Water saver: adjustable flow restricters to 5.7 lpm.
4. Isolation: two angle stop valves 12.7 mm, similar to Ideal Standard G4303.
5. Drain: 32 mm Lava chrome P-Trap, similar to Ideal Standard G8105.
6. Cover: None, otherwise either floor standing pedestal similar to model no. “Manta
R3363”, or wall hung pedestal similar to model no. “Manta 3334” as manufactured
by “Ideal Standard”, as directed by the ID engineer.

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 - Page 3 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.4 PANTRY SINKS

A. Type PS-1: Pantry sink 86 Cm width, white color, deep basin, constructed from high-quality
fired clay material, providing long-lasting durability and resistance against scratches and
stains with a pre-drilled tap hole. Similar to model no. “Cassia – 751386” as manufactured
by “Duravit” or approved equal and to be complete with the following accessories:

1. Location: pantry.
2. Mixer: Single lever, kitchen deck mount mixer, ceramic cartridge with cast chrome
body, complete with two flexible hoses 12.7 mm. Mixer to be similar to model no.
“Ceramix A1284AA” as manufactured by “Ideal Standard” or approved equal.
3. Water saver: adjustable flow restricters to 5.7 lpm.
4. Isolation: two angle stop valves 12.7 mm, similar to Ideal Standard G4303.
5. Drain: 32 mm Lava chrome P-Trap, similar to Ideal Standard G8105.

2.5 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closet type WC-1: White vitreous china, floor standing, elongated closed couple
bowl with horizontal outlet P-trap, complete with dual flush tank 4.8 L per flush, operated
push button, and internal douche complete with flexible hose connections 12.7 mm. Water
closet to be similar to model “Manta G3421” as manufactured by “Ideal Standard” or
approved equal and complete with the following accessories and trims from the same
manufacturer or approved equal:

1. Location: Toilets
2. Seat and cover: Plastic, white color similar to model “Manta G7000” as manufactured
by “Ideal Standards”.
3. Fittings and Accessories: Gaskets - neoprene; bolts with chromium plated caps nuts
and washers.
4. Isolation: two angle stop valves 12.7 mm, similar to Ideal Standard G4303.
5. Shower set: wall hung shower head complete with hose and hung, similar to Ideal
Standard Idealspary model B0011AA.

B. Water Closet type WC-2: White vitreous china, floor standing, elongated closed couple
bowl with vertical outlet S-trap, complete with dual flush tank 4.8 L per flush, operated push
button, and internal douche complete with flexible hose connections 12.7 mm. Water closet
to be similar to model “Manta G3422” as manufactured by “Ideal Standard” or approved
equal and complete with the following accessories and trims from the same manufacturer or
approved equal:

1. Location: Toilets
2. Seat and cover: Plastic, white color similar to model “Manta G7000” as manufactured
by “Ideal Standards”.
3. Fittings and Accessories: Gaskets - neoprene; bolts with chromium plated caps nuts
and washers.
4. Isolation: two angle stop valves 12.7 mm, similar to Ideal Standard G4303.
5. Shower set: wall hung shower head complete with hose and hung, similar to Ideal
Standard Idealspary model B0011AA.

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 - Page 4 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.6 URINALS

A. Type UR: Vitreous china, wall hung type, small bowl with integral flush distribution,
integral trap, complete with 20 mm top inlet spud, 50 mm bottom outlet, waste strainer and
32 mm stainless steel dome outlet grating. Urinal to be similar to model no. “G4031” as
manufactured by “Ideal Standard” or approved equal and to be complete with the following
accessories and trims from the same manufacturer or approved equal:

1. Location: toilets.
2. Flushing device: Urinal flush valve similar to model no. “G2470AA” as
manufactured by “Ideal Standard” or approved equal.
3. Complete with support and carriers.

2.7 SHOWERS

A. Type SH-1: Shower tray to be white Acrylic receptor, square size 700x700x25 mm
complete with waste kit, similar to model “ Ultra flat GA966” as manufactured by “Ideal
Standard” or approved equal with the following tray dimension, 900 x 900 x 175 mm deep
and to be complete with the following accessories and trims from the same manufacturer or
approved equal:

1. Location: Lockers.
2. Mixer: Built-in single lever, embedded connections, with ceramic cartridge with cast
chrome body, complete with shower head and spout. Mixer to be similar to model no.
“Ceramix G2002AA” as manufactured by “Ideal Standard” or approved equal.
3. Water saver: adjustable flow restricters to 7.6 lpm.

B. Type SH-1: Shower tray to be white Acrylic receptor, square size 900x900x25 mm
complete with waste kit, similar to model “ Ultra flat GA968” as manufactured by “Ideal
Standard” or approved equal with the following tray dimension, 900 x 900 x 175 mm deep
and to be complete with the following accessories and trims from the same manufacturer or
approved equal:

1. Location: Lockers.
2. Mixer: Built-in single lever, embedded connections, with ceramic cartridge with cast
chrome body, complete with shower head and spout. Mixer to be similar to model no.
“Ceramix G2002AA” as manufactured by “Ideal Standard” or approved equal.

C. Water saver: adjustable flow restricters to 7.6 lpm.

2.8 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components -
Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Fittings, where required:

1. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching

water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange.

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 - Page 5 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Angle Stop valves: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or

compression stop with inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size,
similar to model G4303AA, G4308AA or GA4309AA complete with escutcheon as
manufactured by Ideal Standards or approved equal.
3. Flexible piping: Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube or braided- or corrugated-
stainless-steel flexible hose.

2.9 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) offset tailpiece for accessible lavatories.

C. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) straight tailpiece for standard pantry trays.

D. Trap:

1. Size: N PS 1-1/2 for lavatories, and pantry sinks.

2. Material: PVC trap and waste to wall and wall flange.

E. Flexible Pan Connector:

1. Size: NPS 4 (DN 100) for water closets.

2. Material: High grade plastic, with a rubber sealing washers.
3. Waste connector to bridge the gap between the main toilet pan and the waste pipe.

2.10 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting,

dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to
verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing-fixture installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, cabinets, and counters for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 - Page 6 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install floor-mounted water closets on closet flange attachments to drainage piping.

C. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

D. Install pedestal lavatories on pedestals and secured to wood blocking in wall.

E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to
water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces
behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with
fixture. Comply with valve requirements specified in Division 22 Section
"General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

F. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide
side of compartment.

G. Install toilet seats on water closets.

H. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

I. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes unless otherwise indicated.

J. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste
piping of accessible lavatories and sinks. Comply with requirements in Division 22
Section "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

K. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for
Plumbing Piping."

L. Seal joints between plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type,
one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water
Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary
Waste and Vent Piping."

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 - Page 7 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste
piping of accessible lavatories and sinks. Comply with requirements in Division 22
Section "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust plumbing fixtures and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. After completing installation of plumbing fixtures; inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended
cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in
writing by Employer.

END OF SECTION 224100

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 41 00 - Page 8 of 8

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

DIVISION 23

HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING

April 2024 - REV.0

 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement
other Division 23 Sections.
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Concrete base construction requirements.
3. Escutcheons.
4. Dielectric fittings.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Mechanical sleeve seals.
7. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
8. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified in
Division 23 Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment".
9. No shrink grout for equipment installations.
10. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports.
11. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections.
12. Mechanical demolition.
13. Cutting and patching.
14. Touchup painting and finishing.

B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 23 Section 232110 "Hydronic
Piping", piping system Sections.

C. This section also includes other requirements to complement other sections in Division 23
sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 1 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact
by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. NP: Nylon plastic.
2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
4. uPVC: unplasticized polyvinyl chloride plastic.
5. RTRP: Reinforcement thermosetting resin pipe.
6. GRP: Glass reinforced plastic pipe.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
2. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.

1.4 DESIGN CONDITIONS

A. Outdoor Design Conditions:

1. The outdoor conditions are adopted as follows:
a. Climatic Conditions:
1) Latitude: 30.1 N
2) Altitude: 116 m (Above sea level).

b. Outside Temperatures:
1) Design dry bulb temperature : 42.3 deg.C
2) Wet bulb temperature : 26.6 deg.C
3) Design winter dry bulb temperature : 14.5 deg.C

B. Indoor Design Conditions:

1. Offices spaces : (23-26)°C ± 1°C DB, (40-60)% ± 5% RH
2. Courts areas : (23-26)°C ± 1°C DB, (40-60)% ± 5% RH
3. Public areas : (27-30)°C ± 1°C DB, (40-60)% ± 5% RH
4. Technical areas : (23-26)°C ± 1°C DB, (40-60)% ± 5% RH

1.5 DRAWINGS, INSTRUCTIONS AND SAMPLES

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 2 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Equipment and Materials Lists: As per contract requirement after award of contract, submit
lists of equipment and materials with names of proposed manufacturers and drawings of
interrelated items. All submissions are to show submission dates.

B. Shop and Installation Drawings: As per contract requirement, submit for approval detailed
shop and installation drawings showing to-scale dimensions of equipment, ducts, pipes etc.
in plan and elevation and in relation of same to space assigned.

C. Shop and Installation Drawings: prepare composite installation drawings and sections to a
scale of not less than 1/50 showing clearly how work will be installed in relation to the work
of other trades.

D. Shop and installation drawings: Prepare in BIM (LOD 350) for all systems to ensure
coordination between all systems.

E. Shop and Installation Drawings of equipment and material are to include manufacturer's
detailed drawings, cuts of catalogues and descriptive literature showing type, performance
characteristics, construction, component parts, dimensions, arrangement, operating
clearances, capacity, electrical characteristics, power requirements, motor, drive and testing
information.

F. Shop and Installation Drawings: submit manufacturer's certified drawings, templates and
installation instructions to be furnished for all equipment showing operating weights, weight
distribution, location of any vibration isolation mounts, size and location of anchor bolts,
drains and other required openings and all other pertinent data to assist in design of bases
and supports.

G. Shop and Installation Drawings: mark clearly in ink catalogues, pamphlets and drawings for
proper identification of item proposed and indicate, with reasons, deviations from the
Specification and the Drawings.

H. Shop and Installation Drawings lists etc.: submit three copies.

I. Drawings and material submittals to be submitted in hard and soft copies.

J. Shop and Installation Drawings: submit for approval, materials not covered by drawings,
e.g. pipes, fittings and incidentals, giving ratings and names of manufacturers.

K. Shop and Installation Drawings: no equipment or materials to be purchased or delivered to

Site until drawings etc. are approved.

L. Further Drawings: during the progress of the work, submit shop-drawings, to 1/20 or 1/10
scale, as required by the Engineer and as specified elsewhere.

M. As-Built drawings: Prepare in BIM (LOD 500) for all systems.

N. Engineer's Drawings are generally diagrammatic and not to be scaled. Measurements are to
be made from established bench marks.

O. Engineer's Drawings: check all architectural, structural and electrical drawings in laying out
work to verify adequacy of space in which work is to be installed. Notify the Engineer
where space appears inadequate.

P. Substitution of Equipment and Material: reference to equipment and material by name,

make or catalogue number, and lists of approved manufacturers are to be interpreted as

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 3 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

establishing standard of quality and performance and are not intended to eliminate
equivalent products of other manufacturers.

Q. Minor Changes and Modifications may be made in layout to prevent conflict with work of
other trades or for proper execution of the work.

R. Cooperate with other trades to permit their work to be installed satisfactorily and with
minimum interference or delay.

S. Coordinate space conditions where work will be installed in close proximity to and may
interfere with work of other trades, and accept responsibility for the sufficiency of shafts
and chases, clearance in double partitions, suspended ceilings etc. for proper installation of
the work.

T. Furnish to other trades templates, patterns, setting out plans and shop details necessary for
proper installation and coordination of adjacent work.

U. Protection: close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and
construction.

V. Samples: submit for approval samples of proposed materials and workmanship.

1.6 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Access: install work to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.
Approved deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this.

B. Group Together as practically as possible concealed valves and devices to be easily

accessible through access doors.

C. Purpose: access doors are to be provided for the operation of concealed dampers, damper
quadrants, controls, valves, traps, vents, drains, cleanouts, motors, air filters etc.

D. Details of access doors and frames: Provide details, dimensions and locations of access
doors required and submit for approval in sufficient time to enable access doors to be
installed during normal course of work.

1.7 LABELS, TAGS AND CHARTS

A. General: refer to section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and the
following to complete this task. Consult the engineer for any discrepancy.

B. Identification: Access doors are to be identified to indicate location of concealed work.

Method and schedule for identification of access doors is to be approved.

C. Nameplates: each piece of equipment to have a certified nameplate at a conspicuous

location, permanently attached at factory, printed or stamped with name and address of
manufacturer, equipment model number, serial number, date of manufacture, electrical
characteristics, performance rating or duty, pressure, temperature or other limitations and
other pertinent data.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 4 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Label and Identify equipment, instruments, controls, electrical devices, valves etc. as to
duty, service or function. Label controls and electrical devices to indicate clearly what they
control.

E. Labels: attach to equipment etc. or to adjacent permanent surfaces in an approved permanent

manner.

F. Labels: laminated Bakelite with different colours for and surface, core and incised lettering
in English. Refer to section 230553 "Identifications for HVAC Piping and Equipment".

G. Tags: Refer to section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment".

H. Tag controls and instruments that cannot be easily identified with Bakelite labels.

I. Tag valves and controls, except equipment shut off valves located at equipment.

J. Labels and Tags: submit for approval a schedule of equipment and devices to be labeled and
tagged, with suggested nomenclature. Labels and tag sizes to suit the size of
equipment/piping and be visible to the viewer.

K. Charts are to be prepared of schematic flow diagrams of each piping system with location
and function of each valve and with type and size of each essential feature of the system.

L. Charts: prepare schedules for equipment lubrication and maintenance and essential
operating instructions.

M. Charts: submit for approval.

N. Charts: mount on wooden plaques or 6 mm Masonite boards, cover with heat bonded clear
plastic laminate or frame under glass, and permanently fix with four brass screws at
approved locations.

O. Labels and tags should suit the size of equipment/piping and to be clearly visible from long
distance. Sizes to be subject to engineer approval.

1.8 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Instruction Manuals: provide six copies in bound booklet form containing the following
information for all systems and equipment including free issued equipment provided by
client:
1. Brief description of each system and piece of equipment with basic operating features
2. Descriptive literature of equipment and components with manufacturer's name, model
number, capacity rating and operating characteristics.
3. Exploded view for assemble parts and equipment.
4. Service manual prepared by manufacturer for every major piece of equipment giving
operating and maintenance instructions, starting and shut-down instructions,
lubrication instructions and list of possible breakdown and repairs
5. Manufacturer's list of general spare parts for every piece of equipment with unit
prices
6. Manufacturer's list of recommended spare parts for one, three and five years of
operation of each piece of equipment with unit prices

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 5 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

7. Detailed and simplified one line colour coded flow diagram of each system with tag
number, location and function of each valve and instrument
8. Detailed and simplified colour coded as-installed wiring diagrams of motor
controllers and automatic controls with tag number, location and function of each
instrument and electrical device with description of sequence of operation and
interlocks.

B. Instruction Manuals: submit in draft form for review and approval prior to taking over as
per the contract requirement.

C. Record Drawings: submit an approved complete set of as-built drawings and electrical
wiring diagrams in tracing or other reproducible form. Also submit soft copies of all As-
Built cad drawings.

D. Overall Purpose: provide a general overview of the original design intent.

E. Description: provide the followings:

Type of system.
System location and what it serves.
What the system depends upon in order to function.
Design data, basic design parameters, basic assumptions made during design.
Reasons for selecting particular plant.
Expected service life (where available).
Planned operational efficiency.

F. Equipment Schedule: the type, model number and serial number of all component items
within the system should be listed, together with the names of their respective manufacturers
of suppliers.

G. Parts Identification and Recommended Spares: this should comprise a parts identification
list detailing and identifying replaceable assemblies, sub-assemblies and components. it
should include supplier’s recommendation for both spares and “running spare” (i.e. parts
required for scheduled replacement due to wear or deterioration), recommend stocking level
of spare parts and manufacturing and shipping time required for imported spare parts.

H. Commissioning Data
Measured Data.
Measurement Points.
Test Equipment used
Calibration Certificate details.
Test Certificates
Safety & Fire Certificates (where applicable)
A statement of whether design requirements.

I. Operation: instructions must be given for the safe and efficient operation, under both
normal and emergency conditions. These will be in addition to manufacturer’s literature for
Plant Items and should include:
A recommended strategy for operation and control.
An outline of the general operating mode.
Control data (location, effect, object, sequence, limits of capability, modes, set points).
Procedure and sequences for start-up, running and shutdown, under both normal and
emergency conditions.
Interlocks between plant items
Operating procedure for standby plant.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 6 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Precautions necessary to overcome known hazards.

The means by which any potentially hazardous plants may be made safe.
Target figures of both energy consumption and energy costs.
Forms for recording plant running hours, energy consumption and energy costs.

J. Maintenance: the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions for maintenance for

each item of plant and equipment. Clear distinction should be made between planned tasks
(preventative maintenance) and work done on corrective basis. instructions should be given
on each of the following as appropriate:
The isolation and return of plant and equipment.
Adjustments, calibration and testing.
Dismantling and re-assembly.
The exchange of components and assemblies
Dealing with hazards which may arise during maintenance.
The nature of deterioration and the defects to be looked for.
Special tools, test equipment and ancillary services.

K. Maintenance Schedules: should be provided for preventative maintenance tasks and should
be based on manufacturer’s recommendations and other authoritative sources and should
include:
Inspections
Examinations
Tests
Adjustments
Calibration
Lubrication
Periodic Overhaul
Procedure for the logical diagnosis and correction of faults should be provided.

L. Modification Information: information on permitted plant or system modification’s allowed

for by the manufacturers of system designers should be included for each system. Space
must be provided in the name for the recording of all modifications and changes as they
occur.

M. Disposal Instructions: where relevant, information should be provided detailing:

Any known dangers likely to arise during the disposal of specific items of plant or
equipment together with the necessary precautions and safety measures.
Methods for safely disposing of or destroying the equipment or any parts thereof, including
packaging, insulation and fluids.
Sources from which further advice can be obtained.

N. Index of Plans and Drawings: an index should be provided of all “as fitted” drawings
supplied during the course of the installation work, identified by number and title. Index
should also include a schedule of all drawings issued by the manufacturers and suppliers
during the course of the installation work e.g. control panel-wiring diagrams.

O. Emergency Information: should include names, addresses, telephone and telex/fax numbers
of the appropriate contacts in the event of the fire, theft or burglary, and fuel, gas, electricity
or water failure/leaks. It should also list those firms or staff to contact in the event of the
failure or breakdown of such plant as lifts, plants, etc.

P. Manufacturers Literature: a complete set of all manufacturers’ literature should be provided

for the plant and equipment installed and assembled. The literature should provide the
following information:

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 7 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Description of the product as purchased

The cost and date of purchase
Performance – behavioral characteristics of the equipment in use
Applications – suitability for use
Operation and maintenance
Resources of labor, plant, material and space required
Methods of Operation and Control
Clearing and maintenance requirements
Protective measures
Labor, safety and welfare associated with the equipment
Public safety considerations.

1.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTNEANCE TRAINING PROGRAM

A. Manufacturers’ guarantees and warranties: include copies of all manufacturers’ guarantees

and warranties.

B. Contractor – furnished training program: to provide trained operation and maintenance

(O&M) personnel for the Employer’s Operations and Maintenance Program, Contractor
shall develop and implement a program for the training of Employer nominated staff in
operating and maintaining the facilities and systems/subsystems constructed and installed.
Two copies of submittals required by this Attachment to the Special Conditions shall be
supplied to Authorized Representative for review not later, than ninety (90) days prior to
scheduled start of each formal training course. Thirty (30) days shall be allowed for such
review. Training shall be performed only in accordance with such reviewed and approved
training program submittals. All training aids proposed for use in the program shall be
available for inspection prior to commencement of training. Upon completion of the
training program, the training aids, tools, test equipment, training manuals and other
materials relating to the program shall be handed over to the Employer.

When short familiarization courses are offered to Contractor by the equipment

manufacturer/vendor as a common industry practice at no extra cost to Contractor, then
Contractor shall make arrangements for the Government nominated staff to attend such
courses at the no additional cost to the Government.

C. DESCRIPTION: this section covers the requirements for preparing, administrating and
conducting a training program in English for Employer, nominated operator, maintenance,
and supervisor and instructor trainees in operation, maintenance and computer software
programming of the system. Training shall be of sufficient scope and depth to ensure that
all operations, maintenance and computer software trainees who complete the training
program will be fully qualified, certified and capable of operating and/or maintaining the
system/subsystems as installed under this Contract. The program shall provide the training,
orientation and familiarization necessary to ensure a smooth transition between system
installation and operations activities.

D. Scope: Training shall be in sufficient scope to ensure that all trainees who complete the
program will be certified as capable to operate and/or maintain the equipment, systems and
facilities furnished and installed under this contract, and to ensure a smooth transition
between construction and operation activities.

E. Scope: training shall be performed in accordance with an approved training program. All
training aids shall be available and approved prior to start of training. Each training course
shall usually include classroom (theoretical) training and on-the-job (hands-on) training to
provide practical experience. Where system/subsystem interfaces occur, such as with

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 8 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

equipment or facilities furnished under other contracts, the contractor shall co-operate with
and assist the Construction Manager in coordinating timing and scheduling of training so
that trainees can be made familiar with the operation and maintenance of the
system/subsystem as a complete, in-place, operating unit.

F. Language: training shall be conducted in English and Arabic.

G. Submittals: The following should be submitted:

1. A training program stating all program courses and activities, and their individual
duration’s sequence, and interrelationships.
2. A narrative description of each course, including its purpose, technical scope and the
number of hours from start of course to trainee certification.
3. Current resumes of training and technical personnel who will be assigned to the
classroom and/or on-the-job (hands-on) phases of training. Resumes shall be
identified by course.
4. The ration of training and technical personnel to trainees for both classroom and on-
the-job phases of each course.
5. A narrative (verbal) and graphic (pictorial) explanation of the system’s operational
scheme and features which will be covered in the Operations-related courses.
6. A narrative (verbal) and graphic (pictorial) explanation of the system’s operational
and maintenance schemes which will be covered in the maintenance-related courses.
7. A comprehensives training manual for each course in the form and content which will
be used in both classroom and on-the-job phases of training. In addition to other
information, the manual shall contain an agenda, the hours devoted to each
topic/subject, and the objectives for each lesson. Such manual shall be prepared in
English.
8. A descriptive listing, by course, of all training aids to be used during both classroom
and on-the-job phases of training.
9. A narrative description of the practices to be followed to measure, record and report
each trainee’s progress and proficiency on completion of formal training. Also, a
description of the method(s) to be used to certify trainees as being capable to operate
and/or maintain the system/subsequent.
10. Samples of written examinations to be used for each course.
11. A narrative description of the methods proposed to provide make-up instruction for
trainees who miss training sessions due to illness of approved absences.
12. A bibliography containing a listing of reference publications to be used in
conjunction with classroom and on-the-job training.
13. A power point presentation in Microsoft power point or similar software.

H. Employer Nominated Staff: Employer will nominate staff to receive training. Such trainees
many be expected to be familiar with the fundamental concepts of the operation and
maintenance of similar system and be basically qualified in both written and spoken
English. Each trainee will be designated by Employer in one of three categories (trainees,
supervisor-trainee, or instructor trainee) for operations, maintenance or computer software
training.

I. Assistance to Key Technical Personnel: all key technical personnel of Contractor shall have
a general responsibility to assist Employer non-nominated trainees in conducting training for

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 9 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

the operation and maintenance of the system/subsystem. Such assistance shall be a part of
their duties and shall be included in their job descriptions.

J. Qualifications of Training Personnel: personnel designated to conduct training shall be fully

qualified and shall have a minimum of three years’ experience with the systems/subsystem
as installed, or comparable successful experience as a trainee.

K. Training Aids: Training aids shall include approved operation and maintenance (O&M)
manual(s) prepared by Contractor as part of this Contract; training manuals, including
course outline, basic test of instructions modules and trainee workbook; films; slides; video
tape(s); charts; models; hand-outs; catalogues’ samples; and other visual and written aids to
complement instruction. In addition spare parts and other special hardware shall be
provided to support “hand-on” familiarization with the equipment or systems.

L. Training Manuals: training manuals in English shall be provided for each training course
covering both the classroom and on-the-job phases. The organization of the manuals shall
follow the same sequence as the course’s schedule presentation of material, providing such
additional background and supplementary information as a trainee may need to understand
the O&M manuals. The training manuals shall contain course agenda, schedule of hours
devoted to each topic or subject and objectives for each lesson.

M. Proficiency: at designated intervals, each trainee’s proficiency level shall be determined by

written, oral and practical performance tests.

N. Completion: upon satisfactory completion of the training, it shall be certified, in writing,

that each trainee, by name, is qualified to operate or maintain the system, supervise or
instruct, as applicable.

O. Disposition: upon completion of the training program, all training aids, test equipment and
similar items provided by Contractor for this training program shall become the property of
the Employer.

P. Schedule of all Plant Requiring Lubrication should be provided together with

manufacturer’s recommendations on the type of lubricant and the method and frequency of
application where the type of lubricant is identified by product name, a generic reference
(e.g. B.S.) should also be given. Special requirements for the handling and storage of
lubricants should be provided where applicable for recommended lubricants.

Q. Make-Up Instruction: make-up instruction shall be scheduled to accommodate shift work

and authorized absences.

R. Training Categories: training shall be provided using approved programs in the following
categories:
Operations
Maintenance
Computer Software
Operations – Supervisor
Operations – Instructor
Maintenance – Supervisor
Maintenance – Instructor
Other categories as may be required by CONTRACTOR’s system design.

S. Operations Training: operators shall be provided with a thorough training in all aspects of
system/subsystem operation under both normal and abnormal conditions. This training shall
include, but not be limited to:

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 10 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Orientation to provide overview of system/subsystem purpose, configuration and

operations;
Terminology;
Operations theory and interface;
Equipment appearance, functions, concepts and operation;
Operating modes, practices and procedures under normal and emergency conditions;
Safety precautions;
On-the-job operating experience covering all system/subsystem operating functions,
activities and tasks including those associated with degraded operating modes, failure
recognition and recovery processes;
Familiarity with the content and use of O&M manuals and related reference publications.

T. Maintenance Training: maintenance training shall cover all on-site routine, preventive and
remedial maintenance of the system/subsystem. This training shall include, but not be
limited to:
Orientation to provide overview of system/subsystem purpose, configuration and
operations;
Terminology;
Operations theory and interfaces;
Equipment modes, practices and procedures under normal and emergency conditions;
Safety precautions;
Use of tools and test equipment;
Preventive maintenance;
Troubleshooting, diagnostics and testing;
Assembly and disassembly;
Repair and parts replacement;
Parts ordering practices and storage;
Failure and recovery procedures;
System/subsystem cabling;
Familiarity with and use of O&M manuals and other reference materials.

U. COMPUTER SOFTWARE TRAINING: computer software training shall cover the use,
management, development and maintenance of system/subsystem software. This training
shall include but not be limited to:
Orientation to provide overview of system/subsystem concepts, configuration and
operations;
Basis programming and software architecture;
System executive and utility program;
Application program;
Modification program;
Modification of command lines codes;
Interrupt logic;
Intra- and inter-system interfaces;
Processor system operating procedures;
Diagnostics;
Communications software;
File management;
Hand-on training;
Safety precautions;
Familiarization with and use of O&M manuals and other reference materials.

V. Operations – Supervisor Training: supplemental and specialized training shall be provided

for supervisor level trainees. This training shall impart the knowledge and skills necessary
to schedule, supervise and improve the proficiency of operating and computer software
personnel.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 11 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

W. Operations – Instructor Training: supplemental and specialized training shall be provided to

prepare graduate trainees or nominated instructors successfully to instruct future trainees in
system/subsystem operations and computer software.

X. Maintenance – Supervisor Training: supplemental and specialized training shall be provided

for supervisory level trainees. This training shall impart the knowledge and skills necessary
to schedule, supervise and improve the proficiency of maintenance personnel.

Y. Maintenance – Instructor Training: supplemented and specialized training shall be provided

to prepare graduate trainees of nominated instructions successfully to instruct future trainees
in all phases of system/subsystem maintenance.

1.10 INITIAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS

A. After installation is complete, operate system for time required to complete tests specified
under TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING, to demonstrate performance in
accordance with design requirements and to provide instruction and training to the
Employer's designated personnel.

B. Commencement Date: obtain approval of commencement date.

1.11 NOISE AND VIBRATION

A. Equipment is to operate under all conditions of load without objectionable noise or

vibration.

B. Noise and vibration noticeable outside a room in which moving equipment is installed, or
annoyingly noticeable inside the room, will be considered objectionable.

C. Noise Level resulting from equipment and heard in the same building or nearby buildings is
not to exceed specified noise levels as measured with a standard sound level meter on the 'A'
scale.

D. Correction: conditions considered objectionable are to be corrected by approved means and

as directed.

E. Method of Correction: noise is to be corrected by addition of sound absorbers in ducts, by

internal duct lining, by installation of sound barriers or dampeners on walls and/or ceilings
of equipment rooms or by other method to produce satisfactory noise levels.

F. Vibration Control is to be by approved vibration isolators applied and installed in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

G. Acoustic and vibration study should be performed by approved specialist to be engaged

from the start of the project.

1.12 WARRANTEE

A. Warrantee is to cover perfect mechanical operation of systems, perfect attainment of

temperatures and humidity’s within specified design conditions, acceptable noise and
vibration levels and reasonable consumption of power, fuel and water.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 12 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Defects during warrantee Period: if during warrantee period any equipment or material
proves defective or any part of system fails to function properly, equipment is to be replaced
and defects and malfunctions corrected as directed by the Engineer.

C. Extension of warrantee: if during warrantee period any piece of major equipment is replaced
or rebuilt, the warrantee period is to be extended as per the contract conditions.

D. Maintenance and Operation: provide necessary skills and labor to assure proper operation
and to provide regular and preventive maintenance required for equipment and controls
during warrantee period on a continuous 24 hour basis.

E. Maintenance and Operation: act promptly to correct problems arising in operation of

equipment or system.

F. Maintenance and Operation: provide the Employer with monthly inspection certificates of
equipment, record findings on a check list, and certify that each piece of equipment has been
examined, is operating as intended and has been properly maintained as recommended by
the manufacturer.

G. Maintenance and Operation: check all controls monthly to ascertain that they function as
designed.

H. Spare Parts for normal wear and tear are to be provided by the Employer.

1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing
angles of identification devices.

B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions,

capacities, and ratings may be furnished at no additional cost to the Contract, provided such
proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical
services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, equipment spaces, and the like are
increased accordingly. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified,
equipment must meet design and commissioning requirements.

C. Equipment Vibration Tolerance:

1. The allowable vibration tolerance is specified in Division 23 Section 230548
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping" and equipment. Equipment
specifications require factory balancing of equipment to this tolerance.
2. After air balance work is completed and permanent drive sheaves are in place,
perform field mechanical balancing and adjustments required to meet the specified
vibration tolerance.

D. Products Criteria:
1. Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization that
maintains a complete inventory of repair parts and is located reasonably close to the
site.
2. Multiple Units: When 2 or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or
class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 13 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components

made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.
4. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall
be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast
integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of
equipment.
5. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.

E. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are

required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material
being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Resident
Engineer prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the
recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for
rejection of the material.

F. Provide copies of approved equipment submittals to the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
Subcontractor.

1.14 WELDING

A. The Contractor is entirely responsible for the quality of the welding and shall:
1. Conduct tests of the welding procedures used by his organization, determine the
suitability of the procedures used, determine that the welds made will meet the
required tests, and also determine that the welding operators have the ability to make
sound welds under standard conditions.
2. Comply with ASME B31.1 and AWS B2.1.
3. Perform all welding operations required for construction and installation of the piping
systems.

B. Qualification of Welders: Rules of procedure for qualification of all welders and general
requirements for fusion welding shall conform with the applicable portions of ASME B31.1,
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications, and AWS B2.1, and / or, as
approved by the Qualifications."

C. Examining Welder: Examine each welder at job site, in the presence of the Resident
Engineer, to determine the ability of the welder to meet the qualifications required. Test
welders for piping for all positions, including welds with the axis horizontal (not rolled) and
with the axis vertical. Each welder shall be allowed to weld only in the position in which he
has qualified and shall be required to identify his welds with his specific code marking
signifying his name and number assigned.

D. Examination Results: Provide the Resident Engineer with a list of names and corresponding
code markings. Retest welders who fail to meet the prescribed welding qualifications.
Disqualify welders, who fail the second test, for work on the project.

E. Beveling: Field bevels and shop bevels shall be done by mechanical means or by flame
cutting. Where beveling is done by flame cutting, surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of
scale and oxidation just prior to welding. Conform to specified standards.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 14 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

F. Alignment: Utilize split welding rings or approved alternate method for joints on all pipes
above 50 mm to assure proper alignment, complete weld penetration, and prevention of
weld spatter reaching the interior of the pipe.

G. Erection: Piping shall not be split, bent, flattened, or otherwise damaged either before,
during, or after installation.

H. Defective Welds: Replace and re-inspect defective welds. Repairing defective welds by
adding weld material over the defect or by peening will not be permitted. Welders
responsible for defective welds must be re-qualified.

I. Electrodes: Electrodes shall be stored in a dry heated area, and be kept free of moisture and
dampness during the fabrication operations. Discard electrodes that have lost part of their
coating.

J. Welding: welded joints for pipes larger than 300 mm and all pipes within tunnel or buried
pipes to be subjected to 100 % x-ray testing.

1.15 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. The equipment supplied shall be packed for protection against damage during handling,
transport, warehousing and installation. The efficiency of the packing shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair or replace any damaged items,
at no additional cost, as instructed by the Engineer even after delivery of the equipment, if it
is proven that the damage was caused by packing, storage, or handling deficiencies.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end bevel damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris,
and moisture.

C. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.

D. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.

E. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.16 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other trades and building components.

B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for mechanical installations.

C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning
before closing in building.

E. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead

utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised
service companies, and controlling agencies.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 15 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access
are concealed behind finished surfaces.

G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if

devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical
ceilings and similar concealment.

1.17 ASSET CODING

A. The Sub-contractor shall identify all equipment, materials, spare parts and consumables and
incorporate them into the as-built documentation and operating & maintenance manuals.
Asset coding to be used and implemented in the building automation software including
maintenance program.

B. The Sub-contractor shall also be responsible for the creation of the entire asset code
electronic data base handed over to the Client upon completion of the project. An indicative
Asset Coding format sample is shown hereinafter. The MEP Subcontractor shall note that
the format may be revised at a later date. The MEP Subcontractor shall prepare the data base
in excel/other formal capable of importing to other data bases. The MEP Subcontractor shall
be also responsible for preparation and fixing of asset code tags to materials and equipment
forming part of his supply. The asset codes shall be stated at the time of submittal to track
order, manufacturing, delivery, installation and testing and commissioning. The minimum
list of equipment to be coded is as follows:

C. HVAC and Electrical (MEP) Installation

1. ACMV/BMS System
a. Ventilation Systems - Fans. DX units, split unite and all associated automatic
dampers, VFD, and local motor control panels (LMCP).
b. Chilled Water System - MCC, chilled water pumps, feed & expansion tank,
valves, automatic air vents, expansion bellow, chemical treatment system.
c. BMS/ Control System - All central hardware, and field panels and all field
equipment.
d. Smoke Control System - Fans, smoke curtains and smoke curtain control panel
e. All landlord AHU, VAV, FCU, and heat recovery units including associated
LMCP. VFD and automatic dampers.
f. Thermal storage system.
g. Workshop equipment including platform lift, cranes and monorails.
2. Electrical System
a. All Main LV switchboard and sub-boards.
b. All UPS charger/battery system.
c. All central battery system
d. All emergency generator and associated cooling towers, pumps and LMCP.
e. All power/lighting distribution panels.
f. All main HV switchboards.
g. All transformers
h. All cables HV, MV and LV.
i. Walkie-talkie system - all central hardware, field panels and handsets.
j. All central dimmer panels/systems.
k. ATS, power factor correction capacitors, and DB's.
l. All exit lights, architectural light fittings, and wiring devices.
m. All disconnector switches, sockets (normal, power) and wiring device.
n. Lighting protection systems.
o. Earthing system.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 16 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

p. Telephone raceways.
q. Cameras.
The Sub-contractor shall coordinate with the appointed Asset Management Team for the
asset coding format required and the creation of the asset coding database. The coding
shall be in accordance with client coding system adopted throughout his projects.

Sample of Coding

B01 GR XXX 236416/CH/01

BUILDING ITEM_SERIAL
REFERENCE

LEVEL ITEM
N SCHEDULE

ROOM NUMBER FILE REF.

ARCH. LAYOUTS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 17 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections 232110 "Hydronic Piping", 231113

"Facility Fuel-Oil Piping Valves and Accessories" and 231213 "Facility Fuel-Oil Pumps"
for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 or British Standard Taper Pipe Thread for factory-threaded
pipe and pipe fittings.

C. Pipe fittings: use standard fittings and Tee. If standard Tee(s) are not available for indicated
branches use weld-o-lets. The use of fabricated fittings is not allowed.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed
below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 3.2 mm maximum thickness, unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full face gasket: Suitable for use with flat-face (FF) flanges.
b. Flat-ring gasket: Suitable for use with raised face (RF) flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-
face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel with hot dip galvanization for indoor
application and stainless steel for external application.

D. Flanges: ASME 16.5, Carbon steel, welding neck type with raised face. A. Pressure rating:
13.8 bar or 20 bar working pressure as per pressure performance requirements.

E. Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.

1. Alloy Sn95: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent
lead content.
2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent
maximum lead content.
3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead
content.
4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead
content.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 18 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead
content.

G. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.
2. BAg1: Silver alloy.

H. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

I. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

J. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.

K. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-
steel bolts and nuts and to be hot dip galvanized.

L. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.

1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.
2. Followers: ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111 and Hot dip Galvanized
5. Finish: Enamel paint.

M. Couplings for RTRP and Fittings: Piping manufacturer's standard.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General: Assembly, fitting with insulating material isolating or only insulating material
isolating used for the installation between pipes from dissimilar metals to prevent
accelerated corrosion and deterioration in the piping system due to galvanic and stray
current.

B. Insulating Material: EPDM, neoprene, phenolic gasket, polysulfone, Polyethylene that are
suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 1700 kPa minimum working
pressure at 40 deg. C.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 1700 kPa minimum

working pressure at 40 deg. C.

E. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face

or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene
bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 19 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for for 1700 kPa
minimum working pressure at 40 deg. C.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic

lining; threaded ends; for 1700 kPa minimum working pressure at 40 deg. C.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; for 1700 kPa minimum working pressure at
40 deg. C.

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible
pipe connections. All flexible connectors shall be selected based on the stress analysis report
and the vibration study. Include 2070 kPa minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher
working pressure is indicated, and ends according to the following:
1. DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
2. DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
3. Option for DN65 and Larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings.

B. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with bronze
wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to hose.

C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner

tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to
hose.

D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel,

inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or
flanges, welded to hose.

E. Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with multiple

plies of NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 2070 kPa minimum
working-pressure rating at 104 deg. C Units may be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise
indicated. Shall be minimum double sphere or more depending on the stress analysis and
vibration study.

2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill
annular space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.

2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.6 mm minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 20 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

b. Screws used for outdoor and wet application shall be of stainless steel.

B. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to
conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.
1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw and polished chrome-plated finish.
4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge, set screw and polished chrome-
plated finish.
5. Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw and chrome-plated finish.
6. Stamped Steel: One piece, with spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
7. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome-plated
finish.
8. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated
finish.
9. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.

C. Screws: Provide Stainless Steel screws for outdoor and wet applications.

2.7 GROUT

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout,
nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2. Design Mix: 34.5 MPa, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.8 MANHOLE COVERS & FRAMES

A. Ductile iron to BS EN 1563:1997, heavy duty and double seal, non slip, non – rocking, solid
top, assist lift manhole cover and frame to BS EN 124. Cover test load shall be 400 KM.
The cover shall be provided with factory fitted vibration resistant locking system, safety
grids.

B. Finish: Black bituminous solution coating with galvanized finish for removable supporting
steelwork to BS EN ISO 1461:1999. Epoxy coating to be done to prevent from rusting.

C. Dimension: As shown on drawings.

D. Lift assist to insure maximum lifting weight 25 kg.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise.
Individual Division 23 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 21 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate
general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements
were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on
Coordination Drawings.

C. All piping, fittings and flanges to be sand blasted and epoxy coated.

D. All supports to be designed based on stress analysis report.

E. Install piping at indicated slope.

F. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

G. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and
service areas.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls.
Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements.
Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.

K. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 25 mm clearance around insulation.

L. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

N. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

O. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board
partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome-
plated finish. Use split-casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and
chrome-plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or spring clips.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and
roof slabs.

Q. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 50 mm above finished floor level. Extend sleeve fittings below
floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 22 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.

3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 6 mm annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than DN150.
b. Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes DN150 and larger, penetrating gypsum-
board partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of
soil pipe to extend sleeve to 50 mm above finished floor level. Refer to
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants" for materials.
5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless
otherwise indicated.

R. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25 mm annular clear space between pipe and
sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 150 mm in diameter.
2. Install steel sheet for sleeves 150 mm in diameter and larger.
3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.

S. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install steel pipe for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25 mm annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.

T. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire stopping materials. Refer to
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.

U. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

V. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.

W. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in
individual piping Specification Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS' "Soldering Manual," Chapter
"The Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 23 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS' "Brazing Handbook," Chapter

"Pipe and Tube."
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of
internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry
seal threading is specified.
c. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being
threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open
welds.
6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices
and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and
welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material,
size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically
positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of
flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.
8. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with
clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
b. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661.
c. CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493.
d. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672.
e. PVC Nonpressure Piping: ASTM D 2855.
f. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and solvent cement
according to ASTM D 3138.

9. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with
clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657 procedures and
manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

X. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise

indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping DN50 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with DN50 or smaller threaded pipe
connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping DN65 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric fittings to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric fittings to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 24 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not
indicated.

B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown
only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Engineer.

C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to
other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.

F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to
equipment shafts if possible.

3.3 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. Refer to specification Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and
application of paint.

B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Interior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat
over enamel undercoat and primer.
2. Interior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2
finish coats over galvanized metal primer.
3. Interior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel/epoxy finish. Include
finish coat over enamel undercoat and primer.
4. Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel/epoxy finish. Include 2
finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer.
5. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel/epoxy finish.
Include 2 finish coats over galvanized metal primer.
6. Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel/epoxy finish. Include 2
finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer.

C. Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish.

D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials
and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 25 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but not less than
150 mm larger in both directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment
manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 21 MPa, 28-day
compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Concrete Specification
Section.

3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. Floor mounted
metallic supports shall have base and concrete plinths beneath.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
C. Floor Mounted Support: Provide base plate and concrete plinths beneath each floor
mounted support.

3.6 DEMOLITION

A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove Work as indicated in Division 23 Sections and as stated
below.
B. If pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove
damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality.
C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.
D. Work Abandoned in Place: Cut and remove underground pipe a minimum of 50 mm
beyond face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.
E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from Project site.
F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational
equipment indicated for relocation.

3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary
for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.

3.8 GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic, no shrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump
and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 26 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 230500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - Page 27 of 27

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 05 13

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements;
size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and
coatings.

B. Factory Test Reports: For specified tests.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NEMA MG1.

B. Comply with IEC 60034.

C. Comply with IEC 60072.

D. Comply with IEC 60529.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

1. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender, itemized schedules of spare parts to
be provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the
manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 - Page 1 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Motors shall be of the energy efficient design.

C. Motors shall be NEMA design B or design N or NY as applicable to IEC 60034-12, unless

otherwise recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for high torque
applications.

D. Motors 0.746 kW (1 HP) and larger: Three phase.

E. Motors smaller than 0.746 (1 HP): Single phase.

F. Frequency Rating: Determined by the frequency of circuit to which motor is connected,

refer to Electrical Specifications and Drawings.

G. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected, refer to

Electrical Specifications and Drawings.

H. Service Factor: 1.15 according to NEMA MG1 or shall be duty type S1 - continuous
running duty to IEC 60034-1, unless otherwise indicated. Motors used for excessive
intermittent periodic operation shall be suitably designed for the expected number of starts.
Motors’ dimensions shall comply with NEMA MG1 or IEC 60072 as applicable.

I. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start,
accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.

J. Low Voltage Motors’ Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled type (TEFC) to NEMA MG1
or IC 411 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

K. Medium Voltage Motors’ Enclosures: Totally enclosed, air to air cooled (TEAAC) to
NEMA MG1 or IC 611 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable or totally enclosed, water to air cooled
(TEWAC) to NEMA MG1 or IC 817 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable. Enclosure type shall be
as recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer, unless otherwise
indicated.

L. Degree of Protection (IP): Motors shall be IP55 to IEC 60529 for outdoor use and IP54 to
IEC 60529 for indoor motors as a minimum.

M. Temperature Rise: Shall not exceed 80 deg. C based on 50 deg. C (122 deg. F) ambient
temperature, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by manufacturer and approved by
the Engineer for specific applications such as: overhead cranes or submersible pumps,
where temperature rise not exceeding 105 deg. C may be used.

N. Motors that utilize a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty to NEMA MG1
or Class I to IEC 60034-18-41 and shall be classified as energy efficiency to NEMA MG1
or high efficiency class IE2 to IEC 60034-30.

O. Low Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of protection.

P. Medium Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of protection
and shall be designed for differential CT's and/or surge protection (surge arrestor and surge
capacitor). Enough space shall be provided below main terminal box for cable connection.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 - Page 2 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Q. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for winding
protection for all low voltage motors rated 50 HP and above and for all low voltage VFD
motors.

R. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for winding and
bearing protection for all medium voltage motors.

S. The contractor is responsible for coordination between the motor and motor controller
suppliers to ensure compatibility, proper starting and satisfactory operation.

2.2 THREE PHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1 or IEC 60034 and IEC 60072, induction motor.

1. Design Characteristics: NEMA MG 1 or IEC Standards.

2. Energy-Efficient Design: Premium efficiency to NEMA MG1 or class IE3 to IEC
60034-30 unless otherwise indicated.
3. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. Multispeed motors have
separate winding for each speed.
4. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
6. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class F for motors with temperature rise 80
deg. C and Class H for motors with temperature rise 105 deg. C as indicated in
paragraph 2.1 M above.

B. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal box to suit control
method. Maximum permissible starting current shall be 5 to 6.3 times the Full Load Current
(FLC). (NEMA starting code F or G) for motors rated 15 HP and above. For motors rated
below 15HP, starting current shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller output.

D. Rugged-Duty Motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with 1.25 minimum
service factors to NEMA MG1, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped
relief vents. Windings are insulated with nonhygroscopic material. External finish is
chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer.

E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to IEC:

1. Measurement of winding resistance.

2. No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. High-potential test.
5. Alignment.

2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 - Page 3 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit starting
torque and other requirements of specific motor application.

1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
4. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class B insulation may be used.

B. Shaded-Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 0.037 kW (1/20 hp).

C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens

power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to
temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically resets
when motor temperature returns to normal range, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial
forces on motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other single-phase motors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ADJUSTING

A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt-driven motors.

B. Align pulleys and install belts.

C. Tension according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install power feeders to motors in raceways. Locate raceways close to motor terminal box
and use liquid tight flex for final connection to motor terminal box.

E. Motors located in classified areas shall be installed in accordance with IEC or NFPA
recommendations for “Hazardous (classified) Locations”.

3.2 COMMISSIONING

A. Check operating motors for unusual conditions during normal operation. Coordinate with
the commissioning of the equipment for which the motor is a part.

B. Take measurements and prepare a log of voltage, current, frequency, and power.

C. Report unusual conditions.

D. Report current deficiencies of field-installed units.

END OF SECTION 230513

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 - Page 4 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 05 16

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for HVAC piping systems.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and
temperatures.

B. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection and
design of expansion fittings and loops.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and methods
of assembly.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

D. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for each expansion
fitting and loop.

1.5 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS

As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional engineer.

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 16 - Page 1 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

registered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering
services are defined as those performed for installations of expansion fittings and
loops that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: 1200-kPa or 2000-kPa (175-psig or 300 psig) pressure

rating as per system performance requirements, with end fittings and external tie rods for
limiting maximum travel, and flanged-end connections, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Configuration: Single- and double-bellows type, with base, unless otherwise

indicated.
2. Joints for Copper Piping: Single- and two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass
shroud.
3. Joints for Stainless-Steel Waterway: Single-ply stainless-steel bellows, stainless-
steel-pipe end connections, and steel shroud.
4. Joints for Steel Piping: Single- and two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel
shroud.

B. Expansion Compensators: 1200-kPa or 2000-kPa (175-psig or 300 psig) pressure rating as

per system performance requirements, with internal guides, antitorque device, and
removable end clip for positioning.

1. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Joints for Copper Piping: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shroud.
4. Joints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shroud.

C. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber, and pressure rated
for 1200-kPa or 2000 kPa at 116 deg C (175 psig or 300 psig at 240 deg F) as per system
performance requirements .

1. Configuration: Full-faced, integral, steel-flanged-end connections; external control

rods; and steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes.
2. Types: Single and double sphere.

D. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-hose legs

joined by long-radius 180-degree return bend with inlet and outlet elbow fittings,
corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.

1. Joints for Copper Piping: Copper fittings with solder-joint end connections.

a. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths
with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and 3450 kPa at 232 deg C
(500 psig at 450 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 16 - Page 2 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

b. DN65 to DN100 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4): Stainless-steel hoses and double-
braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 2890 kPa at 21 deg C (420 psig at 70 deg F)
and 2170 kPa at 232 deg C (315 psig at 450 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.

2. Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings.

a. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

b. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
c. Joints for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
stainless-steel sheaths with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and
3550 kPa at 315 deg C (515 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
d. Joints for DN65 to DN150 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6): Stainless-steel hoses and
double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 1900 kPa at 21 deg C (275 psig at 70
deg F) and 1380 kPa at 315 deg C (200 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure
ratings.
e. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
stainless-steel sheaths with 1130 kPa at 21 deg C (165 psig at 70 deg F) and
830 kPa at 315 deg C (120 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.

2.2 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Slip Expansion Joints: Carbon-steel, packing-type pipe expansion joint designed for
repacking under pressure and pressure rated for 1725 kPa or 2000 kPa at 204 deg C (250
psig or 300 psig at 400 deg F) as per system performance requirements; with compound
limit stops, flanged or weld ends to match piping system, drip connection if used for steam
piping systems, and flanged-end connections, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene.

2. Double-Slip Type: With base.

B. Flexible Ball Joints: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition packing,

designed for 360-degree rotation and angular deflection, and pressure rated for 1725 kPa or
2000 kPa at 204 deg C (250 psig or 300 psig at 400 deg F) as per system performance
requirements; comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section II, "Materials
Specifications," and with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials and
design of pressure-containing parts and bolting.

1. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Joints for DN150 (NPS 6) and Smaller: 30-degree angular deflection minimum.
4. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: 15-degree angular deflection minimum.

2.3 GUIDES

A. Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment of
piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 16 - Page 3 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in
hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for
application.

1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened portland
cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy
resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be
installed.
2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 21 MPa minimum. Refer to Section "Cast-in-Place

Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.

G. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.

C. Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly
absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.

1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written
instructions.

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 16 - Page 4 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.3 GUIDE INSTALLATION

A. Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.

B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.

3.4 ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by

ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.

C. Construct concrete anchors of cast-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated, or otherwise

required, and include embedded fasteners.

D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written instructions if

expansion fittings are indicated.

E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed
on or in concrete.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.

B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section "Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

END OF SECTION 230516

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 16 - Page 5 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 05 17

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves.
2. Stack-sleeve fittings.
3. Sleeve-seal systems.
4. Sleeve-seal fittings.
5. Grout.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and
welded steel collar; zinc coated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
coated, with plain ends.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube

closed with welded longitudinal joint.

2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include

clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 17 - Page 1 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular
space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates Stainless steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure
plates to sealing elements.

2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, water-stop assembly made for imbedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber water-stop collar with center opening to
match piping OD.

2.5 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and
walls are constructed.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal
system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 17 - Page 2 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for
sealants as per Architectural specifications.

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with
requirements for fire-stopping as per Architectural specifications.

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with
membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing as per
Architectural specifications.
3. Install section of cast-iron pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished
floor level.
4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if
ring is specified.
5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal
pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for fire-stopping as per
Architectural specification.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service
piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and
for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,
assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make a watertight seal.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position water-stop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 17 - Page 3 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal
system

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

4. Concrete Slabs above Grade: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

5. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150) PVC-pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.

END OF SECTION 230517

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 17 - Page 4 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 05 18

ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Escutcheons.
2. Floor plates.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

A. Section Includes:

1. ID: Internal diameter

2. OD: Outside diameter

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish

and clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge and
setscrew.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 18 - Page 1 of 3

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

2.3 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, and insulation of insulated piping and
with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern

type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-
plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, steel type or steel type with exposed-rivet hinge.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
steel type or steel type with concealed hinge.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, steel type
or steel type with concealed hinge.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
chrome-plated finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, steel type or steel type
with concealed hinge.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with chrome-
plated finish.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, steel type or steel type with
concealed hinge.

2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.
b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting
brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate,
steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 18 - Page 2 of 3

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, steel type

with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting brass type with
polished, chrome-plated finish.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, steel type with
concealed hinge.
i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting brass type with chrome-plated
finish.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, steel type with concealed hinge.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, and insulation of piping and with OD
that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.

END OF SECTION 230518

ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 18 - Page 3 of 3

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 05 19

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes meters and gages for HVAC systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each
meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.

B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, fittings,
and location for each meter and gage.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracies

under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.

D. Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct-mounting thermometers.

E. Operation and maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and
maintenance manuals. Include data for the following:

1. Measuring tools.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: complying with the specifications as per approved vendor list.

2.2 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL

A. Pressure rating: 12 bar or 20 bar as per system performance requirements.

B. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:

1. Chilled Water: 0 to plus 40 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions.

2. Condenser Water: 0 to plus 50 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions.

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19 - Page 1 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to
maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.

2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Pressure rating: 12 bar or 20 bar as per system performance requirements.

B. Description: ASTM E1-07.

C. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured,
230 mm (9 inches) long.

D. Adjustable Joint: Finish matching case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

E. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens.

F. Scale: Satin-faced non reflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit
installation.

2.4 DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. Pressure rating: 12 bar or 20 bar as per system performance requirements.

B. Description: Vapor-actuated, universal-angle dials type.

C. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 100 mm diameter, glass lens.

D. Adjustable Joint: Finish matching case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

E. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze bourdon pressure tube.

F. Movement: Brass, precision geared.

G. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced non reflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

H. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit
installation.

2.5 REMOTE-READING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. Pressure rating: 12 bar or 20 bar as per system performance requirements.

B. Description: Vapor-actuated, remote-reading dial type.

C. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 100 mm diameter, glass lens.

D. Movement: Brass, precision geared.

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19 - Page 2 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced non reflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

F. Tubing: Bronze, double-braided, armor-over-copper capillary; of length to suit installation.

G. Bulb: Copper with separable socket for liquids; averaging element for air.

2.6 BIMETAL DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. Pressure rating: 12 bar or 20 bar as per system performance requirements.

B. Description: ASME B40.200; direct-mounting, universal-angle dials type.

C. Case: Stainless steel with 100 mm diameter, glass lens.

D. Adjustable Joint: Finish matching case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

E. Element: Bimetal coil.

F. Scale: Satin-faced non reflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

G. Stem: Stainless steel for separable socket, of length to suit installation.

2.7 INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. Pressure rating: 12 bar or 20 bar as per system performance requirements.

B. Description: ASME B40.200, bimetal type.

C. Dial: 25-mm (1-inch) diameter.

D. Case: Stainless steel.

E. Stem: Dustproof and leak-proof 3 mm diameter, tapered-end stem with nominal length of
125 mm.

2.8 SEPARABLE SOCKETS

A. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold
fixed thermometer stem.

1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not less than
thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not insulated.
4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

2.9 THERMOMETER WELLS

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19 - Page 3 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold test
thermometer.

1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not less than
thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not insulated.
4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

2.10 DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES

A. Description: Flanged-fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with threaded end for
attaching thermometer.

1. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not less than

thickness of exterior insulation.
2. Insertion-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not less than
thickness of insulation lining.

2.11 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Pressure rating: 12 bar or 20 bar as per system performance requirements.

B. Description: ASME B40.100, phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom connection;

dry type, for all purpose use. Liquid-filled-case type, for booster sets and pumps.

C. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 100 mm diameter, glass lens.

D. Connector: Brass, DN8 (NPS 1/4).

E. Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.

F. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.

G. Range: Comply with the following:

1. Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure (30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15
psig of pressure).
2. Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.

2.12 PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS

A. Valves: DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass or stainless-steel needle type.

B. Syphons: DN8 (NPS 1/4) coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.

C. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-
metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19 - Page 4 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.13 TEST PLUGS

A. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in DN15 (NPS 1/2) fitting.

B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.

C. Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa (500 psig) minimum.

D. Core Insert: Self-sealing valve, suitable for inserting 3-mm (1/8-inch) OD probe from dial-
type thermometer or pressure gage.

E. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to plus 93 deg C (20 to 200 deg F),
chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

F. Core Material for Air and Water: Minus 35 to plus 136 deg C (Minus 30 to plus 275 deg F),
ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

G. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.

H. Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers, pressure
gage and carrying case.

1. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the system's
operating conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for
applications where used.

3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION

A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

B. Install in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central
systems.
3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit.
5. Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank.
6. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.
7. Each duct thermometer support flange.

C. Install remote-reading dial thermometers in control panels with tubing connecting panel and
thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

D. Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed thermometers are
indicated.

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19 - Page 5 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Install with socket extending to center of pipe.

2. Fill sockets with oil or graphite and secure caps.

E. Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test thermometers are
indicated.

1. Install with stem extending to center of pipe.

2. Install with extension on insulated piping
3. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.

F. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are
indicated. Attach to duct with screws.

3.3 PRESSURE-GAGE INSTALLATION

A. Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on pipe at most
readable position.

B. Install dry-type pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Chilled-water and condenser-water inlets and outlets of chillers.

C. Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.

3.4 FLOW AND ENERGY-MEASURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Refer to section 230900 for flow and energy measuring devices specifications.

B. Install meters in accessible and most readable positions in piping systems.

C. Install flow-measuring elements and as indicated in drawings.

D. Install meters with minimum straight lengths of pipe upstream and downstream from
element as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable meters in accessible locations.

F. Install permanently mounted meters for flow elements on walls or brackets in accessible
locations.

G. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as prescribed
by manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance.

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19 - Page 6 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.

3. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
4. Connect thermal-energy-flowmeter transmitters to meters.

B. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and devices.

C. Ground electrically operated meters.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

D. Install electrical connections for power and devices.

E. Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked
and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touchup
paint.

END OF SECTION 230519

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19 - Page 7 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 05 23

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general duty valves and Motorized valves common to HVAC piping
systems.

1.3 MANUFACTURERS

A. As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and
temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and
arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list
indicating valve and its application.

B. Listing of Product Installation shall be submitted for valve assemblies indicating at least 5
installed units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for a
minimum of 5 years.

C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual. Include
detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single-Source Responsibility: Recommended.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 1 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block checks valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight
enclosures.

C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.

1.7 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D. NRS: Nonrising stem.
E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F. RS: Rising stem.
G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS: USA, Europe, Japan or their own factory except china and the
priority to be for local manufacturers fulfilling the specifications.

2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES

A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.

1. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of
rising stems.

B. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed underground or
above ground, and or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated with 250 micron fusion
bonded epoxy coating.

C. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated in the "Application Schedule" of
Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 2 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Operators: Use specified operators and hand wheels, except provide the following special
operator features:

1. Hand wheels: For valves other than quarter turn.

2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves DN150 (6 inches) and smaller, except for
plug valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Employer with 1 wrench for
every 10 plug valves.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves DN100 (4 inches) and larger, installed 2400 mm
(96 inches) or higher above finished floor elevation.
4. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves DN200 (8 inches) and larger.

F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems

arranged to receive insulation.

G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.

H. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

I. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze
valves.

J. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.

K. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

L. All valves shall be in an accessible location. If not, suitable means of access shall be
provided.

2.3 GATE VALVES

A. Pressure rating: 13.8 bar or 20 bar working pressure as per pressure performance
requirements.

B. Gate Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body
and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy rising stem, Teflon-impregnated
packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum
or malleable-iron handwheel.

C. Gate Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-70, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and
bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem, rising stem, Teflon-impregnated packing
with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron
handwheel.

2.4 BALL VALVES

A. Pressure rating: 13.8 bar or 20 bar working pressure as per pressure performance
requirements.

B. Ball Valves, DN100 (4 Inches) and Smaller: : MSS SP-110, , ASTM B 584 bronze body
and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, standard port for DN15 (1/2-
inch) valves and smaller and conventional port for DN20 (3/4-inch) valves and larger;

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 3 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; Teflon seats and seals; threaded or soldered end
connections:

1. Operator: Steel hand-wheel.

2. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
3. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel tee handle.
4. Operator: Lever operators with lock.
5. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
6. Memory Stop: For operator handles.

2.5 PLUG VALVES

A. Pressure rating: 13.8 bar or 20 bar working pressure as per pressure performance
requirements.

B. Plug Valves: non-lubricated MSS SP-78, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, cast-iron
plug, Buna N, Viton, or Teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections:

1. Operator: Lever.
2. Operator: Square head with 1 wrench for every 10 valves.
3. Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes DN150 (6 inches) and larger.
4. Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes DN150 (6 inches) and larger, 2400
mm (96 inches) or higher above floor.

2.6 GLOBE VALVES

A. Pressure rating: 13.8 bar or 20 bar working pressure as per pressure performance
requirements.

B. Globe Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze
body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or Teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, Teflon-
impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with
aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.

C. Globe Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-85, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and
bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside
screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated packing with cast-iron follower, flanged end
connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.

2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES (LESS THAN 65 MM DIA.)

A. Pressure rating: 13.8 bar or 20 bar working pressure as per pressure performance
requirements.

B. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck,
stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, lug, or
grooved style:

1. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron.

2. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze.
3. Operator: Standard lever handle.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 4 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.8 BUTTERFLY VALVES (DOUBLE ECCENTRIC – 65 MM DIA AND LARGER)

A. Pressure rating: 13.8 bar or 20 bar working pressure as per pressure performance
requirements.

B. Double Eccentric (DE) butterfly valves shall be manufactured in accordance with BS EN

593. Disc of the Valve shall be Double Eccentric Design and have adjustable EPDM sealing
Ring fixed through Retaining Ring made of SS Grade 1.4571.The manufacturer shall have
produced butterfly valves for a minimum of five years. All valves shall be ISO-DE Flanged
Butterfly Valves and comply with the following details.

C. Valve Body: Valve bodies shall be constructed of ASTM A536 Gr. 65-45-12 ductile iron,
which exceeds DIN-GGG-40 and BS-2789 Grade 420 requirements. Flanged valves shall be
raised faced and drilled in accordance with EN-558-1/ ISO 5752 /BS EN 092. All valve
body wetted iron or carbon steel surfaces shall be epoxy coated internally and externally.
The face to face dimension of butterfly valves shall comply with ISO 5752 Series 14 and
shall have a nominal pressure rating PN16 unless otherwise specified. Cast steel valves are
acceptable subject to Engineer’s approval.

D. Valve Disc: The disc shall be designed to afford minimal pressure drop and line turbulence.
The disk shall be designed to withstand the maximum pressure differential across the valve
in either direction of flow. Materials of construction shall be ASTM A536 Gr. 65-45-12
ductile iron, which exceeds DIN-GGG-40 and BS-2789 Grade 420 requirements.

E. Discs shall be retained by stainless steel dry pins which extend through the shaft in blind
holes to withstand the specified line pressure up to valve rating and the torque required to
operate the valve. Disc stops located in the flow stream are not allowed. All disc wetted
surfaces shall be coated with fusion bonded epoxy.

F. Valve Shaft: The shaft made of Duplex Stainless Steel Grade 1.4462 at both ends of the
valve shall be designed dry using sealing sleeves and O-rings.

G. Valve Seat: Rubber seats shall be of one piece molded construction and mechanically
attached to the valve disc by means of seat retaining ring made of SS Grade 1.4571 or
segments and screws. Valve design shall incorporate a double eccentric design to optimize
the seal of the seat retaining ring in position against high pressure and flow.

H. Valve Bearings: Valve bearings shall be of a self-lubricating, non-metallic material to

effectively isolate the disc-shaft assembly from the valve body. Coefficient of friction shall
not exceed 0.12.

I. Valve Operator:

1. Operator for Sizes DN65 to DN150: Standard lever handle with memory stop.
2. Operator for Sizes DN200 and Larger: Gear operator with position indicator.
3. Operator for Sizes DN200 and Larger, 2400 mm (96 Inches) or Higher above Floor:
Chain-wheel operator.

J. Valve Actuator: Manual actuators shall be self-locking type and shall be designed to hold
the valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed without creeping
or fluttering. Actuators shall be equipped with mechanical stop-limiting devices to prevent
over travel of the disc in the open and closed positions. Actuators shall be fully enclosed
and designed to produce the specified torque with a maximum rim pull of 80 Ib. on the

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 5 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

handwheel. Actuator components shall withstand an input of 300 Ft. Lbs. at extreme
operator position without damage.

K. Valve Coating: All surfaces of the valve interior shall be clean, dry and free from grease
before coating. The valve surfaces, except for the disc edge, rubber seat and finished
portions, shall be evenly coated with an epoxy coating system approved for drinking water
applications. Valve sizes up to DN1200 shall be coated using fusion bonded epoxy. Valves
larger than DN1200 shall be coated with liquid epoxy.

L. Testing: Client reserve the right for stage inspection of material, manufacturing process,
testing, etc. by their authorized representatives. Such inspection shall not relieve the
CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for suitable design and workmanship.

M. Hydrostatic and seat leakage tests shall be conducted in strict accordance with BS EN
12261. The valve design shall have undergone cycle testing at minimum of 1000 cycles and
be proven to shutoff at rated pressure with no adjustments or repair to the vale after the
conclusion of the cycle test.

N. Certificates: The below mentioned certificate requirements shall be furnished before

despatch of materials for review of client and obtain a Shipment Release from Client.

1. Certificate of compliance for Valve body and disc shall be issued for the following
criteria in accordance to EN 10204 - Type 3.1 for Butterfly valves. All certificates
shall be either European or USA origin.
a) Heat treatment after coating (if applicable)
b) Chemical analysis
c) Physical properties

2. Certification of compliance for the following tests shall be issued by the manufacturer
according to EN 10204 – Type 3.1. . All certificates shall be either European or USA
origin.
a) Functional tests
b) Strength test for the body
c) Leak test for the disk /seat
d) Coating thickness checks (internally & externally)
A. Non Toxicity Certificate for material in contact with potable water

3. Witness Testing: 5% of each size and type of valves supplied (butterfly, gate, non-
return and air valves) or a minimum of 1 No. of each size and type whichever is
greater shall be made available to Client for witness testing. If the test on any valve
fails, the percentage of valves to be tested will be raised to 10%.

O. Butterfly valve motor:

1. The Control Sub-contractor shall provide actuators for all valves that are furnished
by the control sub-contractor.
2. Actuator shall be motor driven type. Valve stem position shall be adjustable in
increments of one (1) percent or less of full stem travel.
3. Actuator shall have an integral self-locking gear train, mechanical travel stops and
two adjustable travel limit switches with electrically isolated contacts.
4. Actuator gear assembly shall be made of hard-anodised aluminium or steel or
material of equivalent durability. No plastic components shall be acceptable for

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 6 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

the gear drive assembly. Disassembly of the gears shall not be required to remove
the motor.
5. Actuator shall be rated for continuous duty and have an input voltage of 220 Vac,
50 Hz or 24 V.
6. Actuator housing shall have a minimum IP 54 to BS 60529 rating. Actuators on
valves located in mechanical rooms or outdoors shall have covers of aluminium or
a material of equivalent strength and shall have captive bolts to eliminate loss of
bolts when removing the cover from the base. Housings for valves located in a
plenum and used for terminal unit or fan coil unit heating/cooling coils, may be
constructed of reinforced plastic. Materials of construction for all actuator
components shall be non-corroding.
7. Actuator motor shall be fully accessible for ease of maintenance.
8. Actuator shall be sized to meet the shut-off requirements when operating at the
maximum system differential pressure and with the installed system pump
operating at shut-off head.
9. Actuator shall control against system maximum working pressures.
10. Actuator shall fail as indicated on the control drawings that form part of these sub-
contract documents. Provide spring return to de-energised position on loss of
power or loss of control signal if so required by the sequences of operation.
11. Actuator shall accept control signals compatible with the BMS system analogue,
digital output subsystem as appropriate or software interface via open protocol.
The valve stem position shall be linearly related to the control signal.
12. Actuator shall have visual mechanical position indication, showing output shaft
and valve position.
13. Actuator shall operate the valve from the fully closed to the fully open position
and vice versa in less than two minutes.
14. Actuator shall be constructed to withstand high shock and vibration without
operations failure. Materials of construction shall be non-corroding.
15. Actuator shall be equipped with an integral position potentiometer to indicate the
stem position of the valve where required by the control sequences. All valve
actuators shall have integral end position indicators.
16. Actuator and valve shall be mounted and installed only in the location/orientation
approved by the manufacturer. Installation drawings shall clearly indicate the
valve location.
17. Actuator shall have a manual declutch lever to enable manual operation of the
valve. It shall be possible for an operator to manually modulate valves located in
mechanical rooms in the event of loss of power. The operator shall be able to
manually modulate the valves without having to climb a ladder or other non-
permanent structure. It shall be ensured that the valve installation is such that the
valve cannot declutch under the influence of gravity and/or vibration.

2.9 CHECK VALVES

A. Pressure rating: 13.8 bar or 20 bar working pressure as per pressure performance
requirements.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 7 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; horizontal swing, Y-
pattern, ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or
composition seat, threaded or soldered end connections:

C. Swing Check Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-71, ASTM A 126 cast-iron
body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing, weighted non-slam, bronze disc, flanged or grooved
end connections.

D. Air Cushioned Check Valves, DN 150 and Larger: Cast iron, ASTM A126, AWWA C508
having integral flanges, stainless steel shaft, lever and weight, air cushioned side mounted
cylinder, cast iron disk, double clevis connected to ductile iron disc arm, flanged or grooved
connection.

E. Wafer Check Valves: ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, non-slam, bronze disc/plates, stainless-
steel pins and springs, Buna N seals, installed between flanges.

F. Lift Check Valves: ASTM B 62 bronze body and cap (main components), horizontal or
vertical pattern, lift-type, non-slam, bronze disc or Buna N rubber disc with stainless-steel
holder threaded or soldered end connections.

G. Silent Axial Guided Check valve: ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy
seat, Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy Disc, Stainless Steel Type 316 ASTM A 313 spring.

2.10 FAN COIL UNIT PRE-ASSEMBLED HOOK-UP VALVES (OPTION)

A. A pre-fabricated module for FCU hook-up including pressure independent control valve,
actuator, flushing by-pass, isolation valves and flexible connections for terminal units.

B. For PICV specifications, refer to section “239000 BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND

CONTROL SYSTEM”

C. Pressure rating PN16.

2.11 MOTORIZED VALVES

A. Pressure rating: 13.8 bar or 20 bar working pressure as per pressure performance
requirements.

B. General Requirements

1. General

a. All valves shall be designed and manufactured for, continued operation without
seizure, cavitation, excessive vibration or strain; and requiring only that degree
of maintenance generally accepted as normal for the specific type of valve
required. Likewise the valves shall also be able to withstand long periods of
inactivity without detrimental effects on seals, etc.
b. The Contractor shall confirm with his offer the valve components that will
require to be replaced at each maintenance stage.
c. The Contractor shall provide references to where similar design and size of
Isolation Valves assembly have been supplied and are in current operation.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 8 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

d. All parts and components in a given type, size and rating of valve shall be
designed and built for inter-changeability so that replacement parts may be
installed without additional fitting or machining.
e. All pressure containing parts shall be designed to withstand the design
pressure, based on material thickness excluding corrosion allowances.
f. The mating surfaces of any sealing joints shall be fully machined after any
necessary stress relieving. A composite one piece gasket shall be used between
the mating surfaces. Metal-to-metal joints are not acceptable.
g. Joints requiring accurate re-alignment upon re-assembly shall have dowels
fitted, commensurate with valve size.
h. The Isolation Valves shall be required to operate under the chilled water,
heating water and condenser water design conditions as stated in the relevant
documents and drawings.
i. All valves of the same type, size and pressure rating shall have the same face-
to-face dimensions and the same flanges and shall be interchangeable.
j. Isolation Valves shall be designed to open and close against an unbalanced
pressure equal to the valve pressure rating.

2. Manual Operation

a. Where manual operation is specified, Isolation Valves shall be fitted with lever
arms or hand wheels, or stem caps for key operation. Lever arms and hand
wheels shall be positioned to be in either the horizontal or vertical plane.
Suitable gearing shall ensure that stem caps are presented in the vertical
position for operation by ring key and bar.
b. Hand wheels shall be sized such that the maximum force required to operate
the valve is 0.3 kN applied at the rim of the hand wheel, or in the case of ring
key operation, gearing shall be chosen such that the valve is operable by a
standard ring key and bar.

C. Electrically Actuated Valves

1. Electrical Operation

a. Electrically powered actuators for the operation of valves can be mounted

either directly or indirectly.
b. The actuator shall be suitably rated for the valve, the duty and the Contractor's
manufacturer recommendation regarding the torque requirements.
c. A clutch shall engage the hand wheel for manual use, and prevent hand wheel
rotation during powered operation.

2. Local Operation

a. Actuators shall be suitable for remote or local operation electrically by touch

screen display and be fitted with a hand wheel for manual operation. A pad-
lockable "local/off/remote" switch on the actuator shall allow the mode of
operation to be selected. Local electrical initiation of operation shall not negate
actuator control of valve speed or safety functions. A clearly identified actuator
mounted stop button shall allow powered operation to be stopped with one
action. Local operation shall not negate the remote indication of valve and
actuator status and alarms.
b. The Contractor shall ensure that it is possible to operate the clutch to disengage
the motor drive in an emergency. The clutch lever shall be pad-lockable in both
the engaged and the disengaged positions. Hand wheel operation shall have the

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 9 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

facility to hammer the valve off, or onto the seat. The direction of rotation of
the hand wheel for closing shall be clockwise. A plate shall be mounted with
the direction of opening indicated, and the word "OPEN" written in English.
Likewise a similar label shall indicate the closing direction with the word
"CLOSE".

3. Actuator Mounting

a. Mounting of the actuator to the valve or pedestal shall comply with ISO
5210/ISO 5211.
b. The drive mechanism shall be self-locking such that fluid and/or vibration
forces do not cause the valve, disc or gate, to move from any set position.
c. The drive arrangement shall be designed to transmit the maximum torque
induced by the drive motor.

4. Speed Of Operation

a. Speed of operation shall be stated as the valve stroke time from fully open to
fully close.

5. Isolating Operation

a. Actuators that operate infrequently, i.e., at or less than one start per hour shall
be considered to be isolating duty.

6. Failure Mode

a. Unless otherwise specified, actuators shall "stay put" in case the actuator
control systems fail.

7. Mechanical Valve Position Indication

a. The valve actuator assembly shall have a mechanical means of indicating the
valve position. Actuators shall be fitted with limit switches to indicate the
valve position (either OPEN or CLOSE) through BMS.
b. Limit switches shall be fitted as required by the actuator manufacturer, or by
the requirements of the actuator control circuits.

8. Enclosure

a. Actuator enclosures shall have a degree of protection to NEMA 6P. The valve
shall remain fully operational under any flooded condition.
b. Actuator enclosures shall have an inner watertight and dustproof O-ring seal
between the terminal compartment and the internal electrical elements of the
actuator. This system shall fully protect the switch mechanism, motor and all
other internal electrical elements of the actuator, from ingress of moisture and
dust should the terminal cover be removed on site for cabling.

9. Electric Motors

a. Motors shall be of the squirrel cage rotor type, suitable for direct-on-line
starting. Enclosures shall be totally enclosed (non-ventilated).
b. Motors shall have Class "F" insulation, but with a temperature rise restricted to
that allowed for Class "B" as described by IEC 85. Motors shall be rated with 4

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 10 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

starts per hour a minimum and shall permit the valve to be fully stroked in the
relevant time periods.
c. In-built thermal protection and anti-condensation heaters shall be provided.

10. Motors Starters And Control

a. Each actuator shall be provided with a mechanically and electrically

interlocked reversing contactor starter integral with the assembly. The starter
shall operate on 400 V (+ 10%), 50 Hz (+ 5%) three phase supply.
b. Internal wiring shall be of tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of
appropriate size for the control and 3-phase power. Each wire shall be clearly
identified at each end. The terminal enclosure shall be separated from the inner
electrical components of the actuator by means of a watertight seal. All wiring
supplied as part of the actuator to be contained within the main enclosure for
physical and environmental protection. External conduit connections between
components are not acceptable. Terminal enclosure shall be provided with a
minimum of 2 threaded cable entries.
c. Switches and terminals having different voltages shall be segregated from each
other by insulating barriers.
d. Each actuator shall be provided with:

 Local/Off/Remote rotary selector switch (lockable)

 Momentary “Stop” push button (emergency only)
 Momentary “Open” push button (valve to open in local mode only)
 Momentary “Close” push button (valve to close in local mode only)
 Local valve position indicator
 Each shall be labelled in English and Arabic.

e. The actuator mounted stop button shall be a red "mushroom" type. The starter
control circuit shall incorporate over torque and open/close limit switches for
tripping the electric motor during over torque or at fully open and fully closed
positions.
f. Torque and limit switches shall be set prior to despatch from the factory,
consistent with the calculated values corresponding to the maximum operating
conditions.

11. Remote Control And Indication

a. Remote indication and control facilities shall be provided over a BACnet or

Modbus interface compatible with the BMS as follows:

 Open and close valve status from limit switches

 Open and close controls
 Emergency shutdown (ESD) control
 Valve “Actuator Fault” alarm status, which shall be initiated under the
following conditions:

 Phase fault
 Power supply failed
 Control supply failed
 Local “stop” push button
 Local/off/remote switch not in remote position
 Motor tripped on overload

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 11 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

b. The facility shall be provided in each actuator to receive an 'ESD' signal. This
signal shall override all controls, local and remote and close the valve.
c. Labels in English and Arabic shall be provided for:

 Warning of different operating voltages within the actuator enclosure

 Actuator controls and indications

12. Ambient Conditions

a. Actuators shall be suitable for mounting in exposed locations having high solar
radiation, shade temperatures up to 65°C, windblown sand and dust and
occasional heavy rain. Actuators shall also be suitable for subsoil chamber
mounting conditions of high humidity.

13. Coatings For Actuators

a. Contractor’s standard heavy duty coating system(s) will be accepted provided

they comply with the following minimum requirements.
b. The Contractor shall submit full details of the proposed coating system(s) for
review and approval by the Engineer prior to award of any contract or purchase
order. The Contractor’s submittal to the Engineer shall include but not
necessary be limited to the following:

 Proven suitability of the coating system for an aggressive environment,

including UV resistance where required.
 The Contractor's procedures and specification for substrate surface
preparation, coating application and quality control.
 Recommendations for surface preparation and coating application.
 The mean dry film thickness for each coating application and for the
total coating system.

14. Testing Of Actuators

a. Direct mounted actuators shall be tested at the factory, mounted to the valve as
an integral part of the assembly. The testing shall be conducted to ensure that
all requirements mentioned in this specification are met. Related test reports
and certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to
shipment to site. All actuator functions shall be tested, signals being simulated
as needed to complete testing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during
shipping and handling.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 12 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operation.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material
composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.

F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 1500 mm (60 inches) above finished floor
elevation.

H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS

A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.

B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush
to a bright finish. Clean valve socket.

C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.

D. Open ball, gate and globe valves to fully open position.

E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.

F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve.
Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 13 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder
until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once
the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.

3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS

A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall
to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

B. Align threads at point of assembly.

C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry
seal threading is specified.

D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the
pipe is being threaded.

3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS

A. Align flange surfaces parallel.

B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets
as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts
gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for
proper shutoff and retention.

3.6 VALVE END SELECTION

A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

1. Copper Tube Size, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide
threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.

3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. General Application: Use gate, and butterfly valves for shutoff and isolating duty; ball
valves for drain lines, globe and balancing valves for throttling duty. Refer to piping system
Specification Sections for specific valve applications and arrangements.

B. Use gate valves for sizes up to 2 “(50 DN), and butterfly valves for sizes 2.5” (65DN) and
above.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 14 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

END OF SECTION 230523

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 - Page 15 of 15

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."

C. NBR: Nitrile butadiene rubber, Nitrile rubber, or Buna-N.

D. ASCE: American Society for Civil Engineers

E. Locally fabricated: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

1.4 MSS STANDARD (MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE

VALVE AND FITTING INDUSTRY) COMPLIANCE

A. Terminology used in this Section is defined in MSS SP-90.

B. Provide pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58.

C. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-69.

D. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-89.

1.5 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment suitable for seismic
zone of project.

B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - Page 1 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. The contractor to prepare seismic calculations and submit comprehensive report showing
the requirements for seismic system for different MEP systems and equipment for the Engi-
neer approval. Accordingly, The contractor to obtain the relevant items for seismic restraint
hangers and supports for piping and equipment complying with the calculations and the re-
port outcomes. Upon application of seismic forces of computed intensity, piping shall re-
main fully connected into operable systems and shall not be displaced sufficiently to dam-
age adjacent or connecting equipment, or building members. Thermal expansion flexibility
shall not be impaired. Seismic criteria shall be submitted according to the following param-
eters according to ASCE, and local codes:

1. Seismic Zone
2. Site Class
3. Seismic design category
4. Importance factor
5. Risk Category
6. The mapped spectral accelerations for short periods (Ss)
7. The mapped spectral accelerations for a 1-second period (S1)

D. All hangers and supports installation details and any cutting and drilling in structural ele-
ments shall be approved by the Engineer.

1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and ther-
mal-hanger shield insert indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping
supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations justifying forces, sizes, embed-
ments and characteristics of components and fabrication details.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer.

C. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
each multiple pipe support, trapeze restraint by a qualified professional engineer.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - Page 2 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally regis-

tered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is ex-
perienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering ser-
vices are defined as those performed for installations of hangers and supports re-
straints that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and ex-
tent.

D. The contractor shall submit stress analysis study for piping installations more than 300 mm
diameter (12” DN) to prove safety and sustainability.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Re-
fer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger
and support types.

1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-
applied finish.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-strength insula-

tion, encased in sheet metal shield.

1. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium sili-
cate with vapor barrier.
2. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium sili-
cate.
3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of
pipe.
4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
5. Insert Length: Extend 50 mm beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Rigid Supports for Insulated Pipes: Rigid support is mandatory to be used to support the
weight of pipe and its components. The following two alternatives are acceptable:

1. Rigid polyurethane core with NBR/PVC-based elastomeric insulation collars,

wrapped by an outer PVC jacket with overlapping tab system, 120 kg/m3 density,
0.036 W/m2. Deg C thermal conductivity, and tested to comply with surface burning
characteristics of buildings materials as per ASTM E84/NFPA 255.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - Page 3 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Treated wooden pipe support tested, certified and complying with test procedure of
ASTM D 4761, 440 kg/m3 density, flame spread index of 25 and less, and smoke de-
veloped index of 50 and less.

B. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with

pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.

C. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

D. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

E. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and
nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior
and exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified
in piping system Specification Sections.

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as speci-
fied in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, DN15 to DN750 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 30).
2. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, DN100 to DN900
(NPS 4 to NPS 36), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange
and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
3. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for
pipes, DN65 to DN900 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36), if vertical adjustment is required,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
4. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, DN25 to DN750 (NPS 1
to NPS 30), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and con-
traction might occur.
5. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, DN65 to
DN500 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by
expansion and contraction might occur.
6. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN1050 (NPS 2
to NPS 42), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might oc-
cur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
7. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN600
(NPS 2 to NPS 24), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contrac-
tion might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - Page 4 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

8. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN750 (NPS 2 to NPS 30), if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might
be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, DN20 to
DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
DN20 to DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
2. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types
of building attachments.
3. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 49 to 232 deg C (120 to 450 deg F)
piping installations.

F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
3. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
4. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads.
5. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
6. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 340 kg (750 lb).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 675 kg (1500 lb).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 1350 kg (3000 lb).

8. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is re-
quired.
9. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where head room is limited.

G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - Page 5 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to pre-

vent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of
high-density, 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-
treated calcium silicate, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and
encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.

H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping move-
ment.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not ex-
ceed 32 mm.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger
with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variabil-
ity factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system
from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system
from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of
stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment.
Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability.
These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.

B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled channel systems.

1. Field assembles and install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Heavy-

Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
2. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for indi-
vidual pipe hangers.
3. Field fabricates from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being sup-
ported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - Page 6 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space at-
tachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expan-
sion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is
placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

D. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and com-
pletely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install
fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

E. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion
joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

J. Support fire protection systems piping independent of other piping.

K. Insulated Piping: Use Rigid Supports, or comply with the followings:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
b. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barri-
er. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.
c. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-
distribution plate for pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.

3. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. DN8 to DN90 (NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2): 300 mm (12 inches) long and 1.22 mm
(0.048 inch) thick.
b. DN100 (NPS 4): 300 mm long and 1.52 mm (0.06 inch) thick.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - Page 7 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

c. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): 450 mm (18 inches) long and 1.52
mm (0.06 inch) thick.
d. DN200 to DN350 (NPS 8 to NPS 14): 600 mm (24 inches) long and 1.91 mm
(0.075 inch) thick.
e. DN400 to DN600 (NPS 16 to NPS 24): 600 mm (24 inches) long and 2.67 mm
(0.105 inch) thick.

4. Pipes DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equip-
ment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot
be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the
following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corro-
sion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and con-
tours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

D. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.

E. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 40 mm (1-1/2 inches).

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas im-
mediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop paint-
ing. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm
(2 mils).

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - Page 8 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abrad-
ed areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section "Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galva-
nizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

END OF SECTION 230529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - Page 9 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases and vibration isolation
roof curbs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of isolator
specified. Include load deflection curves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional engineer, for the
following:

1. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators and design of

vibration isolation bases.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor
slides and rails, and base weights.

C. Seismic Calculations: The contractor to prepare seismic calculations and submit

comprehensive report showing the requirements for seismic system for different MEP
systems and equipment for the Engineer approval. Accordingly, the contractor to obtain the
relevant items for seismic control for piping and equipment complying with the calculations
and the report outcomes. Seismic criteria shall be submitted according to the following
parameters according to ASCE, and local codes:

1. Seismic Zone
2. Site Class
3. Seismic design category
4. Importance factor
5. Risk Category
6. The mapped spectral accelerations for short periods (Ss)
7. The mapped spectral accelerations for a 1-second period (S1)

D. Seismic Requirements: Submittals are required for all equipment anchors, supports and
seismic restraints. Submittals shall include weights, dimensions, standard connections,
manufacturer's recommendations, behavior problems (vibration, thermal, expansion etc.)
associated with equipment or piping

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - Page 1 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered and

qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced
in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as
those performed for installations of vibration isolation bases that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration restraints. All

selection shall be certified by manufacturer.

C. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration restraints. All

selection shall be certified by manufacturer.

D. Seismic Restraint Requirements (Shall be complying with approved calculations):

1. For equipment:

a. All mechanical equipment shall be suitable for applications requiring

equipment anchorage to resist seismic forces.

b. All mechanical equipment not supported with isolators external to the unit shall
be securely anchored to the structure. Such mechanical equipment, shall be
properly supported to resist a horizontal force of 20 percent of the weight of
the equipment furnished

c. All mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall be provided

with seismic restraints capable of resisting a horizontal force of 20 percent of
the weight of the equipment furnished.

d. Mechanical Equipment: Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected

shall include the following items to the extent required on the Drawings or in
other Sections of the Specification:

2. For piping: The following mechanical systems shall be installed as required on the
Drawings and other Sections of the Specification and shall be seismically protected in
accordance with this Specification:

a. All Piping inside the Building bigger than 150 mm in diameter (to be
confirmed by calculations).

E. Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment: Not to exceed

a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of 5 mm per second RMS, filter in, when
measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal and axial
directions or measured at equipment mounting feet if bearings are concealed.
Measurements for internally isolated fans and motors may be made at the mounting feet.

F. The contractor shall employ an Acoustic Consultant to ensure he meets the criteria.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation devices with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - Page 2 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation bases. Cast
anchor-bolt inserts into base.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Isolator Pads: Oil and water resistant and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of the
equipment supported.

1. Rubber Isolator Pads: Elastomer (neoprene or silicone) arranged in single or multiple

layers and molded with a nonslip pattern and steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness to
provide uniform loading over the pad area.
2. Fiberglass or Cork Isolator Pads: Molded cork or glass fiber not less than 25 mm
thick and precompressed through 10 compression cycles at 3 times the rated load.
3. Load Range: From 69 to 345 kPa (10 to 50 psig) and a deflection not less than 2 mm
per 25 mm of thickness. Do not exceed a loading of 345 kPa (50 psig).

B. Rubber Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene

isolator elements bonded to formed-steel housings with threaded connections for hanger
rods. Color-code to indicate capacity range.

C. Spring Hangers: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger with coil spring and
elastomeric insert in compression.

1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30
degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity
range.

D. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable
engagement.

E. Anchor Bolts: Drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - Page 3 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES

A. Floor Mountings:

1. Double Deflection Neoprene (Type N): Shall include neoprene covered steel support
plated (top and bottom), friction pads, and necessary bolt holes.

2. Captive Spring Mount for Seismic (Type SS):

a. Design mounts to resiliently resist seismic forces in all directions. Snubbing

shall take place in all modes with adjustment to limit upward, downward, and
horizontal travel to a maximum of 6 mm before contacting snubbers.
Mountings shall be have a minimum rating of one G as calculated and certified
by a registered structural engineer.

b. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the
equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height
of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to
solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. Mountings shall have ports
for spring inspection. Provide an all directional neoprene cushion collar around
the equipment bolt.

3. Spring Isolators with Vertical Limit Stops (Type SP): Similar to spring isolators
preceding, except include a vertical limit stop to limit upward travel if weight is
removed and also to reduce movement due to wind loads. Provide clearance around
restraining bolts to prevent mechanical short circuiting. Isolators shall have a
minimum seismic rating of one G.

4. Seismic Pad (Type DS): Pads shall be felt, cork neoprene waffle, neoprene and cork
sandwich, neoprene and fiberglass, neoprene and steel waffle, or reinforced duck and
neoprene, with steel top plate and drilled for an anchor bolt. Washers and bushings
shall be reinforced duck and neoprene. Size pads for a maximum load of 345 kPa (50
pounds per square inch).

B. Hangers: Shall be combination neoprene and springs unless otherwise noted and shall allow
for expansion of pipe.

1. Combination Neoprene and Spring (Type H): Vibration hanger shall contain a spring
and double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring shall have a diameter not
less than 0.8 of compressed operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum
additional travel of 50 percent between design height and solid height. Spring shall
permit a 15 degree angular misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.

2. Spring Position Hanger (Type HP): Similar to combination neoprene and spring
hanger except hanger shall hold piping at a fixed elevation during installation and
include a secondary adjustment feature to transfer load to spring while maintaining
same position.

3. Neoprene (Type HN): Vibration hanger shall contain a double deflection type
neoprene isolation element. Hanger rod shall be separated from contact with hanger
bracket by a neoprene grommet.

4. Spring (Type HS): Vibration hanger shall contain a coiled steel spring in series with a
neoprene grommet. Spring shall have a diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - Page 4 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent
between design height and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular
misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.

5. Hanger supports for piping 50 mm and larger shall have a pointer and scale deflection
indicator.

C. Snubbers: Each spring mounted base shall have a minimum of four all-directional or eight
two directional (two per side) seismic snubbers that are double acting. Elastomeric
materials shall be shock absorbent neoprene bridge quality bearing pads, maximum 60
durometer, replaceable and have a minimum thickness of 6 mm. Air gap between hard and
resilient material shall be not less than 3 mm nor more than 6 mm. Restraints shall be
capable of withstanding design load without permanent deformation.

D. Thrust Restraints (Type THR): Restraints shall provide a spring element contained in a steel
frame with neoprene pads at each end attachment. Restraints shall have factory preset thrust
and be field adjustable to allow a maximum movement of 6 mm when the fan starts and
stops. Restraint assemblies shall include rods, angle brackets and other hardware for field
installation.

2.3 BASES

A. Rails (Type R): Design rails with isolator brackets to reduce mounting height of equipment
and cradle machines having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary
base. To assure adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of
longest base dimension but not less than 100 mm (four-inches). Where rails are used with
neoprene mounts for small fans or close coupled pumps, extend rails to compensate
overhang of housing.

B. Integral Structural Steel Base (Type B): Design base with isolator brackets to reduce
mounting height of equipment which require a complete supplementary rigid base. To
assure adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base
dimension, but not less than 100 mm.

C. Inertia Base (Type I): This applies to diesel generators, any floor mounted pumps and as
shown on drawings. Base shall be a reinforced concrete inertia base. Pour concrete into a
welded steel channel frame, incorporating prelocated equipment anchor bolts and pipe
sleeves. Level concrete to provide a smooth uniform bearing surface for equipment
mounting. Provide grout under uneven supports. Channel depth shall be a minimum of 1/12
of longest dimension of base but not less than 150 mm. Form shall include 13 mm
reinforcing bars welded in place on minimum of 203 mm centers running both ways in a
layer 40 mm above bottom. The whole assembly shall be supported on spring isolators
carrying the base from brackets that keep the center of gravity low. Use height saving
brackets in all mounting locations. Weight of inertia base two to three the weight of
equipment supported to provide a maximum peak-to-peak displacement of 2 mm. For
pumps use wide enough base, so that the supports for the pipe connections are made on the
base.

D. Curb Mounted Isolation Base (Type CB): Fabricate from aluminum to fit on top of standard
curb with overlap to allow water run-off and have wind and water seals which shall not
interfere with spring action. Provide resilient snubbers with 6 mm clearance for wind
resistance. Top and bottom bearing surfaces shall have sponge type weather seals. Integral
spring isolators shall comply with Spring Isolator (Type S) requirements.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - Page 5 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.4 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT

A. Bolt pad mounted equipment, without vibration isolators, to the floor or other support using
ASTM A307 standard bolting material; or, equal.

B. Floor Mounted Equipment, With Vibration Isolators: Type SS. Where Type N isolators are
used provide channel frame lease horizontal restraints bolted to the floor, or other support,
on all sides of the equipment. Size and material required for the lease shall be as
recommended by the isolator manufacturer.

C. On all sides of suspended equipment, provide bracing for rigid supports and provide
restraints for resiliently supported equipment. The slack cable restraint method, Mason
Industries, or equal, is acceptable.

D. Neoprene Pads: Oil-resistant neoprene sheets, of manufacturer's standard hardness and

cross-ribbed or waffled pattern.

E. Vibration Isolation Springs: Wound-steel compression springs, or high-strength spring

alloy steel; with spring diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed height of spring at rated
loads. Provide minimum additional travel to solid, equal to 50% of rated deflection.
Provide spring wire with elastic limit stress exceeding at solid deflection.

F. All-Directional Anchors: Provide all-directional acoustical pipe anchor consisting of

telescopic arrangement of 2 sizes of steel tubing separated by minimum 12.7 mm thickness
of heavy-duty neoprene and duck, or neoprene isolation material. Provide vertical restraints
by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Design for
maximum 3450 kPa load on isolation materials, and provide for equal resistance in any
direction. Equip anchor with threaded hole on top and 2 holes in base plate for bolting
down; or provide welding provisions top and bottom, if indicated.

G. Thrust Restraints: Provide horizontal thrust restraints consisting of spring element in series
with neoprene pad. Select spring deflection same as for equipment loading. Design so
thrust restraints can be pre-set and adjusted in field. Attach horizontal restraints at
centerline of thrust and symmetrically on either side of unit.

H. Fabricated Equipment Bases: Where supplementary bases are indicated for use with isolator
units to support equipment (base not integral with equipment), provide welded rectangular
unit, fabricated of structural steel shapes, plates and bars complying with ASTM A36, as
shown. Provide welded support brackets at points indicated, and anchor base to spring
isolator units. Except as otherwise indicated arrange brackets to result in lowest possible
mounting height for equipment, but provide minimum of 25 mm . Provide bolt holes in
base matching anchor bolt holes in equipment.

1. Where indicated, provide for auxiliary motor slide base under motor or motor slide
rails for adjusting belt tension. Design primary base for bolting of rails or slide base
in position.

2. Where sizes of base framing members are not indicated, fabricate base with depth of
structure not less than 0.10 x longest span of base, rigidly braced to support
equipment without deflections or distortions which would be detrimental to
equipment or equipment performance.

I. Inertia Base Frames: Where inertia bases are indicated for use with pad type isolation units
to support equipment, provide rectangular structural beam channel, or complete sheet metal

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - Page 6 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

box concrete forms for floating foundations, with materials complying with ASTM A36.
Frame unit as shown or, if not shown, with minimum depth of 0.08 x longest dimension of
base, but not less than 150 mm deep. Size frame as shown or, if not shown, so that weight
of frame plus concrete fill will be greater than operating weight of equipment supported.
Provide steel reinforcing both ways with both ends of reinforcing butt welded to base
framing.

1. Provide anchor bolts, located as required for equipment anchorage and supported for
casting of concrete. Locate bolts as indicated.

2. Provide adjustable bolts in pipe sleeves; for minimum of 12.7 mm (1/2") adjustment
around anchor bolts.

J. Isolation Hangers: Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's
standard compression isolators of type indicated. Design brackets for 3 times rated loading
of units. Fabricate units to accept misalignment of 15 degrees off center in any direction
before contacting hanger box, and for use with both rod or strap type members, and
including acoustical washers to prevent metal-to-metal contacts.

1. Provide vibration isolation spring with cap in lower part of hanger and rubber hanger
element in top, securely retained in unit.

2. Provide hangers, precompressed to rated load to limit deflection during installation.

Design so hanger may be released after full load is applied.

K. Flexible Pipe Connectors:

1. For non-ferrous piping, provide bronze hose covered with copper tube ends or bronze
flanged ends, braze-welded to hose.

2. For ferrous piping, provide stainless steel hose covered with stainless steel wire braid
with NPT steel nipples or 1030 kPa ANSI flanges, welded to hose.

3. Flexible pipe connectors to have screwed ends for pipes 50 mm and under and
flanged ends for pipes over 50 mm.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with
requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install and anchor vibration and sound control products according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - Page 7 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates to structural floors as required.

C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates to structural supports as required.

D. Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration isolators.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact
during normal operations.

B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 6 mm of movement at start and stop.

C. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.

D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.

E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

G. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation devices. Remove paint
splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

END OF SECTION 230548

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - Page 8 of 8
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes identification for HVAC piping and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.

B. Samples: Of color, lettering style and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.

C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond paper. Tabu-
late valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on tag, room or space loca-
tion of valve, and variations for identification. Mark valves intended for emergency shutoff
and similar special uses. Furnish copies for maintenance aside from mounted copies.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for lettering
size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS

A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Sections. If more than
single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Contractor's option.

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - Page 1 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or

stamped.

1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating
and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.

C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared with letter sizes conforming to recommendations of

ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 30 mm for ducts, and 20 mm for access door signs
and similar operational instructions.

1. Material: Brass.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicat-
ed. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according to
ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-coded, pres-

sure-sensitive, vinyl type with permanent adhesive.

E. Pipes, Including Insulation: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at
each location.

F. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Engineer.

1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

G. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color
codes:

1. Green: Cold-air supply.

2. Yellow: Hot-air supply.
3. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
4. Hazardous Material Exhausts: Use colors and designs recommended by
ASME A13.1.
5. Terminology: Include direction of airflow; duct service such as supply, return, and
exhaust; duct origin, duct destination, and design flow.

H. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, vinyl

tape, at least 0.08 mm thick.

1. Width: 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm; 65 mm for
larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6-mm letters for piping system abbreviation and 13-
mm sequenced numbers. Include 4-mm hole for fastener.

1. Material: 0.8-mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum.

2. Size: 40-mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain; beaded chain; or S-hooks.

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - Page 2 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

K. Access Panel Markers: 2-mm thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with abbreviated
terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 3-mm center hole for at-
tachment.

L. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls
for each page of valve schedule. Include screws.

1. Frame: Extruded aluminum.

2. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5-mm, single-
thickness glass.

M. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-

resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white
melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message.
Provide holes for mechanical fastening.

1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equip-
ment identification.
2. Thickness: 3 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following

color codes:

1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.

2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:

a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving condi-
tions, and speed.

7. Size: 65 by 100 mm for control devices, dampers, and valves; 115 by 150 mm for
equipment.

O. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized

card stock with mat finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 85 by 145 mm.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO
NOT OPERATE.

P. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in
mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters,
and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical sys-
tems and equipment.

1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems
of same name are indicated.

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - Page 3 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.

B. Marker Type: Stenciled markers complying with ASME A13.1.

C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 150 mm OD by following meth-
od:

1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 20
mm wide, lapped a minimum of 40 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.

D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and larger by following
method:

1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 40
mm wide, lapped a minimum of 75 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.

E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, ceilings, and plenums; and ex-
terior nonconcealed locations according to the following:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at a maximum of 15-m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 7.5 m in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced
markers.

3.2 VALVE TAGS

A. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, and HVAC terminal devices and similar
roughing-in connections of units. List tagged valves in valve schedule.

B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color scheme, and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following:

C. Tag Material: Brass or aluminum.

D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:

1. Chilled Water: 40 mm, round.

2. Heating Water: 40 mm, round.

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - Page 4 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Condenser Water: 40 mm, round.

E. Tag Color: According to the following:

1. Chilled Water: Blue.

2. Heating Water: Yellow.
3. Condenser Water: Green.

F. Letter Color: According to the following:

1. Chilled Water: Black.

2. Heating Water: Black.
3. Condenser Water: Black.

G. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS

A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:

1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices.

2. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
3. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
4. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, and similar equipment.
5. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
6. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units, CAV boxes, fan coil units, con-
trols and components.
7. Tanks and pressure vessels.
8. Strainers, filters, and similar equipment.

B. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in exposed sign
outside concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed above acoustical ceiling or
similar concealment.

1. Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in unoccupied
spaces, including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags.

C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, and exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct
markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows showing service and direction of flow.

1. Location: Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at
maximum intervals of 15 m in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by
removable ceiling system.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked
by work of this or other Divisions.

B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - Page 5 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

END OF SECTION 230553

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - Page 6 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design
objectives, including the following:

1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains,
branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are
included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and
equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to
reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches,
and terminals, according to design quantities.

C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of
high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is
withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield

repeatable results.

E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 1 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In
a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction
side.

H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings
of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.

J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves
the distribution system.

K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.

L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.

O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.

P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Engineer's Notice to Commence,

submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this
Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in
the "Quality Assurance" Article below.

B. Sustainability Submittals:

1. Air-Balance Report for Prerequisite IEQ 1: Documentation of work performed for

ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
2. TAB Report for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation of work performed for
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."

C. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Engineer's Notice to
Commence, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3
of this Section.

D. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Engineer's Notice to Commence,
submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step
procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of
report forms intended for use on this Project.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 2 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared,
as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and
balancing Agent.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either
AABC or NEBB, or another agency acceptable to Engineer.

B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Employer's and the
Engineer's representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and
procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation
of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized
service representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7
days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements.

b. Contract Documents examination report.
c. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting,
and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved
testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in
this Specification.

D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent's
report forms as approved by the Engineer.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards

NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification".

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more

frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Employer Occupancy: The Employer may occupy completed areas of the building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Employer during testing, adjusting, and
balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Employer's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 3 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and

equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and
equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.

B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.

C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water
distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems and equipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the Conditions of Contract of the Contract.

2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are
required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these
balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for
efficient system and equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine project record documents (As-Built).

D. Examine Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design
assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance
data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create
undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was
performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and
charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's
"HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data
and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification
Sections have been performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 4 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing
valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations
are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.

J. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.

K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that
they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that
pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.

M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

N. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.

O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

P. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.

R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing
boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing
and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts,
and cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to
changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.

S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.

3.2 PREPARATION

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 5 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 6 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be
met.

3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this
Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those
removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this
Project.

C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material,
including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar
controls and devices, to show final settings.

3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes
with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.

E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 7 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air
systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multizone, dual-duct,
induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These additional
procedures are specified in other articles in this Section.

B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the
fan manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable
and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan
as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Engineer.
Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to
accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-
motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling,
full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake
horsepower.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 8 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design
airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-
tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.

D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's

written instructions and calculating factors.

E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified
tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at the air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

F. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to
end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate.
Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

G. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

H. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to
the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check expansion tank liquid level.
3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design flow.
5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not
set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless several
terminal valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device
so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 9 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.6 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-
displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Verify
with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure
differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in
gage heights. Note the point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and
confirm that the pump has the intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump
discharge valve until design water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for
the system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated
brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where
actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated pre-settings.

C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-

drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that
is 5 percent greater than design flow.

E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage
over design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over design
flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, and
rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air
temperature.

G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of

balancing.

3.7 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

A. Balance systems with automatic control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through
heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 10 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.8 MOTORS

A. Motors: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.

2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Drives: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the drive, if specified under
Division 26 section “Motor Control Centers”, to prove proper operation. Record
observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate
data.

3.9 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures.

2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed for less
than 3540 L/s (7500 cfm).
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.

B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperatures at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
5. Calculated kW at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

3.10 TEMPERATURE TESTING

A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature
regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2
successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final
temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 11 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.11 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
operators.

F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions
and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to
input changes.

G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on
a grounded or nongrounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.12 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.

3.13 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing
devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes
and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance
measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and
problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each
system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 12 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.14 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in

3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:

1. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers' test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved
Shop Drawings and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in
the final report, as applicable:

1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Engineer's name and address.
6. Contractor's name and address.
7. Report date.
8. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
9. Summary of contents, including the following:

a. Design versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.

10. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

11. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
12. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design
values.
13. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 13 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).

3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Total airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Total system static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Filter static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
f. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
g. Heating coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
h. Outside airflow in L/s (cfm).
i. Return airflow in L/s (cfm).
j. Outside-air damper position.
k. Return-air damper position.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 14 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:

1. Coil Data: Include the following:

a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in mm o.c. (fins per inch).
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
h. Tube size in DN (NPS).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Average face velocity in m/s (fpm).
c. Air pressure drop in Pa (inches wg).
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
h. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
i. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
j. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in kPa (psig).
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg C (deg F).
o. Inlet steam pressure in kPa (psig).

3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Total airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Entering-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Leaving-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Air temperature differential in deg C (deg F).
e. Entering-air static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
f. Leaving-air static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
g. Air static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
h. Low-fire fuel input in kW (Btuh).
i. High-fire fuel input in kW (Btuh).
j. Manifold pressure in kPa (psig).
k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg C (deg F).
l. Operating set point in kW (Btuh).
m. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in kW (Btuh).

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 15 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data: Include the following:

a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).

2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).
g. Number of belts, make, and size.

3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Total airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Total system static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Suction static pressure in Pa (inches wg).

I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data: Include the following:

a. System and air-handling unit number.

b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Duct size in mm (inches).
f. Duct area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
g. Design airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
h. Design velocity in m/s (fpm).
i. Actual airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
j. Actual average velocity in m/s (fpm).
k. Barometric pressure in Pa (psig).

J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 16 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

b. Location and zone.

c. Test apparatus used.
d. Area served.
e. Air-terminal-device make.
f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
g. Air-terminal-device type and model number.
h. Air-terminal-device size.
i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. m (sq. ft.).

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Air velocity in m/s (fpm).
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in L/s (cfm).
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in m/s (fpm).
e. Final airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
f. Final velocity in m/s (fpm).
g. Space temperature in deg C (deg F).

K. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the
following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.

b. Location and zone.
c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flowmeter type.

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Water pressure drop in kPa (feet of head or psig).
e. Entering-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Leaving-air temperature in deg C (deg F).

3. Pump Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following, as applicable:

a. Make and model number.

b. Manufacturer's serial number.
c. Motor make and frame size.
d. Motor horsepower and rpm.
e. Voltage at each connection.
f. Amperage for each phase.
g. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).

4. Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).

b. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Water temperature differential in deg C (deg F).
d. Entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 17 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

e. Leaving-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).

f. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
g. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
h. Bleed water flow rate in L/s (gpm).

5. Air Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Duct airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Inlet-duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Outlet-duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
d. Average entering-air, wet-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Average leaving-air, wet-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Ambient wet-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).

L. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:

1. Report Data: Include the following:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.

3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, performs additional testing
and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to
correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed
during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and
adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION 230593

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - Page 18 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 07 13

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the followings:

1. Duct insulation.
2. Piping insulation.
3. Equipment and valves insulation.
4. Relevant factory or field-applied jackets; accessories, attachments and sealing
compounds.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise
attack surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry state. Materials to be used
on stainless-steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos
free.

B. Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by NFPA 220.

Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation materials, except
cellular elastomers, shall have a maximum flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25 and a
smoke-developed classification (SDC) of 50. Flame-contributed classification (FCC) shall
be as specified for the application. These maximum values shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM E 84 and NFPA 255.

C. Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state. Adhesives,
coatings, and sealants shall have published or certified temperature ratings suitable for the
entire range of working temperatures normal for the surfaces to which they are to be
applied.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.

2. Application of field-applied jackets.

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 1 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Applications at linkages for control devices.

4. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
5. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
6. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
7. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type
of insulation.
8. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use.

1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of
field-applied finish material indicated.
2. Submit 300 mm square sections of each sample material for duct insulation.
3. Submit 300 mm long of preformed pipe insulation materials DN50 (NPS 2).
4. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 300 mm square.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer, indicating,
interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers,
attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.

E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.

1.5 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS

A. As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully a craft training program
certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723, or NFPA 225, by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-
developed rating of 150 or less.

C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups
according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Include the following mockups:

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 2 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

a. One 3-m section of rectangular straight duct.

b. One 90-degree square elbow and one 90-degree radius elbow.
c. One branch takeoff.
d. One transition fitting.
e. Four support hangers.

2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for
insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.
4. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM or other approved specification designation, type and grade, and
maximum use temperature.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with installer for insulation application.

1.9 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments of ducts and piping that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of
less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.

D. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber

materials. Comply with ASTM C 534/C 534M, either in sheets for metal ducts or
preformed circular for tubular pipes.

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 3 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive, as recommended by insulation material

manufacturer.

2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

3. Thermal Conductivity:  0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
4. Density: 65 to 80 kg/m3.
5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.15 perm-inches.
6. Noise Reduction up to 27 L for 20 mm thick insulation.

E. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

F. Rockwool thermal insulation: Insulation shall be 50 mm thick mineral wool bats reinforced
wire mesh, 80 Kg/m3 density, 0.128 W/m.deg.K thermal conductivity at mean temperature
of 400 deg. C secured with metal mechanical surfaces fasteners on 460 mm centers. 75mm
air clearance shall be provided between the exhaust duct and construction material. Exposed
portions shall be finished with 8 ounce glass cloth jacket neatly pasted on, unless otherwise
shown on Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.

G. Calcium silicate thermal insulation: Material: ASTM C 533, Type I; inorganic, hydrous
calcium silicate, non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement; incombustible.

1. Form: Molded flat block boards, curved block, and preformed pipe sections as
appropriate for the surface.
2. Thermal Conductivity: 0.052 W/m.*C at 260 deg C .
3. Dry Density: 180 Kg/m3 at 650 Deg. C.
4. Compressive Strength: minimum 250 kPa for rupture.

2.2 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms,
(measured before factory application or installation), minimum puncture resistance 50
Beach units on all surfaces. Minimum tensile strength, 6.1 N/mm widths. Jackets used on
insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without
sizing.

B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, elastomeric insulation, flame-retardant, all purpose, kraft
paper and aluminum foil.

C. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying
with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over
entire surface in contact with insulation.

1. Finish and Thickness: Stucco embossed finish, 0.7 mm thick unless otherwise noted.
2. Moisture Barrier: 0.025-mm thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

D. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum rolls stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to
indicate sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.

1. Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.25 mm thick.

2. Moisture Barrier: 0.025-mm thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 4 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same
material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

2.3 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Tape: Vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying
with ASTM C 1136

1. Tape Width: 100 mm.

B. Bands: 19 mm wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.5 mm thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.13 mm thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.18 mm thick.
4. Brass: 0.25 mm thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.13 mm thick.

C. Wire: 2.0-mm, nickel-copper alloy; 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 1.6-mm, soft-
annealed, galvanized steel.

D. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and
washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length
sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.

1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface

temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of
45 kg for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.

2.4 Adhesives:

1. Cloth: Adhesives for adhering, sizing, and finishing open-weave glass cloth shall be
pigmented polyvinyl acetate emulsion and shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C 916, Type I.

2. Cellular Elastomer: Adhesive for cellular elastomer insulation shall be a solvent

cutback chloroprene elastomer conforming to ASTM C 916, Type I, and shall be a
type approved by the manufacturer of the cellular elastomer for the intended use.

2.5 Coatings (Option):

1. Cellular Elastomer Insulation: Finish coating for cellular elastomer insulation shall be
a polyvinylchloride lacquer approved by the manufacturer of the cellular elastomer
for the intended use.

2. Coating Color: Coating color shall conform to color code specified or as directed by
the Engineer.

2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 5 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible

with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the
length of ducts and fittings.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet
or dry state.

D. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

I. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

J. Apply insulation over fittings, valves and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply
insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 6 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs at least 300 mm from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation
ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation
to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields
over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger,
support, and shield.

L. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain
vapor retarder.

M. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.

N. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.

2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. Overlap jacket seams at least 40 mm.
Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
4. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids
with vapor-retarder mastic.

O. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing

insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

P. Insulated ductwork and piping Exposed in Mechanical Rooms or parking areas: Finish with
aluminum jacket.

Q. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.

1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-
retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair
punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with
outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as
insulation.

R. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.

S. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

T. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.

1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.

2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 7 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

U. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.

V. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper

sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.

W. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support
at top of floor.

1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation
ends with vapor-retarder mastic.

3.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight ducts, pipes and tubes as follows:

1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe
surface.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts,
plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the
pipe surface.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the
pipe surface.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation
and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to
permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access
to strainer basket.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow
passage of air to the pipe surface.

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 8 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.5 ROCKWOOL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight ducts and pipes as follows:

1. Secure insulation layer of board/preformed pipe insulation with wire, tape, or bands
without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor retarders are required, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with
vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 4.5 to
6 m to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples
at 150 mm o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts,
plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,

overlapping seams at least 25 mm, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of

duct/pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered
sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure
insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.

3. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachment and accessories. Seal seams
with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to ducts as follows:

1. Secure the insulation layer to pipe with stainless-steel bands at 300 mm intervals and
tighten without deforming insulation materials.

2. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed

insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 9 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 25 mm. Apply finish coat of lagging
adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply preformed insulation to duct flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts,
plus twice the thickness of the duct insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner surface of flange insulation and outer surface of adjacent
duct segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same material and thickness
as duct insulation.

4. Finish flange insulation the same as duct insulation.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

1. Apply mitered insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of duct
insulation. Secure insulation materials with stainless-steel wire..

2. Finish insulation of fittings the same as duct insulation.

D. Apply insulation to dampers as follows:

1. Apply mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to damper body.

2. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3. Finish damper insulation the same as duct insulation.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing

insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Engineer.

2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.

B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials
according to these Specifications.

C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to
these Specifications.

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 10 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.9 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
this Section.

C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:

1. Indoor concealed supply, return, and treated fresh air ductwork.

2. Indoor exposed supply, return-, and treated fresh air ductwork.
3. Outdoor exposed supply return and treated fresh air ductwork.
4. Indoor exhaust ducts from tenants that is used for heat recovery at cooling tower.

D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Air ducts not related to air conditioning (exhaust to outdoor, make up...etc.)
2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
3. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Vibration-control devices.
6. Testing agency labels and stamps.
7. Nameplates and data plates.
8. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.

3.10 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Supply, treated fresh air, and return air ducts in concealed spaces in air-conditioned
area:

1. Material: Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation sheets.

2. Thickness: 15 mm thickness.
3. Thermal conductivity: not less than 0.034 W/(m·K) at 20°C.
4. Number of Layers: One.
5. Jacketing: None.

B. Service: Supply, and return air ducts exposed to view in air-conditioned area:

1. Material: Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation sheets.

2. Thickness: 15 mm thickness.
3. Thermal conductivity: not less than 0.034 W/(m·K) at 20°C
4. Number of Layers: One.
5. Jacketing: Aluminum foil.

C. Service: Supply, treated fresh air duct, and return air ducts either exposed in mechanical and
electrical equipment rooms, and attics containing air handling units, or enclosed inside
service shafts:

1. Material: Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation sheets.

2. Thickness: 20 mm thickness.
3. Thermal conductivity: not less than 0.036 W/(m·K) at 20°C
4. Number of Layers: One.

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 11 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

5. Jacketing: Insulation to be complete with reinforced aluminum cladding 0.7 mm

thickness with high resistance to water vapor.

D. Service: Supply, return and treated fresh air ducts in car park:

1. Material: Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation sheets.

2. Thickness: 25 mm thickness.
3. Thermal conductivity: not less than 0.036 W/(m·K) at 20°C
4. Number of Layers: One.
5. Jacketing: Aluminum foil.

E. Service: kitchen exhaust ducts, and smoke duct.

1. Material: Calcium silicate or Rockwool.

2. Thickness: 25 mm for Calcium silicate and 50 mm for Rockwool.
3. Maximum temperature: 400 °C
4. Number of Layers: One.
5. Jacketing: for exposed ducts to view, provide insulation to be complete with
reinforced aluminum cladding 0.7 mm thickness with high resistance to water vapor.

3.11 OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Supply, return and treated fresh air ducts.

1. Material: Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation sheets.

2. Thickness: 30 mm thickness.
3. Thermal conductivity: not less than 0.036 W/(m·K) at 20°C
4. Number of Layers: One.
5. Jacketing: Insulation to be complete with reinforced aluminum cladding 0.7 mm
thickness with high resistance to water vapor and UV protection.

3.12 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Flexible connectors.
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
6. Cooling towers pipes serving chillers’ condensers.

3.13 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Condensate drains galvanized steel piping.

1. Operating Temperature: 2 to 24 deg C (35 to 75 deg F).

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
3. Insulation Thickness: 13 mm.

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 12 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

4. Jacketing: Aluminum foil.

B. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.

1. Operating Temperature: 2 to 24 deg C (35 to 75 deg F).

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Pipe, all sizes: 19 mm, in non-air-conditioned spaces

b. Pipe, all sizes: 13 mm, in air-conditioned spaces

4. Jacketing: Aluminum foil for exposed piping to view, except in mechanical room
provide insulation to be complete with reinforced aluminum cladding 0.7 mm
thickness with high resistance to water vapor.

C. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping.

1. Operating Temperature: 2 to 10 deg C (35 to 50 deg F).

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric with high mechanical resistance.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Pipe, all sizes: 13 mm.

4. Jacketing: Aluminum foil.

D. Service: Generator chimney tube.

1. Material: Calcium silicate or Rockwool.

2. Thickness: 25 mm for Calcium silicate and 50 mm for Rockwool.
3. Maximum temperature: 400 °C
4. Number of Layers: One.
5. Jacketing: Insulation to be complete with reinforced aluminum cladding 0.7 mm
thickness with high resistance to water vapor.

3.14 OUTDOOR PIPING INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Loose-fill
insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in piping distribution Sections.

B. Service: Refrigerant suction.

1. Operating Temperature: 2 to 10 deg C (35 to 50 deg F).

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric with high mechanical resistance.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Pipe, all sizes: 19 mm.

4. Jacketing: Aluminum foil.

C. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.

1. Operating Temperature: 2 to 24 deg C (35 to 75 deg F).

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 13 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.

3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Pipe, all sizes: 25 mm.

4. Jacketing: Insulation to be complete with reinforced aluminum cladding with high

resistance to water vapor in mechanical rooms only.

D. Service: Generator chimney tube.

1. Material: Calcium silicate or Rockwool.

2. Thickness: 25 mm for Calcium silicate and 50 mm for Rockwool.
3. Maximum temperature: 400 °C
4. Number of Layers: One.
5. Jacketing: Insulation to be complete with reinforced aluminum cladding 0.7 mm
thickness with high resistance to water vapor.

3.15 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
this Section.

3.16 INTERIOR TANKS AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Equipment: Chilled-water air separators and compression tanks.

1. Operating Temperature: 2 to 24 deg C (35 to 75 deg F).

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric
3. Insulation Thickness: 25 mm
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.

a. Aluminum Thickness 0.8 mm.

b. Corrugation Dimension: Smooth.
5. Finish: None.

3.17 HYDRONIC PUMPS INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Equipment: Chilled-water Hydronic pumps.

1. Operating Temperature: 2 to 24 deg C (35 to 75 deg F).

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric
3. Insulation Thickness: 25 mm
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.

a. Aluminum Thickness 0.8 mm.

b. Corrugation Dimension: Smooth.
5. Finish: None.

END OF SECTION 230713

THERMAL INSULATION 23 07 13 - Page 14 of 14

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 230900
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM

GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 10, Division 14, Division 21, Division 22, Division 23, Division 26, Division 27,
Division 28 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

The BMS sub-contractor of the Tower shall provide the Building Management System
(BMS), shall implement all features called for in this specification and shall implement the
necessary sequences for satisfactory operation of the system.

The BMS sub-contractor of the Tower shall be responsible for the integration of the BMS
with the other low voltage building systems as detailed hereafter in Scope of Works and the
remainder of specifications.

The BMS sub-contractor shall be a sub-consultant to the mechanical contractor and shall be
a BMS specialist and meet the requirements of section 1.17 "BMS installer qualifications".

RELATED WORKS

The following disciplines contain requirements that relate to this Section:

HVAC

Plumbing

Electrical

ABBREVIATIONS

A/C - Air Conditioning

ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers
ASC - Application Specific Controller
BBMD - BACnet Broadcast Management Device
BTL - BACnet Testing Laboratory
BIBB - BACnet Interoperability Building Block
BMS - Building Management System
BSI - British Standards Institution
CCR - Central Command Room
CIBSE - Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 1 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

CPU - Central Processing Unit

CUC - Central Utilities Complex
DCP - Distributed Control Panel
DDC - Direct Digital Control or Direct Digital Controller
DDR - Double Data Rate
ELV - Extra Low Voltage
EP - Electric-to-Pneumatic
FAS - Fire Alarm System
FCU - Fan Coil Unit
FMS - Facility Management System
HMI - Human Machine Interface
HVAC - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
ICT - Information and Communication Technology
ISO - International Standards Organization
ID - IDentification
I/O - Input/Output
ISA - Instrument Society of America (now International Society for
Measurement and Control)
LAN - Local Area Network
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
LED - Light Emitting Diode
LON - Local Operating Network
LSF - Low Smoke and Fume
MATV - Master Antenna Television
MCC - Motor Control Centre
NAC - Network Automation controller, BTL Certified as BACnet Building
Controller.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NPT - National Pipe Taper (pipe thread specification)
ODBC - Open Data Base Connectivity
OEM - Original Equipment Manufacturer
OIW - Operator Interface Workstation
OLE - Object Linking and Embedding
OPC - OLE for Process Control
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act
PABX - Private Automatic Branch eXchange
PC - Personal Computer
PCI - Peripheral Component Interconnect
PE - Pneumatic-to-Electric
PICS - Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
PDA - Personal Digital Assistant
PIM - Process Interface Module
POT - Portable Operator Terminal
PTFE - Polytetrafluoroethylene (Teflon)
RAID - Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks
RAM - Random Access Memory
RFI - Radio Frequency Interference
RH - Relative Humidity
RTD - Resistance Temperature Device
SAMA - Scientific Apparatus Manufacturer’s Association
SCADA - Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
SCBA - Self Contained Breathing Apparatus
SCPT - Standard Configuration Property Type

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 2 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SCSI - Small Computer System Interface

SMS - Short Message Service (cellular phones text messaging)
SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol
SNVT - Standard Network Variable Type
SOAP - Simple Object Access Protocol
SQL - Structured Query Language
SSPC - Standing Standard Project Committee
SVGA - Super Video Graphics Adapter
TDS - Technical Data Sheets
UART - Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
UC - Unitary Controller
UCPT - User-defined Configuration Property Type
UNVT - User-defined Network Variable Type
UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply
VAV - Variable Air Volume
VDU - Video Display Unit
VFC - Volt Free Contacts
VPN - Virtual Private Network
VFD - Variable Frequency Drive
WAN - Wide Area Network
XIF - eXternal Interface File
XML - eXtensible Mark-up Language

DEFINITIONS

Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem.

Analog: A continuously varying signal value (temperature current, velocity, etc.).

BACnet: The Building Automation and Control Network open protocol communication
standard developed by ASHRAE (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012) and which is now an ISO and
ANSI standard. BACnet can operate over multimedia including Ethernet, ArcNet and MSTP.
The BACnet components shall be fully compliant with British standards BS EN ISO 16484-
5 (Building automation and control systems. Data communication protocol), BS EN 13321-1
(Open data communication in building automation, controls and building management. Home
and building electronic system. Product and system requirements), ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012
and all other applicable codes.

BACnet Object: A physical or virtual point with a set of associated properties such as a
temperature sensor that has properties including, name, current value, maximum and
minimum values, high and low alarm levels, etc.

BACnet Conformance: A description of the capabilities of a device for communicating

information to other BACnet devices. It is usually a set of requirements to be met in order
for a device to conform to BACnet standards. There are 6 levels of conformance for standard
BACnet objects and services. The higher the conformance class the more features that are
covered. The BACnet devices furnished under this sub-contract shall, at minimum, be
conformance class 4.

BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBB’s): A BIBB defines a small portion of

BACnet functionality needed to perform a particular task. BIBB’s come in pairs, A and B,
which reflect the client/server nature. The A BIBB represents the client, i.e. the device
requesting information or commanding an action. The B BIBB represents the server, i.e. the

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 3 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

device furnishing the information or executing the command. For 2 devices to be

interoperable the A BIBB and the B BIBB must be the same.

BACnet/IP: The building automation and control network open protocol communication
standard which complies with ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012 and ASHRAE 135.1-
2013standards.

Binary: A two-state system where a high signal level represents an “ON” condition and an
"OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level.

BMS: This shall mean the complete Building Management System including the components
at the Field, Automation and Management Levels.

Component: Any individual element of the BMS furnished under this sub-contract including
hardware, software and materials.

Control Wiring: This includes conduit, wire, and wiring devices to install complete HVAC
control systems, including motor control circuits, interlocks, sensors, PE and EP switches and
like devices. This also includes all wiring from node to node, nodes to all sensors and points
defined in the I/O summary shown on drawings or specified herein and required to execute
the sequence of operation. This does not include line voltage power wiring.

Diagnostic Program: Machine-executable instructions used to detect and isolate system and
component malfunctions.

Direct Digital Control (DDC) involves the connection of microprocessor-based controllers to

field level sensors and actuators. The signals received from field level instrumentation are
converted from analogue to digital format so that the data can be used in software logic.
Control signals are determined by software logic and they are converted from digital to
analogue format so that the final control elements can be adjusted.

Distributed Control: A system whereby all control processing is decentralized and

independent of a central computer.

Furnish: Purchase and deliver to the appropriate installing sub-contractor, complete with
every appurtenance, document, commission and warranty.

Gateway: A device that contains an input/output (I/O) software driver to translate input data
from one communications protocol to output data in a second communications protocol.

Human-Machine Interface (HMI): Human-machine interfacing allows the operator to

manage, command, monitor and program the system.

Integration: Establishing communication and meaningful data transfer between two devices
based on a standard protocol or through the use of a standard based gateway.

Interoperability: The ability of systems from different manufacturers and of different types
to share information with each other without losing any of their independent functional
capabilities and without the need for complex programming.

Native BACnet: This term is used to imply that BACnet devices (i.e. the BMS controllers
and workstation) only communicate in BACnet protocol and do not require a gateway for
protocol conversion. The BACnet devices shall be connected on a peer-to-peer network using
one of the approved LAN technologies such as Ethernet, ARCNET, MS/TP or BACnet/IP.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 4 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 5 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Network: A system of distributed control units that are linked together on a communication
bus. A network allows sharing of point information between all control units. Additionally,
a network provides central monitoring and control of the entire system from any distributed
control unit location.

Operating System (OS): Software that controls the execution of computer programs and
which provides scheduling, debugging, input/output controls, accounting, compilation,
storage assignment, data management and related services.

Operator Interface Workstation (OIW): The OIW consists of a high-level processing personal
computer and peripheral I/O devices that enable access to the PC and to the entire
Management Level Network.

Peer-to-Peer Communication: Communication directly between devices that operate on the

same communications level of a network without intervention from any intermediary devices
such as a host or server.

Peripheral I/O: Input / Output (I/O) equipment used to communicate to and from the computer
and make hard copies of system outputs and magnetic files. Peripherals include graphical
display, printers, hard drives, disk drives and modems, etc.

Portable Operator Terminal (POT): Permits remote operator interface to facilitate network
management, node commissioning, diagnostics and general operator interface with the BMS.

Programmable Device: A device that does not have a pre-established built in application. An
application creation software tool is required for an application to be created and downloaded
to the device.

Provide: Furnish, install, commission, test and warrant. Refer to the definition of “furnish”.

Router: A device that routes messages destined for a node on another segment sub-net or
domain of the control network. The device controls message traffic based on node address
and priority. Media converters which serve as communication links between power line,
twisted pair, fiber, coax and RF media are sometimes referred to as Routers.

Standing Standard Project Committee (SSPC): ASHRAE terminology for a technical

committee that oversees the maintenance of a standard.

Software: Generic term used for those components of the computer systems that are intangible
rather than physical. The term "software" is used to refer to the programs executed by the
computer systems as distinct from the physical hardware of the computer systems and
encompasses any programs such as operating systems, applications programs, operating
sequences and databases. The term "software" shall be interpreted to include firmware if, in
the context in which it is used, the term "software" does not exclude the use of read-only
memory and the use of firmware meets all of the applicable criteria detailed in these
specifications.

Thin Client: Thin client technology involves delivering windows applications to client
workstations from a centrally based server. The thin client workstation has the ability to
process information but data storage, applications and administrative functions reside on the
BMS server. The applications run on the server and screen updates are sent from the server
to the client. The thin client workstation displays the screen updates and sends operator
entered requests/commands via the keyboard and mouse back to the server for execution.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 6 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Application Specific Controller: A controller generally designed for a specific application and
for a single piece of equipment.

Virtual Private Network (VPN): This is a network that uses encryption and other technologies
to provide secure communications over the Internet or an Intranet.

XIF: “External Interface File” contains the contents of the manufacturer’s product
documentation.

XML/SOAP: Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) is a simple eXtensible Mark-up

Language (XML) based protocol that enables applications to exchange information over
HTTP. Or more simply: SOAP is a protocol for accessing a Web Service.

The above definitions shall apply to the words:

When they are in upper case, when they are in lower case and when they are
capitalized.
In the singular and in the plural.
In all grammatical tenses.

BMS ARCHITECTURE

The following is a general description of the BMS architecture. This description is not
intended to indicate the number of components and neither is it intended to be the only
acceptable BMS configuration. The description of the system architecture is provided to
illustrate the relationship between the various components. Different BMS Specialists may
have a slightly different topology that generally will be acceptable provided that it meets the
intent of these specifications. For the purpose of describing the BMS architecture it is divided
into 3 levels:

BMS Management level

BMS Automation Level
Field Level

The Management Level

The Building Management Level shall provide a means of interoperable

communication between the Extra Low Voltage (ELV) Building Systems using
BACnet/IP. This LAN is hereafter referred to as the Building Management Level
Network. This Network shall provide a means by which the ELV building systems
can exchange data in the form of BACnet objects. It shall be BACnet/IP and shall
be such that an operator with the required access level shall be able to undertake
monitoring and control functions for any of the integrated ELV building systems
from any workstation that communicates with the BMS servers residing at the Site
Management Level.
It shall be the responsibility of each ELV building system sub-contractor, to ensure
that all the system data is available at the Management Level Network in the form
of BACnet objects. Each ELV building system sub-contractor shall provide
comprehensive and complete documentation regarding the BACnet object ID,
component IP addresses, databases and other pertinent information. The intent is
that any third party system provider shall be able to read this data from the network
and shall be able to write data in BACnet format to the third party system.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 7 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The BMS Specialist shall provide comprehensive and complete documentation

regarding the BACnet object ID, component IP addresses, databases and other
pertinent information.
All Servers, Operator Interface Workstations (OIW), Operating Systems and
related applications shall reside on the management level.
The Network Automation Controllers (NAC) shall be part of the Management
Level Network.
As an exception, certain of the NAC shall be at the Automation Level rather than
the Management Level. If a third party system provides monitoring and control
for equipment that is also monitored and controlled by a BMS DDC controller
(such as chillers for example), then the gateway between the third party system
and the BMS shall be at the Automation Level.
The third party ELV Building System Specialist shall provide the interface /
gateway, shall connect the gateway to the data port at the third party Building
System and shall provide complete documentation to the BMS Specialist.
The gateway shall be a BACnet to third party protocol.
The BMS Specialist shall connect the gateway to the BMS Automation Level
Network and shall map the BACnet objects to the associated DDC controllers.
The BMS Specialist shall provide the third party Specialist with the BACnet object
for information that is to be transferred from the BMS Automation Level
Network to the third party system controller together with other relevant
information.
The third party Specialist shall map the points into the third party system
controller.
The BMS Specialist shall map the BACnet object IDs of the third party system
points into the servers. These points shall be treated in exactly the same manner
as any points monitored/controlled by the BMS control panels directly.

The Automation Level

The automation level shall, primarily, include the DDC controllers that interface
with the field sensors and final control elements. It is anticipated that there will
be 2 types of Automation Controllers within the BMS architecture:

Advanced Application Controllers (AAC).

Application Specific Controllers (ASC).

The BMS Automation Level Networks shall be BACnet throughout. No other

protocols shall be used at the BMS Automation Level. All AACs and ASCs shall
communicate on the same protocol.

The Field Level

The Field Level shall include the instrumentation interfaced to the Automation
Level DDC controllers such as the temperature, humidity, level, pressure sensors
and switches etc.
It shall also include the final control elements such as the valve and damper
actuators and the control relays.
All field level cables shall be in containment.
The control and monitoring signals between the Automation Level controllers and
the Field Level components shall be via industry standard analogue ranges, except

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 8 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

where detailed below, such as 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 4 to 20 mA, switched 0 and 5V,
switched 0 and 10V, etc.

SCOPE OF WORKS

The BMS sub-contractor shall perform all related tasks for the full integration over the site
wide Ethernet network, which requires the provision of BACnet objects IDs to be
documented, mapped and furnished over the overall wide IP network.

Provide a complete BMS turnkey installation as detailed in the sections of this specification.
The BMS shall comprise at minimum, the following components:

2 No. BMS Servers

2 No. Operator Interface Workstations (OIW)
Portable Operator Terminals (POT)
Local Area Networks (LAN)
Network Automation Controller (NAC)
Distributed Control Panels (DCP)
Advanced Application Controllers (AAC)
Application Specific controllers (ASC)
Field Instrumentation including intelligent sensors
Automatic Valves
Dampers
Actuators for automatic valves and dampers
Routers, Hubs, Switches, gateways, software as well as all other accessories or
equipment necessary to implement the required interfaces with third party
systems.
Software as detailed herein
Low Voltage Cables (Less than 240V)
All power supplies, interlocking and control relays and other components as well
as containment, Material and services required for a complete and fully
operational turnkey BMS installation in line with the specifications.
The BMS subcontractor shall coordinate the interface between his network and
the building’s converged data network installed by the ICT specialist.

Map the BACnet objects into the servers and present data for the third party ELV Building
Systems that are integrated at the BMS Automation Level.

The BMS shall meet the following general criteria:

Computer based.
Fully networked.
Real time.
Distributed processing.
No single point of failure.

All components of the BMS at the management level and at the automation level, except for
the Application Specific Controllers (ASC), shall operate on UPS. The BMS contractor shall
not provide the UPS. The BMS contractor shall coordinate with the Electrical contractor the
UPS outlets dedicated for the BMS as indicated on the electrical design drawings.

The BMS contractor shall show the power supply / UPS load requirements for
each DCP on the submitted riser diagram

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 9 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The BMS contractor shall submit the calculated UPS loads for Engineer’s
approval.

The BMS contractor shall provide UPS (as an optional item) for the BMS management and
automation levels. The UPS shall be installed in the DCP or in a separate panel nearby the
DCP.
Each UPS shall be monitored by the DCP that it supply the power to. At least the
following point shall be available on the BMS:

Status: Main/Battery/Bypass
Normal Fault
Battery Status
Alarm
The UPS shall automatically provide continuous, regulated AC power to the load
under normal and abnormal conditions, including loss of input AC power. The
UPS rectifier/charger shall convert the incoming AC input power to DC power for
the inverter and for charging the batteries. The inverter shall supply AC power
continuously. Inverter output shall be synchronized with the bypass AC power
source, provided that the bypass AC power source is within the specified
frequency range, and shall supply clean AC power. The battery shall bridge the
gap in a loss of utility power.
The UPS module shall consist of a solid state rectifier/battery charger, a solid state
inverter, a static bypass switch, built-in or external battery cabinet, protective
fuses, synchronizing circuitry, protective devices, and accessories that shall
automatically ensure continuity of electric power within specified tolerance
without interruption
The UPS shall be a standard product of the manufacturer and shall have a
calculated mean time between failure (MTBF) exceeding 24,000 hours.
The UPS batteries shall allow for at least 30 minutes of operation (Backup time)
for the supplied system in case of mains AC power failure
The UPS shall not be loaded more than 80% of its rated capacity.

The components furnished shall be the most recent products offered by the BMS manufacturer
that meet the specifications. If there are improved models of any components that become
available before the on-site commencement of installation then these shall be offered by the
BMS Specialist to the Employer at no additional cost to the Employer. The Employer shall
have the option to accept or decline the offer. The components offered shall have been in
successful operation in at least 2 similar applications for a minimum of 12 months.

The BMS Specialist shall provide all software licenses necessary for the legal operation of
the BMS.

Provide adequate earthing on all equipment to prevent the build-up of electromagnetic voltage
potentials. Provide screening of panels, enclosures, devices, or components that emit
interferences. All monitoring and control and communication cables shall be screened with
one end earthed.

Provide the following support for all components furnished under this sub-contract:
Warranty and service during the defects liability period.
Submittals, samples and record documentation.
Comprehensive commissioning and testing (to be completed by CMO if
appointed).

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 10 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Detailed theoretical and practical training services for the Supervisors and
Operators.
Coordination with other site Specialists.
Reporting to the Employer and Engineer for the coordinated and timely execution
of the Work
Comprehensive and complete interoperability documentation and method
statement for third party systems. The BMS Specialist shall provide separate
interoperability documentation at the end of execution of the project, which shall
detail integrating BACnet objects, controllers or gateways from any manufacturer,
connecting all the hardware of the proposed system to another BACnet system
server or link all the data in the proposed BMS to another system with all their
attributes. This document shall also include the BACnet Object ID of all the
objects captured or generated by the system, database documentation, querying
methods and full documentation to read and write BACnet data with another
system.

The BMS shall support the Distributed Server Architecture (DSA).

COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

The BMS sub-Contractor shall coordinate the work of this contract with the work of all other
trades on the project.

Any task related to the BMS turnkey installation that is not clearly identified in this document
as being the responsibility of another trade shall be the responsibility of the BMS sub-
Contractor.

BMS EXPANSION

The BMS, as installed, shall incorporate a minimum of 20 percent (20%) additional hardware
(field) points without adding controllers. The number and type of the installed spare points
shall be uniformly distributed between the installed controllers.

Network architecture shall allow unlimited expandability by the addition of new sub networks
and associated routers, gateways, etc.

Each BMS as installed shall be expandable, at minimum, to incorporate the following in

addition to the above:

A minimum of 200 percent additional hardware (field) points with the addition of
NAC, DCP, Routers, Gateways and ASC.
A minimum of 200 percent additional system diagrams in addition to those
required to meet these specifications.
A minimum of 10 No. additional interfaces to low voltage building systems of a
similar nature to those integrated under this contract.

Subsequent to the potential expansion detailed above:

The BMS performance shall not be degraded in any manner and shall meet all
performance criteria detailed in these specifications.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 11 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Equipment installed under this sub-contract shall not become redundant as a result
of implementing these BMS expansion requirements.

SHOP DRAWINGS

Prepare an itemized listing of all shop drawings and equipment documentation submittal data
for the Project including all required submissions identified throughout the Contract
Documents. The itemized listing shall include a shop drawing sheet number or equipment
documentation submittal number, reference to the specific Specification section and
description of the shop drawing or equipment documentation submittal item. Submit the
itemized listing within two (2) weeks after commencing work.

Prepare all shop drawings, diagrams, equipment and device schedules, equipment technical
data sheets and software information necessary to ensure compliance with the Specifications.
Submit all shop drawings and equipment documentation submittal data for the work within 1
months of receiving the notice to proceed except the cable and containment shop drawings
detailed below which shall be submitted within 15 days of the notice to proceed.

The following information shall be included on the cover page for each shop drawing and
equipment documentation submittal:

Project name.
Date.
Submittal number and re-submittal (revision) number as appropriate.
Name and address of Engineer.
Name and address of Employer.
Name and address of BMS contractor.
Name and address of supplier or vendor if appropriate.
Name of manufacturer.
Reference to the applicable Specification Section by name and number.
Stamped and signed coordination certification stamp.

Shop drawings shall be CAD generated, minimum A1 plot size. Drawings shall include
diagrams, mounting instructions, installation procedures, equipment details and software
descriptions for all aspects of the system to be installed. At minimum, the shop drawings
shall include:

BMS topology schematic.

Installation drawings and schedules.
DCP, ASC and other panel layouts, including floor plan location and
interconnection drawings.
Field instrumentation locations on floor plan drawings.
Schematic of systems indicating instrumentation locations.
Installation details.
Schedule of cabling including details of proposed cable types.
Composite drawings of all motor starter terminal strips and damper terminal strips
indicating all existing and new wiring by all contractors on the motor terminal
strip.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 12 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SUBMITTALS

Equipment submittals shall include design, performance and installation details for all aspects
of the system to be installed. At minimum, the equipment documentation submittals shall
include:

Equipment technical data sheets with mounting and installation details.

Central monitoring and control equipment details.
Operator terminal specifications and data sheets.
Software specifications and descriptions including operating sequences.
Field sensor and instrumentation specification sheets.
Dampers, damper actuators and Damper Interface Unit (DIU) drawings.
Valves and valve actuator specification sheets and valve schedules.
Details of PID and other appropriate control algorithms.
Proposed Graphical Display schematics.

The BMS sub-contractor shall not implement Operating sequences until the Engineer has
given approval. The BMS sub-contractor shall make any changes to the operating sequences
as requested at the shop drawing stage and as requested by the Engineer following their
implementation up to the issue of the Certificate of Substantial Completion at no additional
cost to the Employer.

All literature pertaining to a particular item, piece of equipment or installation shall be

submitted at one time and shall be specifically prepared for this project. General sales
information brochures shall not be acceptable. Each equipment documentation submittal shall
be properly marked with service or function, any options available that are not to be provided
shall be crossed out or options that will be provided shall be highlighted.

Comply with the requirements of the specifications. Any deviations from the specifications
will not be allowed. Submittals not in accordance with the specification requirements shall
be rejected. Before equipment, devices and materials are installed, they shall have submittals
that are stamped by the Engineer “Approved” or “Approved as Noted”. Submittals stamped
“Approved” or “Approved as Noted” shall not relieve the contractor from the requirements to
comply with the complete requirements of the Specifications. Corrections or modifications
to the work because of errors and/or omissions shall be at the contractor’s expense.

Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified by the contractor prior to submission
to the Engineer. The certification shall be in the form of a rubber stamp that states: "I hereby
certify that the equipment shown on this shop drawing, product data and or sample, complies
in all respects with the requirements of the Specifications for this Project. I further certify that
all data shown hereon as to performance, dimensions, construction, materials and other
pertinent items is true and correct."

(Name of the BMS sub-Contractor)

Signed:
Position:
Date:

WARRANTY AND SERVICES DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 13 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The warranty period for all components of the BMS and their installation shall be 2 years
following the date of completion of the project.

Any material furnished by the BMS sub-contractor which is defective or fails during normal
operation of the system, shall be remedied (replaced or repaired) immediately by the BMS
sub-Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer, during the period prior to the issue of
the certificate of completion, and during the warranty period.

Repair work shall only be undertaken at times approved by the Employer.

Repair work shall not include routine maintenance during the Defects Liability Period. The
cost of providing routine maintenance during the Defects Liability Period shall be provided
separately as an Optional Price as detailed below.

Respond and be on site within 4 hours of the Engineer and/or Employer placing a system
trouble call for items of an immediate nature (e.g.: failed component, non-functioning
controller, etc.).

Response to warranty call out by the Engineer and/or Employer shall be within 24 hours for
items not requiring immediate attention.

Work to troubleshoot and identify the cause of the BMS system or component failure shall
begin immediately and shall continue until repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
Employer.

Any software upgrades and new software programs that become standard product offerings
from the BMS Specialist and/or BMS equipment vendors during the Defects Liability Period
shall be brought to the attention of the Employer together with the cost and, if the Employer
wishes, he shall purchase the software. If at any time during the Defects Liability Period,
software patches that correct software errors become available the Employer shall be notified
immediately and they shall be made available to the Employer at no additional cost.

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE DURING THE DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD (OPTIONAL

PRICE)

Submit an alternate price to provide routine maintenance services during the initial warranty
period. Provide the pricing as an add-on price not included in the base tender pricing. The
maintenance services shall cover routine preventative maintenance and shall not include
emergency maintenance or the cost of materials that are to be covered by the warranty.

Schedule maintenance and repair works with the Employer’s representative to prevent
interference with normal building activities.

During routine maintenance components of the BMS shall be selectively inspected and
serviced during the Defects Liability Period. Provide, at minimum, preventative service
inspections at least once every 3 months during the Defects Liability Period. Perform, at
minimum, the following during each preventative service inspection:

Verify the proper operation of the workstations including:

Cooling fans
Power supplies
PC diagnostics
Clean housings, keyboard, etc. Change or clean filters.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 14 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Verify proper operation of each digital controller and network. Clean enclosures.
Verify the satisfactory operation of at least 25 percent of each type of field device
including valves and dampers. All field devices shall be checked at least once
during the initial Defects Liability Period and shall be calibrated and adjusted as
necessary.
Provide a comprehensive written report to the Employer indicating the results of
each inspection and all repairs and adjustments made.
Perform complete backup of all software.

The routine maintenance services during the Defects Liability Period shall include 20 hours
per year of programming changes to the BMS as requested by the Employer.

Update as-built documentation, submitted at the time of taking-over of the Works as necessary
to reflect any changes that may have been introduced during the Defects Liability Period.

Detail the minimum number of hours to be spent on routine maintenance during the Defects
Liability Period in the tender submittal.

The BMS Specialist shall maintain an inventory of common components in the local office
for the replacement of failed components as detailed under “Spare Parts”.

Provide replacement components within the specified time periods for the following
components. The Specialist shall guarantee to the Employer that the delivery of replacement
components will be provided within the specified time periods.

BMS Component Delivery Time

Workstation Computer Equipment:
a. Server computer components. Five (5) days
b. Operator Workstations and components. Five (5) days
c. Management and automation levels One (1) day
BMS communication LAN components
including any hubs, network interface cards,
bridges, routers, protocol converters,
termination plugs, etc.
NAC. Two (2) days

ASC and DDC. Two (2) days

Temperature sensors. One (1) days
Any other items of instrumentation. Two (2) days

During the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum of 10%
spare DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the
Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over DDC, NAC and ASC of each
type to the Employer which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed
DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on site under this contract.

During the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum of 10%
spare sensors of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the Defects
Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over sensors of each type to the Employer,
which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed sensors of each type
installed on Site under this contract.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 15 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AFTER THE DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD EXTENSION

(OPTIONAL PRICE)

Submit an Optional price to extend the Defects Liability Period and the maintenance during
that period for ten (10) one (1) year periods. The maintenance service contract shall be an all-
inclusive labor and parts contract but the Employer reserves the right to obtain parts from
alternative sources.

The requirements during each additional year shall be exactly the same as those detailed in
paragraphs "warranty and services during the defects liability period" and "routine
maintenance during the defects liability period (optional price)".

The BMS Specialist shall enter into a direct contract with the Employer to provide the
maintenance services for a minimum period of ten (10) years. The Employer shall have the
option to renew each year if the Employer so wishes. The BMS Specialist shall submit the
cost for the maintenance service agreement in one of the following ways:
A fixed price for a ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out between labor and parts, or A
fixed price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out between labor
and parts for the first year and A percent value or a table of percent values that the labor
portion of the cost would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years and a percent
value or a table of percent values that the parts portion of the cost would be escalated at during
the succeeding nine (9) years, or A fixed price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement
with a break-out between labor and parts for the first year with the annual increase for labor
and parts over the succeeding nine (9) years based on the annual percent increase in a cost of
living index from one year to the next, the cost of living index to be used is to be specified
by the BMS Specialist in the tender submittal.

If at any time during the maintenance service contract, software patches that correct software
errors become available the Employer shall be notified immediately and they shall be made
available to the Employer at no additional cost.

During the Defects Liability Period Extension the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum
of 10% spare DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on site under this contract. At the
end of the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over DDC, NAC and ASC
of each type to the Employer which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of
installed DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on site under this contract.

During the Defects Liability Period Extension the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum
of 10% spare sensors of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the
Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over sensors of each type to the
Employer, which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed sensors of
each type installed on Site under this contract.

CODES, PERMITS AND APPROVAL

Obtain all required permits and inspection certificates. All permits and certificates shall be
made available to the Employer.

The latest requirements of all national, county, municipal and other authorities having
jurisdiction shall be met.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 16 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Work shall be performed in compliance with Employer's insurance underwriters'

requirements.

All electrical work shall comply with Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods”.

All components shall be IP 2X finger protected to IEC 60529 such that live components
cannot be accidentally touched. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to IEC 60529
and exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to IEC 60529 unless specifically noted
otherwise within these documents.

The BMS Specialist shall only offer equipment that meets UL 916 requirements and all
electrical components shall be UL listed and shall carry the UL label.

The BMS shall be listed and manufactured to ISO 9001 and ISO 9002.

All electrical installation work shall conform to the requirements specified in the electrical
trade contract documents. Where there is any conflict between the requirements of the
different project trade contract documents, statutes, codes, regulations, local ordinances and
any requirement of an agency having jurisdiction over the project, the most stringent
requirement shall apply unless determined otherwise by Engineer. Advise the Engineer of any
discrepancy between the various requirements for the project.

Each component shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Manufactured by experienced manufacturers of the specific component and

facilities.
Designed to minimize the requirement for field repair or maintenance.
Modular design.
Electronic components shall have internal failure diagnostics.
Each component shall be maintainable without significantly affecting the ongoing
operation of the other components.
Components, test ports and cable terminations shall be readily accessible.
Damage caused by the failure of one component will be limited to the component
that has failed without affecting the ongoing operation of the other components.
Analytic software applications to optimize the building’s performance, fault
detection and diagnostics shall be adopted by the BMS contractor.

Equipment, devices and materials shall conform to all performance requirements of the
specifications when exposed to the following interferences:

Project lighting, telephone and elevator equipment.

VHF and UHF signals as generated by external or internal portable or fixed
transmitters.
AM signals as generated from transmitters.
Electrical noise on the building power system, both spurious and harmonics.
The installations shall not radiate signals that cause interference to the correct
operation of The Employer’s on-site equipment.
The BMS and all individual electrical equipment, devices and components shall
comply with the requirements of IEC 61000-6-3 (General Emission Standard) and
IEC 61000-6-1 and 2 (General Immunity Standard), the requirements of the
Federal Communication Commission rules and regulations Part 15, sub part J and
all other applicable codes and statutes with respect to the radiation and conduction
of radio frequency interference.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 17 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SCHEDULE

Complete all requirements of the BMS sub-contract in accordance with the project program
and prior to the scheduled Substantial Completion date for each phase.

Attend project meetings as requested by the Engineer.

Provide to the Engineer a schedule indicating the sequence of work, durations of individual
tasks, delivery dates for all material, devices and equipment and detail any interface that must
be coordinated with any other Specialists.

Provide written status reports at required intervals and in a format acceptable to the Engineer.
An updated schedule of work shall be included in each status report.

Comply with the Project Construction Schedule. Provide additional staffing or work overtime
as required to comply with the Project Schedule so as not to interfere with other on-site
Specialists in their effort to comply with the Project Schedule. Confirm, prior to tender
submittal that all equipment, devices, material and services proposed are available and will
be delivered accordingly to comply with the Project Schedule.

Provide written Request For Information (RFI) notices to the Engineer when specific
information or clarification of the specifications is required. Request For Information notices
shall be provided at least two (2) weeks prior to the need for the information.

BMS INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

The BMS specialist shall:

Have a local staff, within 50 kilometers of the project site, of trained personnel
capable of giving instructions and providing routine and emergency maintenance
on the BMS, all components and software/firmware and all other elements of the
BMS.
Have a proven record of experience in the supply and installation of equivalent
systems over a minimum period of ten (10) years in the project area.
Have comprehensive local service and support facilities for the total BMS that
shall be capable of responding to Client call-out within 2 hours, 7 days a week.
Maintain local, or have approved local sub-contracted access to, supplies of
essential expendable parts.
Undertake to maintain necessary project staff and maintenance personnel as per
the Employer’s requirements.

HEALTH AND SAFETY

Work shall comply with all the requirements of the Health and Safety Commission and with
all of the instructions of the Engineer and Project Manager.

UNIT PRICES

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 18 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The BMS specialist is to provide a tender price for the complete BMS. In addition, the BMS
specialist shall provide unit prices for all items and equipment installed under the contract in
sufficient details to enable additions and deletions to the contract to be priced by the
Employer.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 19 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

PRODUCTS

GENERAL

When a specific reference to a manufacturer of a product is made, and the term "equal and
approved" is used, substitutions of a product by another manufacturer will be allowed, but the
substituted product must conform to all specified requirements. The Engineer’s determination
on the acceptability of substitutes shall be final. Approved substituted equipment shall
conform to available space requirements. Substituted equipment that does not conform to the
available space requirements shall be replaced or required modifications shall be made at no
additional cost to the Employer.

All equipment and materials shall be new and without any defect. All components of one type
shall be products of one manufacturer (temperature sensors, dampers, etc.).

Hazardous Materials Notification: In the event no product or material is available that does
not contain asbestos, PCB, or other hazardous materials as determined by the Engineer, a
written application shall be made by the BMS Specialist to the Engineer providing all relevant
details concerning a proposed product or material that contains hazardous material prior to
installation.

Asbestos and PCB Certification: After completion of installation, but prior to Substantial
Completion, the BMS Specialist shall certify in writing that products and materials installed,
and processes used, do not contain asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB).

PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATION

The BMS Specialist shall certify in writing with the tender submittal that all components
proposed for this project comply with all of the following requirements:

Complete and thorough testing has proven that performance shall not be affected
when the building electrical distribution system experiences disturbances of the
type and magnitude normally encountered in buildings of this nature.
Power line disturbance tests involving the cycling of mains voltage showed that
all components operated satisfactorily when the voltage dropped to 75% or less of
the nominal mains voltage and normal operation resumed when the voltage
returned to less than 85% of the nominal mains voltage. Following these brownout
conditions the components were free of any stress and/or damage, operated as
normal and no data at the PC, NAC, DCP, DDC, Gateways and/or ASC was lost
or corrupted.

AMBIENT CONDITIONS

Provide equipment, devices and materials for interior and exterior applications that shall be
capable of withstanding and operating satisfactorily in, at minimum, the following ambient
conditions:

0 °C. (41 °F.) to 55 °C. (131 °F.) temperature.

10-95 percent relative humidity (non-condensing).

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 20 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Electrical power service of single phase 220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz nominal with tolerances in
compliance with the applicable statutes, codes and regulations.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of the contract Documents

Accept products on site and verify damage.

Protect products from construction operations, dust and debris by storing in conditioned
space.

SPARE PARTS

Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment furnished. Data to include a
complete list of the sources of supply, a list of parts and supplies that are either normally
furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of the equipment, or specified hereinafter as
EXTRA MATERIALS to be furnished as part of the sub-contract

Submit a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to assure efficient

operation for a period of 360 days at the particular installation. The foregoing shall not relieve
the Specialist of any responsibilities under the guarantee condition.

EXTRA MATERIALS

Provide special hardware and software tools required for maintenance.

Provide two of each plug in circuit board.

Provide 5000 sheets of continuous form paper.

LABELING

Provide labeling for all DDC controllers, NAC, DCP, Gateways, Routers, Hubs, field level
components, etc, panels and enclosures. Labeling shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:

Plastic laminated label that shall be affixed to the panel or enclosure with rivets or
permanent adhesive.
Lettering 6mm (0.25 inch) high that sharply contrasts the background colour.
Consistent throughout the project.
Indicated on the record documentation.

Provide labeling of all cabling and containment. Labeling shall meet, at minimum, the
following requirements:

Identified with permanent tag or self-adhesive label within the panel.

Cross referenced on the associated record documentation and laminated record
drawing within the panel enclosure.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 21 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The BMS Specialist shall provide labelling for all cable furnished and installed by
the ICT Specialist for the use of the BMS Specialist.

WARNING NOTICE

Provide warning notices at all equipment controlled by the BMS and at all associated motor
starters and MCC panels where notices of a similar manner have not been provided by other
trades. Warning labels shall be installed, at minimum, at the following locations:

AHU access doors.

AHU motor starter and VFD controllers.
Pump motors.
Pump motor starter and VFD controllers.
Fan enclosure or access panel.
Fan motor starter and VFD controllers.
All other equipment and installations that are monitored and/or controlled by the
BMS.

The warning notices shall be 75 mm by 125 mm (3in. by 5in.) minimum, with yellow
background and with black lettering. The notices shall state the following:

THIS EQUIPMENT IS UNDER AUTOMATIC

CONTROL AND MAY START OR STOP AT
ANY TIME WITHOUT WARNING.

The warning notices shall be securely attached to the equipment at a location approved by the
Engineer and shall be highly visible. Submit a sample with shop drawings.

PANELS AND ENCLOSURES

Provide panels and enclosures for all components of the BMS except where it is specifically
identified within these contract documents that the enclosure shall be furnished by another
trade. Panels and enclosures shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Painted steel panels with locking door. All panels shall be lockable with the same
key and shall include a lamp.
Ventilated to prevent excessive heat build-up, where required.
Field cabling shall be terminated on a terminal strip. Provide strain relief.
Internal components shall be installed to allow easy access for diagnostics,
maintenance, removal or replacement.
Panel or enclosure shall be suitable rated for the environment for which it is to be
installed. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to IEC 60529 and
exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to IEC 60529 unless specifically
noted otherwise within these sub-contract documents.
Panel or enclosures shall have 20% spare space for future addition of BMS
controllers.

Panels and enclosures shall only be located as indicated on the drawings prepared by the
contractor upon approval of BMS materials and at Engineer approved locations.

The BMS Specialist shall not furnish MCC panels, motor starters, variable speed controllers
and local disconnect switches. The trade furnishing the motor starters and variable frequency

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 22 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

drives shall provide an interface terminal strip in a dedicated enclosure which may be a
separate external enclosure or may be a compartment within the motor starter enclosure. Refer
to the sub-contract documents for the trade furnishing the motor starter and the variable speed
controllers for the details of the enclosures. The DDC controllers shall not be located in the
MCC panels

CONDUIT, TRUNKING AND FITTINGS

Comply with Division 26, Specifications Sections: Raceways and Boxes for Electrical
Systems” and “Cable Trays for Electrical Systems”.

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

General Cable requirements: Size and type as recommended in writing by system

manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

All input/output field cables shall be at least 18AWG (0.8sqm) where a multi-pair cable shall
not share analog and digital signals or digital outputs and digital inputs, wiring shall follow
the following rule:
One multi-pair cable for Analog Input / Output only
One multi-pair for Digital Outputs only
One multi-pair for Digital Inputs only

All the cables carrying analog signals shall be screened and shall have a drain wire.

Comply with the following Specification Sections – as applicable to power, control and data
signal transmission cables:
Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”
Division 27 Section “Communications Horizontal Cabling.”

LSZH: For use in plenum installation as per adopted Standards for the Project. Refer to
Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for LSZH cables
for installation in Plenum areas.

Fire Resistant Cables: For use with life safety installations interface. Refer to Division 26
Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”.

Grounding Components: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems."

Terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure. Twist type wire nuts shall not be
acceptable. Insulated tinned copper lugs shall be provided.

Cable within panels or enclosures shall be installed in wiring guides.

All wiring terminations within field panels shall be terminated at terminal stripes and shall be
identification tagged on both sides of the terminal strip.

Cable run in vertical trunking shall have means of cable support, at minimum, every 2m.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 23 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

BMS SERVER (BMSS)

General

All hardware, software, firmware, and/or operating system requirements given are the
minimum requirements. The Contractor's product shall meet or exceed these
requirements. Additionally, and due to the rapid advancement and antiquation of
hardware technology, the supplied hardware shall be the “contemporary technical and
operational equivalent” of the specified hardware. The following requirements shall be
met:
Contemporary technical and operational equivalent shall be based on a comparison
of technology at the time of Contract to the technology at the time of ordering the
equipment for each phase.
Hardware shall be ordered as close to the actual installation date for a given phase
as possible. Final hardware approval and scheduled order date shall be at the sole
discretion of the Employer.
Hardware equivalence shall be based on both technical equivalence and operational
equivalence.
Contemporary technical equivalence shall be based on device performance and class
specifications.
Contemporary operational equivalence shall be based on industry standards and
function.

Environmental Rating: Equipment shall be rated for continuous operation under the
ambient environmental temperature, humidity, and vibration conditions encountered at
the installed location.

To ensure compatibility among devices, all hardware equipment shall be supplied by a

single manufacturer. Solutions which are based on sourcing equipment from different
manufacturers, are not acceptable.

Hardware specification

No. Hot redundant fault tolerant servers shall be installed at the control room.

The Contractor shall design servers that are able to cope with the foreseen workload; the
Contractor shall indicate the workload’s increase percentage that the servers will be
able to cope with.

Contractor shall deliver Rack servers or Blade servers and shall configure them
accordingly.

Processor:
a. Contractor shall provide an Intel Xeon processor - family E5. Latest available
family’s version at the time of ordering shall be provided; if E5 v4 family is
launched, processors from E5 v3 family are not accepted.
b. Bus type: QPI.
c. Instruction set: 64-bit.
d. Instruction Set Extensions: AVX 2.0

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 24 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Memory specifications:
Memory type: DDR4. All latest versions by Intel (E3 v5, E5 v4 and E7 v3 families)
support DDR4 memory type.
Maximum Memory Bandwidth: 59.7 GB/s or higher. Max Memory bandwidth is
the maximum rate at which data can be read from or stored into a semiconductor
memory by the processor (in GB/s).
Maximum Memory size: 1536 GB or better.
Supported Intel Data Protection Technology:
Intel AES New Instructions.
Secure Key.
Supported Intel Platform Protection Technology:
OS guard.
Trusted Execution Technology.
Execute Disable Bit.
Expansion slots’ technology: PCIe 3.0
Hot-swappable cooling fans shall be provided.
Calculation:
Based on the BMS manufacturer’s recommendations and the physical total
number of I/O points, Contractor shall provide by justified calculations - for
each of the servers - the choice of the:
Processor’s number of cores.
Contractor shall not use the Hyper-Threading technology in order to meet the
required number of cores; Contractor shall provide a physical number of cores
equal or greater than the required number.
CPU frequency.
RAM.
Storage capacity (calculated at maximum frequency).
The total average CPU load shall not exceed 40%. Contractor shall increase the
CPU number of cores and RAM in order to maintain the required average CPU
load. The server storage hardware shall be calculated for 5 years, configured
using hardware RAID 5 and designed to use less than 60% of the available space.
Calculation shall clearly state the analog tags’, the discrete tags’, and the string
tags’ number in addition to the update’s rate.
Hard drives: HDD SAS Server RAID System shall have integrated RAID 5 with
on board RAID controllers.
Software RAID instead of a dedicated RAID controller chip is not acceptable.
Enclosure:
Servers shall be rack mounted in a standard 19” racks complying with EIA/ECA-
310-E and IEC 60297 Mechanical structures for electronic equipment -
Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6 mm (19 in) series:

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 25 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

IEC 60297-3-100 Part 3-100: Basic dimensions of front panels, subracks,

chassis, racks and cabinets

IEC 60297-3-101 Part 3-101: Subracks and associated plug-in units

IEC 60297-3-102 Part 3-102: Injector/extractor handle

IEC 60297-3-103 Part 3-103: Keying and alignment pin

IEC 60297-3-104 Part 3-104: Connector dependent interface dimensions of

subracks and plug-in units
IEC 60297-3-105 Part 3-105: Dimensions and design aspects for 1U chassis

Enclosure Accessories: Contractor shall be responsible for providing fans,

shelves, drawers, special power wiring, ground connections, cables, connectors,
appurtenances, and adapters of any kind necessary to accommodate the system
installation, operation, testing, or maintenance.
Operating System
The latest supported version of the Operating System shall be provided.
The following Operating Systems shall be supported:
Microsoft Windows Server.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL)
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES).
VMware.
Citrix XenServer.

OPERATOR INTERFACE WORKSTATIONS (OIW)

The 2 No. OIW shall comprise a PC and associated peripheral operator I/O devices. The OIW
shall be located as follows:
R1.1 Building BMS Control Room

The OIW PC, shall have the latest release of Microsoft Windows professional operating
system at the time of implementation and shall have, at minimum, the following facilities:
Intel® Core™ i7-13 GEN. 3.4GHz, 8M 4C TWR CPU or a better performing model.
At least 1 TB RAID 1 Mirrored Array Configuration.
16 GB DDR4-2133 ECC Unbuffered RAM.
100/1000Mbps Ethernet adapter.
1GB DDR4 [DVI, HDMI.].
4 USB ports.
SuperMulti DVD Burner.
Real time software or hardware clock.
Tower Case with minimum of 4 external 5¼” and 3 Internal 5¼” drive bays, 400 watt or
greater capacity rated power supplies, internal cooling fan and external keyboard lock.
All necessary mounting hardware and cables for all components.
Integral power supplies which shall be suitably rated for the service.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 26 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Provide an alarm to uniquely identify a PC communication failure. One way that this might
be accomplished is by using a watchdog timer at a DDC controller.

Following a power failure, all PC shall return to a fully operational status without operator
intervention within two (2) minutes of the return of mains power. Software changes,
including modifications to database(s), shall not be lost in a power failure.

All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognized
manufacturer of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest time possible
without causing a delay in the schedule in order to ensure that it is state-of-the-art and is based
on the latest proven technology. All PC shall be suitable for rugged and continuous operation.

The following peripheral I/O devices shall be provided at each OIW:

Keyboard and mouse.
Flat panel LCD video display unit.
Alarm printer.
Report Printer.

The BMS OIW at each location shall have 1No. Report Printer. Where there are multiple OIW
at one location the printer shall be networked such that they are available to each OIW.

PERIPHERAL OPERATOR I/O DEVICES

Printers: General
The operator shall be able to direct the hardcopy output to any printer. The BMS
Specialist shall set up the system such that all BMS generated messages such as alarms,
returns to normal, etc. are directed to the appropriate alarm printers and all BMS
automatically generated and operator requested reports are output to the appropriate
report printer.
The printers at one location shall be accessible from any OIW such that an operator at
one location can generate a hardcopy message at any other location.

Printers: Alarm Printers

The alarm printer shall meet the following specifications:

Minimum print speed of 300 characters/second. Slower speed printers shall not be
acceptable when printing in normal quality.
Selectable character sizes
Sprocket paper feed.
Top-of-page, skip and tab control.
The printers shall accept continuous fan-fold paper with a width equivalent to A3 size (297
mm by 420 mm).
Constructed for heavy duty-cycle environment.
24 x 24 dot matrix printer

Printers: Report Printers

The report printer shall meet, at minimum, the following specifications:

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 27 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Minimum print speed of twelve pages per minute black and three pages per minute color.
Slower speed printers shall not be acceptable when printing in normal quality.
Scalable fonts.
Single or double bin paper trays, capable of printing A3 size (297mm x 420mm) and A4
size (210mm x 297mm).
Page feed and page discharge controls.
Color and black and white printing capability without changing ink or toner cartridges.
1200 dpi black and white and 600 x 300 dpi color.
Laser jet technology.

Keyboard:
Provide a keyboard for operator access at each OIW and server. This shall be in addition
to any other operator input device such as a mouse.
The keyboard shall be in a standard typewriter (QWERTY) configuration with a full
alphanumeric standard ASCII character set and with additional dedicated keys for other
functions associated with the BMS such as print screen.

Mouse:
Provide a mouse at each OIW and server and configure the system such that cursor
control can be undertaken from both the keyboard and mouse as selected by the operator.
Mouse shall be latest optical technology.

Graphical Display:
Provide a Full HD resolution LCD with LED backlight graphical display at each OIW
and server. The monitor shall be a flat panel type with standard HDMI Input.
The graphical display shall be used for the display of operator entered and requested data
and the output of BMS generated alarm and other information.
The graphical display shall have a minimum screen diagonal measurement of 25 inches.
The graphical display shall be full HD 1080P having a minimum resolution of 1920 by
1080 pixels with 100 Hz minimum refresh rate.
The unit shall be capable of displaying both schematic and alphanumeric data at the same
time.
A minimum of 16.7 million discrete colors shall be available for display selection.
Integral stereo speakers.

PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL (POT)

The POT’s devices shall not be used by the BMS Specialist for commissioning the BMS or
for any other purpose and shall be delivered new to the Employer immediately prior to the
acceptance testing.

Provide a jack at each DDC controller and at each mechanical and electrical room for the plug
connection of the POT. Provide two spare cables for plug connection for each POT. The
operator shall be able to communicate with the BMS via the POT using the same operator
interface as that at any OIW PC.

The POT shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 28 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

4th generation Intel® Core™ i7-4710HQ Quad Core Processor (2.5GHz, turbo up to
3.5GHz) with 6MB Cache and Hyper Threading
512 GB PCIe SSD.
8GB DDR3 1600 MHz RAM.
100/1000Mbps Ethernet adapter.
Wi-Fi® Wireless networking (802.11b/g/n/ac) with Bluetooth® v3.0
14.0" IPS FHD 1920x1080p.
40X Speed CD-ROM drive (interchangeable).DVD SuperMulti (+/-R double layer)
drive.
Integral power supplies which shall be suitably rated for the service.
Integral QWERTY keyboard with full ASCII character set.
Weight, including carrying case, not to exceed 3.5kg.
Provide a carrying case designed specifically for the POT that ensures adequate
protection.
POT shall be powered by a rechargeable battery and shall also be powered by a 220/240
Vac, nominal 50/60 Hz source. Provide batteries adequate for a minimum of 4 hours of
operation.

When connected to the BMS Automation Level at the DDC controllers or at a network data
port, the POT shall be able to undertake all of the control and monitoring functions that can
be performed at the OIW. One of the POT’s shall be used to configure the system
components.

CONSOLES

The Contractor shall provide the enclosure’s furniture of the control rooms’ workstations
referred to as consoles. The work-surface height shall be 72cm above the finished floor.

The consoles shall accommodate the display, and the operator interface’s devices.

The consoles shall satisfy the functional, ergonomic and aesthetic requirements of the
operational environment.

The consoles shall be of modular design, facilitating future equipment retrofits and full
reconfigurations without major modification to the structure or to the exterior elements.

The consoles shall have the possibility to customize the mounting positions in order to suit
both the operator and the equipment’s requirements.

The consoles shall be provided with ventilation, task lighting, bottom cable entry, cable
management system, power bars, adjustable monitor height and angle.

The Contractor shall provide pre-production review drawings of the console arrangements in
order to verify the equipment layout, exterior finish, architectural, mechanical and electrical
elements:

The contractor shall supply five sets of scaled drawings for each console assembly showing
the location of all the specified electronics in isometric view in addition to top and front views.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 29 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The specification of sizes and dimensions shown in the drawings shall have a tolerance of
1.5mm as maximum.

The Console shall be comprised of end and intermediate frames with horizontal stringers and
decorative end panels.

The Console shall feature a hinged dual-channel duct cover with integrated aluminum
mounting system for LCD monitor arrays.

The Console shall have a minimum 30mm thick MDF core PVC work surface. The work
surface shall be not less than 580mm deep overall and should include a 45mm deep beveled
edge covering the work surface's entire front width.

All components within the console shall be:

Of a pre-engineered modular construction, i.e.: constructed from a series of independent
sectional compartments.
Available from a pre-defined set of manufacturer’s model numbers.
Free from alterations to the design either prior to or following installation. The assembly
of the console shall be accomplished without the need for either welding or carpentry
work.
Constructed of a steel super-structure framework consisting of intermediate and end
frames connected by horizontal stringers. External decorative side panels shall be
available in TruForm or laminated MDF core.

The self-supporting skeleton framework shall:

Be installed at the site in advance of any external finishing panels. The framework shall
be fully capable of supporting all specified electronics without the need for attachment
of any external panels.
Be capable of being supplied to site in knockdown (flat packed) form and be capable of
assembly using bolts and fastening system without welding or carpentry work.
Include front and rear horizontal stringers constructed of 2.5mm formed sheet metal.
Stringers will connect, and span, 2mm end frames and/or intermediate frames to form a
complete structure.

Components
Intermediate and end frames shall be a minimum of 40mm in width and capable of
supporting fully loaded console. Intermediate and end frames shall incorporate 10mm
diameter threaded adjustable glides and 50mm vertical slots for mounting two and four
gang electrical boxes.
End frames shall feature an anti-tip extension and the intermediate frames shall feature
four grommet holes.
2.5mm formed sheet metal horizontal stringers with fastening system shall be 50mm high
and available in 600mm, 1200mm, and 1800mm widths.
1.5mm stationary steel shelf shall extend 450mm from the front of the console and shall
feature four grommet holes and has a load capacity of 90kg.
Doors shall be supplied with a keyed-alike locking lever latch and integrated cable
management. Doors shall be able to accept an optional CPU shelf or file/storage bin for
convenient swing-out access.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 30 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

15, 45, and 90 degree 2.5mm steel corner fillers shall be available. Corners fillers will
feature Insta-Lock fastening system for ease of installation. Corners shall be available
in concave and convex configurations.
1.2mm steel hinged duct cover shall conceal, and allow easy access to, dual cable
raceway so signal and power cords can be separated.
2mm angled data/power rail shall include cable grommets and openings for a universal
data mounting plate and/or duplex power box. The data/power rail shall incorporate
Insta-Lock fastening system and, combined with 2mm shelf brackets shall support the
work surface.
Fully integrated black anodized aluminum track system shall be capable of supporting a
wide variety of monitor arrays while providing simple horizontal adjustment.
Constructed of extruded 6105-T5 aluminum with a T-slot profile. Monitor array support
posts shall be available in 380mm, 725mm, and 1000mm heights. The support posts shall
be 48mm in diameter with a wall thickness of 2.8mm. Monitor arrays shall be mounted
to the Versa-Track with ball spring drop-in T-nuts.

Chair
Provide 2 No. scientifically designed universal task arm-chairs, back rest type, with gas
lift cylinder for seat height adjustment, and finished with carpet castors for base and back
to Engineer's approval

Finish and Color

All exterior and frame steel components including doors, rack turrets, duct covers, and
shelving shall be zinc oxide wash primer with a black powder coat textured finish.

Optional Accessories
A full range of optional accessories shall be available such as fans, electrical boxes, CPU
shelves, file bins, rack mount turrets, monitor mounts, and LED task lighting with VESA
mount or magnetic base.

Instructions
Fully detailed assembly instructions at least in English language shall be supplied with
both written and pictorial descriptions for each item/model numbered component.

Packaging
Each component part number shall be independently marked and packed into double or
triple ply corrugated outer cartons and shall be suitable for storage and shipping to site
without damage.

Warranty
Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the manufacturer shall provide a written 10
years guarantee against defects of all component parts, material and workmanship under
normal use.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 31 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SOFTWARE

3.1. OPERATING SYSTEM: GENERAL

The BMS Specialist shall provide a site-wide software license that shall permit the Employer
to add a PC to the BMS Management level Network without the requirement to obtain an
additional software license.

The BMS shall have an “off-the-shelf” software package (Middleware) that shall be able to
import and export data in, at minimum, the following protocols over an Ethernet TCP/IP
backbone:
BACnet.
LonTalk.
Modbus.
SNMP.
XML/SOAP.
OPC.
KNX.
Shall be able to communicate with any DDE compliant application.

Data shall be output from the BMS in the appropriate protocol to the appropriate ELV
Building System. Note that it shall be possible to output the same data in different protocols
to different ELV Building Systems.

Information shall be output from the BMS when:

Requested by the operator. This includes requests made by the operator for the immediate
output of specific information and requests for information that are optional and have
been pre-programmed by the operator for display.
Scheduled by the operator. An example of this might be the output of a report at an
operator-defined time of day.
An alarm condition has been detected by the BMS. All alarm conditions detected by the
BMS shall be annunciated as detailed elsewhere in this section.

The operator interfaces for the Operator Interface Workstation and the Portable Operator
Terminal shall be the same.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 32 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The graphical user operator interface shall be "user friendly". The interface shall be such that
there is no need for the operator to reference documentation other than "help" menus on the
system in order for the operator to perform his normal duties after the training has been
received, as detailed in these specifications.

The operator interface shall be English language with metric units. The system shall be
capable of converting all engineering unit displays into the equivalent English values and
displaying such values with the appropriate unit identifiers. The switchover from metric to
English and vice versa shall be done with a single operator command. The engineering unit
switchover shall be for all measured and displayed variables and calculated points. Unit
conversion and display shall be carried through all possible display view including graphical
displays, text base displays, and software application packages.

The performance criteria detailed in these specifications for the operator interface shall apply
when all BMS are in their completed form and all software and hardware functions are
operational.

The software shall be acceptable to all potential BMS Specialists. The BMS server software
package shall have a successful history of use with BACnet/IP and shall incorporate all drivers
required to meet these specifications.

The programs shall be designed to provide industrial quality real time data presentation. The
software shall enable the BMS Specialists to develop customized graphical views of the
mechanical and electrical systems and shall contain an advanced graphics library that contains
all potentially required images.

SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ACCESS CONTROL

Access to the BMS at the OIW, the POT and any other I/O device shall be protected by a
password based access system. An operator shall not be able to access information or perform
any tasks at the BMS until a valid password has been entered. Access shall terminate when
an operator signs off or after a predetermined time-out period, initially set at 10 minutes after
the last operator access, whichever occurs first. The password shall not be echoed at any
terminal when it is entered. Any operator functions, whether or not detailed within these
specifications, shall be subject to the operator's password being of a sufficiently high level to
enable the operator to perform the function.

Each password shall have up to 6 No. alphanumeric characters, at minimum, with at least 500
million different combinations and it shall be possible to have a minimum of 10,000 active
passwords at any time.

It shall be possible to define the following for each password:

I/O terminals that can be used for access. This shall be defined for any terminal that has
access to the BMS (including the web browsing facility).
Functions that can be performed.
Points that can be accessed.

If the system has fixed defined function levels then there shall be at least five (5) levels. Only
the highest level shall be able to undertake changes to the passwords.

An operator with the highest level of password shall be able to make additions, deletions and
changes to the passwords on-line using an interactive procedure including the changing of the

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 33 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

time-out period. An operator with the highest level of password shall be able to obtain a report
detailing the passwords assigned to each operator and all relevant details of the access
privileges associated with each password.

SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ACCESS GENERAL

An operator with the suitable level of access shall be able to access the network to perform
the following BMS functions:
Observe values of BMS monitored points, BMS outputs and BMS calculated values.
Observe and change control modes for motors, i.e. BMS manual control mode and BMS
software control mode.
Observe, add, delete and change a database including a database that defines a monitored,
controlled or calculated point, a database that defines schedules or a database that is
created to meet any of the many functions detailed in these documents.
Issue commands to change the status of a digital output or the value of an analogue
output.
Observe and acknowledge BMS determined alarm conditions.
Initiate the outputs of add, delete and change reports.
Observe, add, delete and change operating sequences.
Observe, add, delete and change graphical display system diagrams.
Observe, add, delete and change control algorithms including PID control constants.
Other functions as expressly detailed in the BMS specifications or as required, even if
not expressed, in order to meet the intent of these specifications.

Operator access shall be by penetration through a hierarchy of menus and/or system displays
on the graphical display using cursor control and by means of a series of alphanumeric inputs
at a keyboard. The menu selections shall be self-evident and shall easily guide the operator
through the execution of any of the functions. The alphanumeric input shall comprise short
English language statements and/or readily understood abbreviations. Whichever approach
is used, the process shall be via the most direct path and shall involve as few operations as
possible. It shall not be necessary for the operator to know the location, i.e. the DDC
controller, at which a point is monitored/controlled in order to access any information
concerning that point.

Following the completion of all steps by the operator performing an operator access function,
the function shall commence within two (2) seconds and shall be completed within ten (10)
seconds apart from those functions that are subject to the limitations of the output rate of the
printers.

An operator shall be able to edit his keyboard entries prior to attempted execution using
standard keys such as "delete" and "backspace". However, if an operator makes an incorrect
entry then the BMS will display a message that clearly details the nature of the error and
identifies the appropriate "help" menu that will assist the operator to successfully complete
the entry.

All operator entries shall be echoed, except passwords, the OIW, servers and on the screen on
the POT depending on where the operator entry is made.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 34 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: PROGRAMMING AND UPDATES

The BMS Specialist shall provide documentation detailing the methods and techniques
required to connect additional workstations, DDC controllers, gateways, routers and any other
BMS hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as well as to export the data in any
of the previously mentioned standards to another system.

The system documentation shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the BMS’s incorporation
into another BACnet system in the future.

SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: OPERATOR REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

Each monitored, controlled and calculated point in the system shall be accessed via the menu
and the alphanumeric approaches as detailed in these specifications.

Access using the system schematic displays, as detailed in the previous sections, with the
addition that once the system display level is reached it shall be possible to progress to the
individual monitored, controlled or calculated point. Once a menu or system display selection
is made it shall take no more than five (5) seconds before the next menu or display level
appears on the graphical display.

Access using the alphanumeric approach shall enable an operator to access any point via a
unique point name that may be a short English language descriptor or a readily understandable
mnemonic of the type used to identify points in the points schedules and system diagrams.

Either approach shall enable the operator to observe or change any parameter associated with
a point and to add and delete points.

SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: OPERATOR COMMANDS

The operator shall be able to place any output in the BMS manual control mode and when in
that mode the operator shall be able to place any output to any required value subject to any
hardwired interlocks and any software interlocks that are specified to apply in the BMS
manual control mode.

The operator shall be able to place any set point that is determined by software into the manual
mode and to manually assign a value to the set point.

The operator shall be able to initiate the restart of equipment following a fire alarm and
following a power failure. Refer to the paragraphs titled "Equipment restart following a fire
alarm" and "Equipment restart following a power failure".

SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA BASES AND OPERATING SEQUENCES

The operator shall be able to make on-line modifications, additions and deletions to all
databases at the PC, NAC, DDC, and ASC using interactive procedures. Prior to the
acceptance of the changes by the BMS there shall be a restatement of the contemplated
database modification, addition or deletion together with a question of the type "Do you wish
to proceed?" which will require an affirmative answer before the change takes place.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 35 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The operator shall be able to modify a sequence, add a sequence and delete a sequence on-
line as detailed in the Section titled “BMS Software”.

The databases shall be open standards based on BACnet. The BMS Specialist shall provide
complete comprehensive documentation on writing to the databases, retrieving data from the
databases and sharing the data at the databases.

SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ALARMS

Alarms shall be generated by the BMS upon the occurrence of one of the following events:
Failure of a PC, DDC controller, or any other BMS hardware components.
Failure of communications between nodes on any LAN or the BMS Management level
Network.
A monitored status indicates a discrepancy between the actual and the required value.
A monitored value does not meet criteria established by the operator.
The deviation of a variable from set point exceeds operator-established criteria.
The output to a final control element is outside operator-established criteria.
A digital input is in the state defined by the operator as indicating an alarm condition.
Software failures and errors shall be diagnosed and annunciated by the BMS.

The failure of a BMS hardware component, including communications failures, shall generate
an alarm that shall be differentiated from process alarms. If the failure of a PC cannot be
annunciated at a printer or graphical display at the OIW because of the BMS topology then
provide an alternative means such as a "watchdog timer" at a DDC controller. The alarm
message generated by the BMS shall clearly identify the component that has failed and the
location of a communications failure shall also be clearly indicated.

In the event that the BMS detects a disparity between the actual and the required status of a
digital input, the BMS shall generate an alarm and shall set the control relay to the off state.
This shall occur when the digital output is in both the BMS manual control mode and the
BMS software control mode and shall automatically place the output in the BMS manual
control mode.

The operator shall be able to define alarm conditions for each analog input, at minimum, as
follows:
The high limit above which the variable is in alarm.
The low limit below which the variable is in alarm.
An end or range alarm. This shall occur when the analogue signal goes to zero or to its
maximum value.

The operator shall be able to assign deviation limits to set point values. An alarm shall be
generated when a controlled variable deviates from set point by more than an operator-defined
amount.

The operator shall be able to assign alarm limits to analogue outputs. The BMS shall generate
an alarm when an analogue output reaches or exceeds an operator assigned high limit and
reaches or goes below an operator assigned low limit.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 36 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The operator shall be able to designate one state of a digital input as an alarm state.

The operator shall be able to assign a time delay following detection by the BMS of an alarm
condition such that if there is a return to normal during the assigned time delays the alarm
shall not be annunciated. If at the end of the time delay period the alarm condition still exists
then the BMS shall annunciate an alarm within two (2) seconds (end-to-end time). The time
delay shall be individually assignable to each alarm condition. All monitored points shall meet
these alarm annunciation criteria regardless of type of panel used to monitor the point.

The operator shall be able to assign a dead-band to all analog high and low alarm limits so as
to minimize the too frequent and unnecessary annunciation of alarms. An analogue alarm
limit shall not have returned to normal until it has returned beyond the alarm limit by a
sufficient amount to have also cleared the dead-band. The same shall also apply to analogue
output high and low alarms.

A report shall be available to the operator detailing points in alarm and a further report shall
be available to the operator detailing the alarm limits established for the monitored, controlled
and calculated points.

Designated alarms shall be output on the alarm printer.

The occurrence of designated alarms shall initiate a visual alarm at the OIW. A switch, button
or keyboard key shall be dedicated to the acknowledgment of alarms at the OIW. The visual
alarm shall cease after acknowledgment of an alarm unless another alarm is awaiting
acknowledgment. All alarms shall be acknowledged individually and the acknowledgment
shall be recorded on the alarm printer. The alarm message shall uniquely identify the cause
of the alarm together with the time of detection by the BMS. The operator shall be able to
associate an "event message" with any alarm occurrence. The operator shall be able to
designate at which workstation(s) the alarm shall be annunciated.

Alarms shall be allocated priorities by the operator on-line using an interactive procedure. If
there are concurrent alarms then they shall be annunciated in order of their priority. An icon
shall appear on the graphical display when there are alarms other than those displayed. The
cursor and icon shall enable the operator to bring up an alarm report on the graphical display
at any time. There shall be at minimum, three levels of alarm priority. Alarms shall be
prioritized in the following categories, with the following actions taking place:

Category Action Taken

Critical. Printout on alarm printer and display on the graphical

display. Clearly distinguish critical alarms on hard
copy printouts and graphical displays and reports.

Non-critical. Display.

BMS component. Printout on alarm printer and display. Clearly

distinguish BMS components alarms on hard copy
print outs and graphical displays and reports.

Alarms shall remain on the OIW graphical display alarm queue until the alarm has been
acknowledged by the operator and returned to the normal state. If the alarm returns to normal

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 37 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

before operator acknowledgment, then it shall be identified as such via different color
designation on the alarm queue. If the alarm is acknowledged before it has returned to normal,
then it shall also be identified via a different color designation.

It shall only be necessary to acknowledge an alarm at one OIW.

It shall be possible to assign alarms to different OIW on a scheduled basis.

The BMS Specialist shall configure the alarms and their priorities in accordance with the
requirements of the Employer.

SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: REPORTS

Reports shall be output when requested by the operator and when scheduled by the operator.

Reports shall be provided as detailed throughout these specifications and shall be output at
the OIW, the printer designated by the operator at the report printer or the screen at the POT
whichever is selected by the operator. The default output device for reports shall be the report
printer at the OIW.

The operator shall be able to select reports to be output in the following manner:
For a specific point.
For a specific item(s) of equipment.
For all points located on a specific floor or area of the building.
For all equipment serving a particular floor.
For all points monitored, controlled and calculated.
For afterhours operation of the AHU.
For a specific schedule.
For a specific or group of trended points.
For a specific or group of totalized points.

Reports shall all have the time and date at which they were output recorded on them. Reports
shall be formatted in such a manner as to make them easily understandable to the operator.

A menu of reports shall enable the operator to access any report on the BMS. Each report
shall contain the date and time.

The operator shall be able to configure customized reports. Standard and customized reports
shall be configured through the BMS.

The BMS Specialist shall configure the reports in accordance with the requirements of the
Employer.

SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: EVENT MESSAGES

The operator shall create messages up to 64 characters in length, at minimum, which shall be
displayed upon the occurrence of a particular event. There shall be capacity for 1000 event
messages at any one time and the operator shall be able to associate a single message with

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 38 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

more than one occurrence and shall be able to associate more than one event message with a
particular event.

The event message shall be output at all devices selected on-line by the operator using an
interactive procedure.

The operator shall be able to associate one or more event messages with the following events:
An alarm
A change of status.
The return to normal of an alarm condition.
An operator entered schedule.
Any other event initiated by the BMS or monitored by the BMS.

SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: GRAPHICAL DISPLAY

High Definition graphical displays of system diagrams are discussed in the Section titled
“Graphical Display system diagram” of these specifications.

Graphical Displays shall form the basis of the menu penetration means of operator access.

The time and date and the building kW shall appear on the display at all times and when there
are system diagrams displayed on the OIW, the outside air temperature and relative humidity
shall be displayed.

Icons shall be used in conjunction with cursor control where possible to simplify access to
data and the execution of operator commands.

System diagrams shall appear on the graphical displays complete with all associated data
within five (5) seconds of the completion of the operator entry/ menu selection.

SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: WEB ACCESS

Operators and other authorized personnel shall have access to specific functions of the BMS
via a standard web browser interface, subject to password access assigned by the Employer.

Web based access to the BMS shall provide monitoring and limited control specific to the
user. The information displayed on the web pages shall be refreshed at least once every 10
seconds.

Where a Web page provides for the operator to input changes, the activation of the changes
shall require the operator to click on a "submit" button or similar feature before the changes
are sent. All web access actions shall be immediately echoed to all other OIW.

BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: GENERAL

The Distributed Control Panels, Workstations and Application Specific Controllers shall run
under the control of proven real-time executive operating software systems. These operating
systems are collectively referred to as the BMS operating systems.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 39 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The BMS operating Systems shall include:

Controllers Monitoring and Control Software
Controller Application Software
Data Analysis and Storage Software.
Data Presentation Software.

The operating sequences and all databases related to monitoring and control functions shall
reside at the associated DDC and/or ASC. Copies of these databases, operating sequences,
schedules and other programmable software shall reside at the PC at the OIW. It shall be
ensured that at all times there is no mismatch between software resident at the DDC and/or
ASC and the software copy resident at the PC.

SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS

The sequences of operation shall be resident at the controllers.

Where terms are used, such as “operator determined”, “operator changeable”, etc., which
indicate an operator originated decision; it shall mean that an operator shall be able to amend
a value, such as a set point, alarm limit, time delay, etc. through an interactive approach. The
term "interactive" is used to mean that the system shall operate in a conversational mode
whereby the operator shall receive English language prompts in the form of:
Tables into which the operator enters data.
Questions that are responded to by the operator.
Selections that are made by the operator based on a list of suggested alternatives that is
generated by the BMS.

The procedure by which an operator amends a value or implements a selection shall be such
that the operator can readily execute the task without reference to instruction manuals and
without knowledge of the BMS control language.

All set points, alarms limits, dead-bands, software time delays, report configuration and
requests, operating time limits, schedules, etc. shall be operator definable through an
interactive procedure via the OIW and POT. In addition, the set points and schedules shall be
changeable via the BMS/telephone and BMS/web facilities.

The equipment that is fed from emergency power and which is controlled by the BMS shall
operate normally under emergency power conditions and shall be monitored and controlled
by the BMS under emergency power conditions. Ensure that all equipment furnished under
this sub-contract that is associated with the control of equipment on emergency power is fed
from the emergency power service and can maintain normal equipment operations when the
equipment is on emergency power. Following a loss of normal power, the BMS shall resume
normal equipment control and monitoring functions for that equipment on emergency power
within 20 seconds of the availability of emergency power and similarly when there is a return
to normal power. If necessary provide an uninterruptible power source in order to meet this
20 seconds resumption of operation requirement.

The BMS Specialist shall identify on the cable and containment shop drawings which
components are to be fed from emergency power and which components are to be fed from a
UPS source.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 40 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The BMS Specialist shall provide an easy to use means of defining the operating sequences
such as a high-level control language or a graphical/flowcharting facility.

The means provided for the creation of the operating sequences shall be suitable for the
implementation of the sequences detailed on the control diagrams that form a part of these
sub-contract documents.

If the BMS Specialist requires additional instrumentation to that indicated in the BMS Point
Schedules and Diagrams in order to implement the operating sequences as detailed on the
control drawings then the BMS Specialist shall include such additional instrumentation within
the tender price. Such instrumentation shall meet the requirements detailed in the Section
titled "BMS Field Instrumentation" or, where specifications are not provided, details of such
instrumentation shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

The operating sequences shall be written in a readily understandable high level control
language such as Pascal, Basic, C or equivalent or they shall be constructed using an easily
understood graphics interface package. Provide adequate English language notation in the
software to assist the operator understand the intent of the programmed sequences.

The control language shall be capable of implementing 32-bit floating-point calculations

using. At minimum, the following arithmetic operators:
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
Roots
Exponentials
Natural logarithms

The control language shall, at minimum, be able to implement the following logic operations
and relational operations:
and
or
not
nand
nor
If then else statement
less than
less than or equal to
equal to
greater than or equal to
greater than
not equal to

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 41 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The BMS Specialist shall be responsible for the stable operation of all control loops. The
BMS Specialist shall provide self-tuning PID control algorithms. Verify that the control loops
are stable.

If any BMS or system component should fail during the operation of a system, then the BMS
shall execute the procedure detailed in the sequences of operation. Where a failure mode is
not provided for a BMS controlled item of equipment the BMS Specialist shall obtain details
of the required failure mode from the Employer.

Any information required by the BMS Specialist for the implementation of the software shall
be requested in writing from the Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to the time it is required.
Submit the request for information in the form of tables or forms for the Employer’s personnel
to complete and return.

The operating sequences detailed in this section shall only apply when the BMS is controlling
and monitoring the system in the BMS software control mode.

In cases where outside air duct cross-sectional area exceeds a certain amount, multiple damper
sections rather than a single section shall be furnished and shall be controlled in groups. Refer
to the mechanical trade documents to determine the number of damper sections and the
number of actuators.

Where indicated on the control diagrams, the BMS Specialist shall interlock motorized
dampers with fans such that when the dampers are closed the associated fans stop.

The BMS Specialist shall provide any modifications to the operating sequences as requested
by the Engineer without additional costs until the substantial completion of the entire BMS.

The sequences of operation are detailed on the control drawings that form part of these
documents. Where sequences have not been specifically identified for a mechanical,
electrical or public health system/component, the BMS Specialist shall obtain instruction from
the Engineer and shall implement the required sequences at no additional cost to the
Employer.

BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: CONTROLLERS MONITORING & CONTROL

SOFTWARE

Scan rates at the DDC and/or ASC shall meet the following requirements:
Each analogue and digital input point shall be scanned at least once every 5 seconds.
If a point is in alarm, then the alarm shall be annunciated at the OIW within 2 seconds of
the termination of the time delay period following detection of the alarm condition.

DDC outputs shall be updated at a frequency defined by the operator. The operator shall be
able to select a frequency, at minimum, in the range of 2 seconds to 256 seconds.

The operator shall be able to define a minimum time delay between successive starts of
equipment so that disturbances created on the building electrical system are minimized in
frequency and amplitude.

BMS analogue and digital outputs shall change as the result of either an operator entered
command or a BMS generated software command. These two modes of BMS output are

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 42 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

referred to as the BMS MANUAL CONTROL mode and the BMS SOFTWARE CONTROL
mode and differ as follows:
In the BMS manual control mode, the signal to a final control element such as a valve or
a damper actuator and to a relay such as a motor control relay shall change as the result
of a command manually entered at one of the operator terminals. When an output is in
the BMS manual control mode, there shall be no means by which it can switch to the
BMS software control mode or by which the value or state of the BMS output can change
without operator intervention.
In the BMS software control mode, the signal to the final control element or relay shall
be changed automatically as the result of software such as a schedule, operating sequence
or Applications Package such as the Optimized Scheduling feature.

The operator shall be able to select the mode of output control for each analogue and digital
output.

The operator shall be able to define the minimum time delay between the stopping of a piece
of equipment and its subsequent restart. This time delay shall be in effect for motors in the
BMS software control mode and for motors in the BMS manual control mode.

If there is a discrepancy between the actual and BMS commanded state of a motor then, unless
the discrepancy arises because of control of the motor by the fire alarm system or because of
a power failure, the motor control relay shall be set automatically to the OFF state, an alarm
shall be generated and the motor shall be placed in the BMS manual control mode.
If the discrepancy has arisen because of override control by the fire alarm system, then
the motor shall be restarted by the BMS in accordance with the procedure detailed in the
paragraph titled "Equipment Restart Following a Fire Alarm".
If the discrepancy has arisen because of a power failure, then the motor shall be restarted
by the BMS in accordance with the procedure detailed in the paragraph titled "Equipment
Restart Following a Power Failure".
In all cases a motor shall only restart following an operator manually entered command

The BMS shall not override any hardwired interlocks such as those provided at motor starters
for overload protection, damper interlock, pressure interlock, etc. and those provided to
facilitate control by the Fire Alarm System regardless of the BMS output control mode.

Unless stated otherwise elsewhere in these Specifications, the modulation of final control
elements by the BMS in the BMS software control mode shall be based on a Proportional-
Integral-Derivative (PID) control algorithm. The control constants for the PID algorithm shall
be definable by the operator. If self-tuning algorithms are provided, it shall still be possible
for the operator to manually tune the control loops. The software shall incorporate facilities
to enable the bump-less transfer of a modulating output from BMS manual control to BMS
software control and vice versa and the prevention of integral wind-up. PID algorithms shall
maintain the system operation within the desired tolerance around the set point. Set point
tolerances shall be as follows:
Supply air temperature control, ± 0.5 Deg. C.
Space temperature control, ± 0.5 Deg. C.
Duct static pressure control, ± 50 Pa
Water differential pressure, ± 15 kPa.
Space static pressure control, ± 10 Pa

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 43 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Relative humidity, ± 3%

Software shall automatically inhibit the generating of an alarm on an analogue input when the
status of an associated digital input indicates that an alarm condition is to be expected. Such
would be the case, for example, when an air handling unit is off as it would be expected that
the supply air temperature would be outside the alarm limits established for the operating
state. An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to link any analogue value to a digital
input so as to inhibit unnecessary alarms. Points with their alarms locked out shall continue
to be displayed on reports and graphical displays. The alarms shall remain locked out for an
operator defined time delay following the start-up of the associated equipment

If for any reason the operator wishes to terminate the monitoring of a particular digital or
analogue input, then it shall be possible to take the point out of service via an interactive
procedure. If the point is the monitored variable in a control loop, then the control loop shall
be disabled, any sequence dependent on the point shall also be disabled and all associated
BMS outputs shall go to the BMS manual control mode.

An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to add, delete and modify points monitored
and controlled by the BMS.

An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to configure control loops. The operator
shall define Set points for control loops or they shall be derived from software logic as detailed
in the sequences of operation.

All configuration tools shall be built into the BMS graphics software and all components of
the system shall be programmable from any OIW via the web browser including the
downloading of programs to the DDC controllers.

BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: CONTROLLER APPLICATION SOFTWARE

Applications software functions associated with the control and monitoring of the mechanical
and electrical systems by the BMS shall be resident at the DDC controllers and OIW PC as
appropriate. The application of these features shall be in accordance with the details provided
in the Sequences of Operation. The BMS Specialist is to implement all applications programs.
Where additional information is required the BMS Specialist shall request the information in
writing to the Employer at least two weeks before it is required by the BMS Specialist.

These application software packages shall include but not be limited to the following:
Provide the following programs for the optimization of energy usage:

HVAC control
Provide the following programs for the calculation of data:

Electrical Energy usage and demand

Psychrometric properties
Equipment operating time

Provide the following programs for the restart of building mechanical systems:

Equipment restart following a fire alarm

Equipment restart following a power failure

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 44 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Energy Management Features: BMS controllers shall perform all energy management
functions specified herein to reduce energy consumption. The system shall provide energy
supervisory management routines that improve the energy efficiency of the building HVAC
systems. These routines shall coordinate the execution of all energy management application
features, acting as an executive software system for them, and as an interface for their control
strategy with other application features in the system. These energy management functions to
be categorized under HVAC control. These features shall reside at the DDCs and are to
operate independently of the POT. Energy harvesting type of peripherals may be used also.

HVAC Control
BMS to provide predefined control algorithms to accomplish Optimal Run (start/stop)
Time, Supply Air Reset and Enthalpy Switchover Optimization applications.
Optimization applications to be coordinated through energy supervisory management
routines. These routines to coordinate control action required by optimization
applications between themselves, all other energy features, and all application features
within the system.
Each control system to support English or metric units of measurement and be assigned
a unique identifier which is to be used to request operator-relevant HVAC control status
data. Each control system to be capable of supporting Optimal Run Time, Supply Air
Reset, and Enthalpy Switchover Optimization.
Control systems and their associated points and parameters to be online definable. Any
additions, modifications or deletions to be made online. Each system to be individually
identified with a unique English language descriptor.
Each system to provide a savings profile summary which is to document, but is not
limited to, the following:

Period start date as defined by operator

Calculated optimal start time daily saving values
Calculated optimal stop time daily saving values
Calculated optimal start time daily saving values during current period
Calculated optimal stop time daily saving values during current period
Calculated SAR (Supply Air Reset) daily saving values
Calculated SAR saving values during current period
Calculated ESQ (Enthalpy Switch-over) daily saving values
Calculated ESQ saving values during current per.
These documented savings values to be automatically historically stored for the current
defined period and a minimum of twelve past periods.
Optimal Run Time (ORT) Program is to:

Control start up and shutdown of HVAC control equipment

Provide the most efficient operation during potentially energy wasteful periods of the day
based on occupancy schedules, outside air temperature, seasonal requirements and
interior room mass temperatures
Startup systems by using outside air temperature and room temperatures to "learn" the
building's thermal characteristics through a dynamic adaptive modeling technique
Predict and self-adjust the HVAC control system for how long building takes to cool
down under different conditions, using the adaptive model
Determine how early it can shut down the system without adversely affecting ventilation,
by using the outside air temperature
Automatically determine the seasonal mode and worse case condition for each day, by
analyzing multiple building mass sensors

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 45 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Analysis to require only easily obtained occupancy schedule data and desired mass
temperatures for implementation.
Supply Air Reset (SAR) Program is to:

Monitor cooling loads in building spaces

Monitor single zone unit discharge temperatures
Adjust HVAC control discharge temperature to the most energy efficient levels that still
satisfy the measured load
Raise cooling temperatures to highest possible value, and still cool and dehumidify the
warmest monitored room served by fan.

Electrical Energy Usage and Demand

Provide software to monitor and report electrical energy usage and instantaneous energy
demand. This feature shall also store data for recall via the historical data trend package.
The BMS shall monitor the demand kW, kVA and kWh at the switchboards. The BMS
shall also monitor and provide reporting on kWh usage of controlled equipment within
the building based on equipment operating time and monitored kW for each piece of
equipment. If an item of equipment is not monitored then it shall be possible for the BMS
Specialist to input the kW of the equipment as a constant to be used in the calculation.
The kW value shall be obtained from the manufacturer’s literature and shall be verified
by the manufacturer.
This software feature shall generate a report available on demand and on a scheduled
basis:

Demand (at each meter) at time of report.

Usage for present day to time of report.
Usage on previous day.
Usage for present week to time of report.
Usage for previous week.
Usage for present month to time of report.
Usage for previous month.
Usage for year to time of report.
Usage for previous year.
Peak demand for the present day, week, month and year to time of report.
Peak demand for the previous day, week, month and year.
In addition to the above reporting of data the operator shall be able to assign any
monitored or calculated value to the real-time plotting and historical data trend features.
As part of the work of this sub-contract the BMS Specialist shall implement all energy
management calculations as requested by the Employer. Submit in writing to the
Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to the acceptance testing, a request for points to be
placed on the energy management calculation feature. The written request will clearly
indicate the information required from the Employer and the format in which it is to be
provided.

Psychrometric properties
Provide a software package to determine the following properties of ambient air:

Wet bulb temperature.

Dew point temperature.
The above parameters shall be calculated using the monitored values of ambient air-dry
bulb temperature and relative humidity

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 46 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

This software package shall also calculate the enthalpy of ambient air and ducted return
air on the basis of the dry bulb temperature and relative humidity monitored in ambient
air and the ducted return air.
These psychrometric calculations shall be based on sea level data and shall cover the dry
bulb temperature range of +10 Deg. C. to +60 Deg. C.
The psychrometric chart shall be displayed on the OIW and shall be dynamic. With the
input of any two variables all other psychrometric data shall be automatically displayed
on the psychrometric chart.

Equipment operating time

Provide a software package that will accumulate the operating times for motors as
selected by the operator using an interactive procedure. Any piece of equipment that has
its status monitored by the BMS shall be selectable for inclusion in this feature. It shall
be possible to concurrently monitor the accumulated operating time for every item of
equipment monitored and/or controlled by the BMS. Data shall be stored at the local
controllers and shall be uploaded to the OIW at regular intervals. In the event of loss of
communications between the OIW and the local controller the local controller shall
continue to monitor and store data such that the data can be downloaded when the
communication is restored. The number of starts and stops of motors shall also be
accumulated.
The operator shall be able to establish on-line, using an interactive procedure, a value for
the accumulated operating time at which a suitably worded message shall be output to
the operator advising that the reporting limit has been reached for a specific motor. The
message shall be output at the designated alarm printer.
The operator shall be able to change the accumulated total for any motor to any value.
The accumulated operating times shall be updated at least every 15 minutes.
The operator shall be able to obtain a report on demand and on a scheduled basis detailing
the accumulated operating times.
Operating times and the number of equipment starts/stops shall be input by the BMS
equipment-scheduling program to the Employer's Facility Management System and shall
be the basis of maintenance programming.

Equipment restart following a fire alarm

Provide and implement a software program that will restart equipment, following the
return to normal condition that was shut down by the FAS or by the BMS as the result of
a fire alarm. The only equipment that shall be shut down by the BMS as the result of a
fire alarm shall be the FCU. The FAS shall shut down all other equipment on an as
required basis.

If an item of equipment is shut down by a source other than the BMS when there is a fire
alarm in effect then the BMS shall assume that the cause of the shutdown is the FAS and
shall not indicate an alarm.
The FAS shall communicate to the BMS a list of all equipment that it has shut down as
the result of a fire alarm.
If an item of equipment was presumed by the BMS to have shut down as a result of the
fire alarm but is not on the FAS list then an alarm shall be annunciated for that item of
equipment to indicate equipment failure. An alarm shall also be generated if an item of
equipment on the list does not have the required status.
Following the receipt by the BMS of a return to normal message from the fire alarm
system the operator shall be able to initiate the restart of all equipment shutdown by the
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 47 of 90
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

FAS and BMS with individual manually entered commands to each item of equipment
and with a single command that shall restart all equipment scheduled to be operational at
the time of the operator restart command. Prior to the return to normal of the fire alarm
system the operator shall not be able to execute the restart command. The restart of the
equipment shall be subject to all the software protection such as the minimum "off" time
and the operator defined time delay requirements between successive equipment starts.
As part of the work of this sub-contract the BMS Specialist shall implement the restart
following a fire alarm function. Submit in written to the Employer, at least 4 weeks prior
to the acceptance testing, a request for the order in which motors are to be restarted, the
delay times between successive motor starts and the minimum “off” and “on’ times. The
written request will clearly indicate the information required from the Employer and the
format in which it is to be provided.

Equipment restart following a power failure

Provide and implement a program that will facilitate the restart of equipment following
a power failure.
This program shall be based on the BMS detection of a power failure and the return of
power. This feature shall operate on a per BMS basis and not a site wide basis and shall
be implemented for both emergency, normal power and UPS power.
When there is a loss of normal power, the BMS shall de-energize all units under its
control. When power is restored the BMS shall restart equipment on the basis of the
following as selected by the operator:

Manually entered operator command. A single command shall initiate the start of all
equipment controlled by a BMS or the equipment shall be started individually as selected
by the operator.
Automatically by the BMS when the return of power is detected by the BMS, either
utility power.
Whichever method of restart is selected the motors shall be started in a predetermined
order and the startup shall be subject to all the software protections such as the minimum
"off" time and the operator defined time delay requirements between successive
equipment starts, to prevent surges in the electrical distribution system.
As part of the work of this sub-contract the BMS Specialist shall implement the restart
following a power failure function. Submit in written to the Employer, at least 2 weeks
prior to the acceptance testing, a request for the order in which motors are to be restarted,
the delay times between successive motor starts and the minimum “off” and “on’ times.
The written request will clearly indicate the information required from the Employer and
the format in which it is to be provided.
In the case of standby power, the BMS shall only restart equipment that is scheduled to
operate at that time of day and which is permitted to operate under standby power
conditions.

BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA ANALYSIS AND STORAGE SOFTWARE

Data analysis and storage software shall reside at the BMS servers such that all PC on the
BMS Management level Network can present data in the same format. These features shall
comprise the following:
Dynamic Trending
Historical data trends

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 48 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Dynamic Trending
Provide a software package that emulates, at minimum, a 3No. point strip chart recorder.
This program shall concurrently display 3No. or more (maximum of 6) plots of variables
in a graphical format. The graphs shall be plotted as the values are sampled in a similar
fashion to a chart recorder and when the plot reaches the right hand side of the X-axis,
the X-axis shall scroll to the left so as to accommodate newly sampled data.
The variables to be plotted shall be selected by the operator from any input, output point,
BMS calculated value or any set point. It is envisaged that the primary use of this facility
will be for the tuning of control loops and the observance of control loop performance.
Typically this would require, for example, the concurrent plotting of the loop set point,
the monitored variable and the BMS output to the final control element.
Each of the plotted variables shall be uniquely and clearly identified using a means of
differentiation such as different colors for each variable or different symbols for the
plotted points for each variable.
The X-axis shall be the time axis and shall have a scale selected by the operator using an
interactive procedure or shall be scaled automatically to accommodate a minimum of 30
plotted points for each variable. The plot rate shall be selected by the operator using an
interactive procedure and shall have the following minimum ranges:

Plot rates for monitored variables shall range from their BMS scan rate to at least once
per day.
Set points shall be plotted at the same rate as the associated variable.
Plot rates for BMS outputs shall range from their BMS update rates to at least once per
day.
Plot rates for calculated points shall range from the rate at which the calculation is
performed to at least once per day.
The Y-axis shall be the value of the plotted variable. If plotted variables have different
ranges then provide separate Y-axes. The Y-axis for each plotted variable shall be defined
by the operator using an interactive procedure or shall be scaled automatically using a
technique that displays the data in an optimum manner.
It shall be possible to have a minimum of 100 active trend plots at any OIW on the
network.
As part of the work of this sub-contract the BMS Specialist shall implement all trend logs
as requested by the Employer. Submit in writing to the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior
to the acceptance testing, a request for points to be placed on the dynamic trending
function. The written request will clearly indicate the information required from the
Employer and the format in which it is to be provided.

Historical data trends

Provide a software facility for the collection and storage of data at the BMS servers and
its subsequent retrieval and display in tabular and graphical form as selected by the
operator.
The operator shall be able to assign on-line, using an interactive procedure, any BMS
input or output point, calculated variable or set point to the historical data trend facility.
It shall be possible to have data collection and storage concurrently, at minimum, for
250,000 variables and it shall be possible to have data collection for each variable at 2
separate sampling rates.
Each variable shall be sampled at an operator-defined frequency using an interactive
procedure. The sampling frequencies shall be in the following ranges at minimum:

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 49 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

For BMS monitored points the sample rate shall be selectable individually for each
variable at between once per day and once per second or once per scan, whichever is the
less frequent.
Set points shall be sampled at the same rate as their associated variable.
For BMS outputs the sample rate shall be selectable individually for each variable at
between once per day and once per second or once per output change, whichever is the
less frequent.
For calculated points the sample rate shall be selectable individually for each calculated
value at between once per day and once every calculation.
Storage shall be provided for at least 10,000 pieces of sampled data for each variable
assigned to this feature. Recall of data shall be in either a tabular form or in a graphical
form and shall be displayed on the OIWs or output on one of the printers as selected by
the operator. Whichever form of output the operator selects it shall be possible to
concurrently output data for a minimum of 3No. variables. The time period to be covered
by the data output shall be selected by the operator using an interactive procedure. When
the storage capacity for a variable is full, the newly sampled data shall over-write the
data first stored for that variable. It shall be possible to store data for the same point at
different collection rates. For example, it shall be possible to store 10,000 values of
ambient temperature collected once per hour and it shall be possible to store 10,000
values of ambient temperature collected every noon and midnight.
Data output in tabular form shall clearly distinguish between the variables and shall
indicate the time and date at which each piece of data was sampled.
Data output in graphical form shall meet the same requirements as detailed above for the
real-time plotting of data.
It shall be possible at any time to obtain a listing of which points have been assigned to
this feature and their sampling rates.
It shall be possible to output the historical data in a Microsoft Excel format in a hardcopy
and in an electronic format.
As part of the work of this sub-contract the BMS Specialist shall implement all historical
data storage as requested by the Employer. Submit in writing to the Employer, at least 2
weeks prior to the acceptance testing, a request for points to be placed on the historical
data trending function. The written request will clearly indicate the information required
from the Employer and the format in which it is to be provided.

BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA PRESENTATION SOFTWARE

Data presentation software shall reside at the BMS servers such that all PC on the BMS
Management level Network can present data in the same format. These features shall
comprise the following:
Graphical Display system diagram displays

Graphical System Diagram Displays

Provide a software package to enable the operator to configure, modify and delete system
diagrams similar in scope to those on the control diagrams that form part of these sub-
contract documents. Real-time data shall be superimposed on the system diagrams and
shall be updated at intervals between 10 and 20 seconds. The data shall be positioned on
the display at points indicative of the instrumentation locations on the system.
Provide a library of commonly used symbols in accordance with CIBSE standards
including all symbols used in the compilation of the system diagrams for this project.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 50 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Each system diagram shall indicate real-time data including analogue and digital input
and output points, set points and calculated values of the associated system. The BMS
Point Schedules and System Diagrams detailed on the control diagrams shall provide a
guideline for the selection of data to be displayed on a particular system diagram.
Preferably the status of motors, e.g. on, off, failed, etc., shall be indicated by color
changes such as green for on, blue for off and red for failed. The system diagrams shall
also distinguish between outputs in the BMS manual control mode and in the BMS
software control mode. Where necessary to enhance the understanding of the data
displayed use alphanumeric text. The graphics shall be fully animated such that they
clearly indicate the status of motors.
Provide a hierarchy of display pages that will enable an operator, for example, to progress
from a diagram of the building, to a particular floor in the building and to a particular
zone on the floor. The selection at each stage shall be by cursor control using a mouse or
keyboard arrow buttons.
Provide icons on displays to enable easy access from one display to a related display. For
example, provide a target box on the system diagram for a group of VAV terminal units
that will enable one-step access to the associated air-handling unit.
A system diagram shall be provided, at minimum, for the following:

Each of the systems detailed in the point definition sections of these sub-contract
documents. This shall include at minimum each air handling unit and each extract and
supply fan system, each chilled and condenser water system and each system monitored
and controlled via a third party interface.
Each FCU terminal unit. This shall show the location of each FCU on the floor, the zone
temperatures, the mode of operation, e.g. occupied mode, unoccupied mode, standby
mode, etc. of the terminal units. The zones covered by each FCU terminal unit shall be
outlined and zones with temperatures in alarm shall be red.
As for above but for the lighting.
As for above but for the combined lighting and FCU terminal units.
As for above but for the FAS.
As for above but for the security devices
Combined security, FAS and lighting on each floor. This shall show the location of each
security and fire alarm device on the floor, the status of each security and fire alarm
device and the status of each zone of lighting. A device(s) that has indicated a security
or a fire alarm shall be clearly identified. It shall be possible by clicking on the
appropriate icon on the full floor display for the operator to zoom in on half of a floor.
All other schematics as detailed throughout these sub-contract documents.
The BMS Specialist shall submit a complete set of the proposed system diagrams at the
shop drawing stage of the project. The BMS Specialist shall modify the system diagrams
as requested by the Engineer following shop drawing review at no additional cost to the
Employer.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 51 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

BMS CONTROLLERS:

GENERAL

There shall be 3 types of BMS Controllers:

NAC: Network automation Controller, BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)
DDC: Direct Digital Controller, BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC)
ASC: Application Specific Controllers (ASC)

All BACnet controllers shall be based on native BACnet and shall support all applicable
BIBB’s from the data sharing, alarm event, schedule, trend and device manager groups.
Standard BACnet object types supported by the controllers shall include:
Binary input and output and value
Analogue input, output and value,
Multi-state input and output
Loop, calendar, notification class, command, file, program, schedule, group, event
enrolment and device.
Proprietary object types shall not be used unless specifically approved by the Employer.

Following a loss of power the PC, NAC, DDC and ASC shall reboot in an orderly fashion and
attain a normal operating status within 2 minutes of the return of power. This shall be
accomplished without operator intervention.

The BMS can be used for smoke management applications (life Safety Applications) if all the
DDC’s are certified in accordance with UL864 UUKL requirements.

DDC may be used for any equipment monitored and controlled by the BMS. A dedicated
DDC shall be provided at minimum to monitor and control the following:
A single Air Handling Unit (each AHU shall have a dedicated DDC).
Other major items of equipment.

BACnet BUILDING CONTROLLER (B-BC)

Furnish and Install BACnet Building Controllers (B-BCs) in the quantities as shown on the
drawings.

Furnish and install a BACnet router (B-RTR) in the quantities as shown on the drawings plus
one additional router for each B-BC shown on the drawings at the location shown for each B-
BC.

General: Building Controllers shall combine both network routing functions and control
functions into a single unit. B-BC's shall route communications between the BACnet/IP
network, the BACnet 8802.3 network, BACnet PTP network and the BACnet MS/TP
network. The BC shall be responsible for monitoring and controlling directly connected
HVAC equipment such as large AHU's or Boilers. A sufficient number of B-BC's shall be
supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list. Each
B-BC shall be classified as a "native" BACnet device, supporting the BACnet Building
Controller (B) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B-AAC are not

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 52 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

acceptable. BC's shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as
Building Controllers (B-BC).

Hardware Specifications:
Memory: The operating system and the application programs for the B-BC shall be stored
in non-volatile FLASH memory. The B-BC shall support up to 256 MB Flash memory
and up to 512 MB of RAM.
Communication Ports: Each B-BC shall provide communication to both the Server(s)
and the field buses. The B-BC shall have on-board at least one 10/100bT Ethernet port,
an RS-232 Port and at least two RS-485 ports. It shall support communications to a
maximum of 32 MS/TP master devices per port.
Modular Expandability: The system shall employ a modular I/O field interface (sensors,
actuators, etc.) design to allow easy expansion of the field interface device Input and
Output capacity. It shall be possible to add I/O modules as desired to meet the I/O
requirements for individual control applications. These modules shall be capable of being
installed up to 100 feet from the B-BC
Inputs: The B-BC shall have 16 on-board universal inputs, if required, with a minimum
of 12-bit analog to digital conversion. Each input shall have over-voltage protection.
Outputs: The B-BC shall have 16 on-board universal outputs, if required, with a 12-bit
digital to analog conversion.

Optional output cards for the following outputs:

24 VAC Zero crossing Triac.

N.C. Form A relay output.
N.O. Form A relay output.
4 to 20mA.
0 to 10VDC analog output.
Local Status Indicator Lamps: Provide as a minimum, LED indication of CPU status,
Ethernet LAN status, and field bus status.
Real Time Clock (RTC): Each B-BC shall include a battery or capacitor backed, real
time clock for 72 hours, accurate to 1.5 minutes per month. The RTC shall provide the
following: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. The system shall
automatically correct for daylight savings time and leap years.
Power Supply: The power supply for the B-BC's shall be 24 or 220/240 volts AC (-15%,
+20%, 25 VA max.) power. Line voltage below the operating range of the system shall
be considered outages. The controller shall have over voltage surge protection without
additional AC power signal conditioning.
Automatic Restart after Power Failure: Upon restoration of power after an outage, the B-
BC shall automatically and without human intervention: update all monitored functions;
resume operation based on current synchronized time and status, and implement special
start-up strategies as required.
Battery Backup: The B-BC shall include an on-board battery to back up the controller's
RAM memory. In the case of a power failure, the B-BC shall first try to restart from the
RAM memory. If that memory is corrupted or unusable, then the B-BC shall restart itself
from its application program stored in its FLASH memory.

Software Specifications:

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 53 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

General: The B-BC shall contain FLASH memory to store both the resident operating
system and application programming. Each B-BC shall be capable of parallel processing,
executing all control programs simultaneously. Any program may affect the operation of
any other program. Each program shall have the full access of all I/O facilities of the
processor. This execution of control function shall not be interrupted due to normal user
communications including interrogation, program entry, printout of the program for
storage, routing communications, etc.
User Programming Language: The application software shall be user programmable.
This includes all strategies, sequences of operation, control algorithms, parameters, and
set points. The source program shall be English language-based and programmable by
the user.

Control Software:
The B-BC shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control algorithms:

Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID)

Two Position Control.
Digital Filter.
Ratio Calculator.
Equipment Cycling Protection.
Mathematical Functions: Each controller shall be capable of performing basic
mathematical functions (+, -, x, /), squares, square roots, exponential, logarithms,
trigonometric functions, Boolean logic statements or combinations of all. The controllers
shall be capable of performing complex logical statements including operators such as >,
<, =, and, or, exclusive or, etc. These shall be able to be used in the same equations with
the mathematical operators and nested up to five parentheses deep.
Energy Management Applications: B-BC's shall have the ability to perform any or all of
the following energy management routines:

Time of Day Scheduling.

Calendar Based Scheduling.
Holiday Scheduling.
Exception Scheduling.
Temporary Schedule Overrides.
Optimal Start.
Optimal Stop.
Night Setback Control.
Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer).
Peak Demand Limiting.
Temperature Compensated Duty Cycling.
Heating/Cooling Interlock.
Hot/Cold Deck Reset.
Free Cooling.
Hot Water Reset.
Chilled Water Reset.
Condenser Water Reset.
Chiller Sequencing.

History Logging: Each controller shall be capable of locally logging any input, output,
calculated value, etc. over user defined time intervals (1 second minimum time). Up to 256
values shall be stored in each log. Each log can record either the instantaneous, average,
minimum or maximum value of the point. Logged data shall be downloadable to the Operator

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 54 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Workstation for long term archiving based upon user-defined time intervals, or manual
command.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 55 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Alarm Management: For each system point, alarms can be created based on high/low limits
or conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan of the BC and can result in the
display of one or more alarm messages or reports. Up to 8 alarms can be configured for each
point in the controller. Alarms will be generated based on their priority. A minimum of 255
priority levels shall be provided. If communication with the Operator Workstation is
temporarily interrupted, the alarm will be time-stamped and buffered in the B-BC. When
communications return, the alarm will be transmitted to the Operator Workstation. Alarms
shall be capable of being routed to any BACnet workstation that conforms to the B-AWS
device profile and uses the BACnet/IP protocol.

Router Function: The B-BC shall be capable of routing traffic between two BACnet MS/TP
ports, one BACnet PTP (Point to Point) port, four (logical) BACnet IP ports and one (logical)
BACnet Ethernet port. The BC shall support BACnet IP Foreign Device Registration and
BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD). The B-BC shall support PTP modem
communications and perform IP Packet Assembling/Disassembling (PAD) Routing for up to
four BACnet IP PAD networks.

Each B-BC shall have the following standard features:

Each of the four BACnet IP ports can be configured for BACnet IP, BBMD, Foreign
Device Registration or PAD.
The Firmware shall be upgradeable through the Ethernet connection via FTP without
physical access to the B-BC for easy updates as future enhancements expand
functionality.
Accept up to four expansion I/O cards.
Expansion I/O modules shall be connected with twisted pair wire or pluggable on the
controllers backplane.
Shall dynamically allocate memory resources to provide flexible use of its memory.
Shall contain up to 32 user defined control programs.
Shall employ at minimum a 32-bit microprocessor.
Shall meet or exceed the specifications in the ANSI/ASHRAE BACnet Standard 135-
2012 for BACnet Building Controllers.
Shall have removable screw terminal blocks that can accommodate wire sizes 14-22
AWG.
Shall support pulse counting up to 16 Hz with accumulator objects.
Shall support direct connections up to 64 inputs, 32 outputs.
Shall support up to 1000 Analog Value Objects, 1000 Binary Value Objects and up to
256 Multi-state Value Objects.
Shall support up to 32 Loop Objects.
Shall support up to 32 Program Objects.
Shall support up to 32 Schedule Objects and up to 32 Calendar Objects.
Shall support up to 256 Trend Objects.

Embedded Web Server: Each B-BC shall have an embedded Web Server that provides the
following capabilities as standard features.
Serve and display optional custom graphics and tabular web pages containing any set of
desired I/O values from the entire BMS.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 56 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The B-BC shall have capacity for at least 50 unique graphical web page backgrounds.
Each background may be re-used multiple times with different sets of similar data such
as for a FCU to provide many more unique displayed data sets.
Provide a built-in alarm summary that displays selected FMCS system alarms in a tabular
summary page.
Provides a minimum of 3 levels of web browser password protected user access.
The B-BC shall be capable of being configured over the data network by using a standard
Internet Browser without any additional software.

BACnet ADVANCED APPLICATION CONTROLLER (B-AAC)

Controllers shall be microprocessor based BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-

AAC) in accordance with the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2012. The Native BACnet
AAC's shall be provided for Air Handling Units, Pumps and other applications as shown on
the drawings. The application control program shall be resident within the same enclosure as
the input/output circuitry, which translates the sensor signals. The system supplier shall
provide a PICS document showing the installed systems compliance level to the
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2012.

AAC's must be BTL-listed as a B-AAC, shall be fully application programmable and shall at
all times maintain their BACnet compliance. Controllers offering application selection only
(non-programmable) are not acceptable. Control sequences within or programmed into the
BACnet B-AAC's shall be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the
presence of a battery, to be retained.

Whether stand-alone or networked, the BTL Listed Advanced Application Controllers (B-
AAC) shall be used to provide direct digital control of HVAC equipment and other connected
equipment. In addition to their standalone capabilities to execute the operating sequences,
they shall also be capable to be networked in a peer-to-peer, BACnet MS/TP field network to
other BACnet B-AAC's, or as part of a complete integrated management system which
integrates multiple field networks. These controllers may be used to optimize the energy
consumption by implementing various Energy Management strategies such as demand
limiting, duty cycling, outside air optimization, temperature setup/setback, optimum start/stop
routines, etc.

Standard features for field devices shall include:

Stand-alone or networked peer-to-peer capabilities as MS/TP Masters, slave devices are
not acceptable.
BACnet MS/TP LAN with configurable baud rate from 9600 to 76.8k baud.
Inputs to be Universal Inputs with 12 bit resolution- software selectable as analog or
digital with standard and custom ranges. Pulse counting shall be available for 30% of the
inputs up to 16Hz frequency.
All Outputs to be Universal Outputs with 10 bit resolution - software selectable for analog
(0-10V and 4-20mA) or digital with standard and custom ranges.
40 BV points and 40 AV points minimum.
Standard P, PI, or PID BACnet Loop Objects. Minimum of 1 Loop Object for each
output.
Retains Last To Normal/To Off Normal Event for each object.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 57 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

10 User definable program areas.

8 BACnet Trend Log Objects, minimum sample interval of 1 second.
8 BACnet Schedule Objects.
3 BACnet Calendar Objects.
BACnet Intrinsic Alarm Reporting.
Sensor conversion tables for creating linear curves.
Compatible with "Smart Sensor" specified below.
For BACnet B-AAC's designed to control larger HVAC equipment including AHUs,
Exhaust Fans and Boiler Plants, the following shall apply in addition to the standard
features:

Optional output cards for the following outputs:

24 VAC Zero crossing Triac.

N.C. Form A relay output.
N.O. Form A relay output.
4-20mA.
0-10VDC analog output.
RTD

One B-AAC may only serve a single Air Handling Unit (each AHU shall have a dedicated
controller).

BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC): General (FOR PUBLIC AREAS AND
MEP SERVICES)

Each ASC controller shall be a dedicated, stand-alone, microprocessor-based, application-

specific unitary controller designed to control the HVAC plant, control sequences, and point
configurations. The ASC shall operate with a high-speed 16-bit processor. ASC must be BTL-
listed as a B-ASC (BACnet-Application Specific Controller) conforming to ANSI/ASHRAE
135-2012.

ASC controller shall utilize user programmable function modules as required to meet the
functional intent of all control sequences on a stand-alone basis.

Universal inputs shall include the following minimum requirements:

Five universal inputs per controller.

Configurable for 0-10VDC, 4-20mA, RTD, or dry contact type input signals with 12-bit
resolution.

Digital outputs shall include the following minimum requirements:

FCU ASC: At least Five (5) relay outputs per controller, where three of them shall be suitably
rated for the FCU fan Operation.

Analog outputs shall include the following minimum requirements:

Three (3) analog outputs per controller configurable for 0-10VDC or 4-20mA.
Floating analog outputs are not accepted.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 58 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Communication Networks:

ASC shall utilize optically isolated, 2-wire twisted shielded EIA-485 line signaling for
portable operator terminal, color graphic operator station, or NAC and shall utilize the
BACnet MS/TP communications protocol designed to control the HVAC plant, control
sequences, and point configurations.
ASCs shall communicate at speeds up to and including 76.8k baud and shall utilize a token
passing scheme to accommodate concurrent communication with multiple network devices.
Failure of one ASC shall not affect the performance of other ASCs on the network.

Nonvolatile Memory: All ASC's operating parameters, set points, and schedules shall be
stored in flash memory or other nonvolatile memory.

ASCs firmware shall be upgradeable through flash memory over MS/TP without application
interruption.

Input Power: Input power requirements for the ASC shall be line voltage or 24VAC, 50/60
Hz, 20 VA maximum. The controller power supply shall be separate from any other used for
motor control contractor coils.

Mounting: ASC shall be readily mounted by using pre-drilled holes or integral mounting lugs
such as DIN rail.

BMS CONTROLLERS: APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (ASC): FAN COIL

UNITS (FOR PUBLIC AREAS AND MEP SERVICES)

Each fan coil unit shall have an ASC. The number, type and location of FCU shall be as
indicated on the Mechanical Drawings.

The BMS Specialist shall furnish the following components for each FCU to the MEP
Specialist for installation by the MEP Specialist:
Application Specific Controller.
24 Vac control transformer if required.
Interposing relays for fan speed commands AC-3 rated according to the FCU fan current
requirement.
Temperature sensors for those FCU that have the temperature sensor located in the
recirculation port.
Chilled water valve and actuator. The MEP Specialist shall install the valve.

Provide a wall mounted smart sensor for the monitoring of the space temperature and for the
user commands associated with the FCU. The sensor shall meet the following minimum
requirements:
RTD sensors.
Temperature reported at the OIW shall have an accuracy of + or – 0.5 °C.
Enclosure shall be rugged plastic and shall be white. There shall be no logos, trademarks
or names on the enclosure and there shall be no evidence of their removal.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 59 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Sensor shall have an LCD. Temperature reported at the LCD shall have an accuracy of +
or – 0.5 °C. and the difference between the LCD and the OIW reported temperatures shall
not differ by more than 0.2 °C. Cover shall be removable to allow access to the plug for
the POT.
The functions displayed by LCD via selector button shall be space temperature, space
temperature set point and fan speed.
The enclosures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be amended as
instructed by the Engineer at no cost to the Employer.
Smart sensor housings with LCD shall be intelligent and shall only communicate with
their associated ASC via a digital communications network over screened twisted pair
cable or equivalent and shall be independent from BMS LAN. This communications
network may use a proprietary protocol. Enclosures associated with FCU that have speed
control shall also incorporate speed selection buttons.
If requested by the engineer the smart sensor enclosure shall be temporarily mounted
alongside the FCU and shall be subsequently relocated as required by the fit-out design.
The wall mounted smart sensors shall be located 1500 mm above finished floor level.
Coordinate exact locations with Architectural Plans.

Provide the MEP Specialist with the following documentation within 2 weeks of receiving
the request from the MEP Specialist:
Multi-color point to point wiring diagram detailing the wiring of the FCU controller and
other control equipment installed on the terminal devices.
Written instructions and drawings containing sufficient information to enable the MEP
Specialist to undertake the installation satisfactorily.
The BMS Specialist shall provide a list of all FCU that shall have the temperature sensor
located in the recirculation port.

The BMS Specialist shall meet with the MEP Specialist before commencement of the ASC
installation and cabling to ensure that the proposed installation procedures are satisfactory.
The MEP Specialist shall prepare a drawing of the wiring for the ASC and all associated
instrumentation and final control elements based on the information provided by the BMS
Specialist. The MEP Specialist and the BMS Specialist shall both certify on the drawing that
the drawing is correct and the drawing shall be submitted as a shop drawing for review by the
Engineer.

The BMS Specialist shall periodically meet with the MEP Specialist to inspect the installation
of the ASC and to verify proper operation via a POT.

The BMS Specialist shall enter all data into the ASC at the site after the FCU has been
installed.

The ASC shall monitor and control the following parameters for FCU:
Space temperature.
Fan ON/OFF and Speed control.
Cooling and Heating coils valve.
Electric reheat coil
Fresh air damper

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 60 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Set point reset (applicable only to those units with wall mounted enclosures having a set
point reset capability)
Fan speed control selection (applicable only to those units with wall mounted enclosures
having a set point reset capability)

PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within ± 0.5 °C. of the space temperature
set points.

The operator shall be able to access the ASC by connecting the POT to the ASC LAN at the
smart sensor enclosure. It shall not be necessary for the operator to obtain access to the ceiling
plenum in order to obtain an operator interface to the ASC. At minimum, the operator shall
be able to undertake the following functions via the POT when communicating with the BMS
Management level Network or when connected at the smart sensor housing, at the DDC and
at the NAC and via any OIW:
Change space temperature set points for a single FCU.
Change an alarm limit/value.
Change the operating mode for a single FCU.
Change the schedules for a single FCU.
Turn the fan ON/OFF for a single FCU.
Override the fan speed.
Set the cooling or heating coil valve to fully open and fully closed and any intermediate
position.
Enable / disable the reheat coil

The BMS Specialist shall install data into the ASC on site as necessary for the correct
operation of the FCU including:
FCU-ASC MS/TP address.
Occupied space temperature set points.
Unoccupied space temperature set points.
Control constants.
Engineering units conversion factors.
Default operating schedules.
Definition of FCU type.
Other parameters as necessary to define the operation of the FCU in accordance with
these specifications.

The BMS Specialist shall calibrate the space temperature sensor at the project site.

Following the installation of the FCU the BMS Specialist shall undertake the following tasks:
Physically connect the ASC into the BMS LAN.
Enter all parameters that may not have been entered before shipment of the FCU to the
site.
Verify that the ASC modulates the cooling or heating coil valve from fully open to fully
closed and vice versa.
Verify that the FCU-ASC is satisfactorily integrated into the LAN.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 61 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Verify that the operating sequences are correct and that there is stable modulation of the
cooling coil valve and fan speeds
Calibrate the temperature sensor.

ASC shall have opto-isolation or equivalent protection.

BMS CONTROLLERS: APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (ASC): FAN COIL

UNITS (OPTION FOR TENANTS)

The BMS Specialist shall furnish the following components for each FCU to the MEP
Specialist for installation by the MEP Specialist:
Application Specific Controller.
24 Vac control transformer if required.
Interposing relays for fan speed commands AC-3 rated according to the FCU fan current
requirement.
Temperature sensors for those FCU that have the temperature sensor located in the
recirculation port.
Chilled water valve and actuator. The MEP Specialist shall install the valve.

Provide a wall mounted smart sensor for the monitoring of the space temperature and for the
user commands associated with the FCU. The sensor shall meet the following minimum
requirements:
RTD sensors.
Enclosure shall be rugged plastic and shall be white. There shall be no logos, trademarks
or names on the enclosure and there shall be no evidence of their removal.
Sensor shall have an LCD.
The functions displayed by LCD via selector button shall be space temperature, space
temperature set point and fan speed.
The enclosures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be amended as
instructed by the Engineer at no cost to the Employer.
Coordinate exact locations with Architectural Plans.

Provide the MEP Specialist with the following documentation within 2 weeks of receiving
the request from the MEP Specialist:
Multi-color point to point wiring diagram detailing the wiring of the FCU controller and
other control equipment installed on the terminal devices.
Written instructions and drawings containing sufficient information to enable the MEP
Specialist to undertake the installation satisfactorily.

ASC shall have opto-isolation or equivalent protection.

BACnet ROUTERS

Provide all BACnet routers as necessary to meet the requirements of these specifications.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 62 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

BACnet routers shall be native BACnet only. Proprietary and other standard protocols shall
not be provided. Routers shall be provided as necessary to connect one medium to another,
e.g. BACnet ARCnet to BACnet MS/TP, etc.

The BACnet routers shall, at minimum, support BIBB’s for data sharing, alarm and event
management, scheduling, trending and device and network management.

DISTRIBUTED CONTROL PANELS (DCP)

General

The DCP’s shall be standalone, shall reside on the automation level and shall meet the
following requirements:
DCP shall house the DDC’s and shall meet the requirements detailed in Paragraph titled
“Panels and Enclosures” of these specifications. The DCP shall be placed at the same
location as the equipment they control. The BMS Specialist shall provide a suitably rated
enclosure for all associated BMS components, including the controllers, relays, wiring
guides, terminal strips, etc.
Each DCP shall have its own power supplies that shall be rated such that they will
adequately accommodate all foreseeable uses of the DCP including DDC controllers and
field devices.
Each DCP shall have an AC Mains Socket outlet rated 1000 Watts. If all the sockets in
the DCP’s are connected to the UPS, no more than two sockets shall be used at the same
time therefore a 2kW additional load shall be considered in the main UPS selection.
All field instrumentation and final control elements cable shall be terminated at the DCP
on terminal strips.
All Power circuits (220/240VAC, 24VAC, 24VDC, 15VDC etc) supplying any type of
equipment or field devices from the DCP, shall be fused. Outgoing power cables shall be
terminated on Fused Terminals inside the DCP.
Cabling shall be terminated on rugged and easily accessible terminal strips. Each
termination shall be clearly marked and shall be as detailed in the shop and record
drawings.
Provide and install as-built wiring diagrams to indicate the control points on all
equipment. Also provide laminated point lists in all DCP’s

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 63 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

FIELD INSTRUMENTATION

TEMPERATURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED – SINGLE POINT

Provide duct mounted, single point, temperature sensor as follows:

In ducts less than 1 m2 in cross-sectional area.
In ducts greater than 1m2 in cross-sectional area if there is no heating coil and no cooling
coil and no mixing of air flows of different temperatures upstream.

Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Stainless steel probe of length between one-third and two-thirds of the duct width.
100 or 1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature coefficient of resistance
of 0.00375 ohm/ohm/°C.
Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of ± 0.5 °C. (1.0 °F.).
Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter. Where necessary to meet monitoring
accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration.
Duct mounted moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
Temperature range of 0 °C. to 50 °C. (32 °F to 122 °F).

TEMPERATURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED – AVERAGING TYPE

Provide duct mounted, averaging temperature sensor as follows:

In ducts greater than 1 m² in cross-sectional area.

Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Probe length of 3.66m (12 feet) minimum or 3.25m per m2. (One linear foot per square
foot) of duct cross-sectional area, whichever is greater.
Copper sheathed construction.
100 or 1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature coefficient of resistance
of 0.00375 ohm/ohm/°C.
Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of ± 1.0 °C. (2.0 °F.)
Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter. Where necessary to meet monitoring
accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration.
Duct mounted moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
Suitable supports at all bends and at intermediate points to prevent movement in the air
stream.
Temperature range of 0 °C. to 50 °C. (32 °F to 122 °F.).

TEMPERATURE SENSOR: WALL MOUNTED – PUBLIC SPACES

Provide wall mounted temperature sensor that meet the following:

White protective enclosure. There shall be no manufacturer's logos, name or
thermometer on casing.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 64 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Location shall be selected by the Engineer. No sensor shall be mounted until the
Employer gives specific location instructions.
100/1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature coefficient of resistance of
0.00375 ohm/ohm/°C.
Monitored temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of ± 0.5 °C. (1.0 °F.).
Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter. Where necessary to meet monitoring
accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration
Temperature range of 10 °C. to 60 °C.
Sensor shall have and LCD.

TEMPERATURE SENSOR: THERMOWELL MOUNTED

Thermowell mounted temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:
Rigid stainless steel probe of length which is, at minimum, 20% of the pipe width.
100 or 1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature coefficient of resistance
of 0.00375 ohm/ohm/°C.
BMS shall report the monitored temperature with an accuracy of ± 0.25 °C. (0.5 °F.)
accuracy.
The device shall have screen to present the water temperature.
Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter where required with a temperature range
that is appropriate for the application.
Range for chilled water between 0 °C. and +70 °C. (+32 °F. and +160 °F.)
Range for condenser water between 0 °C. and +120 °C. (+32 °F. and +250 °F.)
Range for hot and heating water Between 0 °C. and +120 °C. (+32 °F. and +250 °F.)
Where necessary to meet monitoring accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire
configuration.
Moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
Stainless steel thermowell.
Provided with thermal grease to aid temperature sensing.
Sensors required for the determination of temperature differential shall be matched with
a maximum variation over the entire temperature range of 0.1 °C. (0.2 °F.).

STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED

Duct mounted static pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
Input range shall be appropriate for the application. Select range such that it covers from
zero duct static pressure relative to the exterior of the duct up to a static pressure of
between 20% and 50% in excess of the maximum static pressure that could be
encountered in the duct relative to the duct exterior. Typically:

For low pressure duct consider using a range of 0 to 500Pa (0 to 2” wc.)

For medium pressure duct use a range of 0 to 1500Pa (0 to 6” wc.)

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 65 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

For high-pressure duct use a range of 0 to 2500 Pa (0 to 10” wc.).

4-20mA, 0-5 or 0-10Vdc output proportional to pressure input range compatible with the
BMS.
1% Full scale output accuracy
Operating temperature range of 0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF).
Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero adjustment.
Minimum over pressure input protection of two times rated input or 7 kpa (20 psi)
whichever is greater.
LCD

STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: WATER

Pressure sensors shall meet the following requirements:

Input range of 0 to 1400 kPa
4-20 mA output proportional to water pressure.
0.5% accuracy of range.
Temperature range of 0 °C. to 38 °C. (32 °F to 100 °F.).
Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero and span adjustment.
Over pressure input protection of two times rated input.
An IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and an IP65 to IEC
60529 housing for an exterior housing.
Stainless steel wetted parts.
Burst pressure of 5 times rated input
Long-term stability of .25 percent of full scale.
Construction of pressure transmitter and associated components shall be rated for at least
twice the maximum static pressure.
Pressure sensor shall have two-way manifolds to facilitate isolation and calibration.
Manifolds shall be mated to transmitters and the assembly factory tested under pressure
prior to installation. Manifolds shall be integral mounted “coplanar” with 316 SS flange,
drain and vents.

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR – AIR

Differential pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Output shall be 4-20mA, 0-10Vdc or 0-5Vdc output proportional to pressure input range
compatible with BMS.
Select range as required, taking into consideration pressure drop across filter or coil.
Typically 0 to 500Pa (0-2” wc) range for low-pressure commercial duct.
Operating temperature range of 0 DEG C to 60 DEG C (32 DEG F to 140 DEG F).
With LCD

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 66 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR - WATER

Water differential pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
Cast aluminum an IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and
an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
Output of 4-20 mA proportional to the pressure sensed.
Over pressure protection of five times the rated input.
Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero and span adjustment.
Operating range shall be suitable for the application. Select range such that it covers
from zero differential pressure up to a differential static pressure of between 20% and
50% in excess of the maximum static pressure that could be encountered. Remember
that if the sensor is used for the control of a chilled water bypass and is located across,
for example, a chilled water AHU coil, the pressure drop of both the coil and the
associated valve at full design flow have to be taken into account.
Accuracy of ± 2% of full-scale reading.
Valved tapings shall be installed by the Mechanical contractor. Furnish the valves to the
Mechanical contractor.
Differential pressure transmitters shall have three way manifolds. Manifolds shall be
mated to transmitters and the assembly factory tested under pressure prior to installation.
Manifolds shall be integral mounted “coplanar” with 316 SS flange, drain and vents.

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH - AIR

Air differential pressure switch shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
An IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and an IP65 to IEC
60529 housing for an exterior housing.
SPDT switch rated for 10 amps minimum at 120 Vac.
Set point trip adjustment with scale to indicate setting. Switches used for filter
differential pressures shall also have a display of the monitored differential pressure.
Dead band adjustment.
Select range such that it covers from zero duct static pressure relative to the exterior of
the duct up to a static pressure of between 20% and 50% in excess of the maximum static
pressure that could be encountered in the duct relative to the duct exterior. Typically:

For low pressure commercial duct use a range of 0 to 500pa (0 to 2 inches w.g.)
For medium pressure duct use a range of 0 to 1500Pa (0 to 6 inches w.g.)
For high pressure duct use a range of 0 to 2500Pa (0 to 10 inches w.g.)
Temperature range of -18 °C. to 71 °C. (0 °F. to 160 °F.).
Manual reset.

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH - WATER

Water differential pressure switches shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 67 of 90
APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

316 stainless steel body.

Local display gauge.
End to end accuracy not to exceed ± 1.0% over entire range.
Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero and span adjustment.
Over pressure input protection to a minimum of five (5) times rated input.
The differential pressure transducer shall be rated to withstand the maximum rated
pressure of the system in which it is installed.
Range to be coordinated with the chilling unit manufacturer.

DAMPER END SWITCH

Damper end switch shall meet the following:

Adjustable axle mounted collar for easy setup and adjustment
Electrical enclosure with ½" knockout allowing for easy installation
Dual, opposed switches for fully opened or fully closed position
Switches will have the option to be set as normally closed (NC) or normally opened (NO)
by user.

LIQUID LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH

Liquid level float switches shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
Polypropylene float, PVC cable, hermetically sealed mercury switch.
13 amp running current @ 120 VAC, 11 amp current @ 240 VAC.
SPDT type.
Operating temperature of 0 °C. to 71 °C. (32 °F. to 160 °F.).
Operating pressure of 180 kPa

ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOWMETER

Electromagnetic flow meter shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

No moving parts.
Microprocessor-based.
4-20 mA output.
Full lugged flanged.
Accuracy shall better than 5% of flow rate over a 33:1 turndown at all flow rates above
1 fps.
The integrally mounted meter housing and flow meter sensor with an IP54 to IEC 60529
transmitter housing for an interior application and an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an
exterior housing. The flow sensor coil housing shall be steel and withstand 3500 kPa
external pressure in all conditions.
Electronics shall be remote mounted within the central plant either wall or column
mounted adjacent to the bypass piping area.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 68 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Flow meter transmitter shall be furnished in an IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing
for an interior application and an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing,
with a character, 2 line 16 digit backlit display. The alphanumeric display shall indicate
user-defined flow units and flow rate. All menu advice and commands shall be visible
on this display.
The flow meter shall be suitable for operation at temperatures from -40 °F to 200 °F and
at pressures from full vacuum to 2100 kPa.
The meter shall feature non-volatile sensor memory (EEPROM)) which shall contain all
the characteristics of the sensor (i.e. calibration factors, coil frequency, gain settings) as
well as user defined parameters on site. This memory shall facilitate automatic transfer
of pre-programmed data to new electronics in the event of a transmitter fault, without
requiring renewed calibration/programming.
The flow meter shall have a switching power supply having an operating range from 77-
265 VAC 50/60 Hz (12-60 VDC). Power consumption shall not exceed 20 VA.
Carbon steel body.
Flow meter shall distinguish between directions of fluid flow.
Construction of flow-meter and associated components shall be rated for at least twice
the maximum static pressure.

ENERGY METER (BTU)

The energy meter shall provide calculation of energy used by the client. It shall calculate
based on the supply / return temperature and the chilled water flow.

The energy meter minimum requirement is as follows:-

1. It should accept:
a. RTD: 4 – wire PT 100 RTD temperature inputs
b. Flow: Pulse signal / 4.20 mA signal
2. Metric or SI unit configurable
3. Communication: BACnet IP
4. The local displays shall display the following
a. Accumulated Energy
b. Accumulated Water Flow
c. Actual Water Flow (Electromagnetic type)
d. Supply Temperature
e. Return Temperature
f. Actual Thermal Power
g. Peak Thermal Power
h. Communication over Modbus shall have following parameters as a minimum but not limited
to:-
 Supply Temperature
 Return Temperature
 Flow
 Energy
5. The energy meter shall be installed on the panel. It shall have proper protection in order to avoid
tampering of the meter.
6. The energy meter shall be immune to electromagnetic interference for electrical devices such as
VFDs.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 69 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

7. Energy meter shall have pulse output for configuration of energy as a pulse.

CURRENT SENSING RELAYS

Current sensing relays shall meet, at minimum, the following specifications:

Rated and sized for the applicable load.
The output relay shall have an accessible trip adjustment over its complete
operating range.
Current relay shall have input and output isolation via current transformer.
Current relay shall be self-powered with no insertion loss.
Relay shall be housed a dustproof enclosure.
Accuracy to be <2% of full-scale max.
Temperature rating of –15 °C to 60 °C (5 °F to 140 °F).
Option: Provide LED indication of relay status.

Whenever the status of a motor cannot be monitored though a differential pressure switch it
shall be done via a current sensing relay. The BMS contractor shall provide current sensing
relays at the MCC starters or at the local starters.

VOLTAGE SENSING RELAY

Voltage sensing relays shall continuously monitor 3-phase power lines for phase loss, phase
reversal and low voltage. Voltage sensing relays shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
Dustproof ABS plastic housing.
The output relay shall have an accessible trip adjustment over its complete
operating range.
Relay shall have over current and over voltage protection.
Automatic reset with adjustable reset delay.
Adjustable trip delay.
Transient protection - 2500 VRMS for 10 ms.
Accuracy - ± 0.1% of set point.
Operating temperature range of -29 °C. to 49 °C. (-20 °F. to 120 °F.).
Accuracy - ± 0.5% of FS voltage.
Operating temperature range of -29 °C. to 49 °C. (-20 °F. to 120 °F.).

KW AND KWH TRANSDUCER

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 70 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Provide kW and kWh transducers as identified in Field termination sheets and/or control
drawings. Transducer shall include, at minimum, the following:
True RMS conversion.
24 Bit DSP signal processor.
On board potential transformers for up to 600 Vac applications.
Configurable via RS-232C on personal computer.
RS-485 data port for communication with BMS.
4-20 mA proportional to KW demand output.
Opto-isolated open collector solid state form a relay rated at 30 Vdc @150mA for
kWH output.
Opto-isolated open collector solid state form a relay rated at 30 Vdc @150mA for
phase loss output.
Accuracy 1% or better of full scale.
Operating temperature of 0ºC to 70ºC (32ºF to 158ºF).
Provide disconnect/shorting bar and Current Transformer compatible with
amperage being sensed.
With LCD.

CONTROL RELAYS – LATCHING

Latching Relays shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Pickup rating, time and hold rating as required for individual applications.
Rated for a minimum of ten (10) million mechanical operations and a minimum
of 500,000 electrical operations.
Provide complete isolation between the control circuit and the digital output.
Located in the DCP, DDC, ASC or other local enclosures.
Malfunction of a BMS component shall cause the controlled output to fail to the
positions identified in the failure procedure within the operating sequences.
10 amp contact rating.
Pin type terminals.

CONTROL RELAYS – MOMENTARY

Momentary Relays shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Coil ratings of 240 VAC, 50 mA or 10-30 VAC/VDC, 40 mA as suitable for the
application.
Provide complete isolation between the control circuit and the digital output.
Located in the DCP, DDC, ASC or other local enclosures.
10 amp contact rating.
LED status indication.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 71 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

CARBONE MONOXIDE (CO) SENSOR

Provide CO monitoring systems for the drop off area. Provide complete coverage of the drop
off area. The carbon monoxide sensor shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Sensors shall be of the electrochemical type.

Locate sensing points on walls and columns at 1.5 to 2m (5-6ft) above floor level.
Locate one sensing point per 700 m2 (7500 ft²). Do not locate sensing points closer
than 2m to traffic lanes.
Sensor range shall be of 0 to 300 ppm for 7% accuracy cell or 500 ppm for 3% accurate
cell.
Provide two (2) relay contacts, at minimum, per sensor, to indicate CO warning level
(initially set at 50ppm) and CO alarm level (initially set at 200ppm) for each sensing
point.
Unit shall be complete with 85 db audible alarm and have visual output reading via an
LCD of the gas sensed.
Provide 4-20mA, 0-10 or 0-5Vdc output of Carbon Monoxide sensed compatible with
BMS.
The proposed sensor locations shall be submitted at the shop drawing stage and shall
be amended as directed by the Employer and/or Engineer.
Sensor shall be factory calibrated and will only require calibration after a minimum one
(1) year service.

AMBIENT LIGHT LEVEL SENSOR

Provide ambient light level sensors as indicated within the field termination schedules and/or
control diagrams. Light level sensor shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
Light sensor shall have a 12 – 35 Vdc power at maximum 22mA current draw.
4-20 mA output proportional to the ambient light level where 4 mA is light and 20 mA
is dark.
Photo sensitive resistor with analog transducer.
Mounted on the exterior of a North wall on the roof.
Temperature range of -25ºC to 75ºC (-13ºF to 167ºF)

DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR

Duct smoke detectors shall be provided at the supply and return ducts of all AHU’s and at the
ducted branches from ceiling voids used as return air plenums to the main ducted return air
system. To initiate closing of dampers and/or shutting off of fans having the following
features:
Photo-electric type for duct mounting
Adjustable sensitivity
Housing of die-cast aluminum for mounting on outside of duct wall with air sampling
tubes extending into air duct, fitted with filters.
Reset switch and indicator lamps for power ON and/or alarm
Integral switching relay (2No SPDT Contacts) for energizing an alarm panel and for de-
energizing air handling devices.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 72 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

UL Listed.
Alarm response time less than 10 seconds.
Air Velocity range 0.5 to 20 m/s.
Operating temperature 0 to 55 °C.
Operating humidity 10 to 95% (Non Condensing)

All duct smoke detectors shall be connected to the building’s Fire Alarm System.

Supply duct smoke detector installation should be downstream of fans, filters, coils, heaters,
and humidifiers

Duct smoke detectors in the return air stream should be located at every return air opening
within the smoke compartment, or where the air exits each smoke compartment or in the duct
system before air enters the return air system common to more than one compartment.

Exception: Additional smoke detectors are not required in ducts where the air duct system
passes through other smoke compartments not served by the duct.

Location of detectors mounted in or on air ducts should be downstream from any duct
openings, deflection plates, sharp bends or branch connections.

Exception: Where it is physically impossible to locate the detector accordingly, the detector
can be positioned where pressure differentials are within those established by the
manufacturer for the proper operation of the detector, usually as far as possible from the
opening, bend or deflection plates.

Detectors should be listed by a third party testing laboratory for the environment measured in
the duct and room at the installation site. Relocate the detector if measurements fall outside
of rated limits.

An access panel or door is incorporated in the duct side walls and is used during installation
and for maintenance and test.

Duct smoke detectors should be located at a minimum of 3 meters downstream from

humidifiers

CONTROL VALVES GENERAL

Furnish all valves controlled by the BMS as detailed in the mechanical trade documents and
as indicated on the control drawings which form part of these sub-contract documents. The
contractor shall install valves, except those for instrumentation.

Refer to the Mechanical plans and drawings and to the control drawings which form part of
these sub-contract documents for the design conditions on which to base sizing and ratings of
the valves and their actuators.

The complete valve (body and trim) shall be rated for a pressure that is at least 50% greater
than the maximum pressure to which it will be exposed. Where noted in this Section, the
valve shall be rated for a higher pressure. The complete valve shall be rated for a temperature
that shall be at least 50 deg. C. (90 deg. F.) greater than the maximum temperature to which

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 73 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

it will be exposed. The Manufacturer shall certify that each complete valve is suitable for and
meets all relevant standards for the application.

All valves shall be rated appropriately for the fluid, temperature and pressure and, at
minimum, shall have a 16 bar rating. Valves shall comply with BS EN 60534.

Valves of similar types shall be by the same manufacturer.

Valves shall have the manufacturer's name and the pressure rating clearly marked on the
outside of the body. Where this is not possible manufacturer's name and valve pressure rating
shall be engraved on a minimum 50mm (2 inch) diameter stainless steel tag that shall be
attached to the valve by a chain in such a manner that it cannot be unintentionally removed.

Valves 13mm to 50mm (0.5 inch to 2 inches) shall have screwed ends. Screwed ends shall
comply with BS EN 10226 (Specification for pipe threads for tubes and fittings where
pressure-tight joints are made on the threads - metric dimensions). Valves 63mm (2.5 inches)
and larger shall have flanged ends. Flanged valves shall be furnished complete with
companion flanges, gaskets and bolting materials. Flanges, gaskets and bolting materials shall
meet the appropriate BS EN requirements.

Verify and certify that the materials of construction of the pipe, weld, flange, bolts and valve
will not cause any galvanic corrosion.

Valves shall be suitable for continuous throttling.

Valve schedules shall be submitted for review and shall clearly show the following for each
valve:
Associated system.
Manufacturer and model number.
Valve size and line size.
Flow rate, flow coefficient (CV) - and pressure drop at design conditions
Valve authority, flow rate and pressure drop across the valve at design conditions and
pressure drop across the associated mechanical equipment, e.g., coil, heat exchanger,
etc., at design conditions.
Valve configuration (e.g. two way, three way, butterfly).
Leakage rate.
Maximum pressure shut-off capability.
Actuator manufacturer and model number.
Valve body pressure and temperature rating.
Normally open/closed and failure positions.

Where necessary to achieve the required performance and pressure drop a control valve may
be sized up to two nominal sizes below line size.

Valve bodies shall be cast iron, carbon steel, brass, stainless steel or bronze subject to
requirements for valve body pressure and temperature rating and suitability of material for
application. Valve stem and trim shall be stainless steel.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 74 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Valve seats shall be replaceable. Valve seats shall be metal, ceramic filled PTFE or equivalent
and must assure tight seating.

TWO WAY CONTROL VALVES-PRESSURE INDEPENDENT CONTRL VALVE.

All 2 way control valves shall be dynamic, modulating, pressure independent control valves
(PICV) and shall be provided by the same manufacturer. PICVs shall be installed on each
cooling (or heating) coil as indicated on the drawings and/or contract documents. The valve
shall be a combination of balancing valve and control valve and differential pressure control
valve and shall be able to control the flow independent of the system pressure fluctuation.

Balancing valves and associated balancing shall not be used where pressure independent
modulating control valves are installed. The control valve must have the ability to limit flow
to the maximum design flow specific for each coil at all valve differential pressure ranges of
5 to 60 PSI (0.34 to 4 bar) ) or higher as per maximal system differential pressure

Each control valve shall be individually flow tested and factory verified to deviate no more
than ±5% through the entire operating pressure range of 5 to 60 PSI (0.34 to 4 bar) or higher
as per maximal system differential pressure. All valves shall be tested on a test stand
calibrated and verified with traceability to NIST standards. All testing must be performed at
5 PSI (0° through 90° at 10° increments), 15 and 60 PSI (45° and 90°). Test reports must be
provided if requested.

Valve shall require no more than 5 PSI (0.34 bar) to operated pressure independent. Flow
shall not vary more than ±5% through the entire operating pressure range of 5 to 60 PSI (0.34
to 4 bar).

Each control valve shall be factory commissioned. A calibrated performance tag shall be
provided with each valve listing the measured flow rate in 10° rotation increments.

Control valve range ability shall be a minimum of 100:1 through the operating pressure range.

Valve bodies 2” [50mm] and smaller shall be brass. Valve bodies 3” [80mm] through 8”
[200mm] shall be ductile iron. All internal parts shall be brass, carbon steel, stainless steel or
Teflon®.

All valves shall have at least two (2) factory installed pressure/temperature ports to allow field
verification of flow and pressure independent operation based on Kv-methodology at every
presetting. If the test points are not available or flow measurement based on Kv-methodology
is not possible separate orifice plate shall be provided and installed in series with each PICV.

Valve flow characteristics may be modified in valves 8” [200mm] and smaller without
removal from the piping system.

Maximum flow settings may be adjusted to different settings within the range of the valve
size.

For stable and accurate modulating control the stroke of the valve shall be ≥ 4mm for valves
DN15-20 and ≥ 6.5mm for valves DN25 and above.

Valve differential pressure rating shall be equal to or greater than the associated pump’s
design head pressure. Valve assembly and actuator torque shall be selected to close off against
this differential pressure.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 75 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

For large pipe sizes (>DN200), where PICV is not available, 2 nos. of PICVs installed in
parallel shall be provided even if not indicated on the drawings or separate DPCV
(Differential Pressure Control Valve), Orifice plate and 2 Way Globe Modulating Control
Valve to achieve pressure independent controls.

Pressure rating: 13.8 or 20 bar as per system pressure requirements.

Valve actuator shall be furnished with touch screen display to local control for more details
refer to section 230523.

VALVES FOR INSTRUMENTATION

Instrumentation, such as pressure sensors and flow rate monitors, which is provided for the
monitoring of parameters associated with liquid in pipes or tanks, shall be removable and
replaceable without the requirement to shut down a pump and without the requirement to
drain the pipe or tank and without causing liquid to leak from the pipe or tank. To facilitate
this, the BMS subcontractor shall furnish valves for installation by the mechanical trade.

Instrumentation that is mounted external to the pipe or tank and which is connected to the
pipe or tank by one or more sampling lines shall have a manual two-way on/off valve in each
sampling line meeting the following requirements:
Ball type valve
Valve body shall be 316 stainless steel
Ball and stem shall be 316 stainless steel
Zero leakage.
Rated for 1050 kPa or for a pressure 50% greater than the system working pressure,
whichever is greater.
Rated for a minimum of 50 deg. C (90 °F.) greater than the highest fluid temperature.
Brass or stainless steel trim.
Valve seats shall be metal, reinforced TFE or equivalent and must assure tight seating.
Valve shall be Whitey 40 Series or 80 Series or approved equal if it meets the
requirements detailed above.

Valves for insertion flow meters shall be full port gate valves sized for the flow meter in
accordance with the flow meter manufacturer’s instructions. If the flow meter manufacturer
offers the valve as an accessory then it shall be purchased by the BMS subcontractor from the
insertion flow meter manufacturer and shall be installed by the mechanical trade in accordance
with the insertion flow meter manufacturer’s instructions. The valve shall meet the pressure
and temperature requirements detailed for the control valves and shall have zero leakage at
the system maximum pressure.

Pressure rating: 13.8 or 20 bar as per system pressure requirements.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 76 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

DAMPERS GENERAL

Provide actuators for all motorized dampers excluding motorized fire and/or smoke rated
dampers. All motorized damper actuators furnished by the BMS Specialist shall be
modulating actuators.

Multiple section two position dampers shall be controlled by one BMS output unless indicated
otherwise within the Point Schedules or Sequences of Operation.

Multiple section modulating dampers shall be controlled in sequence unless indicated

otherwise within the Point Schedules or Sequences of Operation.

Actuators shall be mounted to allow complete access for maintenance and removal. Wherever
possible provide damper actuators mounted on the exterior of the duct/damper section. The
installation of actuators within air streams will be permitted only where damper
configurations and site conditions require. Obtain approval for proposed installations of
actuators within ductwork, plenums, airstreams, etc. Furnish access doors where required to
allow access.

Damper actuators shall be configured for normal and failure positions as indicated in the
operating sequences and as indicated on the MEP Specialist Mechanical Drawings and
Specifications. Provide damper end switches on 2-position actuators and position feedback
for modulating damper actuators.

Provide actuators sized in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and industry

standards for accurate and stable control of airflow in each application.

Provide damper actuator installations to comply with the acoustical requirements for the
project. Noise generated from damper actuators in air streams shall not be detectable in
occupied building spaces.

Damper actuators shall be controlled by the BMS where necessary to meet the required
sequences of operation. If the FAS also controls a damper then the FAS control shall override
the BMS control of the damper.

Dampers shall be provided by the Mechanical Specialist.

DAMPER ACTUATORS

Provide electric damper actuators for all motorized dampers. Electric actuators shall meet, at
minimum, the following requirements:
Stroke by the rotating motion of a reversible, overload-protected synchronous motor.
Actuators shall be directly coupled to damper drive blades with no intermediate linkages
or shall be rotary type actuators directly coupled to the damper drive shaft.
Protected against overload by an integral magnetic clutch or stall protection by non-
overloading impedance protected motor.
240 Vac ± 10%, 50/60 Hz or 24 Vac power supply with 2 limit switches with electrically
isolated contacts
One actuator for each damper section. Provide additional actuators to ensure sufficient
torque to meet the specified close off leakage requirements. Damper actuators shall not
be stacked.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 77 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Actuators shall be motorized/driven in both the open and closed directions. Where
required by the sequences of operation, actuators shall have a spring return to the de-
energized position upon loss of power. Damper normal and failure positions shall be as
identified within the sequences of operation.
BMS controlled actuators for modulating Motorized Dampers shall be controlled by a 0-
10 Vdc, or 4-20mA signal. Provide actuators that are fully compatible with the BMS
analogue output subsystem. BMS controlled actuators for two position dampers shall be
controlled by 24Vac, 24Vdc or single-phase 240 Vac power switched by the BMS.
Complete with mounting brackets suitable for extended shaft mounting or direct damper
drive shaft mounting.
Stroke dampers from fully closed to fully open in accordance with the following:
Service Timing Requirement

Two position normal service 75 seconds

Modulating normal service 120 seconds
Emergency service (stair pressurization, smoke containment, etc.) 15 seconds
Actuators for non-fire and/or smoke rated dampers shall be rated for operation at ambient
temperatures of minus 40 °C. to 50 °C. (-40 °F. to 122 °F.).
Complete with damper/actuator stroke position indicator.
Manual drive release mechanism and manual positioning mechanism.

Actuators shall be quiet in operation such that noise from actuator operation is not detectable
in any occupied spaces.

DAMPER ACTUATORS HARDWIRED INTERLOCKS

Provide all required hardwired interlocks between fans and any motor actuated dampers as
identified within these sub-contract documents.

Power for interlocked dampers shall be obtained from the associated air handling fan motor
control circuit. Coordinate actuator power supply wiring and fire alarm system override
control of dampers with MEP Specialist.

Where dampers are specified to be hard wire interlocked with fan motors the BMS Specialist
shall provide the damper position switches. Provide the damper end switch(s) hard wire
interlocked to achieve the operational requirements as specified in the Point Schedules and
the sequences of operation, and as indicated in the MEP Specialist Drawings and
Specifications. Provide damper end switches hard wire interlocked to prevent fan motor
operation in both the hand and auto position of hand/off/auto motor control circuit. Damper
position switches shall be set to indicate the open position when they are open by more than
80%.

Provide for each damper that is controlled by both the BMS and the FAS, a terminal strip and
associated control relays such as to allow control and monitoring as follows (as applicable):
BMS two position open-closed control - contact closure of a BMS relay,
thermostat or interlocking device shall control the damper. Contact opening shall
close the damper.
BMS modulating control - modulating signal from the BMS of 0-10 Vdc or 4-20
mA output to achieve the required sequence.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 78 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Damper open/closed status - allows FAS monitoring or interlock of damper open

and damper close status.
Damper open/closed status - allows BMS monitoring or interlock of damper open
and damper close status.
Override open control - contact closure of a FAS command relay or localized
smoke detector shall override any BMS modulating or open/closed control to open
the damper.
Override closed control - contact closure of a FAS command relay or localized
smoke detector shall override any BMS modulating or open/closed control to close
the damper.
Furnish and terminate cabling as follows:

Between all damper actuators and the associated damper terminal strip.
Between the BMS and the damper terminal strip for any damper monitored and/or
controlled by the BMS.
Between the damper terminal strip and interlocked motors, thermostats, pressure
switches, generators, pumps, etc.

Coordinate exact FAS interface requirements and terminal strip locations with the MEP
Specialist.

THIRD PARTY INTERFACES

GENERAL

The NAC, Gateways used for third party systems integration shall be software programmable
gateways that shall provide a native BACnet/IP to third party ELV building system gateway
if the third party ELV building system does not provide data in a BACnet Object format
meeting all of the requirements of ASHRAE standard SSPC 135.

At minimum the third party protocols shall include Modbus, J-Bus, OPC, and LonWorks.

The third party ELV building system shall have a communications port and shall exchange
information with the Management Level Network in a BACnet/IP format.

The Third Party Supplier scope shall include the following:

Provide third party controller with a communication data port necessary for the data
exchange with the BMS.
Provide the Gateway that shall provide a native BACnet/IP to third party ELV building
system only if the third party ELV building system does not provide data in a BACnet
Object format meeting all of the requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012.
Connect the Gateway if provided to the Third Party System.
Provide to the BMS supplier the BACnet Objects IDs of all BACnet Objects that are to
be transferred to the BMS, as well as complete documentation and information required
for the mapping.
Map the BACnet Object IDs as received from the BMS supplier to the third Party
Controller.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 79 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The BMS Supplier Scope shall include the following:

Provide the physical link (cable & necessary accessories) between the Network
Automation Controller (NAC) or the Distributed Control Panel (DCP) and the Third
Party System Gateway or directly to the Third Party System Data Port if third party ELV
building system provides data in a BACnet Object format meeting all of the requirements
of ASHRAE standard SSPC 135.
Map the BACnet Object IDs as received from the Third Party System Supplier to the
BMS
Provide the Third Party System Supplier with the BACnet Objects IDs of Objects to be
transferred to the Third Party System, as well as complete documentation and
information required for the mapping

THIRD PARTY INTEGRATION TESTS

The interface between the BMS and each third party ELV building system shall be
demonstrated. The tests shall be fully coordinated by the mechanical contractor who shall
liaise with each party concerned. It shall be conclusively demonstrated that a BMS
workstation on the Management Level Network can communicate with the third party system
and vice versa.

The testing of the interface between the Management Level Network and the third party
system shall verify, at minimum, that:
All data communicated from the third party system to the Management Level Network
is in the form of BACnet Objects that comply completely with ANSI/ASHRAE 135-
2012.
All data points mapped from the Management Level Network to the third party system
are displayed correctly on the third party system monitor.
All mapped points are identical with regard to value, the engineering units and significant
digits on the third party system and the BMS workstation.
All points mapped from the third party system to the Management Level Network meet
all of the specifications detailed in the BMS specifications for points directly
monitored/controlled by the BMS.
Communications speed between the two systems is satisfactory.
Both systems restart and communications between the two systems resume following a
power failure without operator intervention.

INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)

The variable frequency drive (VFD) controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have
a data port that enables the exchange of data between the VFD controller and the BMS
Automation Level.

The interface between the variable frequency drive controller and the Automation level
Network shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred to the BMS
Automation Level:
Speed Reference Feedback.
Motor Operating Status.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 80 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

VFD alarm.
VFD status
Motor power in kW.
Motor kWh.
Motor current.
Motor voltage.
Hours run.
DC link voltage.
Thermal load on motor.
Thermal load on VFD.
Heat sink temperature.
Any other information available from the VFD controller as selected by the Employer.

The interface between the VFD controller and the Management level Network shall enable,
at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the Management Level
Network to the VFD controller:
Speed Control Signal.
Start/Stop Control Signal.
Speed Feedback
VFD Fault
General Alarm

INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

The Fire Alarm System shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to enable the
transfer of information to the Management level Network. The communication shall be
unidirectional from the FAS to the Management Level Network only. The FAS shall be on its
own wide area network.

The start and end of any message shall be uniquely identified and the message shall indicate
the following information at minimum:
Time
Date
Zone of incidence
Indication of whether it is a fire alarm, return to normal or Fire Alarm System
fault.

In the event of a fire the Fire Alarm System shall communicate a list of all equipment shut
down and started by the Fire Alarm System.

There shall be no transfer of data from the Management Level Network to the Fire Alarm
System.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 81 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

If it is required by the local applicable codes and standards or required by the Authority having
jurisdiction the BMS shall be able to automatically shut down all terminal units and FCU
serving the zone of incidence in the event of a fire alarm and shall automatically restart
equipment following a return to normal message, as detailed in the Part titled “Equipment
Restart Following a Fire Alarm” in this Section of the documents.

The BMS shall generate an alarm if the status of any equipment differs from that
communicated by the Fire Alarm System to the Management Level Network.

INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND THE UPS

The UPS controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to enable the
transfer of data between the UPS controller and the Management Level Network.

The interface between the UPS controller and the Management level Network shall enable, at
minimum, the following information to be transferred from the Management Level Network
to the BMS:
Bypass Voltage X-Y, Y-Z, Z-X
Bypass Voltage X-N, Y-N, Z-N
Critical Voltage X-Y, Y-Z, Z-X
Critical Voltage X-N, Y-N, Z-N
Critical Current X, Y, Z
Critical Bus Frequency
Critical Bus KVA
Critical Bus KW
Critical Bus Capacity
UPM DC Voltage
UPM Battery Amperage
UPM Input Voltage X-Y, Y-Z, Z-X
UPM Battery Discharging
UPM Low Battery Warning
UPM Output Overload
UPM Fuse Failure
UPM Ambient over Temperature
UPM DC Ground
UPM Blower Failure
UPM Control Power Failure
UPM Overload Shutdown
SCC Output Overload
SCC Emergency off
SCC Load on Bypass

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 82 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SCC Static Switch Disabled

SCC Output Over/under Voltage
SCC UPM Summary Alarm
Any other information available from the UPS controller as selected by the Employer.

INTERFACE BETWEEN BMS AND SECURITY AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

The security and access control system shall have a data port to enable the exchange of data
with the Management Level Network as indicated in BMS design drawings.

The interface shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred to the
Management Level network:
Mains power available
System normal
System in alarm condition
On/Off status
Trip alarm

HARDWIRED INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND LOW VOLTAGE

SWITCHBOARD

The BMS shall have the following hardwired interfaces with the low voltage switchboards:
Open, closed and trip status for all feeder circuit breakers of all MDBs and SMDBs.

EXECUTION

TRAINING

Submit an outline of the training courses to be given for 2 trainees as assigned by the
employer. This outline shall include a schedule of the training sessions in at least one-half
day increments, indication of the topics to be covered in each session and any prerequisite
requirements that should be met prior to attendance. The training outline shall be submitted
with the initial shop drawing and submittals packages. Training shall not commence unless
the Engineer has approved a training outline. Training shall be coordinated with the
Employer’s designated training coordinator.

Training sessions shall include classroom type instruction and "hands on" instruction and shall
be given by the Specialist at the BMS Specialists facilities and on-site as detailed below. The
trainers shall be factory trained and certified from the manufacturer, shall be experienced with
the hardware and software and shall be experienced trainers. The resumes of the trainers shall
be submitted to the Employer and Engineer for approval. The resumes shall indicate clearly
the experience and expertise of the proposed training staff with regard to both their technical
and training capabilities. The BMS Specialist shall certify the proposed training staff as
specialist trainers. The BMS Specialist shall advise the Employer of the recommended
qualifications for the potential trainees.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 83 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Training shall consist of, 16 No. 4-hour sessions at the BMS Specialist’s facilities. These
training sessions shall be tailored to the construction schedule and they shall be presented in
accordance with a flexible schedule that shall be acceptable to the Employer. Follow up
training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site using the installed components that shall
be given during the period immediately prior to the acceptance testing. Further follow up
training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site during the warranty period. These
training sessions during the warranty period shall be scheduled with the Employer.

Provide all training materials (hand-outs, textbooks, workbooks etc.) and any audiovisual
equipment required to execute the training.

Training sessions shall be formatted to maximize the usage of time of the attendees and
prevent redundant coverage of materials for advanced students. Training sessions shall be
designed on the basis of experience and knowledge of the attendees scheduled to participate
and shall differentiate between the requirements of supervisory, operations and maintenance
personnel. The training shall be specific to this project and shall cover, at minimum, the
following:
Data base features.
Operating sequence programming.
Operator interface features.
Graphics set up and modification.
An overview of the BMCS topology.
Information access.
Executing operator commands.
Operator definable values.
Report customization.
Event message generation and modification.
Maintenance and calibration of instrumentation (Maintenance personnel only)
Use of the Portable Operator Terminals (POT).
Interfaces between the low voltage Building Systems.
Other subjects necessary to ensure that the operators, maintenance and supervisory staffs
will be able to operate the BMS without any on-going assistance from any outside party.

Provide sufficient training to the Employer’s staff such that they shall be able to map BACnet
object Ids to the BMS servers and shall be able to add points to the data storage, analysis and
retrieval functions.

BORING AND PATCHING

Boring and patching for work undertaken by the MEP Specialist to install BMS components
shall be undertaken by the MEP Specialist but the BMS Specialist shall provide boring and
patching of work in those instances where the BMS Specialist has caused damage requiring
boring and patching. The BMS Specialist shall provide boring and patching for all installation
work undertaken by the BMS Specialist. Boring and patching shall meet, at minimum, the
following requirements:
Before boring any structural components, obtain the Engineer's approval.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 84 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Make boring with clean, square and smooth edges. Patches shall be inconspicuous in
covered areas and visually undetectable in areas normally accessible to the tenants.
Restore fire ratings if boring has violated the fire rated assemblies.

FIRE STOPPING

The MEP Specialist shall provide fire stopping for components installed by the MEP
Specialist on behalf of the BMS Specialist but if the BMS Specialist damages fire stopping
installed by another trade or the work undertaken by the BMS Specialist requires that fire
stopping be replaced or added, the BMS Specialist shall seal all conduit, cable, or cable tray
penetrations of fire rated assemblies. Seal or fire-stop shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
Comply with all applicable codes, regulations and statutory requirements.
Approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
Firesafing system or device used shall not derate the ampacity of electrical cables passing
through it.

HANGING AND SUPPORTING

Install all equipment, devices, materials and components in compliance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Supports shall be suitable for the environment within
which the component is to be installed. Coordinate all hanging and supporting of components
with all trades.

Boring and cutting shall be kept to a minimum and conducted in a neat and workmanlike
manner. Provide reinforcing and fastening materials as necessary.

TESTING AND INSPECTIONS

General Requirements:
All components shall be tested by the BMS Specialist to ensure compliance with
the specifications before they leave the BMS Specialist's premises and shall be
tested again on-site by the BMS Specialist before the commencement of
acceptance testing. The BMS Specialist shall not ship components to the project
site until they have been found to be fully compliant with the specifications and
the BMS Specialist shall not request the commencement of acceptance testing
until such time as the BMS Specialist has made a complete and thorough checkout
of all equipment on site.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 85 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Any component furnished under this sub-contract shall be made available for
inspections or tests, as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Use of any component
by the Employer and Engineer shall not imply acceptance of the system or
acceptability of any component. Availability and demonstration of the systems
shall not be withheld and the use of components shall not imply the start of the
Defects Liability Period.
Costs associated with the required inspections and testing shall be included in this
scope of work. Additional charges will not be accepted.
The BMS Specialist shall make available all equipment, calibrated instruments
and ladders, as necessary to satisfactorily demonstrate the acceptability of the
components and systems. Instrumentation to be used for the verification of
monitored parameters shall be calibrated or supplied by an approved laboratory or
manufacturer. Provide copies of the calibration data with the component test
sheets.
Installation, engineering, software and system personnel shall be available on-site
during the commissioning tests. These personnel shall be familiar with the
installation and shall undertake all tests as requested by the Engineer in order to
verify that the BMS components individually and in total meet the specifications.
The BMS Specialist shall confirm that the person(s) who will be conducting the
commissioning tests on behalf of the BMS Specialist has been actively involved
(on site) throughout the commissioning of the control system. Software shall be
developed, tested and demonstrated over a time span short enough to guarantee
continuity of personnel.

Off-Site Tests/Software Tests:

When the BMS Specialist has written and tested the software and prior to loading
software into controllers on site, the BMS Specialist shall demonstrate to the
Engineer that the software functions in accordance with the specifications and
sequences of operations. This shall be accomplished by in-house simulation of
plant operating conditions using switches, potentiometers, voltmeters and lamps
etc., via the BMS graphical interface.
The Off-Site tests shall be limited to the plants with typical sequence of operation
such as:

Air Handling Units

Fan Coil Units
Moreover, the contractor shall demonstrate the ability of the interface to the third
party systems
The software functionality will be checked during the demonstrations on a clause-
by-clause basis with the specification, with reference to all applicable
correspondence, and with variation orders issued by the Employer.
Deficiencies shall be remedied and testing shall be repeated at no additional cost
to the Employer prior to the shipping of the components to the project site.
The Engineer shall be advised at least 2 weeks in advance of any scheduled Off-
Site testing and the Engineer shall determine at that time whether the Engineer
shall witness the tests. If the Employer decides that the tests shall be witnessed
the Employer shall select a representative and the BMS Specialist shall pay the
costs of the representative to attend the tests.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 86 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Inspection During Installation:

Prior to commissioning tests, the BMS shall be available for use by the Employer
and Engineer. Use by the Employer and Engineer shall not imply acceptance of
any component of the BMS or the commencement of the Defects Liability Period.
Provide staff to assist the Engineer in the inspections made during the installation
period to review the progress and quality of the ongoing work. The Engineer will
generate Field Observation Reports on the findings of the inspection. The
Engineer shall advise the BMS Specialist during the inspection of any concerns
noted with respect to the installation and shall repeat the concerns in writing as
soon as possible after the inspection is completed. The BMS Specialist shall take
corrective action to meet the requirement of the specifications.
Failure of the Engineer to identify any error or omission during inspections shall
not relieve the BMS Specialist of any of the specification requirements and shall
not imply that a deviation from the specification has been accepted.

Component Testing/Point To Point Testing:

Prior to the scheduling of the commissioning tests with the Engineer, perform a
complete and detailed operational check of each BMS component. Tests shall be
documented as detailed below and shall cover all of the testing requirements
detailed in this Section for the commissioning tests. The Engineer shall undertake
such random testing as the Engineer considers necessary to verify the acceptability
of the components.
All components testing involving the verification of air and water flow rate
monitoring shall be scheduled in conjunction with the air and water-balancing
Specialists. In particular, this shall apply to the verification of all control and
monitoring parameters for terminal units.
Point to point checks shall be proven from the field device/interface operation to
the controller/outstation and from the controller to the presentation of the point on
the graphics. The results from the point-to-point tests shall be submitted for
approval on pre-defined schedules.
Point to point checks shall verify:

Correct location of the field device for the application.

Correct installation of the control device/interface with reference to the
manufacturer’s literature and check that sufficient access has been provided for
maintenance.
That the control device has the correct range for the application, that the range is
correctly entered in the controller and the display of values is correctly engineered
on the operator's terminal.
Correct operation of the controls device/interface, including any associated alarm
and alarm text.
Correct installation of each valve and damper actuator, and ensure that each valve
and damper actuator is stroked correctly when checked against the BMS output.
Calibration of the control device.
Labels provided on the control devices and mechanical equipment are correct.

Systems Testing:
Systems testing shall not commence until all component testing has been
successfully undertaken and approved by the Engineer.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 87 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

System testing shall be undertaken by the BMS Specialist and the BMS Specialist
shall complete the Specialist’s portion of the system performance verification
sheets. The completed system performance verification test sheets shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
The BMS Specialist shall schedule a repeat of the system performance verification
tests at a time convenient to the Engineer. These tests for the verification by the
Engineer shall not be scheduled until the BMS Specialist has verified that all
systems are operating in accordance with the specifications.
The Engineer’s verification tests shall be performed by the BMS Specialist and
shall be witnessed by the Engineer who shall complete the Engineer’s portion of
the system performance verification test sheets as each test is successfully
undertaken. The BMS Specialist shall remedy any deficiencies that are observed
during the system performance verification tests and retesting shall be scheduled
at a time suitable to the Engineer. If there are deficiencies remaining after the
follow-up systems performance verification testing that require further testing by
the Engineer, then the expenses of the Engineer incurred in providing the
additional follow-up tests to verify compliance with the specifications, including
travel, subsistence, accommodation and normal consulting fees, shall be paid by
the BMS Specialist at no additional cost to the Employer.
The following shall be demonstrated as a minimum:

Each and every point on the system including calibration checks and the stroking
of actuators.
All dynamic graphics comply with the mechanical and control specifications.
All system programs comply with the specification under the normal modes of
operation, emergency power, building fire detected and fireman's override
operating modes.
All system alarms comply with the specification.
System stability.
Dynamic tests to prove control stability and that the environmental conditions are
being maintained.

Test Coordination:
Testing of the BMS during the systems and integrated testing shall be coordinated with
all other trades associated with the system being tested. The system shall be tested as a
complete entity during these tests. The BMS portion of the systems shall not be tested
in isolation.

Testing of Third Party Interfaces:

The BMS Specialist shall develop and fully test all software required for the interface
between the BMS and equipment furnished by others prior to the delivery of the
associated hardware and software components to the project site. There shall be no
software development on site except that associated with the entry of database items such
as set points, alarm limits, control constants and schedules.
The third party interfaces shall be fully demonstrated to the Engineer at the BMS
Specialist’s facilities prior to the installation of any BMS microprocessor based
components at the project site. The demonstration shall include all hardware and software
components associated with the interfaces.
The third party interfaces shall be re-tested on site following the testing and acceptance
by the Engineer of the individual low voltage systems.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 88 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

The BMS Specialist shall fully demonstrate that the BACnet objects are provided at the
BMS Management level network in accordance with the requirements of these
specifications.

Test Documentation:
Test results shall be documented using test sheets. The test sheets shall be prepared in an
appropriate format for the various categories of component and system to be tested.
Component test sheet forms included within this section indicate a minimum acceptable
standard. The final format of the proposed test forms shall be submitted by the BMS
Specialist for approval at the shop drawing stage. The component and system
performance verification sheets attached to this Section of the sub-contract Documents
are provided to the Specialist for information and to serve as a guide for the minimum
standards required. These attached examples of component and system test sheets are
generic in nature and may not accurately reflect the actual sequences of operation that
are to be implemented and not all systems and component types are covered by these
example test verification sheets. It is the responsibility of the BMS Specialist to provide
test verification sheets for each component and system that accurately reflect the
sequences of operation and appropriate data for the components and systems as furnished
under this sub-contract.
Completed component test sheets indicating the test results for each BMS component
within the system shall be submitted to the Engineer, together with a proposed schedule
for system commissioning tests, at least X weeks prior to the proposed system
commissioning tests. The Engineer shall determine on the basis of the BMS Specialist's
component testing, whether or not it is appropriate to commence system-commissioning
tests. It shall be the Engineer’s decision as to whether the system commissioning tests
can proceed as proposed by the BMS Specialist or whether deficiencies have to be
remedied and additional testing undertaken before the system commissioning tests can
proceed.
At minimum, component test sheets will be prepared to cover each of the following
items:

Digital input point

Digital output point
Analogue input point
Analogue output point (one for each type of final control element, e.g. valve, damper,
etc.)
System test sheets shall be prepared for the testing of, at minimum, each of the systems
detailed in the point definition sheets. The test sheets shall be based on the sub-contract
requirements and not on the system as installed.
All test documentation shall be maintained in electronic format and in hard copy.

ACCEPTANCE AND TURNOVER DOCUMENTS

Prior to system acceptance and turnover and as a condition of system acceptance, the
following documents are to be submitted in four copies in accordance with requirements of
Division 1:
System user manual.
Systems maintenance manual including specifications on each piece of equipment,
trouble-shooting charts, and preventive maintenance instructions, technical data sheet for
each instrument referenced for each application.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 89 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

As-built drawings including equipment outlined dimension drawings, equipment wiring

and or piping connection drawing.
Complete supplementary information about software and hardware of system supplied.
This to include:

System block diagram (hardware).

Software "functional" flow diagram.
Memory map of all units.
Specific tasks performed by each processor, especially where a distributed processing
architecture is provided. These are to be clearly indicated in functional form.
Source and object lists of software program.
Tests and calibration data pertinent to each item installed in the systems.
Password at all levels.
Meets ASHRAE SSPC 135 standard.
Interoperability documentation.
System construction inspection procedures.
Points calibration procedures.
Calibration technical procedures.
Plant operational system test procedures.
Operator and maintenance personnel training curriculum.

The BMS sub-contractor shall handover all programs, database, configuration and network
data to the Employer.

All other documentation as detailed in these specifications.

The BMS sub-contractor shall provide documentation detailing the methods and techniques
required to connect additional workstations, DDC controllers, gateways, routers and any other
BMS hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as well as to export the data in any
of the previously mentioned standards to another system. The system documentation shall be
sufficiently detailed to enable the BMS’s incorporation into another BACnet system in the
future.

The BMS sub-contractor shall provide interoperability documentation for the BACnet
components. All the data related to the components shall be presented along with their
respective BACnet object ID created in the system, along with their PICS, BIBBS, addresses
and method statements to read and write data via integration of the components with another
system in future.

Provide latest copy of ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012 and ASHRAE 135.1-2013standards.

END OF SECTION 230900

BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 00 - Page 90 of 90

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 21 13

HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for chilled-water
systems; makeup water for these systems; and blow-down drain lines piping.

1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Chilled water pipes are generated from a dedicated central chillers plant room in level B1,
which supplies chilled water to podium and typical floors through variable speed secondary
pumps.

B. Chilled water network has splitted into two zones, low zone and high zone; through plate
heat exchangers located in the intermediate mechanical floor at level 15 to reduce the rating
pressure on chilled water equipment to avoid special manufactured equipment that sustain
high pressures.

C. Only capped connections with isolating valve, and BTU meters are provided to retails in
podium levels while tenants in typical floors are completely furnished as detailed in the
drawings. Main chilled water headers and risers are sized based on diversified peak load. All
horizontal branches for all levels are sized based on selected equipment peak load.

1.4 STANDARDS

A. The following standards are referred to in this section as alternative

1. BS 10 Flanges for bolting pipes, valves and fittings.

2. BS 21 Pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-type joints are made on
threads (metric dimensions).
3. BS EN 10255 Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and threading. Technical
delivery conditions.
4. BS EN 1044 Filler metals for brazing.
5. BS EN 10253-1 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Wrought carbon steel for general use and
without specific inspection requirements.
6. BS EN 10253-2 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Non alloy and ferritic alloy steels with
specific inspection requirements.
7. BS EN 1092-1 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings
and accessories, PN designated. Steel flanges.
8. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 1 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

9. API American Petroleum Institute.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Manual and Quality plan for Contractor and its related Sub Contractors including:

1. Inspection Test Plan

2. Organization Chart, CV’s and certificates for each personal including NDT Company
and Third Party Company; Third party Engineers shall have minimum 10 years’
experience.
3. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and
pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated
balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of piping Isometric & spools, pipe anchors, hangers,
special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their
attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, welding
map and expansion joints and loops.

C. Proposal Welding Procedure Specification (PWPS).

D. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) supported by Procedure Qualification Record

(PQR).

E. Welder Qualification Certificates.

F. Original Mill Certificates for piping, fitting, filler metal, etc.

G. Calibration Certificate for Equipment and Gauges.

H. Insulation and Coating procedures

I. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the
following:

1. Test procedures used.( NDT Procedures, Hydrostatic& leak test procedures,…etc)

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.

J. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in

maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Surface preparation for all steel pipes: Shot blasting to SA 2.5 and then immediate
application of 150 um polyamide epoxy paint to be confirmed for proper bonding with pre-
insulated pipes manufacturer.

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" and ASME B31.1 or
ASME B31.9 as applicable. Welders shall be certified for the type of pipe material
specified, welding process and position of welds required during fabrication of the piping.

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 2 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Welder’s Qualification Test to be performed on site and attended by Contractor Welding

Inspectors, Third Party and Engineer prior to commencing piping fabrication.

C. Nondestructive examination shall be performed to all pipe welds in accordance to ASME

B31.1 or ASTM B31.9 as applicable. A Non destructive test shall perform the tests and
submit the related reports after getting the approval and stamping of third party inspection
company, prior prequalification approval should be obtained from Engineer on NDT &
Third Party Inspection both companies.

D. All welds shall be identified by the welder’s mark and a sequence number. The Contractor
shall employ a Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) or CSWIP 3.1, NDT personal certified as
Level 2 minimum in the NDE methods utilized (independent of the contractor fabricating or
installing the piping) to visually examine all welds in accordance with inspection and
examination requirements of ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 as applicable. Any welds
failing the visual or NDE inspection shall be ground out or cutout, re-welded and radio
graphed at the expense of the Contractor. The CWI shall submit a written report signed and
stamped from the approved third party for each weld to the Engineer.

E. Additionally, 5% of all fitting, flange and Butt joint welds shop or field or as per ASME
requirements, minimum of 5% of Butt Joints welds, randomly selected by the Engineer,
shall be radio graphed at the expense of the contractor. The certified welding inspector shall
examine the films and provide a written report to the Engineer. All welds not meeting the
requirements of ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 latest edition as applicable will be ground
out, re-welded and re-radio graphed at the expense of the Contractor. If any 10% of the
randomly selected radio graphed welds fail, all welds in the piping will be radio graphed and
repaired at the expense of the contractor.

F. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9 as applicable for
materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the
appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply
with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.

G. The contractor shall submit stress analysis study for piping installations more than 300 mm
diameter (12” DN) to prove safety and sustainability.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components
with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system
components, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.

C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.

E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base..

F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor
assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping as per Architectural
specifications for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 3 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING

A. Products shall be delivered in original, unbroken packages, containers, or bundles bearing

the name of the manufacture.

B. Products shall be carefully stored in a manner that will prevent damage and in an area that is
protected from the elements.

C. End caps weather supplied by the piping manufacturer or fabricated by the contractor are to
be placed at the ends of the piping sections to keep debris and reptiles from entering inside
the pipe while it is placed in storage.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Water Treatment Chemicals: Furnish sufficient chemicals for initial system startup and for
preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's warranty form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components

that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting
materials.

2.3 PIPE AND TUBING

A. Minimum steel pipe size recommended for hydronic piping is NPS 3/4 (DN 20).

B. Chilled Water, Condenser Water, and Vent Piping:

1. Steel pipes DN 50 and smaller: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, Schedule 40 with

threaded ends.
2. Steel pipes DN 65 and up to DN 250: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B or ASTM
A106/A106M Grade B, Schedule 40 with beveled ends for butt welding or roll
Grooved ends for Coupled Joints.
3. Steel pipes DN 300 to DN 600: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, or ASTM A106/A106M
Grade B, and beveled ends for butt welding or roll Grooved ends for Coupled Joints.
4. Pipes above DN 600: API 5L Grade B, SAW at both sides with helical seam and
beveled ends for butt welding or roll Grooved ends for Coupled Joints.

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 4 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

5. Minimum wall thickness shall be in accordance with the calculation based on ASME
B31.1 to verify that wall thickness is adequate enough as per actual system pressure.

2.4 FIELD APPLIED INSULATION:

A. Insulation for valves, fittings, field casing closures, as required, and other piping system
accessories shall be closed cell insulation with cladding system. Thickness shall match
adjacent piping.

2.5 JOINTS:

A. Welded joints: Welded joints between sections of pipe and between pipe and fittings shall
be provided where specified or indicated. Branch connections shall be made with either
welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings attached to the main and reinforced against
external strains.

B. Flanged joints: Flanged joints shall be provided with gaskets and made perfectly square and
tight. Full-faced gaskets shall be used with cast-iron flanges and all gaskets shall be as thin
as the finish of the flange face permits. Gaskets shall be 5 mm (3/16-inch) thick for 25
through 300 mm (1 through 12 inch) flanges and 6 mm (1/4-inch) thick for flanges 350 mm
(14 inches) and larger.

C. Threaded joints: Joints shall be made tight with polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied to the
male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show after the joint is made up.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according
to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for
joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Mechanical joints: Sleeve and grooved pipe couplings shall be installed and protected
against corrosion as recommended by the coupling manufacturer. Joints between
nonmetallic and metallic carrier pipe shall be designed and furnished by the piping system
manufacturer. The transition pieces shall be factory fabricated and shall be designed so that
no field chemical welding of the carrier pipe will be required. Transitional joint connections
to manhole steel piping shall be made inside the manhole except for prefabricated, pre-piped
manholes where joints shall be outside the manhole wall.

G. Insulating joints and dielectric fittings: Shall be installed where shown.

H. Nonmetallic pipe joints: Nonmetallic pipe joints shall be installed in accordance with the
written instructions of the manufacturer.

2.6 FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE

A. General:

1. The pipes fittings shall be to ASTM A234/A234M WPB, ASTM A105/A105M or

ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, suitable for butt welding, and thickness as per matching
pipe.

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 5 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. All Butt welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.9, socket welded
fittings shall be to ASME B16.11.
3. Mechanical coupled joints are allowed as alternative in mechanical rooms and chiller
house but not in pre-insulated pipes running in culverts or tunnels.
4. Manufacture trade name to be marked on pipes and fitting

B. 50 mm and Smaller: Screwed. Mechanical couplings are optional for water piping only.

1. Fitting shall have same wall thickness as pipes.

2. Pipes 50 mm and smaller shall have threaded ends.
3. Forged steel, socket welding or threaded: ASME B16.11.
4. Screwed: 150 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3. 125 pound cast iron, ASME
B16.4, may be used in lieu of malleable iron. Bushing reduction of a single pipe size,
or use of close nipples, is not acceptable.
5. Unions: ASME B16.39.
6. Water hose connection adapter: Brass, pipe thread to 20 mm garden hose thread, with
hose cap nut.

C. 65 mm and Larger: Welded or flanged joints. Mechanical couplings and fittings are optional
for water piping only.

1. Pipe fitting material shall be to ASTM A 234/A 234M WPB, ASTM A105/A105M or
ASTM A53/A53M Grade B.
2. Butt welding fittings: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping.
Elbows shall be long radius type, unless otherwise noted.
3. Socket welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.11.
4. Welding flanges and bolting: ASME B16.5:

a. Water service: Weld neck or slip-on, plain face, with 6 mm (1/8 inch) thick full
face neoprene gasket suitable for 104 degrees C (220 degrees F).

1) Contractor's option: Convoluted, cold formed 150 pound steel flanges,

with Teflon gaskets, may be used for water service.

b. Flange bolting: Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts, ASTM A307,
Grade B.

D. Welded Branch and Tap Connections: Forged steel weldolets, or branchlets and threadolets
may be used for branch connections up to one pipe size smaller than the main. Forged steel
half-couplings, ASME B16.11 may be used for drain, vent and gage connections.

E. Mechanical Pipe Couplings and Fittings: If used and accepted by The Engineer shall be used
with roll grooved pipe, in water service up to 110 degrees C (230 degrees F).

1. Grooved mechanical couplings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron,

ASTM A536, fabricated in two or more parts, securely held together by two or more
track-head, square, or oval-neck bolts, ASTM A183.
2. Gaskets: Rubber product recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the
intended service.
3. Grooved end fittings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M; ductile iron, ASTM A536;
or steel, ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106/A106M, designed to accept grooved
mechanical couplings. Tap-in type branch connections are acceptable.

2.7 FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 6 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Solder Joint:

1. Joints shall be made up in accordance with recommended practices of the materials

applied. Apply 95/5 tin and antimony on all copper piping.
2. Mechanically formed tee connection in water and drain piping: Form mechanically
extracted collars in a continuous operation by drilling pilot hole and drawing out tube
surface to form collar, having a height of not less than three times the thickness of
tube wall. Adjustable collaring device shall insure proper tolerance and complete
uniformity of the joint. Notch and dimple joining branch tube in a single process to
provide free flow where the branch tube penetrates the fitting.

B. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24.

2.8 FITTINGS FOR PLASTIC PIPING

A. PVC Plastic Pipe fittings socket-type, schedule 40, ASTM D2466.

1. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564-04el.

B. Chemical feed piping for condenser water treatment: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC), Schedule 80, ASTM F439.

2.9 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Provide where copper tubing and ferrous metal pipe are joined.

B. 50 mm and Smaller: Threaded dielectric union, ASME B16.39.

C. 65 mm and Larger: Flange union with dielectric gasket and bolt sleeves, ASME B16.42.

D. Temperature Rating, 99 degrees C.

2.10 SCREWED JOINTS

A. Pipe Thread: ANSI B1.20.1.

B. Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compound approved for the intended service.

C. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron;

ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S,
Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or
shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.

D. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic

rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin,
locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

E. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis
of pipe being welded.

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 7 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design
temperatures and pressures.

2.11 FIRE-STOPPING

A. Fire-Resistant Sealant: Provide two-part, foamed-in-place, fire-stopping elastomeric sealant

formulated for use in a through-penetration fire-stop system for filling openings around
piping penetrations through walls and floors, having fire-resistance ratings indicated as
established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory,
Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the work included, shall be K-Flex or approved similar.

2.12 VALVES

A. Gate, globe, check, ball, butterfly valves and motorized valves are specified in Section
"General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

B. Pressure independent control valves (PICV) are specified in section “230900 BUILDING
MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM. The mechanical contractor will be
responsible for the installation of PICVs.

C. Asbestos packing is not acceptable.

D. All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer. Provide gate and
globe valves with packing that can be replaced with the valve under full working pressure.

E. Provide chain operators for valves 100 mm (4 inches) and larger when the centerline is
located 2400 mm (8 feet) or more above the floor or operating platform.

F. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.

G. Static balancing valve: Fixed Orifice Double Regulating Valve for flow balancing and flow
verification, with 2 plug ports for measurements of the differential pressure across the
orifice. The valve housing, stem and bonnet shall be made of DZR brass for sizes (DN15-
DN50) and Ductile Iron for sizes (DN65-DN300), pressure class rated PN16 or PN25 as per
hydraulic pressure in the system. The valve shall have a flow accuracy measurement +/-5%
at all hand wheel settings.

H. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: bronze body, fitted
with a red nylon hand-wheel and a protection cap, pressure rating 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa
(200 psig or 300 psig) working pressure as per system pressure requirements, 107 deg C
(225 deg F) maximum operating temperature, and having threaded end connections.

I. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Y-pattern globe
valve style, Cast-iron or steel body, fitted with seat seal cone, bonnet bolts chromed steel
and digital hand wheel, pressure rating 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300 psig)
working pressure as per system pressure requirements, 107 deg C (225 deg F) maximum
operating temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections.

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 8 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

J. Differential Pressure Control Valves: the valve should be a dynamic differential pressure
control valve with the option of setting the differential pressure on site without suspension
of operation and complete with 2 plug ports for measurements of the differential pressure
across the orifice. The valve shall contain a differential pressure control bonnet assembly
and shall be rated at PN16 or PN25 as per hydraulic pressure in the system. The valves shall
be installed at chilled water main branches feeding basements and podium floors only.

K. Pressure-Reducing Valves: pressure rating 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300 psig)
working pressure as per system pressure requirements, Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass
body with low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown,
and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to
suit system. Valve shall be factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field
adjustment.

L. Safety Valves: pressure rating 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300 psig) working
pressure as per system pressure requirements, Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body
with brass and rubber, wetted, internal working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat
capacity and shall comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV:
Heating Boilers, Bear ASME stamp.

M. Pressure Relief Valve: pressure rating 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300 psig) working
pressure as per system pressure requirements, Bronze or iron body and bronze or stainless
steel trim, with testing lever. Comply with ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, Section 8;
bear ASME stamp.

N. Triple Duty Valve: Contractors option for use at pump discharge in lieu of check valve and
balancing/shut-off valve. Triple duty valve is a non-slam check valve with spring-loaded
weighted disc and a calibrated adjustment feature permitting regulation of pump discharge
flow and shut-off. Valves shall be designed to permit repacking under full line pressure.
Unit shall be installed on discharge side of pump in a horizontal or vertical position with the
stem up. Unit shall be cast iron body construction suitable for maximum working pressure
of 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300 psig) as per system pressure requirements and
maximum operating temperature of 149 C (300 F), bronze disc and seat, stainless steel
stem and spring.

O. Drain Valves: pressure rating 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300 psig) working pressure
as per system pressure requirements, Valves shall be the gate valve types which are in
accordance with MSS SP-80. Valve shall be manually operated, 20 mm pipe size and above
with a threaded end connection. Valve shall be provided with a water hose nipple adapter.

P. Drain Cocks: MSS SP-110, DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) ball valve, rated for 1380 kPa or 2000
kPa (200 psig or 300 psig) working pressure as per system pressure requirements. Include
2-piece, bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and
seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.

1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ANSI/ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread and
cap.

2.13 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Air Vents

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 9 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; pressure rating 1380
kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300 psig) working pressure as per system pressure
requirements; 107 deg C (225 deg F) operating temperature; manually operated with
screwdriver or thumbscrew; with DN 6 (NPS 1/8) discharge connection and DN 15
(NPS 1/2) inlet connection.
2. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze
body and nonferrous internal parts; pressure rating 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or
300 psig) working pressure as per system pressure requirements; 116 deg C (240
deg F) operating temperature; with DN 8 (NPS 1/4) discharge connection and DN 15
(NPS 1/2) inlet connection.
3. Air vents on water coils shall have not less than 3 mm threaded end connections.
4. Air vents on water mains shall have not less than 20 mm threaded end connections.
5. Air vents on all other applications shall have not less than 15 mm threaded end
connections

B. Closed Expansion Tanks: Fully packaged, factory assembled, dynamic type bladder
expansion tank complete with heavy duty steel tank, high quality butyl bladder, makeup
connection, isolating valves, built-in electronic sensors, control unit, and relying on a pump
controlled pressurization module with incorporated automatic water make-up and system
deaeration for the chilled water systems. Constructed in compliance with DIN EN 12828
and the requirements of VDI 4708, with CE marking. Pressure rating 10.2 bar as per system
pressure requirements and 50 deg C (122 deg F) maximum operating temperature.
Functional unit comprising a hydraulic section and a floor-standing framework system made
of anodized Aluminium including the control unit with LCD display, capable of manual and
automatic facility operation. The hydraulic section is comprising two independently
operating stainless steel circulation pumps (one operating and one standby) in conjunction
with two rugged dirt-insensitive motorized ball valves with upstream dirt trap as an
overflow device. The section is provided with a safety relief valve acting as a pressure
safeguard for the unit.

1. Option: bladder rupture detector and relevant connections.

C. Tangential-Type Air Separators: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and labeled for
pressure rating 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300 psig) working pressure as per system
pressure requirements and 45 deg C (113 deg F) maximum operating temperature;
perforated stainless-steel air collector tube designed to direct released air into expansion
tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections; threaded connections for DN 50 (NPS 2) and
smaller; flanged connections for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger; threaded blowdown
connection. Provide units in sizes for full-system flow capacity. Applicable to central
plants.

D. In-Line Air Separators: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir designed to decelerate
system flow to maximize air separation at a working pressure up to pressure rating 1380 kPa
or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300 psig) working pressure as per system pressure requirements
and liquid temperature up to 45 deg C (113 deg F).

E. Y-Pattern Strainers: pressure rating 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300 psig) working
pressure as per system pressure requirements; cast-iron body (ASTM A126-04, Class B),
flanged ends for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger, threaded connections for DN 50 (NPS 2)
and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.

F. Basket Strainers: pressure rating 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300 psig) working
pressure as per system pressure requirements; high-tensile cast-iron body (ASTM A126-04,

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 10 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Class B), flanged-end connections, bolted cover; perforated stainless-steel basket, and
bottom drain connection.

G. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing

protective jacket; pressure rating 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300 psig) working
pressure as per system pressure requirements and 45 deg C (113 deg F) maximum operating
temperature. Connectors shall have flanged- or threaded-end connections to match
equipment connected and shall be capable of 20-mm (3/4-inch) misalignment.

H. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body with steel flanges
drilled to align with Classes 2000 and 300 steel flanges as per system pressure requirements;
operating temperatures up to 45 deg C (113 deg F).

I. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: pressure rating 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300
psig) working pressure as per system pressure requirements, steel pipe fitting consisting of
telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and
chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe telescoping section.

2.14 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Pressure rating 1380 kPa or 2000 kPa (200 psig or 300 psig) working pressure as per system
pressure requirements

B. Factory built devices, inserted in the pipe lines, designed to absorb axial cyclical pipe
movement which results from thermal expansion and contraction. This includes factory-
built or field-fabricated guides located along the pipe lines to restrain lateral pipe motion
and direct the axial pipe movement into the expansion joints.

C. Manufacturing Quality Assurance: Conform to Expansion Joints Manufacturers Association

Standards.

D. Bellows - Internally Pressurized Type:

1. Multiple corrugations of Type 304 or Type A240-321 stainless steel.

2. Internal stainless steel sleeve entire length of bellows.
3. External cast iron equalizing rings for services exceeding 340 kPa (50 psig).
4. Welded ends.
5. Design shall conform to standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1.
6. External tie rods designed to withstand pressure thrust force upon anchor failure if
one or both anchors for the joint are at change in direction of pipeline.
7. Integral external cover.

E. Bellows - Externally Pressurized Type:

1. Multiple corrugations of Type 304 stainless steel.

2. Internal and external guide integral with joint.
3. Design for external pressurization of bellows to eliminate squirm.
4. Welded ends.
5. Conform to the standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1.
6. Threaded connection at bottom, 25 mm (one inch) minimum, for drain or drip point.
7. Integral external cover and internal sleeve.

F. Expansion Compensators:

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 11 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Corrugated bellows, externally pressurized, stainless steel or bronze.

2. Internal guides and anti-torque devices.
3. Threaded ends.
4. External shroud.
5. Conform to standards of EJMA.

G. Expansion Joint Identification: Provide stamped brass or stainless steel nameplate on each
expansion joint listing the manufacturer, the allowable movement, flow direction, design
pressure and temperature, date of manufacture, and identifying the expansion joint by the
identification number on the contract drawings.

H. Guides: Provide factory-built guides along the pipe line to permit axial movement only and
to restrain lateral and angular movement. Guides must be designed to withstand a minimum
of 15 percent of the axial force which will be imposed on the expansion joints and anchors.
Field-built guides may be used if detailed on the contract drawings.

2.15 GAGES, PRESSURE AND COMPOUND

A. ASME B40.100, Accuracy Grade 1A, (pressure, vacuum, or compound for air, oil or water),
initial mid-scale accuracy 1 percent of scale (Qualify grade), metal or phenolic case, 115
mm (4-1/2 inches) in diameter, 6 mm (1/4 inch) NPT bottom connection, white dial with
black graduations and pointer, clear glass or acrylic plastic window, suitable for board
mounting. Provide red "set hand" to indicate normal working pressure.

B. Provide brass lever handle union cock. Provide brass/bronze pressure snubber for gages in
water service.

C. Range of Gages: Provide range equal to at least 130 percent of normal operating range.

1. For condenser water suction (compound): Minus 100 kPa (30 inches Hg) to plus 700
kPa (100 psig).

2.16 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PROVISIONS

A. Pete's Plug: 6 mm (1/4 inch) MPT by 75 mm (3 inches) long, brass body and cap, with
retained safety cap, nordel self-closing valve cores, permanently installed in piping where
shown, or in lieu of pressure gage test connections shown on the drawings.

B. Provide one each of the following test items to the Resident Engineer:

1. 6 mm (1/4 inch) FPT by 3 mm (1/8 inch) diameter stainless steel pressure gage
adapter probe for extra long test plug. PETE'S 500 XL is an example.
2. 90 mm (3-1/2 inch) diameter, one percent accuracy, compound gage, , –—100 kPa
(30 inches) Hg to 700 kPa (100 psig) range.
3. 0 - 104 degrees C (220 degrees F) pocket thermometer one-half degree accuracy, 25
mm (one inch) dial, 125 mm (5 inch) long stainless steel stem, plastic case.

2.17 THERMOMETERS

A. Mercury or organic liquid filled type, red or blue column, clear plastic window, with 150
mm (6 inch) brass stem, straight, fixed or adjustable angle as required for each in reading.

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 12 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Case: Chrome plated brass or aluminum with enamel finish.

C. Scale: Not less than 225 mm (9 inches), range as described below, two degree graduations.

D. Separable Socket (Well): Brass, extension neck type to clear pipe insulation.

E. Scale ranges may be slightly greater than shown to meet manufacturer's standard. Required
ranges in degrees C (F):

1. Chilled Water 0 to 38 degrees C (32-100 degrees F)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Chilled water pipes inside building: Black steel pipes.

B. Condenser water pipes: Black steel pipes.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve
types:

1. Shutoff Duty: Gate, ball, and butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Globe and balancing valves.

B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection
to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch
line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return
connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Install Pressure Independent Control valves in the return water line of each cooling element
and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.

D. Install silent type check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control
flow direction.

E. Install safety valves as required by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install
safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to floor. Comply with the ASME Boiler &
Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1, for installation
requirements.

F. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required to

regulate system pressure

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves.

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 13 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, DN 20 (NPS 3/4) ball valve, and short DN 20
(NPS 3/4) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and risers, and
elsewhere as required for system drainage.

C. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

D. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main
pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the
takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe.

F. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid
valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install DN 20 (NPS 3/4) nipple and ball
valve in blowdown connection of strainers DN 50 (NPS 2) and larger. Match size of
strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than DN 50 (NPS 2).

G. Anchors shall be provided wherever necessary or indicated to localize expansion or to

prevent undue strain on piping. Anchors shall consist of heavy steel collars with lugs and
bolts for clamping and attaching anchor braces, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor braces
shall be installed in the most effective manner to secure the desired results using turnbuckles
where required. Supports, anchors, or stays shall not be attached where they will injure the
structure or adjacent construction during installation or by the weight of expansion of the
pipeline. Where pipe and conduit penetrations of vapor barrier sealed surfaces occur, these
items shall be anchored immediately adjacent to each penetrated surface, to provide
essentially zero movement within penetration seal. Detailed drawings of pipe anchors shall
be submitted for approval before installation.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Section "Hangers and Supports for
HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of
supports.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 6 m long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 6 m or
longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58 for multiple horizontal piping 6 m or longer, supported on a
trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. On plastic pipe, install rubber pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger
from scratching pipe.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:

1. DN 20 (NPS 3/4): Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.

2. DN 25 (NPS 1): Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
3. DN 40 (NPS 1-1/2): Maximum span, 2.7 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
4. DN 50 (NPS 2): Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
5. DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2): Maximum span, 3.4 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
6. DN 80 (NPS 3): Maximum span, 3.7 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 14 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

7. DN 100 (NPS 4): Maximum span, 4.3 m; minimum rod size, 13 mm.
8. DN 150 (NPS 6): Maximum span, 5.2 m; minimum rod size, 13 mm.
9. DN 200 (NPS 8): Maximum span, 5.8 m; minimum rod size, 16 mm.
10. DN 250 (NPS 10): Maximum span, 6.1 m; minimum rod size, 19 mm.
11. DN 300 (NPS 12): Maximum span, 7 m; minimum rod size, 22 mm.
12. DN 350 (NPS 14): Maximum span, 7.6 m; minimum rod size, 25 mm.
13. DN 400 (NPS 16): Maximum span, 8.2 m; minimum rod size, 25 mm.
14. DN 450 (NPS 18): Maximum span, 8.5 m; minimum rod size, 32 mm.
15. DN 500 (NPS 20): Maximum span, 9.1 m; minimum rod size, 32 mm.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:

1. DN 20 (NPS 3/4): Maximum span, 1.5 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.

2. DN 25 (NPS 1): Maximum span, 1.8 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
3. DN 40 (NPS 1-1/2): Maximum span, 2.4 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
4. DN 50 (NPS 2): Maximum span, 2.4 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
5. DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2): Maximum span, 2.7 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
6. DN 80 (NPS 3): Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.

E. PVC Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer have written
instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the
fewest practical rigid anchor points.

F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 3-m intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to
tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified

processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 15 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

H. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC
pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

I. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll
grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for
pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.

J. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool

and procedure, and brazed joints.

K. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion

marks on pipe after assembly.

L. Mechanical and Heat Fusion Joints: Assemble joints according to fitting manufacturer’s
written instructions.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at top of risers and high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and
elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system
piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

C. Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Install piping to expansion tank with a 2 percent
upward slope toward tank.

D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Install piping to compression tank with a
2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install drain valve on units DN 50 (NPS 2) and larger.

E. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position
with top of funnel not more than 1200 mm above floor. Install feeder in bypass line, off
main, using globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between bypass
connections. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain.

F. Install expansion tanks above air separator. Install gage glass and cocks on end of tank.
Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to
establish proper water level in tank.

1. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of
tank, piping connections, and fittings, plus weight of a full tank of water. Do not
overload building components and structural members.

G. Install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank
is properly charged with air to suit system design requirements.

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 16 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control
valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ANSI/ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to
test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from
testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure
shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install
blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure,
to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during
test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage
due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping
may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped
air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full
of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel,
pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified
minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ANSI/ASME
B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing,
or replacing components and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. In addition to mentioned code requirements, ensure the following further specific

requirements for welding joints in hydronic piping:

1. Primary welding procedure specification to be submitted for review and approval by

welding engineer.
2. Procedure qualification to be done prior to any welding activity on site.
3. Welder qualification test to be done prior to any welding activity on site.

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 17 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

4. Mill certificate for consumable material “Electrode, flux,..etc” to be submitted for

review and approval and the mechanical test for electrode material may be required.
5. Heat input during welding is important value so the visual inspection for welding
activity “before, during and after” welding is required.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has
been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.

B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:

1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.

2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and
operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to
design requirements.
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.

3.10 PAINTING

A. All exposed surfaces of ferrous and non-ferrous piping outdoors or indoors in equipment
rooms and exposed to view in occupied spaces shall be cleaned, primed and painted.

B. Refer to Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting" for painting requirement.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer
screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove
disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.

END OF SECTION 232113

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - Page 18 of 18

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 21 23

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply
to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Vertical, in-line centrifugal pumps.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, initial and final impeller dimensions, accessories for
each type of product indicated and all manufacturer's part numbers and spare parts list.
Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Units presented in equipment performance shall be similar to those mentioned in Part 4.

C. Certified factory test procedures reports indicating compliance with specified performance
requirements.

D. Coordination Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with
templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in normal operation, and
maintenance manuals.

F. Warranties: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations, remedies,

limitations, and exclusions.

G. Compliance statement clause by clause full and detailed compliance statement of the
specification shall be submitted where a clear compliance is indicated as follows:
a. “Yes” interprets full unconditional compliance.
b. “No” interprets a deviation (to be clearly indicated as remark or note in the dedicated
column).
c. “Not Applicable” where the case is not available at the manufacturer.
It should be noted that other comments like “noted” or “partial compliance” are
unacceptable and will be interpreted as a non-compliance.

HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23 - Page 1 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product: Provide drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of pumps
and are based on the specific system indicated.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges,
pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

B. Store pumps in dry location.

C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.

D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.

E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

1.6 REFERENCES AND APPLICABLE CODES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

B. ANSI B16.1: Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.

C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

E. Hydraulic Institute Standards.

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

G. UL778: Motor Operated Water Pumps for construction requirements.

1.7 PUMP DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Select pump and impeller to meet scheduled requirements.

B. Select pump casing to accept impeller capable of 10 percent increase in head.

C. Select pump to operate slightly above midpoint of pump curve or at the highest efficiency
point on the curve.

D. Trim impeller to meet specified operating conditions, if needed, in Factory.

E. Design and fabricate pump to Hydraulic Institute Standards.

F. Pump shall be factory built and tested.

HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23 - Page 2 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

G. Minimum pump efficiency shall be not less than 80 %.

HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23 - Page 3 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.8 MOTOR DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Design standard

1. European made motors shall conform to IEC requirements;

2. American made motors shall conform to NEMA requirements.

B. Ratings and Service factor:

1. IEC motors: There must be a margin of not less than 15% between the maximum
shaft (absorbed) power of the driven machinery and the motor kW rating.

2. NEMA motors: minimum 1.15.

C. Nominal efficiency:

1. IEC motors: Motor shall be “EFF1” as per CEMEP classification scheme;

2. NEMA motors: efficiency shall equal or exceed NEMA “Premium” efficiency levels;

D. Motors shall be inverter duty to suit variable speed applications, when required.

E. Speed: Synchronous maximum speed of 1500 rpm.

F. Enclosure:

1. IEC motors: IP55/IC411;

2. NEMA motors: Totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC).

G. Insulation: Limited to 155 deg. C (Class F).

H. Temperature rise: Limited to 80 deg. C (Class B)

I. Ambient Temperature: Motor shall be de-rated for 50 Deg. C ambient temperatures.

J. Nameplate:

1. Permanently stamped as per requirements of NEMA or IEC

2. Shall indicate data at the rated power and temperature (not motor nominal rating).

K. Select motor to be non-overloading throughout entire pump curve.

1.9 FACTORY PERFORMANCE QUARANTEE

A. Factory Performance Test:

1. The pumps manufacturer shall be responsible for conducting pump witness of

performance test to validate the head-flow curves, pump efficiency curve, motor
efficiency curve, NPSHr curve and vibration of the pump motor assembly.

HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23 - Page 4 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. The pump factory test shall be performed in the presence of Owner, Project
Management and Consultant Representatives and all the expenses including
transportation, business class airfare, hotel accommodation…etc shall be borne by the
Contactor and included in the pump cost.
3. The calibration of all instrumentation shall be traceable to the National Institute of
Standards and Technology (NIST) or equivalent.
4. A test method statement shall be forwarded to the Engineer and approval shall be
granted one month prior the test.
5. A certified test report of all data and test result shall be forwarded to the Engineer for
acceptance prior shipping. The report shall include calibration curves, test results,
pump curves as tested and information sheets for all instrumentation.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements.

B. Provide the required information about vibration isolation pads with suitable size and
thickness under pipe supports of each pump set.

C. Provide information about pumps supports and connected piping as per manufacturer
recommendations.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal for a pump.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VERTICAL, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, split coupled vertical in-line pump;
single stage, single or double suction type, with pump characteristics which provide rising
heads to shut off, with rigid spacer type coupling, designed for installation with pump and
motor shafts mounted vertically. Rate pump for 1020/2040 kPa (150/300 PSI) minimum
working pressure as per equipment schedules and a continuous water temperature of 45
deg C minimum.

B. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: radially split volute cast iron, with flanged suction and discharge
connections, with separate drilled and tapped openings for gauges, flush and drain
connections, complete with supportive ribs casted integral with the volute.

2. Casing gasket: confined casing gasket to meet stringent industrial temperature and
pressure applications.

HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23 - Page 5 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Impeller: bronze; fully enclosed type, statically and dynamically balanced. If

required, trim impeller in Factory to match specified performance, with guaranteed
certificate from the manufacturer for the new trimmed impeller.

4. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.

5. Mechanical Seal: accessible and easily replaceable stainless steel, outside multi-
spring balanced type, covered by additional secondary seal, and equipped with
stainless steel gland plate with stainless steel trim, all are secured inside a coupling
guard fully encloses access openings.

6. Provide factory installed flush line with manual vent.

7. Pump Bearings: Oil lubricated; bronze-journal or thrust type.

C. Shaft Coupling: rigid spacer type of high tensile alloy with a lower seal chamber throttle
bushing.

D. Coupling shall be split to allow removal from pump and motor shafts, to be able to replace
all mechanical seal components without removing or dismantling pump or motor

E. Motor: (constant or variable speed, as specified in design schedules), grease-lubricated ball

bearings, unless otherwise indicated; rigidly mounted to pump casing with lifting eye and
supporting lugs in motor enclosure.

F. Seal Flush Line Fittings: Supply in the flush line to the mechanical seal a 50 micron
cartridge filter and sight flow indicator, at the working pressure. Filters shall be changed, by
the contractor, after system is flushed and on a regular basis until turned over to the owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment supports for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 STARTUP SERVICE

A. The contractor in cooperation with the supplier shall perform startup service:

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers on suction piping.
4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23 - Page 6 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
6. Start motor.
7. Open discharge valve slowly.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain pumps.

END OF SECTION 232123

HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23 - Page 7 of 7

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 23 00

REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications, including
pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties; special-duty valves; and refrigerants.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each valve type and refrigerant piping specialty specified.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings, including pipe
and tube sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs,
wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial
relationship between piping and equipment.

1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size and design the layout and
installation of the piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and
tube sizes, to ensure proper operation and conformance with warranties of connected
equipment.

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and
any other information required by Engineer.

D. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in the operation
and maintenance manual.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators according to
ASME Section IX AMENDED by ASME Section IX Addenda A , ASME Section IX
Addenda B, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:

1. ANSI/ASME B31.5-2006, "Refrigeration Piping."

2. ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - Page 1 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207 - 09, "Refrigerant-Containing

Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429 - 03, "Electrically Operated
Valves."

D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and
labeled.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
Structural Engineer.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
to Employer.

1. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: 2 each, containing everything required to conduct 1 test.
2. Refrigerant: 2 containers each, with 10 kg (22 lb) of refrigerant.
3. Filter-Dryer Cartridges: 3 of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES AND TUBES

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B280-08, Type ACR, drawn temper.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88M-05, annealed temper.

2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS

A. Copper Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.22-2001 (R2005), wrought-copper streamlined pattern.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Brazing Filler Metals: ANSI/AWS A5.8/A5.8M:2004, Classification BAg-1 (Silver).

2.4 VALVES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135 deg C (275
deg F) working temperature, globe or angle pattern, forged-brass or bronze body and
bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel,
stainless-steel spring, nylon seat disc, with solder-end connections.

B. Packed-Angle Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135 deg C (275 deg F)
working temperature, forged-brass or bronze body, forged-brass seal caps with copper

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - Page 2 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

gasket, back seating, rising stem and seat, molded stem packing, with solder-end
connections.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - Page 3 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Check Valves DN25 (1-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure,
149 deg C (300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-brass body, with removable piston, PTFE
seat, and stainless-steel spring; straight-through globe design. Valve shall be straight-
through pattern, with solder-end connections.

D. Check Valves Larger than DN25 (1-Inch NPS): 3100-kPa (450-psig) operating pressure,
149 deg C (300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-bronze body, with cast-bronze or forged-
brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically retained PTFE seat disc. Valve shall
be straight-through or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.

E. Service Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) pressure rating, forged-brass body with copper stubs,
brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, with solder-end connections.

F. Solenoid Valves: Conform to ANSI/ARI 760-2007; 121 deg C (250 deg F) temperature
rating, 2760-kPa (400-psig) working pressure; forged brass, with PTFE valve seat, 2-way
straight-through pattern, and solder-end connections; manual operator; with NEMA 250-
2008, Type 1 solenoid enclosure with 13-mm (1/2-inch) conduit adapter, and 24-V normally
closed holding coil.

G. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ANSI/ARI 770-2007; pilot operated, forged brass

or cast bronze with pilot operator, stainless-steel bottom spring, pressure-gage tappings, 24-
V dc standard coil, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections.

H. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ANSI/ARI 770-2007; direct acting, brass with

pilot operator, stainless-steel diaphragm, standard coil, and solder-end connections.

I. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight or angle brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed
and ASME labeled, for standard pressure setting.

J. Thermal Expansion Valves: Conform to ANSI/ARI 750-2007; thermostatic-adjustable,

modulating type; size as required and factory set for superheat requirements; solder-end
connections; with sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for hot-gas bypass line,
and external equalizer line.

K. Hot-Gas Bypass Valve: Adjustable, sized for capacity equal to last step of compressor
unloading; solder-end connections.

2.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 2960-kPa (430-psig) working pressure; forged-brass or

steel body with stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel screen, and screwed cleanout
plug, with solder-end connections.

B. Straight, Non-Cleanable-Type Strainers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure; steel shell

with stainless-steel screen, with solder-end connections.

C. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, 93 deg C (200 deg F)

operating temperature; forged-brass body, with replaceable, polished, optical viewing
window with color-coded moisture indicator, and solder-end connections.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - Page 4 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; steel shell, flange

ring, and spring, ductile-iron cover plate with steel cap screws, and wrought-copper fittings
for solder-end connections; with replaceable-core kit, including gaskets, as follows:

1. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless-steel support,
ARI 730 rated for capacity.
2. Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activated alumina,
ANSI/ARI 730-2005 rated for capacity.
3. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded, bonded core of activated charcoal and desiccant
with integral gaskets.

E. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 2140-kPa (350-psig) maximum operating pressure, 107 deg C (225
deg F) maximum operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-
end connections; molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.

F. Flanged Unions: 2760-kPa (400-psig) working pressure, 165 deg C (330 deg F) maximum
operating temperature; 2 brass tailpiece adapters for solder-end connections to copper
tubing; forged-steel flanges for 22- to 41-mm (1- to 1-1/2-inch) nominal copper-tube size
and ductile iron for 54- to 79-mm (2- to 3-inch) nominal copper-tube size with 4 plated steel
bolts, with silicon bronze nuts and fiber gasket; factory-applied rust-resistant coating on
flanges and bolts.

G. Flexible Connectors: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze or

stainless-steel core, high-tensile bronze-braid covering, solder-end connections, and
synthetic covering; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 180 mm long.

H. Mufflers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, brazed-steel construction with fusible

plug, sized for refrigeration capacity.

2.6 RECEIVERS

A. 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter and Smaller: ARI 495-2005, UL listed, steel, brazed; 2760-kPa
(400-psig) pressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.

B. More than 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter: ARI 495-2005, welded steel, tested and stamped
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 8D; 2760 kPa (400 psig) with
tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and liquid-level indicator.

2.7 REFRIGERANT

A. ASHRAE 34, R-123: Dichlorotrifluoroethane.

B. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - Page 5 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Aboveground, within Building: Type B (Type L) drawn-copper tubing.

B. Belowground for DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Type B (Type L) annealed-copper
tubing.

C. Belowground for Larger than DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Type A (Type K) annealed-copper
tubing.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standards

for Refrigeration Systems.”

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods."

C. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.

D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other equipment.
Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.

E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or
between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings,
sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.

F. Belowground, install copper tubing in conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.

G. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.

1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have
been eliminated.

H. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and
symmetrically.

I. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be
exposed to mechanical injury.

J. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent
downward away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to
compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain oil in
vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

K. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - Page 6 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

L. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted, unless expressly indicated.

M. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.

N. Provide bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than DN50 (2-inch NPS).

O. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, expansion

valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.

P. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection, at right angles to axial
movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.

Q. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers, with isolation valves and valved bypass.

R. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.

S. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems, seats,
and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near bulb of expansion valve.

T. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26 Sections. Coordinate

electrical requirements and connections.

U. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.

1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve outlet.

2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb straps.
Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect
suction-line pressure at bulb location.

V. Install pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety

Standards for Refrigeration Systems” Pipe pressure relief valves on receivers to outdoors.

W. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE 15
AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems” procedures.

X. Charge system as follows:

1. Install filter-dryer core after leak test, but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump, until temperature of 1.7 deg C (35
deg F) is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.
3. Maintain vacuum for a minimum of 5 hours.
4. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas and charge to 14 kPa (2 psig).

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Section "Hangers and Supports."
Provide according to ANSI/ASME B31.5-2006 and ANSI/MSS SP-69-2003.

B. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 6 m in length.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - Page 7 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 6 m or longer.

D. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs, 6 m or longer supported by a trapeze.

E. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes. Tube sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in ASTM B88M-05.

1. 15 mm: Maximum span, 1500 mm; minimum rod size, 6 mm.

2. 18 mm: Maximum span, 1500 mm; minimum rod size, 6 mm.
3. 28 mm: Maximum span, 1500 mm; minimum rod size, 6 mm.
4. 35 mm: Maximum span, 1800 mm; minimum rod size, 8 mm.
5. 42 mm: Maximum span, 2400 mm; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
6. 54 mm: Maximum span, 2400 mm; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
7. 67 mm: Maximum span, 2700 mm; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
8. 79 mm: Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
9. 105 mm: Maximum span, 3.6 m; minimum rod size, 12 mm.

G. Support vertical runs at each floor.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic pipe and tube joint construction is specified in Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods."

B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent
formation of scale.

3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install valves on suction and discharge of compressor, for gage taps at compressor inlet and
outlet, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on inlet and outlet, and on each side of
strainers.

C. Install check valves on compressor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on multiple
condenser systems.

D. Install refrigerant-charging (packed-angle) valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff

valve and expansion valve.

E. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction lines at
evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.

F. Install a full-sized, 3-valve bypass around each dryer.

G. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install
solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26 Sections. Coordinate

electrical requirements and connections.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - Page 8 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

H. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.

1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve outlet.

2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb straps.
Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect
suction-line pressure at bulb location.

I. Install pressure-regulating and relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15 AND 34

PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems”.

3.7 SPECIALTIES APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and
on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.

B. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve, including expansion valves,
solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves.

C. Install strainers on main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers
are used.

D. Install moisture-liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic

expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.

E. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers, and pipe to outdoors.

F. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers and before
each solenoid valve.

G. Install permanent filter-dryers in low-temperature systems, in systems using hermetic

compressors, and before each solenoid valve.

H. Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-
down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil
bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line
when system shuts down.

I. Install receivers on systems 18 kW (5 tons) and larger, and on systems with long piping
runs, sized to accommodate pump-down charge.

J. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors where piping configuration does not
absorb vibration.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 26 Sections for electrical

connections.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - Page 9 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ANSI/ASME B31.5-2006, Chapter VI.

1. Pressure test with nitrogen to 1380 kPa (200 psig). Perform final tests at 186-kPa
(27-psig) vacuum and 1380 kPa (200 psig) using halide torch or electronic leak
detector. Test to no leakage.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

C. Repair leaks using new materials; retest.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichloroethylene.

3.12 COMMISSIONING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of 1.67 deg C (35
deg F) is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between
vacuum pump and system.
5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 14 kPa (2 psig).
6. Complete charging of system, using new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide
full-operating charge.

END OF SECTION 232300

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - Page 10 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 25 00

HVAC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Separate electrical components and materials required for field installation and electrical
connections are specified in Division 26.
C. Motor control centers and motor control panels are specified under Division 26.
D. Refer to section 230513 regarding electrical requirements for HVAC equipment.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes cleaning and water-treatment systems for the following:
1. Chilled-water piping (closed-loop system).
2. Condenser water piping (open system)
3. Evaporative cooling system (open system).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. TSS: Total suspended solids are solid materials, including organic and inorganic, that are
suspended in the water. These solids may include silt, plankton, and industrial wastes.

B. TDS: Total dissolved solids are the combined content of all inorganic and organic
substances contained in a liquid in molecular, ionized or micro-granular (colloidal sol)
suspended form.

1.4 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Closed-Loop System: One bypass feeder on each system with isolating and drain valves
downstream from circulating pumps, and Pump sequestering agent and corrosion inhibitor
from solution tank into condenser water supply to tower. Use agitator as required.
1. Introduce chemical treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by
test.

B. Open-Loop, Condenser Water and Evaporative Cooling Piping: Pump sequestering agent
and corrosion inhibitor from solution tank into condenser water supply to tower. Use
agitator as required.
1. Intermittently feed biocide to condenser water to achieve a toxic level of the chemical
to kill the organism present.
2. Change biocides periodically to avoid chemical immunity.

HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00 - Page 1 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Activate chemical solution pump from water meter in makeup water line to cooling
tower when condenser water pumps are running.
4. Automatically feed chemical with electronic solid-state controllers.
5. Deactivate solution pump and signal alarm by a liquid-level switch in each solution
tank on low chemicals.
6. Chemical control panel for bleed control and injective of chemical is to meet the
following minimum requirements:
a. The Controller must be able to directly monitor and control both the addition of
the corrosion inhibitor, the Primary Biocide and the secondary biocide. It must
also be able to measure the active polymer in the system.
b. The controller must have the ability to monitor and control conductivity
(bleed).
c. The controller must also be capable of monitoring and controlling the
condenser water’s pH and TDS.
d. The control system must have in-line mild steel and copper corrosion probes,
and be capable of sending those readings to the controller for instantaneous
corrosion rate measurements.
e. The unit must be capable of measuring turbidity.
f. The controller must have the ability for remote monitoring and control, either
through a phone line, or a web based system. It must also be able to send
Alarms via phones, and/or emails.
g. The controller must be equipped with a Data Management program, capable of
storing measured values for a one year period, and be able to generate graphs
and reports on any or all of the variables.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain water quality for HVAC systems that controls corrosion and build-up of scale
and biological growth for maximum efficiency of installed equipment without posing a
hazard to operating personnel or the environment.

B. Base chemical treatment performance requirements on quality of water available at Project

site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance
characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and specified requirements and guidelines
of authorities having jurisdiction. The following parameters are for guidance only, the
actual parameters shall follow the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations:
1. Closed System: Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and fouling to
sustain the following water characteristics:
a. pH: 8.5 to 10.5.
b. Corrosion rate of following metals shall not exceed specified Mill Per Year
c. penetration:

1) Ferrous: 0 to 0.5
2) Brass: 0.2
3) Copper alloy: 0 to 0.15

d. Total Iron as Fe++ to be less than 1.0 ppm

HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00 - Page 2 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

e. Inhibitor shall be stable at equipment skin surface temperatures and bulk water
temperatures of, respectively, not less than 121 deg. C (250 degrees F) and 52
deg. C (125 deg. F.).
f. Heat exchanger fouling and capacity reduction shall not exceed that allowed by
fouling factor 0.000088 m2 .k/w (0.0005 hr. ft2.oF/Btu).
2. Condenser Water, Cooling Tower System: Maintain system essentially free of scale
and total suspended solids to sustain the following water characteristics:
a. Calcium Balance: 90 to 100 percent.
b. Water Concentration: Not more than 6 cycles.
c. Iron: Zero.
d. pH: 10.5 or above.
e. Silicon: 120 ppm or less.
f. Corrosion rate: less than 0.5 MPY on mild steel / 0.20 MPY on Copper
g. Bacteria count (Aerobic): less than 1000 colonies/ml.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Installer Qualifications: Submit names and qualifications of the installer agency. Submit
information on 3 recently completed projects. Submit list of proposed equipment.

B. Product Data: Include rated capacities; water-pressure drops; shipping, installed, and
operating weights; and furnished products listed below:
1. Pumps.
2. Chemical solution tanks.
3. Agitators.
4. Control equipment and devices.
5. Test equipment.
6. Chemicals.
7. Chemical feeders.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

D. Water Analysis Verification: Submit a copy of the water analysis certificate to illustrate
water quality available at Project site.

E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

F. Maintenance Data: For pumps, agitators, system controls, and accessories to include in
maintenance manuals.

G. Compliance statement clause by clause full and detailed compliance statement of the
specification shall be submitted where a clear compliance is indicated as follows:
a. “Yes” interprets full unconditional compliance.

HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00 - Page 3 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

b. “No” interprets a deviation (to be clearly indicated as remark or note in the dedicated
column).
c. “Not Applicable” where the case is.

It should be noted that other comments like “noted” or “partial compliance” are
unacceptable and will be interpreted as a non compliance.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Provide the services of an experienced water treatment chemical

engineer or authorized technical representative of the chemical treatment manufacturer for
both installation and maintenance of chemical treatment equipment required for this
Project. The installer should direct installation, flushing, cleaning, pre-treatment, training,
debugging, and acceptance testing operations; direct and perform chemical limit control
during construction period and monitor systems for a period of 12 months after acceptance,
including not less than 4 written status reports.

B. Field Quality Control and Certified Laboratory Reports: During the 1 year guarantee
period, the water treatment installer shall provide not less than 12 reports based on on-site
periodic visits, sample taking and testing, and review with the Engineer, of water treatment
control for the previous period. These monitoring reports shall assess chemical treatment
accuracy, scale formation, fouling, and corrosion control, and shall contain instructions for
the correction of any out-of-control condition.

C. Log Forms: All data logs & trends must be downloaded from the controller including but
not limiting to: pH, conductivity, ORP, corrosion inhibitor level, turbidity, temperature,
corrosion rates on Steel & Copper, Chemical consumption of corrosion inhibitor
&biocides.Provideoneyear’s supply of preprinted water treatment test log forms.

D. When water treatment is specified, the use of chemical-treatment products containing

hexavalent chromium (Cr) is prohibited.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Scope of Service: Provide chemicals and service program for maintaining optimum
conditions in the circulating water for inhibiting corrosion, scale, and organic growths in
the cooling, chilled-water piping, condenser water piping and equipment. Services and
chemicals shall be provided for a period of 1 year from date of Substantial Completion,
including the following:
1. Initial water analysis and recommendations.
2. Startup assistance.
3. Periodic field service and consultation.
4. Customer report charts and log sheets.
5. Laboratory technical assistance.
6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with
government regulations.

HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00 - Page 4 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS/SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Chemical: Furnish quantity approval to 100 percent of amount initially installed.

PART-2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT

A. Bypass Feeders: Cast iron or steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with funnel
shutoff valve on top, air-release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and recirculating
shutoff valves on sides.
1. Capacity: 150L.
2. Working Pressure: 1210 kPa.

B. Drip Feeders: Plastic reservoir with capillary tubing probe, weight, charging syringe, and
clip.

C. Positive-Displacement Diaphragm Pump: Simplex, self-priming, rated for intended

chemical with 25 percent safety factor for design pressure and temperature.
1. Adjustable flow rate.
2. Thermoplastic construction.
3. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 230-V, 50 Hz single-phase motor.
4. Built-in relief valve.

D. Positive-Displacement Piston Pump: Metal and thermoplastic construction.

1. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 230-V, 50 Hz single-phase motor.
2. Built-in relief valve.

E. Chemical Solution Tanks: Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated from high-density

opaque polyethylene with graduated markings.
1. Molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator, and liquid-level
switch.
2. Capacity: 500L.

F. Agitator: Direct drive, 1450 rpm, mounted on tank with angle adjustment.
1. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 230-V50 Hz single-phase motor.
2. Stainless-steel clamp and motor mount, with stainless-steel shaft and propeller.

G. Liquid-Level Switch: Polypropylene housing, integrally mounted PVC air trap,

receptacles for connection to metering pump, and low-level alarm.

HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00 - Page 5 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

H. Packaged Conductivity Controller: Solid-state circuitry, 5 percent accuracy, linear dial

adjustment, built-in calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control-function light,
output to control circuit, and recorder.

I. Cold-Water Meter: Positive-displacement type with sealed, tamperproof magnetic drive;

impulse contact register; single-pole, double-throw, dry-contact switch.
1. Turbine type with bronze or cast-iron body rated for 860 kPa(125 psig).
2. Magnetic-drive or mechanical-impulse contactor matched to signal receiver.
3. At least six-digit totalizers.
4. 230-V ac.

J. Solenoid Valves: Forged-brass body, globe pattern, and general-purpose solenoid

enclosure with 230-V, continuous-duty coil.

K. Electronic Timers: 150-second and 5-minute ranges, with infinite adjustment over full
range, and mounted in cabinet with hand-off-auto switches and status lights.

L. Chemical Tubing: Schedule 40, PVC with solvent-cement joints; or polypropylene tubing
with heat fusion.

M. Plastic Ball Valves: Rigid PVC or CPVC body, integral union ends, and
polytetrafluoroethylene seats and seals.

N. Plastic-Body Strainer: Rigid PVC or CPVC with cleanable stainless-steel strainer element.

O. Condenser Water-Treatment Control Panel: Incorporate solid-state integrated circuits and

digital LED displays, in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure with gasketed and lockable door.
1. Control dissolved solids, based on conductivity, and include the following:
a. Digital readout display.
b. Temperature-compensated sensor probe adaptable to sample stream manifold.
c. High, low, and normal conductance indicator lights.
d. High or low conductance alarm light, trip points field adjustable; with silence
switch.
e. Hand-off-auto switch for solenoid bleed-off valve.
f. Bleed-off light to indicate valve operation.
g. Internal adjustable hysteresis or dead band.
h. Blow down meters similar to the make- up to be installed on blow down
circuits on drawings.
2. Control inhibitor feeding by determining actual product level in the circulating water
and dosing accordingly to reach the set point recommend by the water treatment
supplier and include the following:
a. Solid-state reset counter (accumulator), with selections from 1 to 15.
b. Solid-state timer, adjustable from 15 to 300 seconds.
c. Test switch.
d. Hand-off-auto switch for chemical pump.
e. Illuminated legend to indicate feed when pump is activated.
f. Solid-state lockout timer, adjustable from 15 to 180 minutes, with indicator
light. Lockout timer to deactivate the pump and activate alarm circuits.
g. Electromechanical-type, panel-mounted makeup totalizer to measure amount
of makeup water.

HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00 - Page 6 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Control biocide with an adjustable time programmer and include the following:
a. 24-hour timer with 14-day skip feature to permit activation any hour of day.
b. Precision, solid-state, bleed-off lockout timer (0 to 9 hours) and clock-
controlled biocide pump timer (0 to 2 ½ hours). Prebleed and bleed lockout.
c. Solid-state alternator to enable the use of 2 different formulations.
d. 24-hour digital display of time of day.
e. 14-day LED display of day of week.
f. Fast and slow internal clock set controls.
g. Battery backup so clock is not disturbed by power outages.
h. Quartz timekeeping accuracy.
i. Hand-off-auto switches for biocide pumps.
j. Biocide A and Biocide B illuminated legends to indicate pump is running.

2.2 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Test Kit: Manufacturer recommended equipment and chemicals, in a carrying case, for
testing pH, total dissolved solids, dissolved oxygen, biocount, chloride, and total alkalinity
and for calcium hardness field tests.

B. Corrosion Test Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosion material, complete with

piping, valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream
from mild steel coupon in the test coupon assembly. Test coupon assembly should have a
transparent window to enable visual inspection of the coupon without having to remove the
coupon from the corrosion rack and disturb the system.
1. 2 station rack for closed-loop systems.
2. 4-station rack for open condenser water systems.
3. 4-station rack for open evaportive water systems
4. Corrosion test coupon assembly: to be provided with monitoring instrumentation for
checking corrosion.

2.3 CHEMICALS

A. Furnish chemicals recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are

compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, the actual water
analysis and the types of organisms to be controlled.

B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to
remove grease and petroleum products.

C. Biocide: Chlorine release agents or microbiocides (oxidizing and/or non oxidizing

biocides)oxidizing biocides to be cycled on at least a weekly basis with non oxidizing
biocide.

D. Closed-Loop, Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust
pH, corrosion inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.Corrosion inhibitor should contain
copper dissolved inhibitor.

E. Open-Loop, Condenser Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to inhibit scaling,

acid to reduce alkalinity and pH, corrosion inhibitor, and biocide.

HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00 - Page 7 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

F. Open-Loop Piping Chemicals Serving, Evaporative Condensers, SmallCoolingTowers, and

Liquid Coolers: Sequestering agent to inhibit scaling, corrosion inhibitor, and biocide
nonoxidizing.

G. Use surfactants and antifoaming agents.

PART-3 EXECUTION

3. 1 WATER ANALYSIS

A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of chemical
treatment needed to maintain the water quality as specified in "Performance Requirements"
Article.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb.

B. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Delivery and Storage: Deliver all chemicals in manufacturer's sealed shipping containers.
Store in designated space and protect from deleterious exposure and hazardous spills.

D. Install equipment furnished by the chemical treatment supplier and charge systems
according to the manufacturer's instructions and as directed by the Engineer.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 26 Sections for connecting
electrical equipment.
D. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections. Report results in writing.
2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been
cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing
chemicals for water-treatment system.
3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the
preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.

B. System Preparation & Pre Cleaning Checking

HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00 - Page 8 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Check the strainers in all circulation pumps andprepare smaller mesh size wire in the
strainers so as to start by removing large particles, then gradually remove smaller
particles
2. A suitable number of staff must be available for changing the strainer (also suitable
tools, accessories must be available). Normally, all pumps must be in manual
operation when undergoing strain changing of mesh size and cleaning plus checking
the availability of strainer gaskets.
3. Check the Air Vent availability and working mechanisms
4. Check in drain valves
5. Record the pressure gage reading in the network in each sections showing the
pressure in Ihe discharge side of the main circulation pumps,
6. Check the available thermometers and gel the actual temperature reading in all points
before starting the process cleaning program.
7. The above mention steps shall be applied after the hydraulic pressure test for all the
system
8. Checking the connection ofthe dosage pot and corrosion racks for ideal operation.

C. Pre Flushing and Flushing Stages

During the Pre-flushing & Flushing stages (Closed loop):

1. Make sure to by pass the condensers and heat exchangers to avoid any suspended
material from the cleaning phase to block or damage the Heat Exchange units.
2. For Steel pipelines : use chelating cleaners after inspecting a section of the pipe.
3. Follow the BSRIA guide : “Pre-commission Cleaning of Pipework Systems” –
AG1/2001.1

D. Pre Flushing step

1. System must be flushed with fresh water, mainlaining the maximum pumping flow
to achieve the highest velocity at the different branches. This can be applied by
manually putting all pumps in operation including the standby ones or by closing some
of the branches lines to increase the velocity in the other lines
2. Perform balance make-up and drain to minimize the load on cleaning step by allowing
the looseparticles to be removed saving Ihe cleaner for the hard particles.The ideal
points of drain is on the return line just before the point of themake-up -to guarantee
including the maximum circuit surface in thecleaning- also it is useful to drain from
the lowest point in each building orin each riser.
3. The pre-flushing must run continuously achieving clear wa ten from all draining
points.To avoid the flush rusting during this step, necessary chemicals must be dosed
continuously at a dosage of 50 g/m3i.ethe control limit is to get min. 5 ppm of silicate
during this step

E. Test chemical feed piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory
test results are achieved.
2. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00 - Page 9 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig)above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow test pressure to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure
constitute defects.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until satisfactory results
are obtained.
6. Prepare test reports, including required corrective action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Sample chilled water and condenser water at 1 week intervals after startup for a period of 5
weeks, and prepare certified test report for each required water performance characteristic.
B. Contractor to submit a commissioning report for the filtration system supported by particle
size analysis test for the inlet, outlet and back wash water of the filter after duration of 1
week from successful commissioning and start up of chillers module

C. Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of Substantial Completion, perform 4 separate

water analyses by a third party agency to prove that automatic chemical feed systems are
maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section.
Perform analyses at least 60 days apart. Submit written reports of water analysis to the
owner.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."
1. Schedule at least eight (8) hours of training.
2. Review manufacturer's safety data sheets for handling of chemicals.
3. Review data in maintenance manuals, especially data on recommended parts
inventory and supply sources and on availability of parts and service.

END OF SECTION 232500

HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00 - Page 10 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 31 13

METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rectangular and round metal ducts and plenums for heating,
ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 1000 Pa
(minus 2- to plus 4-inch wg).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Sealing Requirements Definitions: For the purposes of duct systems sealing requirements
specified in this Section, the following definitions apply:

1. Seams: A seam is defined as joining of two longitudinally (in the direction of

airflow) oriented edges of duct surface material occurring between two joints. All
other duct surface connections made on the perimeter are deemed to be joints.
2. Joints: Joints include girth joints; branch and subbranch intersections; so-called duct
collar tap-ins; fitting subsections; louver and air terminal connections to ducts; access
door and access panel frames and jambs; duct, plenum, and casing abutments to
building structures..

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and -
distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or
configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Engineer.
Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed
layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and
joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements
and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - Page 1 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements
in ASHRAE 62.1.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the followings in accordance with Conditions of Contract and

Specification Sections.

B. Product data including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual

components, profiles, and finishes for the following items:

1. Duct Liner.
2. Sealing Materials.
3. Adhesives
4. Gaskets
5. Fire-Stopping Material

C. Sustainability Submittals:

1. Documentation indicating that duct systems complies with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5
- "Systems and Equipment."
2. Documentation indicating that duct systems complies with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
3. Leakage Test Report: Documentation of work performed for compliance with
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4.2.2 - "Duct Leakage Tests."
4. Duct-Cleaning Test Report: Documentation of work performed for compliance with
ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.4 - "Ventilation System Start-up."
5. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement
of VOC content.

D. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,

components, and attachments to other work.
2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
3. Duct layout indicating configuration, liner material, pressure classifications and sizes
on plans.
4. Fittings.
5. Reinforcement and spacing.
6. Seam and joint construction.
7. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
8. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors
and panels.
9. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
10. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation
and duct attachment.

E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to provide access to

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - Page 2 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

dampers and other operating devices.

4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers,
grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.

F. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.

G. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section.
Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

H. Record (As-Built) Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support,
and installed accessories and devices.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Duct fabrications shall be performed by an approved manufacturer. Ducts and fittings shall
be factory machinery fabricated and supplied with factory applied sealant as per approved
methods of statement by the engineer.

B. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding
processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--
Steel," for hangers and supports; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for
duct joint and seam welding.

C. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless
otherwise indicated.

D. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems," unless otherwise indicated.

E. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.

F. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

G. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

H. Mockups: Before installing duct systems, erect mockups representing system pressure
classifications higher than 500 Pa (2-inch wg). Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work:

1. Locate mockups in the locations and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer. Mockup may be a representative section of the actual duct
system.
2. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:

a. Five transverse joints.

b. One access door.
c. Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow.
d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each duct and
apparatus.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - Page 3 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Perform tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Modify mockup

construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum
acceptable results.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting Work.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
7. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion
may become part of the completed Work.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles
with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period
for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.

C. Deliver and store duct sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper maintained
through fabrication and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, exposed
matte finish.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized, sheet metal ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less; 10-mm
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.

2.2 ACCOUSTIC DUCT LINER

A. General: Apply acoustic duct liner as requested.

B. Application: to be installed inside air ducts for the first 3 meters in air handling units and the
first 1 meter in fan coil units. The contractor to add more lengths than specified in case noise
exceeds the acceptable limits as per standards.

C. Material: open cell embossed surface polyurethane foam with a thickness of 30 mm, similar
to K-Flex model K-Fonik B30, or approved equal.

D. Density: 25/30 kg/m3.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - Page 4 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Color: black.

F. Installation: glued securely to the metal duct inner surface.

2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive
or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and
mastics.

B. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed
index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

1. Joint and Seam Tape: 50 mm wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced.

2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral
compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape
to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.
3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl
sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants,
complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.

C. Fire rated sealant shall be used for smoke exhaust ducts.

2.4 FIRE-STOPPING MATERIAL

A. Fire-Resistant Sealant: Provide two-part, foamed-in-place, fire-stopping elastomeric sealant

formulated for use in a through-penetration fire-stop system for filling openings around duct
penetrations through walls and floors, having fire-resistance ratings indicated as established
by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the work included, shall be K-Flex or approved similar.

2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel

fasteners appropriate for building materials.

1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or

for slabs more than 100 mm thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 100 mm thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, all-threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rod.

2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod
diameters.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - Page 5 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.

2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet
steel, in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", Tables 1-3
through 1-19, including their associated details. Conform to the requirements in the
referenced standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications,
and joint types and intervals.

1. Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class

required for pressure classification.
2. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, stains, and discolorations.

B. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the

followings, however the Contractor to verify the static pressure classification based on
actual pressure drop calculations:

1. Supply Ducts, downstream of Fan coil units: 125 Pa (0.5-inch wg).

2. Supply Ducts, downstream air handling equipment: 500 Pa (2-inch wg)
3. Exhaust Ducts: Upstream air handling equipment: 500 Pa (2-inch wg).
4. Return Ducts, upstream of Fan coil units: 125 Pa (0.5-inch wg), negative pressure.
5. Return Ducts: Upstream air handling equipment: 500 Pa (2-inch wg), negative
pressure.
6. Exhaust Ducts: Upstream air handling equipment: 500 Pa (2-inch wg), negative
pressure.

C. Fabricate kitchen hood exhaust ducts with not less than 1.52 mm (16 gage), carbon steel
sheets. Weld and flange seams and joints. Construct ducts liquid tight with continuous
external weld for all seams and joints. Where ducts are not self-draining back to the
equipment, provide low point drain pocket with copper drain pipe to sanitary sewer. Access
doors or panels shall be of the same material and thickness of the duct with gaskets and
sealants that are rated 815 ºC and shall be grease-tight. Conform to NFPA Standard 96

D. Smoke extract ducts: shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet with 1.2 mm thickness,
galvanization of 275 gm/m2 for both sides, welded longitudinal joints, and flanged sectional
joints, reinforced with girders, and sealed with fire rated sealants.

E. Smoke extract ducts, pressurization ducts and fresh air make up air ducts serving smoke
control system, which are running exposed and crossing other fire zones, including ducts
crossing fire rated walls without fire dampers, shall be fire proofed ducts, or protected by
fire rated enclosure. Contractor shall submit clear method statement for the constructing of
fire/smoke rated ducts for approval, such as applying fire resistant coating, which reacts in
contact with fire by forming an insulating barrier to separates two contiguous areas, or by
other proven and approved methods. Fire rated ducts should be two hours fire rated at 300
deg. C.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - Page 6 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

F. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 483 mm and larger
and are 1 mm or less, with more than 1 sq.m. of unbraced panel area, as indicated in
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standard", Figure 1-4, unless they are lined or are
externally insulated

2.7 RECTANGULAR DUCT FITTINGS

A. Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in
accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard", Figures 2-1
through 2-10.

2.8 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of the size of
round duct that has a circumference equal to perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.

B. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of spiral seam, galvanized steel according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

C. Flat-Oval Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts with standard spiral lock seams or with butt-
welded longitudinal seams according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible."

D. Double-Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) ducts with spiral seam
outer shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside
dimensions.

1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean

temperature.
2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell dimensions.
Fabricate outer-shell lengths 50 mm longer than inner shell and insulation, and in
metal thickness specified for single-wall duct.
3. Insulation: 25-mm thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or
uninsulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to
inner liner diameter.
4. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with solid sheet metal of
thickness listed below:
5. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with sheet metal
having 2.4-mm diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use
the following sheet metal thicknesses and seam construction:

a. Ducts 75 to 200 mm in Diameter: 0.5 mm with standard spiral seam

construction.
b. Ducts 225 to 1070 mm in Diameter: 0.5 mm with single-rib spiral seam
construction.
c. Ducts 1120 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 0.55 mm with single-rib spiral seam
construction.
d. Ducts 1575 to 2235 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm with standard spiral seam
construction.

6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation

from dislocation by mechanical means.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - Page 7 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.9 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTING FABRICATION

A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified
for longitudinal seam straight duct.

B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess
material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.

C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend

radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter.
Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:

1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 500 Pa (minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg):

a. Ducts 75 to 660 mm in Diameter: 0.7 mm.

b. Ducts 685 to 915 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm.
c. Ducts 940 to 1270 mm in Diameter: 1.0 mm.
d. Ducts 1320 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 1.3 mm.
e. Ducts 1575 to 2130 mm in Diameter: 1.6 mm.

3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from 500 to 2490 Pa (2- to 10-inch wg):

a. Ducts 75 to 355 mm in Diameter: 0.7 mm.

b. Ducts 380 to 660 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm.
c. Ducts 685 to 1270 mm in Diameter: 1.0 mm.
d. Ducts 1320 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 1.3 mm.
e. Ducts 1575 to 2130 mm in Diameter: 1.6 mm.

4. Flat-Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as

longitudinal seam flat-oval duct.
5. 90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust
systems for material-handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do
not permit using 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning
vanes.
6. Round Elbows, 200 mm and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-
degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
7. Round Elbows, 225 through 355 mm: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45,
60, and 90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
8. Round Elbows, Larger Than 355 mm, and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored
elbows, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 200 mm and All Pressures: 1.0 mm thick with
two-piece welded construction.
10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - Page 8 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

11. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal seam flat-oval duct
specified above.
12. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 355 mm and Pressures through 2490 Pa (10-Inch
wg): 0.55 mm.

D. Double-Wall (Insulated) Fittings: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) fittings with an outer

shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside
dimensions.

1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean

temperature.
2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell dimensions.
Fabricate outer-shell lengths 50 mm longer than inner shell and insulation. Use the
same metal thicknesses for outer duct as for uninsulated fittings.
3. Insulation: 25-mm thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or
uninsulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to
nominal single-wall size.
4. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with solid sheet metal of
thickness listed below:
5. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with sheet metal
having 2.4-mm diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use
the following sheet metal thicknesses:

a. Ducts 75 to 865 mm in Diameter: 0.7 mm.

b. Ducts 890 to 1475 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm.
c. Ducts 1525 to 2235 mm in Diameter: 1.0 mm.

6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation

from dislocation by mechanical means.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.

B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.

C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 3.7 m, unless interrupted by fittings.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and
connections.

F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.

G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - Page 9 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

I. Install ducts with a clearance of 25 mm, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions, unless specifically indicated.

K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting
layouts, and similar finished work.

L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults
and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and
duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap
opening on four sides by at least 38 mm.

N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant, unless these
are fire rated ducts such as for smoke exhaust application. Fire and smoke dampers are
specified in Section "Air Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation
methods are specified in Section "Penetration Fire-stopping."

3.2 UNDERSLAB DUCT INSTALLATIONS

A. Verify undamaged conditions of duct before enclosure with fill or encasement.

B. Install underslab ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--

Metal and Flexible" and as indicated.

C. Protect ducts from damage by equipment used in placing concrete on or around ducts.

D. Protect duct openings.

3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as
described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.

3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Support horizontal ducts within 600 mm of each elbow and within 1200 mm of each branch
intersection.

C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 5 m and at each floor by traditional rods,
otherwise, steel channels shall be used.

D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - Page 10 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

failure (proof-test) load.

E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 100 mm thick.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Section "Air Duct Accessories."

B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate leakage

testing and as required for compliance with test requirements.

B. Conduct tests, in presence of Engineer, at static pressures equal to maximum design

pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test
entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above
maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface
area of test section.

D. Allowable Duct Leakage: As described in ASHRAE 1989 Handbook, "Fundamentals"

Volume, Chapter 32, Table 6 and Figure 10, or in Table 4-1 on page 4-3 in the 1985
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, or in Table 1-1 on page 1.11 in the 2005
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction standards.

E. Maximum Allowable Duct Leakage: 5%

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.

B. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for detailed procedures.

3.8 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the
system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris as per Section
233130.

END OF SECTION 233113

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - Page 11 of 11

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 31 30

AIR DUCT CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cleaning HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and system
components.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ASCS: Air system cleaning specialist.

B. NADCA: National Air Duct Cleaners Association.

C. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For ASCS.

B. Strategies and procedures plan.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. ASCS Qualifications: A member of a nationally recognized nonprofit industry organization

dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems.

1. Certification: Employ a staff of ASCSs certified by a nationally recognized

certification program.
2. Supervisor Qualifications: Certified by a nationally recognized program and
organization.
3. Experience: Submit records of experience in the field of HVAC systems cleaning.
4. Equipment, Materials, and Labor: Have equipment, materials, and labor required to
perform specified services.

B. Comply with current published standards of NADCA.

AIR DUCT CLEANING 23 31 30 - Page 1 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine systems to determine appropriate methods, tools, and equipment required for
performance of work.

B. Perform "Project Evaluation and Recommendation" according to NADCA ACR.

C. Prepare written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

D. Proceed with work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a written plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. At a minimum,
include the following:

1. Supervisor contact information.

2. Work schedule including location, times, and impact on occupied areas.
3. Methods and materials planned for each HVAC component type.
4. Required support from other trades.
5. Equipment and material storage requirements.
6. Exhaust equipment setup locations.

B. Use the existing service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various points of the
HVAC system for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.

C. Comply with NADCA ACR, "Guidelines for Constructing Service Openings in HVAC
Systems" Section.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Remove visible surface contaminants and deposits from within the HVAC system.

B. Engage a qualified ASCS to clean the following systems:

1. Air devices for supply and return air.

2. Air-terminal units.
3. Ductwork:

a. Supply-air ducts, including turning vanes and reheat coils, to the air-handling
unit.
b. Return-air ducts to the air-handling unit.
c. Exhaust-air ducts.

4. Air-Handling Units:

a. Interior surfaces of the unit casing.

AIR DUCT CLEANING 23 31 30 - Page 2 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

b. Coil surfaces compartment.

c. Condensate drain pans.
d. Fans, fan blades, and fan housings.

5. Filters and filter housings.

C. Perform cleaning before air balancing or mark position of dampers and air-directional
mechanical devices before cleaning.

D. Use duct-mounted access doors, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for
inspection.

1. Install additional duct-mounting access doors to comply with duct cleaning

standards. Comply with requirements in Section "Air Duct Accessories" for
additional duct-mounting access doors.
2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
Replace damaged and deteriorated flexible ducts. Comply with requirements in
Section "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible ducts.
3. Disconnect and reconnect flexible connectors as needed for cleaning and inspection.
Replace damaged and deteriorated flexible connectors. Comply with requirements in
Section "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible connectors.
4. Reseal rigid-fiberglass-duct systems according to NAIMA recommended practices.
5. Replace damaged fusible links on fire and smoke dampers. Replacement fusible links
shall be same rating as those being replaced. Comply with requirements in Section
"Air Duct Accessories" for fusible links.
6. Remove and reinstall ceiling components to gain access for duct cleaning. Clean
ceiling components after they have been removed and replaced.

E. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and
restore to their marked position on completion.

F. Collect debris removed during cleaning. Ensure that debris is not dispersed outside the
HVAC system during the cleaning process.

G. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. Where venting vacuuming system inside building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97
percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron (0.0076-mm) size (or greater) particles.
2. When venting vacuuming system outside building, use filtration to contain debris
removed from the HVAC system and locate exhaust down wind and away from air
intakes and other points of entry into building.

H. Clean the following metal-duct system components by removing visible surface

contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling
supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and
drive assemblies.
3. Air-handling-unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil
section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and
dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.

AIR DUCT CLEANING 23 31 30 - Page 3 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators, except in ceiling plenums and mechanical
room.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components.

I. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal-duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract

contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.
Connect vacuum device to downstream end of ducts so areas being cleaned are under
negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without
damaging integrity of metal ducts or duct liner.
4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA ACR. Keep drain pan
operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning
materials; comb and straighten fins.
5. Provide operative drainage system for washdown procedures.
6. Biocidal Agents and Coatings: Apply biocidal agents if fungus is present; use
according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and
debris.

J. Cleanliness Verification:

1. Verify cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before application of treatment,

including biocidal agents and protective coatings.
2. Visually inspect metal-duct systems for contaminants.
3. Where contaminants are discovered, reclean and reinspect duct systems.

3.4 RESTORATION

A. Restore and repair HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and components
according to NADCA ACR, "Restoration and Repair of Mechanical Systems" Section.

B. Restore service openings capable of future reopening. Comply with requirements in

Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." Include location of service openings in Project closeout
report.

C. Replace fibrous-glass materials that cannot be restored by cleaning or resurfacing. Comply

with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts".

D. Replace damaged insulation according to Section 230713 "Thermal Insulation."

E. Ensure that closures do not hinder or alter airflow.

F. New closure materials, including insulation, shall match opened materials and shall have
removable closure panels fitted with gaskets and fasteners.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Gravimetric Analysis: Sections of metal-duct system, chosen randomly by Engineer, may

be tested for cleanliness according to NADCA ACR vacuum test gravimetric analysis.

AIR DUCT CLEANING 23 31 30 - Page 4 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. If analysis determines that levels of debris are equal to or lower than suitable levels,
system shall have passed cleanliness verification.
2. If analysis determines that levels of debris exceed suitable levels, system cleanliness
verification will have failed and metal-duct system shall be recleaned and reverified.

B. Verification of Coil Cleaning: Cleaning shall restore coil pressure drop to within 10 percent
of pressure drop measured when coil was first installed. If original pressure drop is not
known, coil will be considered clean only if it is free of foreign matter and chemical residue,
based on thorough visual inspection.

C. Report results of tests in writing.

END OF SECTION 233130

AIR DUCT CLEANING 23 31 30 - Page 5 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 33 00

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.

2. Barometric relief dampers.
3. Manual-volume dampers.
4. Motorized volume dampers.
5. Fire dampers.
6. Smoke dampers.
7. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
8. Duct silencers.
9. Turning vanes.
10. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
11. Flexible connectors.
12. Flexible ducts.
13. Duct accessory hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data For each type of product.

1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include
breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.

B. Sustainability Submittals:

1. Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -

"Systems and Equipment."
2. Documentation indicating that duct insulation R-values comply with tables in
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning."

C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field
connection. Detail the following:

1. Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations.

2. Fire- and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted access
doors and panels.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - Page 1 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Duct security bars.

4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise power
levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and weights.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.

C. Comply with AMCA 500-D "Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating" for
dampers rating.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

1.6 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS

A. As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality,

with oiled, exposed matte finish.

C. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form;
with standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for concealed
ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221M (ASTM B 221), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - Page 2 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less; 10-mm
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.

2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Description: Gravity balanced, suitable for horizontal or vertical installations. Dampers

shall not produce noise while in operation.

B. Frame: 1.6-mm thick extruded aluminum, with mounting flange.

C. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, 1.2-mm thick aluminum sheet, maximum 150-mm
width, with sealed edges.

D. Blade Action: Parallel.

E. Blade Seals: Neoprene.

F. Blade Axles: Nonferrous.

G. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

H. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

I. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

J. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

K. Bearings: Galvanized steel ball.

L. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3. Electric actuators.
4. Chain pulls.
5. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.
6. Screen Material: [Aluminum].
7. Screen Type: Bird.
8. 90-degree stops.

2.3 BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.

B. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.063-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners
or mechanically attached and mounting flange.

C. Blades:

1. Multiple, [0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick aluminum sheet].

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - Page 3 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Maximum Width: 6 inches (150 mm).

3. Action: Parallel.
4. Balance: Gravity.
5. Off-center pivoted

D. Blade Seals: Neoprene.

E. Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.

F. Tie Bars and Brackets:

1. Material: Aluminum
2. Rattle free with 90-degree stop.

G. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

H. Bearings: Bronze.

I. Accessories:

1. Flange on intake.
2. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressures.

2.4 MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS

A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades
for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position
without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent
with pressure class.

1. Pressure Classifications of 500 Pa (2-Inch wg) or Higher: End bearings or other seals
for ducts with axle’s full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of
operating shaft.

B. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade

design as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for
horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 1.6-mm thick, extruded-aluminum channels; frames

with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where
indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 2.5-mm thick aluminum sheet.
3. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 1.2-mm thick extruded aluminum.
4. Blade Axles: Nonferrous.
5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

C. Jackshaft: 25-mm diameter galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe-bearing assembly
mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper of

a multiple-damper assembly.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - Page 4 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 2.4-mm thick
zinc-plated steel, and a 19-mm hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper
operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.5 MOTORIZED VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design; 2.8 -mm minimum, galvanized-

steel frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 1.6 -mm
galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 200 mm, and with edge seals.

1. Blades shall be secured to 13 -mm diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated

hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and
brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at
each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 93 deg. C (minus 40 to plus
200 deg F).
3. For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging.
4. For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable
seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 51 L/s per
sq. m (10 cfm per sq. ft.) of damper area, at differential pressure of 995 Pa (4 inches
wg) when damper is being held by torque of 5.6 N x m; when tested according to
AMCA 500D
5. Frame: Curtain type with blades in air stream only for non-ducted fire dampers.
6. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside air stream for all ducted fire dampers.
7. Mounting Sleeves: Factory installed sleeves shall only be allowed. Field installed
sleeves shall not be permitted.

2.6 FIRE DAMPERS

A. General: Labeled to UL 555.

B. Fire Rating: One and one-half hours.

C. Select one of two paragraphs below.Frame: SMACNA Type A with blades in airstream;
fabricated with roll-formed, 0.85-mm thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking
corners.

D. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.85-
mm thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 1.3 mm or 1.6 mm thick as indicated, and length to suit

application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper
frame complies with sleeve requirements.

F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.85-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In place of

interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.85-mm thick, galvanized steel blade connectors.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - Page 5 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

H. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.

I. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 74 or 100 deg C (165 or 212 deg F) rated.

2.7 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. General: Labeled to UL 555S. Smoke dampers shall be labeled for one-and-one-half-hour

or three hours rating to UL 555S as per design requirements. Exception for UL certified is
accepted as long as that third party test is provided for zero leakage.

B. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.

C. Frame and Blades: 1.6-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel.

D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 1.3-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel; length to suit
wall or floor application.

E. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.

F. Damper Motors: Provide for modulating or two-position action.

1. Motor Sizes: large enough so driven loads will not require motor to operate in
service factor range above 1.0.
2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed
gear trains.
3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where
indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for
service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 17 N x m and breakaway
torque rating of 17 N x m.
4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets
designed to make motors weatherproof. [Equip motors with internal heaters to permit
normal operation at minus 40 deg C (minus 40 deg F)].
5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 2.3 sq. m, size motor for running
torque rating of 17 N x m and breakaway torque rating of 34 N x m.
6. Two-Position Motor: 230 V, 3 phase, [50 Hz]
7. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 230 V, 3 phase, [50 Hz]

G. Accessories:

1. Auxiliary switches for signaling or position indication.

2. Test and reset switches, damper or remote mounted as practical.

2.8 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S.

B. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours as per fire strategy layouts.

C. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded
corners and mounting flange.

D. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated, fusible links.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - Page 6 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.

F. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking 1.6-mm-thick, galvanized sheet steel.

G. Leakage: Class I.

H. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.

I. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 1.3-mm- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit
wall or floor application.

J. Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.

K. Damper Motors: Modulating or two-position action.

L. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service
factor range above 1.0.
2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed
gear trains.
3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where
indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for
service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and
breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).
4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets
designed to make motors weatherproof. [Equip motors with internal heaters to permit
normal operation at minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C).]
5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size motor
for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of
300 in. x lbf (34 N x m).
6. Electrical Connection: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz.

M. Accessories:

1. Auxiliary switches for signaling or position indication.

2. Test and reset switches, damper or remote mounted as practicle.

2.9 DUCT SILENCERS

A. General: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencer with performance

characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.

B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealers, packing materials, and accessory materials shall have
fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed when tested
according to ASTM E 84.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements
in ASHRAE 62.1

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - Page 7 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.85-mm thick, solid galvanized
sheet steel for outer casing and 0.55-mm thick, and perforated galvanized sheet steel for
inner casing.

E. Round Units: Casings with galvanized sheet steel thicknesses for diameters listed below:

1. Up to 600 mm: 0.85 mm.

2. 650 through 1000 mm: 1.0 mm.
3. 1050 through 1300 mm: 1.3 mm.
4. 1350 through 1500 mm: 1.6 mm.
5. Casings fabricated of spiral lock-seam duct may be one size thinner than that
indicated.
6. Interior Partitions and Baffles: At least 0.85 mm and designed for minimum
aerodynamic losses.

F. Sheet Metal Perforations: 3-mm diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet metal.

G. Fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not
less than 5 percent compression.

H. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react
to system pressure variations.

1. Do not use nuts, bolts, and sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints.
3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in
quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.

I. Source Quality Control: Perform the following factory tests:

1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477, with airflow in both

directions through silencer.
2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power levels,
for both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and reverse flow (air and noise
in opposite directions) with an airflow of at least 10-m/s (2000-fpm) face velocity.
3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure
or 1500-Pa (6-inch wg) static pressure, whichever is greater.

2.10 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and

Flexible."

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 38-mm wide, curved blades set 19 mm o.c.;
support with bars perpendicular to blades set 50 mm o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for
mounting in ducts.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.

2.11 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - Page 8 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Door shall be rigid and airtight with neoprene gaskets and two or more chrome-plated
enamel painted steel hinges and quick fastening locking devices. Provide doors as large as
practical. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 25-by-25 mm butt or piano hinge
and cam latches. Access doors up to 300 X 300 mm shall have two cam locks; larger sizes
shall have four cam locks.

B. Mount doors, if possible, so that air pressure holds them closed. As an alternative,
removable access doors may be used.

C. Accesses doors shall be constructed from stamped sheet metal and consist of an inner and
outer door panel. Where insulated doors are needed, the inner door shall consist of two
panels spot-welded together which totally encapsulate insulation identical to corresponded
ductwork insulation. The inner and outer doors shall be joined by bolts and threaded
handles in such a configuration that the panels can be drawn together to secure the door to
the duct in a sandwich fashion.

D. The handles shall be high impact plastic with threaded metal inserts. Conical springs shall
be used between the door panels to facilitate installation and removal of the door. Fireproof
neoprene gasket shall be used around the outside edge of the inner or outer panel, but not
both, to seal the door.

E. This type of door is approved for use on rectangular, round and flat-oval ductwork.

F. Insulation: 25-mm thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying

with UL 181, Class 1.

B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89 mm wide

attached to two strips of 70-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8-mm
aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.

C. Transverse Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89 mm wide

attached to two strips of 111-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8-mm
aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.

D. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
polychloroprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 880 g/sq. m.

2. Tensile Strength: 84 N/mm in the warp, and 63 N/mm in the filling.

E. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
a synthetic-rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and ozone
environment.

1. Minimum Weight: 880 g/sq. m.

2. Tensile Strength: 93 N/mm in the warp, and 77 N/mm in the filling.

F. High-Temperature System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber
and having a minimum weight of 542 g/sq. m and tensile strength of 50 N/mm in the warp,
and 32 N/mm in the filling.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - Page 9 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.13 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

B. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing.

C. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Corrugated aluminum.

D. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket
enclosing 38-mm thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.

1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.

2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral
fibrous-glass tape, and nylon hanging cord.
3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.

E. Pressure Rating: 1500 Pa (6-inch wg) positive, 125 Pa (1/2-inch wg) negative.

F. Maximum Air Velocity: 20 m/s (4000 fpm).

2.14 ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw
cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of Pitot tube and other testing instruments, and
length to suit duct insulation thickness.

B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 6-mm, zinc-plated

operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square-
head set screw.

C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band
with a worm-gear action, in sizes 75 to 450 mm to suit duct size.

D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass
Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel

accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in
stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - Page 10 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install
dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat
channel.

E. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.

F. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written

instructions.

1. Install fusible links in fire dampers.

H. Install duct silencers [independent of ducts with flexible duct connectors, lagged with
loaded vinyl sheet on inlets and outlets] [rigidly to ducts].

I. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels
downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.

1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting,
adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.
3. Install access panels adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset
or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having
fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for
access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors
installed downstream from dampers.

J. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

K. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm).

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm).
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm).
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm).
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm).
6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).

L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

M. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts [directly or] with maximum
1500-mm (60-inch) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws and tape all
over.

O. Label access doors according to Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

P. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - Page 11 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of
movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.
4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and
damper.

END OF SECTION 233300

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - Page 12 of 12

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 34 13

AXIAL HVAC FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Wall mounted fans.

2. Axial in-line fans.
3. Axial fans.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in equipment
schedule(s) on the Drawings.

D. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for continuous
operation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.

C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components

AXIAL HVAC FANS 23 34 13 - Page 1 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support,
and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.

D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.

F. Maintenance data for fan units to include in the operation and maintenance manual.

1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that
are listed and labeled by UL where available.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed
to use the AMCA Seal.

D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

E. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.

B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.

B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and
fans have been commissioned.

1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Civil works
specifications.

AXIAL HVAC FANS 23 34 13 - Page 2 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
Architectural and Structural requirements.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing
contents.

B. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender, itemized schedules of spare parts to be
provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the manufacturer's
unit price including packaging and delivery to site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2.2 WALL MOUNTED FANS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans, as indicated, consisting of fan blades,

hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories.

B. Housings: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-
enamel finish coat after assembly.

C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron
hub.

D. Cast-Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to cast-aluminum

hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.

E. Extruded-Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened

to cast-aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.

F. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, statically and dynamically
balanced and selected for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower (HP), with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.2.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball
bearings.

a. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 100,000 hours

4. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at factory.
5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of
the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
6. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.

AXIAL HVAC FANS 23 34 13 - Page 3 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

7. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.

AXIAL HVAC FANS 23 34 13 - Page 4 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

G. Motors shall be inverter duty to suit variable speed applications, when required.

H. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:

1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame, interlocked blades with

nylon bearings.
2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, conforming to OSHA specifications,
removable for maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
5. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen.
6. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to
less than 50 percent.
7. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted
inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2.3 AXIAL IN-LINE FANS

A. Description: Axial in-line fans consisting of fan wheel and housing, straightening vane
section, factory-mounted motor, an inlet cone section, and accessories, suitable for in-line
duct mounting. Variable features indicated in equipment schedule include belt driven or
direct drive as indicated, and variable or adjustable pitch.

1. Variable-Pitch Fans: Internally mounted pneumatic actuator, externally mounted

positive positioner, and mechanical-blade-pitch indicator for variable-volume
operation.

B. Housings: Galvanized steel with inlet bell and diffuser sections.

1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion flanges; inlet
cone shall be welded to the fan raceway.
2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from the fan wheel designed
to straighten the airflow.

C. Wheels: Cast-aluminum, axial-flow type, with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on cast-iron

wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid steel key.

D. Fan Hub and Blade-Bearing Assemblies: Cast aluminum, machined and fitted with
threaded bearing wells to receive blade-bearing assemblies.

1. Blades: Replaceable, cast aluminum; factory mounted and balanced to the hub
assembly.
2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70
percent of the first critical speed at the top of the fan's speed range.

E. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning ball or roller bearings.

1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 100,000 hours.

2. Roller-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 11, L-10 of 100,000 hours.
3. Extend lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with grease fittings.

F. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing, out of air stream, factory wired to
disconnect located on outside of fan housing.

AXIAL HVAC FANS 23 34 13 - Page 5 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

G. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.

1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.2.

2. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at factory.
3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle
of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
4. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
5. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.
6. Motor Mount: Adjustable base.

H. Motors shall be inverter duty to suit variable speed applications, when required.

I. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:

1. Companion Flanges: Rolled-steel flanges.

2. Stall Alarm Probe: Sensing probe capable of detecting fan operation in stall and
signaling control devices. Control devices and sequence of operation are specified in
other Sections.
3. Flow Measurement Port: Pressure measurement taps installed in the inlet of the fan
to detect and signal airflow readings to temperature-control systems. Control devices
and sequence of operation are specified in other Sections.
4. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; having peripheral control linkage operated from outside of
the air stream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and provision for
manual or automatic operation as indicated.

2.4 AXIAL FANS

A. Description: Fans shall be axial flow, jetfoil type, especially designed for high rates
ventilation, single direction, high thrust, and silent operation.

B. Housing: Consist of inner and outer tube, motor flange and guide blade assembly. Fan
housing is to be manufactured from mild steel to ISO 3574 , grade HR 14. The housing
assembly is to be hot dip galvanized in accordance with ISO 1461.

C. Impeller: Fan to be provided with asymmetrically profiled impeller and guide blades with
high thrust in major blowing direction. Impeller is to produce same thrust when running in
opposite direction of flow. Impeller is to be dynamically balanced on two planes.

D. Blades and Hub: Cast from aluminum-silicone alloy in accordance with ISO 3522 and
7720, grade LM6 and LM25. Hub is to have a core of cast steel machined for direct
mounting on the motor shaft.

E. Silencers: Tubular directly mounted on inlet and outlet of fan, of stainless steel inner casing
with galvanized steel outer casing welded to hot dip galvanized ends and bell mouths, fitted
with stainless steel perforated line and galvanized steel aerodynamic pod, and solid and
galvanized steel wire mesh at inlet/outlet.

F. Motor: Squirrel type reversible single speed, 50 Hz rating, pad mounted, with self-
lubricating ball bearings of L10 life, continuously air stream rated and complying fully with
IEC 60034-1, Class F insulation.

G. Suspension: Anti-vibration compression spring type fixed to slab by means of stainless

steel studding/nut system. Studding is to be screwed into stainless steel sockets and locked

AXIAL HVAC FANS 23 34 13 - Page 6 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

by means of heavy duty "LOCTITE" or approved equal. Bolts are to be painted after
installation with two coats epoxy anti-corrosion paint.

H. Finish: The complete fan is to be painted after degreasing, with one coat of mordant wash
followed by one coat of epoxy prime and one coat of epoxy finish to give a total mean dry
film thickness of 100 microns.

I. Motors shall be inverter duty to suit variable speed applications, when required.

J. Temperature rating: for fans utilized in smoke extract, specify temperature rating of 400
Deg. C for two hours.

2.5 MOTORS

A. Refer to Section "Common Motors Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for general
requirements for factory-installed motors.

B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.

C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:

1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during

operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building
occupants.

D. Motors shall be inverter duty to suit variable speed applications, when required.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA
Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance
Rating."

B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and shall be suitable for high temperature
application as per design requirements (300 Deg. C for 2 hours).

C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation. The
overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.

AXIAL HVAC FANS 23 34 13 - Page 7 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are
specified in Section "Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Suspend units from structure using threaded steel rods and vibration isolation springs.
Vibration-control devices are specified in Section "Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section "Identification for HVAC Piping
and Equipment."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections
with flexible connector.

B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.

C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including

grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A -
486B.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

supervise the field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct and
electrical connections, and to report results in writing.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Lubricate bearings.

AXIAL HVAC FANS 23 34 13 - Page 8 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction
debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan
wheel and cabinet.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup,
and report results in writing:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connection
for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper
thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive system,
align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for procedures for air-
handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in
final position after balancing is achieved.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain axial fan units.

END OF SECTION 233413

AXIAL HVAC FANS 23 34 13 - Page 9 of 9

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 34 16

CENTRIFUGAL FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes centrifugal fans for indoor or outdoor installations, either stand alone,
ducted in-line or fan section complete with filters as specified in schedules of equipment and
drawings,

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

C. Performance Criteria:

1. The fan schedule shows liter per second (l/s) and design static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at ll0
percent pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa additional pressures.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use
of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a
deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:

a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.

D. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge exposed
to operating and maintenance personnel.

E. Noise level shall not exceed level allowed for place of installation.

F. Overall efficiency shall be minimum 60 percent.

G. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for continuous
operation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 23 34 16 - Page 1 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.

C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support,
and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.

D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.

F. Maintenance data for fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual.

1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that
are listed and labeled by UL where available.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed
to use the AMCA Seal.

D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

E. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement to the final location following
manufacturer's written instructions.

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 23 34 16 - Page 2 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.

B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and
fans have been commissioned.

1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Civil works
specifications.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing
contents.

B. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender, itemized schedules of spare parts to be
provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the manufacturer's
unit price including packaging and delivery to site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2.2 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS

A. General

1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance with
the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and shall
be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and
shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300. Application of
sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit construction shall
conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99 and to requirements
specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and outlets
shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and shall be
constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ANSI B11.19. Installation
shall be such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 23 34 16 - Page 3 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated with
minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system
shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt
spray; ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and ASTM G 152 / ASTM G 153 weathermeter.

C. Air-Handling System Balancing Provisions: All necessary facilities shall be provided for
the adjustment of fan speed for each air-handling system during air-quantity balancing
operations. Facilities provided shall be one of the following:

1. A variable-pitch drive with variable range to produce the fan speed necessary for
proper air balance.
2. A continuously variable drive or power unit to produce the fan speed necessary for
proper air balance.
3. A series of fixed-pitch pulleys that can be interchanged until the proper fan speed has
been determined.

2.3 FAN UNITS

A. Factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated
capacities and characteristics.

B. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings,
motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure.

C. As per schedules of equipment and drawings, centrifugal fans shall be either stand alone,
ducted in-line or fan section complete with filters as specified.

D. Temperature rating: for fans utilized in smoke extract, specify temperature rating of 400
Deg. C for two hours.

2.4 HOUSINGS

A. Materials and Fabrication: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to make curved scroll
housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and doors or panels to allow access to
internal parts and components. Use galvanized steel to fabricate fans downstream from
humidifiers.

1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and
supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Fabrication Class: AMCA 99 Class I, Class II, or Class III.
3. Horizontal Flanged Split Housing: Bolted construction.
4. Plug Fans: Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing, with steel cabinet.
5. Tubular Centrifugal Fans: Fabricate tubular housing from formed- and reinforced-
steel panels with welded seams and the following:

a. Outlet guide vanes.

b. Motor disconnect switch.
c. Spun inlet cone with flange.
d. Outlet flange.
e. Brackets suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.

2.5 WHEELS

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 23 34 16 - Page 4 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with curved inlet flange, back plate,
backwardly inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast-iron or cast-steel
hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.

B. Forward Curved: Black-enameled or galvanized steel construction with inlet flange, back
plate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow, mechanically
secured to flange and back plate; cast-steel hub swaged to back plate and fastened to shaft
with set screws.

C. Airfoil Wheel: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange; heavy back plate; hollow
die-formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and back plate; cast-iron
or cast-steel hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.

2.6 SHAFTS

A. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at the maximum
rated fan speed and motor horsepower (HP), with final alignment and belt adjustment made
after installation.

B. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating
of lubricating oil.

C. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the
fan's speed range.

2.7 BEARINGS

A. Pre-lubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow- block-type ball bearings.

1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 120,000 hours.

B. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type; tapered roller bearings

with double-locking collars and 2-piece, cast-iron housing.

1. Roller-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 11, L-10 of 50,000 hours.

C. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type; ball or roller bearings

with adapter mount and 2-piece, cast-iron housing.

1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 120,000 hours.

2. Roller-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 11, L-10 of 120,000 hours.

2.8 BELT DRIVES

A. Description: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.

1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.2.

B. Drives:

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 23 34 16 - Page 5 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published
recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch diameter of
sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be standard
belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including 40
horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-sheave or
variable-sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-sheave,
high-capacity, and super-type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts shall be
aligned by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer.

C. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at
factory.

D. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of the
adjustment range at fan design conditions.

E. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.

1. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA requirements; 2.7-mm thick, 20-
mm diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime
coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation.
Include provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer
with guard in place.

F. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and gaskets.

B. Companion Flanges: Galvanized steel, for duct connections.

C. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel, with fixed cantilevered vanes welded to inlet bell.

D. Variable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades supported at both ends with 2 permanently
lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control
shaft for double-width fans.

E. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades cantilevered with 2 permanently lubricated
bearings. Variable mechanism out of air stream terminating in single control lever with
control shaft for double-width fans.

1. Double-Width Fan Inlet Vanes: Connected for single operator.

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 23 34 16 - Page 6 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

F. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with blades constructed of 2 plates formed
around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings, with blades linked out of
air stream to single control lever.

1. Configuration: Parallel blade.

2. Configuration: Opposed blade.

G. Inlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid screen, mounted inside shaft bearings.

H. Scroll Drain Connection: DN25 (1-inch) steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan
scroll.

I. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat from
shaft.

J. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.

K. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.

L. Weather Cover: Heavy-gage steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.

2.10 MOTORS

A. Refer to Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.

B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.

C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:

1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during

operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building
occupants.
3. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).

D. Motor Bases: Motor shall be provided with adjustable motor bases, except as otherwise
specified. Motors over 7-1/2 horsepower (5600 watt of power) with fixed-sheave standard
belt section drives shall be provided with adjustable pivoted motor bases wherever
equipment configuration permits proper installation.

E. Motors shall be inverter duty to suit variable speed applications, when required.

2.11 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Sheet Metal Parts: Enamel or prime coat before assembly. Do not prime coat aluminum
parts.

B. Factory Finish for Fans Downstream from Humidifiers: Enamel or prime coat before
assembly with 2 coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not required.

2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 23 34 16 - Page 7 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA
Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance
Rating".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are
specified in Section "Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete housekeeping bases using neoprene pads or

housed spring isolators as indicated. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete
housekeeping base.

C. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods and vibration
isolation springs. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section "Vibration Controls for
HVAC Piping and Equipment."

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section "Identification for HVAC Piping
and Equipment."

3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES

A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:

1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct
base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of the supported
unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, size and
location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or
key to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 23 34 16 - Page 8 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

4. Place concrete and allow curing before installing units. Use portland cement
conforming to ASTM C 150/C 150M, 27 MPa compressive strength, and normal-
weight aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2
or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections
with flexible connectors.

B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.

C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including

grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A -
486B.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

supervise the field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct and
electrical connections, alignment of fan shaft and motor shaft, alignment of pulleys, belt
adjustments, and lubrication, and to report results in writing.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Lubricate bearings.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction
debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan
wheel and cabinet.

3.8 COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup,
and report results in writing:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 23 34 16 - Page 9 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connection
for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper
thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive system,
align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Refer to "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" Section for procedures for air-
handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in
final position after balancing is achieved.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fan
units.

END OF SECTION 233416

CENTRIFUGAL FANS 23 34 16 - Page 10 of 10

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 34 20

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS

CPVCS Car Park Ventilation Control System

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Car Park vane axial fans.

2. Car Park smoke exhaust fans
3. Car Park Ventilation Control System.
4. Car Park CO sensors

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC

EQUIPMENT
2. SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
3. SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
4. SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
5. SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
6. SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
7. SECTION 233413 - AXIAL HVAC FANS
8. SECTION 230900- BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
(BMS)

C. Related Sections include the following (for electrical equipment):

1. Section - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for fire rated power,
control and signal cables, cables termination, glands, etc.
2. Section - Motor Control Centers" for Car Park Ventilation System's Control Panels
(VSCPs) description including circuit breakers, contactors, relays, pushbuttons,
switch disconnectors, control switches, etc.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 1 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Section "- Motor Control Centers" for variable speed drives supplying life safety and
firefighting loads.
4. Section - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for disconnect switches supplying
the car parking ventilation fans.
5. Section - Surge Protective Devices" for SPDs requirements within Car Park
6. Ventilation System's Control Panels (VSCPs).
7. Section - Panelboards" for Car Park Ventilation System's essential power supply
distribution boards' (EDPs) description and circuit breakers specifications.
8. Section - Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System".

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Normal ventilation:

The ventilation system including main supply and exhaust fans s hall provide a
maximum extract rate required by NFPA & Egyptian Code on each floor of the car
park.

Accordingly, the system shall be capable of providing up to 6 air changes per hour or 7.5
l/s/m2 of car park area whichever is greater, and assisted by relevant axial fans to ensure
carbon monoxide levels do not exceed:
- 30 ppm over an 8 hour period
- 90 ppm over a 15 minute period

In case CO level increases in a certain floor, exhaust and makeup fresh air axial fans at
this specific floor will operate at the higher speed increase the air change flow rate in that
floor. Then all fans will go back to their initial speeds when CO level decreases to the
normal level.

The ventilation system shall be controlled by a dedicated Car Park Ventilation

Control System, (CPVCS).

The Car Park Control Panel shall be connected to the following:

1. Supply makeup fresh air fans

2. Exhaust fans
3. Motorized dampers/Automatic shutters dampers
4. CO sensors
5. Maintained power supply
6. BMS system
7. Fire alarm system.

The Car Park ventilation is covering four basements levels, where each basement level is
divided into three zones. Each zone is served by a battery group for exhaust axial fan
including a stand-by, and another battery group of axial makeup fresh air fans. Except for
Basement 1 where only exhaust fans are considered, while fresh air is introduced through
open ramps to outside.

Each battery group of fans shall be included in an enclosed fire rated room, and shall be
provided with its dedicated control panel.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 2 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A two control panels (as specified in Part 3.1) shall act as a master control panel one for
each floor while other panels provided for the fans stations serving shall act as a slave
control panels.

Master Control Panels shall be connected to BMS and Fire Alarm Systems.

Master control panels shall communicate with all other slave panels through a ring
network.

Control Panels serving supply fan room (for each zone) will be connected to the
following:

1. Supply fans VFDs.

2. Supply air motorized dampers/Automatic shutters dampers.
3. One third the number of CO sensors, distributed in between supply fan room and
exhaust fan room.

Control Panel serving exhaust fan room will be connected to the following:

1. Exhaust fans VFDs.

2. Exhaust motorized dampers/Automatic shutters dampers.
3. One third the number of CO sensors, distributed in between supply fan room and
exhaust fan room.

The Car Park Control Panel shall operate the motorized fire dampers, and shall vary the
ventilation rate by varying the speed of supply fans and exhaust fans, according to the
level of CO measured within the car park.

Contractor shall refer to Car Park Ventilation Control System design drawings for the
different CO detection levels and the corresponding supply fans and exhaust fans
operation modes.

B. Emergency ventilation case (fire case):

The ventilation system including main supply and exhaust fans, shall provide a
minimum extract rate required by NFPA & Egyptian Code on the fire floor of the car
park (minimum 8 air change per hour).

In case fire occurs in a certain floor, Axial Fans in this specific floor shall operate at high
speed, while other axial exhaust fans in other floors will close in conjunction with fully
closure to motorized dampers to fully isolate the floor on fire and keep it on positive
pressure.

The system should be initiated by Sprinkler flow switch connected to Fire Alarm
system.

The Fire Alarm System shall provide the CPVCS with a fire alarm voltage free (Dry
contact) signal for each fire zone based on zone flow switch. The CPVCS shall
automatically initiate the fire operation mode of the affected fire zone.

Master control panel shall communicate with slave panels within the same fire zone, in
addition communicating with other master control panels of other fire zones.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 3 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.4 FANS PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in equipment
schedule(s) on the Drawings.

D. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for continuous
operation.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.

C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support,
and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.

D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating
clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.

F. Maintenance data for fan units to include in the operation and maintenance manual and lists
of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that
are listed and labeled by UL where available.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 4 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Electrical Component Standard: Refer to Division 26 Specification Sections cited in

paragraph 1.2.B above.

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this

D. Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

E. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are
licensed to use the AMCA Seal.

F. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA
standards.

G. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.

B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.

B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and
fans have been commissioned.

1.9 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor- bolt inserts
into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish one set of belts for each c-driven fan that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 5 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender, itemized schedules of spare parts to be
provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the manufacturer's unit
price including packaging and delivery to site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of

the As per approved vendor list or approved equal:

2.2 CAR PARK EXHAUST FAN

A. Refer to fan sections for axial fans.

B. Fans should be capable of handling 400oC smoke extract.

2.3 CAR PARK SUPPLY FANS

A. Refer to fans section for axial Fans.

2.4 MOTORS

A. Refer to Section "Common Motors Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for

general requirements for factory-installed motors.

B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B. C.

Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during
operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or
building occupants.

2.5 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according
to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label
fans with the AMCA Seal.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 6 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density,
speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings
according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified
Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and shall be suitable for high
temperature application as per design requirements.

C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of
installation. The overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.

PART 3 - CAR PARK VENTILATION CONTROL SYSTEM

3.1 GENERAL REQURIEMENTS

A. The Car Park Ventilation Control System (CPVCS) shall utilize a PLC based
control system, which shall be responsible for operating the supply fans, exhaust
fans, and the motorized fire dampers in both normal and fire modes.

B. The contractor may utilize a DDC based control system at a reduced cost as an
alternative, subject to the engineer’s approval. In case a DDC based control system shall
be provided all DDCs must be UL listed according to UL 864 UUKL category

C. The contractor shall make sure that the control system adopted is adequate for smoke
management applications. The system shall be built in accordance with, the latest
versions/ amendments of parts 9 & 10 of EN 12101 or ISO 21927.

D. The contractor shall be obligated to provide a turnkey installation that is in compliance

with the above standards. Any equipment or devices or requirements required
by these standards and not specifically mentioned within the design document/ drawings
shall be part of the contractor’s scope.

E. The Car Park shall be divided into several fire zones where each zone is served by
several fans stations. Each fan station (either supply or exhaust) shall be provided with
its dedicated control panel.

F. Master Control Panels shall be provided as follows:

1. Two Master Control Panels serving:

a) Two fire zones at Level B01
b) Two fire zones at Level B02
Each master control panel will serve one floor.

G. The Master PLC and the Slave PLC shall be provided from the same
manufacturer.

H. Generally the PLC shall be housed within the MCC serving the fans that are
controlled by the PLC, however for DDC based control systems, the DDC shall be
installed in a separate cabinet.

I. Each Master Control Panel shall be connected to the BMS and the Fire Alarm
System.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 7 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

J. Each Master control panel shall communicate with all other associated slave panels
through a backbone network.

K. The backbone communication protocol shall support ring topology and multiple
master’s configuration. For Modbus TCP/IP based communication networks, a
redundant Managed Ethernet Switch shall be provided for each Control Panel to enable
ring topology.

L. The contractor shall provide a bandwidth calculations for the CPVCS main
network, at the early stages of the project, and shall ensure that the system is designed to
achieve the maximum bandwidth available for the network components.

M. Beside the life safety capabilities the CPVCS shall also have energy management
functions designed to reduce the energy consumption of the Car Park Ventilation System.

N. Control inputs and outputs used for controlling and monitoring the smoke
management system shall be designed to be fail-safe; inputs and outputs shall be
energized when process conditions are normal. Inputs shall be de-energized to signal fire
mode commands. The contractor shall ensure to design and configure all system
components including contactors, motorized dampers, variable speed drives, etc... In a
manner that in case of a signal loss, the system shall automatically initiate fire
operation modes.

O. The ventilation supplier/contractor shall provide the following for the engineer’s
approval:

1. Full cause and effect matrix.

2. Block diagram of the ventilation system.
3. Communication network bandwidth calculation
4. Battery calculations
5. Control Panel heat dissipation calculations
6. Shop drawings indicating cables routing, and locations of the control panels
and field devices
7. Wiring diagrams.
8. Installation details
9. Full materials submittals
10. Detailed system sequence of operation
11. Materials list and bill of quantities

P. All systems provided shall allow for future expansion.

Q. Despite of the descriptions and quantities given in this specification, Contractor shall
provide components and equipment up to completion of the Site Acceptance Tests.
These include processors, power supplies, Input/output (I/O) modules, module, racks,
cabinets, network devices and software licenses.

R. A back-up battery module with an automatic charger, or alternatively an industrial

DIN rail mounted UPS, shall be provided for each control panel, and shall be capable of
providing 4 hours of back-up power, and shall be monitored by the CPVCS control
panel in accordance with the requirements of EN 12101-
10 or ISO 21927-10.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 8 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

S. It is preferably that the battery back-up module and the automatic charger is supplied
from the same manufacturer of the PLCs, other manufacturers shall be subject to the
Engineer’s approval.

T. PLC units shall be mounted inside the Car Park Ventilation System's Control Panels
specified under electrical specification Section "262419 – Motor Control Centers"

U. The PLC System shall be supplied, installed, and tested in accordance with this
specification, and all related codes, standards, and regulations (latest revision) referred
to therein.

V. Compliance with this specification does not relieve Contractor from providing a safe,
reliable and integrated system that shall achieve the performance requirements contained
in this specification.

W. The Contractor shall comply with all the technical requirements of this
specification unless the same affects the system’s functionality, performance and
reliability; the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing and propose the
manufacturer’s recommended design or standard with price impact if any. The
Contractor may use their alternate design or specification only after receiving written
approval from Engineer.

X. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged

in the manufacturing of similar products, which are of a similar material, design
and workmanship.

3.2 ELECTRICAL WORKS

A. The electrical works pertaining to the Car Park Ventilation System shall mainly
include, but not necessarily limited to the following, in accordance to the
Electrical Drawings and Contract Documents:

1. Car Park Ventilation System Control Panels,

2. Variable Speed Drives (VFDs) for car park ventilation system,
3. Fire rated power and control / signal cables,

B. All electrical equipment, devices, components, their installation and

specifications shall comply with the requirements of Electrical Specification
Division.
C. For Transient / Surge Protection Devices refer to Electrical Specification Division. D.
For electrical specification of the Car Park Ventilation System Control Panels,
refer to “Motor Control Centers" Specification within Electrical Division.

E. For electrical specification of the Variable Speed Drives, refer to Specification

Section - Motor Control Centers".

F. For electrical specification of the fire rated power and control / signal cables, refer to
Specification Section - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ".

3.3 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 9 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. The CPVCS shall be a PLC based control system, where a PLC control panel shall be
provided for each fan station

B. System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.

C. Approved Manufacturers

1. Rockwell Automation
2. Siemens
3. Schneider Electric
4. GE Intelligent Platforms
5. ABB
6. Or approved equal

D. Assign a project team with a wide experience in PLC systems implementation and
identify the key personnel proposed to perform the work on the project. Operational
Organization Chart and CV of key persons.

E. Provide a reference list of executed similar PLC Systems. A brief presentation of the
projects must be enclosed with the expression of interest.

F. Provide local reliable technical support. All engineers assigned within the project shall be
certified by the PLC system manufacturer.

G. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide, at a minimum, a complete and

fully functional system to meet the application requirements. All systems provided shall
allow for future expansion.

H. Despite of the descriptions and quantities given in this specification, Contractor shall
provide components and equipment up to completion of the Site Acceptance Tests.
These include processors, power supplies, Input/output (I/O) modules, module, racks,
cabinets, network devices and software licenses.

I. General Requirements:

1. The PLC system shall be a fault-tolerant, processor-based design that protects

the controlled process from intermittent, transient, and permanent system
faults. A single PLC system fault shall not degrade overall system safety or
impact operation of the controlled process. If a major fault should occur, the
system shall shut down the process in a predictable and safe manner.
2. The PLC system shall include power supplies, processors, rack power
supplies, input/output cards, I/O terminations, communication cards and cables,
cabinet and human-machine interface (HMI) hardware necessary
for a complete operational system as required.
3. The proposed equipment shall be the latest “state-of-the-art-design” based on
the proven designs used for similar applications. Materials - including third party
Contractor supplied products- shall be new, of first
quality, and as per the manufacturer standard products and recommended design.
4. The Contractor shall demonstrate at least two years of successful,
continuous design, fabrication, testing and commercial operation of PLC
cabinets and provide at least three references to be contacted.
5. The equipment shall be designed to operate for 24 hours per day, 365 days
per year. Contractor shall provide “mean time between failures”

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 10 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

details for each component of the system, for example but not limited to:
processors, power supplies, I/O modules and network devices…
6. The PLC system Contractor shall provide a full operating guarantee for the
performance of the hardware, software and components and to detail all
the warranties.
7. The PLC system components shall be suitable for outdoor installation with site
conditions, and simultaneously suitable for installation in rooms
having a maximum ambient temperature of 50C, despite the provision of the air-
conditioning systems.
8. All equipment shall be of the manufacturer’s best quality and construction
to ensure a minimum equipment design life of 15 years.
9. Consideration shall be given in the engineering and component sizing to facilitate
ease of upgrade
10. The Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) shall be modular, field
expandable design allowing the system to be tailored to process control
application. The capability shall exist to allow for expansion of the system by the
addition of hardware and/or software.
11. The control system shall be real time application software incorporating a global
database with programmable functions, a user-friendly graphical interface and
incorporate open, and interoperable standards.
12. The PLC system shall have the hardware configured to prevent the loss of
functionality of the safety interlocks; the PLC system I/O card design should
assure that redundant or parallel service control loops are not terminated on the
same I/O card.
13. The PLC hardware shall operate at an ambient temperature of -10 ºC to 55
ºC with an ambient temperature rating for storage of -25 to +70 ºC.
14. The PLC hardware shall function continuously in the relative humidity range
of 5% to 95% with no condensation.
15. The PLC shall be of a modular-configuration type and potentially
expandable to multiple chassis and multiple rack applications for I/O
requirement predominantly using Profibus-DP Interfaces.
16. I/O cards shall initiate an alarm on an I/O card failure.
17. Each input and output module shall be self-contained and housed within a chassis
which shall contain multiple modules on multiple slots.
18. The PLC shall include the capability of addressing remote input and output modules.
19. The PLC shall have the ability to communicate with multiple remote I/O racks or
devices configured with multiple I/O modules. Networks that allow remote I/O
include Profibus-DP, Profinet, ControlNet, EtherNet/IP, and DeviceNet.
20. It shall be possible to communicate with other PLC’s via fiber optic cable by
inserting fiber optic converters into the links. The fiber link must support
distances up to 35 km.
21. The PLC shall have the ability to support multiple data communications networks
in the same chassis by using Profinet, Profibus-DP, HART, ControlNet,
DeviceNet, Ethernet/IP, Programmable Multi Specialist
Interface modules (to be used as a configuration port), as well as other commonly
used networks.
22. Disconnecting terminal blocks shall be used for status input and output command
signals.
23. The Contractor shall provide PLC system enclosures with internally mounted
air conditioning and/or heaters with filters, if required to meet the
environmental conditions. PLC systems supplied with air conditioning
and/or heaters shall be provided with alarm contacts to indicate air conditioning
and/or heater system failure.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 11 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

24. The PLC shall be capable of operating in a high electrical noise

environment.
25. PLC shall have the necessary facility to be remotely configured, to upgrade its
firmware and to be troubleshooted from a secure Virtual local area network
(VLAN).
26. Local maintenance port shall be independent of communication port.
27. The PLC shall accept time inputs from GPS clock over Network Time
Protocol
(NTP).
28. The PLC system shall be furnished with 20 percent spare hardwired I/O
and 20 percent spare card space. Spare hardwired I/O shall be based on an I/O
card type basis. Spare card slot capability shall be based on total I/O cards
furnished.
29. All indoor PLC cabinets shall be provided with panel mounted Human
Machine Interface (HMI) for local monitoring and diagnostics. For outdoor PLC
cabinets, Human Machine interface shall be located indoors and hooked to
the IP network.
30. All units of measurement shall be based on the SI (metric) system. When Imperial
units are used, the metric equivalent shall be shown in [brackets].
31. Wherever possible, the components shall be pre-assembled, pre-mounted and pre-
wired at the Contractor’s facilities. These pre-assembled components shall be
powered-up with a minimum 72-hours “burn-in”
period, completely calibrated, and tested prior to shipping unless otherwise
noted.
32. The Contractor shall provide the maximum rate of heat generated by each
component of the system during normal, fully loaded operation.
33. PLC’s shall have CSA and UL approval.

J. Central Processing Unit

1. The CPU shall be a self-contained unit, and will provide control program
execution and support remote or local programming. This device will also supply
I/O scanning and inter-controller and peripheral communication functions.
2. The user program and data shall be contained in battery backed memory.
The operating system firmware shall be contained in non-volatile memory. An
option shall be possible to store both the user program and system firmware in a
non-volatile memory for backup/restore purposes.
3. The CPU shall contain a minimum of 4 MB of user memory for PLC located in
Slave Control Panels and a minimum of 16 MB of user memory for PLC located
in Master Control Panels
4. The CPU within the system shall perform internal diagnostic checking and
give visual indication to the user.
5. The front panel of the CPU shall include a holder and a connector for a lithium
battery. The battery shall provide power backup for user programs and data when
the main power supply is not available.
6. All system modules, local and remote chassis shall be designed to provide for free
airflow convection cooling. No internal fans or other means of cooling, except
heat sinks, shall be permitted.
7. All system modules including the controller shall have the capability to be removed
from the chassis or inserted in to the chassis while power is being supplied to
the chassis without faulting the controller or damaging the modules. This is known
as Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP).

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 12 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

Alternately a software’s configurable option shall exist to fault the controller

if required.
8. The PLC shall boot from the non-volatile memory on a processor fault.
9. The PLC shall be furnished with a minimum of 40 percent spare control and
data base processor memory.
10. The CPU shall be UL Listed.

K. Program Storage

1. The program storage medium shall be a battery backed RAM type.

2. Memory shall contain a battery back-up capable of retaining all stored program
data through a power cycle. A low battery condition must be detectable and shall
automatically generate a minor fault.
3. The CPU shall have the ability to store the user program, controller
firmware and all the chassis modules’ firmware to the Compact Flash card.
4. The operator should be able to back up the volatile memory, including
data and program logic, onto a personal computer storage device.
5. All user memory which are not used for program storage shall be allocable for the
purpose of data storage.

L. I/O Modules

1. The field I/O interface shall be through real I/O individual addresses and not
through register manipulation or bit manipulation.
2. Inputs and outputs shall each be individually electrically isolated from other
I/O and from all cabinet wiring.
3. The PLC shall provide a blown fuse alarm for the contact wetting power for
each I/O card.
4. Frames or racks for mounting all types of input and output cards shall be
interchangeable, inputs and outputs shall be interchangeable within the same
frame.
5. I/O sections shall have provisions for both mounting in rack or on wall or remote
panels. Connections, card removals, and power supplies shall be front-accessible.
6. The acceptable I/O card types for the controller include but not limited to the
following:
7. Analog I/O:

a) Analogue input signals 4-20mA Analog and 0-10 Vdc, with minimum
12 bit resolution.
b) Analog outputs shall provide 4-20 mA dc, 12 bit resolution. c)
RTD’s shall be 100 ohm platinum unless otherwise noted.
d) The module shall have local LED indication for power and input
status.
e) Wiring to the modules from panel terminations shall be accomplished through
the use of removable terminal blocks with terminal screw
and pressure plate connections.
f) The analog input modules shall be capable of being wired as single ended or
differential.
g) The input analog-to-digital and the output digital-to-analog
converters shall have an absolute accuracy of 0.1 percent of full scale
of the signal or better.
h) All I/O shall be protected so that a fault in one channel will not affect
any other channel.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 13 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

8. Digital I/O:

a) Digital inputs shall be optically isolated between field contacts and internal
logic voltages.
b) The module shall have local I/O diagnostic LED’s.
c) All digital outputs must be via interposing relays. Switching voltage to
interposing relays may be either 24V DC sink or via relay output
card.
d) Wiring to the DI modules from panel terminations shall be
accomplished through the use of removable terminal blocks with terminal
screw and pressure plate connections.

9. All I/O cards shall have UL and CSA approval.

10. HMI

a) A panel mounted 17” touch panel HMI shall be provided for each
Master Control Panel.
b) The HMI shall be provided by the same manufacturer of the PLC.
c) The HMI equipment and software shall be provided by the PLC
manufacturer.
d) All development and configuration shall reside in one or more common
file or database repositories that provide single point of configuration. The
development environment shall provide the ability to host and manage the
visualization application in a common repository.
e) It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to create a detailed listing of
all required software using the latest versions available.
f) All set points and control parameters shall be accessible through the
HMI system. Set points shall be in Engineering Units. The parameter itself
coming from the I/O module is unit-less (i.e., Raw Counts from
AI module). The following is a list of some of the parameters that shall
be made available to the HMI:

1. Timers
2. Fan Control
3. Damper Control
4. Control Set points
5. Alarm Set points
6. PID Parameters

M. System’s Redundancy

1. Contractor shall provide a Hot Redundant System for all Master Control Panels.
Redundancy of the PLC referenced herein shall mean when the PLC fails for any
reason, a “hot” standby unit of identical functionality shall automatically take
over and an alarm will annunciate. “Hot Standby” is a method of redundancy in
which the primary and secondary (i.e., backup) systems run simultaneously. The
data is mirrored to the secondary system component in real time so that both
systems contain identical information. This does not include I/O modules or I/O
wiring. All devices shall be “hot swappable” unless approved otherwise.
2. The PLC’s processor, power supply and communication modules shall be dual
redundant.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 14 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. The Redundancy System shall provide an automatic program cross-load

and synchronization. The program shall be downloaded only to the primary CPU.
Using this design, it shall eliminate the need for maintaining separate programs for
the primary and the secondary controllers. A CPU, configured as a secondary
controller, shall automatically receive and buffer data changes from the primary
CPU.
4. The switch over between primary and secondary controller shall happen
transparently to the user and to the application:

a) The Redundant System shall automatically swap addresses between primary

and secondary chassis.
b) Any external devices shall continue to communicate with the new primary
CPU.
c) The Redundant System shall guarantee a bumpless switchover for any
outputs in the highest priority task. Outputs referenced by the logic in this
task shall never revert to a previous state because of a switchover event.

N. All electrical equipment, devices, components, their installation and specification shall
comply with the requirements of Division 26.

3.4 POWER SUPPLY

A. General
1. The PLC shall operate in compliance with an electrical service of 18-32
VDC (24VDC
nominal).
2. The 24 VDC power supplies shall be fed from the battery back-up module and
shall be sized at a minimum of 25% above the required capacity.
3. PLCs hosted in the Master Control Panels shall be provided with redundant power
supply modules.
4. The power supply shall automatically shut down the PLC system whenever its
output power is exceeding 125% of its rated power.
5. The power supply shall monitor the incoming line voltage for proper levels.
6. The PLC power supply shall include a diagnostic indicator mounted in a
position to be easily viewed by the user. This indicator shall provide the
operator with the status of the DC power applied to the backplane/ PLC. In
addition, a means of disabling power to the CPU shall be possible from a power
disconnect switch mounted in a position easily accessible by the operator.
7. At the time of power-up, the power supply shall inhibit operation of I/O
modules until the DC voltages of the backplane are within specifications.
8. In addition to the electronic protection, the power supply shall offer a
failsafe fuse that is not accessible by the user.
9. The power supply shall have internal auto-reset over-current, shutdown
overvoltage protection, and power factor correction and shall maintain 2%
load regulation on the output.
10. Power supplies shall have an operating temperature range of -10° to
+60°C and shall have DC on indicator and ±10 % output voltage
adjustment potentiometer.
11. The 24 VDC power supply units shall have the following minimum
requirements
:

a) Nominal Input Voltage: 24 VDC suitable for connection with the back-
up battery module.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 15 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

b) Switch-on Time after applying the mains voltage: < 1 s c)

Transient Surge Protection: Varsitor
d) Input Fuse: 20 AF
e) Back Up Fuse: 16A or 25A circuit breaker f)
Nominal Output Voltage: 24 VDC ± 1%
g) Nominal Output Current: to be sized by PLC specialist
h) Efficiency: > 90%
i) Redundancy for Master Control Panels: Can be connected in parallel with
another PSU through a redundancy module
j) Industrial Control Equipment: UL/C-UL Listed UL 508
k) Mounting Position: On Horizontal DIN Rail to IEC 60715 l)
Degree of Protection: IP20
m) Ambient Temperature: - 25ºC to +60ºC
n) Storage: - 40ºC to +70ºC
o) Humidity: Up to 95% at +25ºC (no condensation)

3.5 MAINTENANCE LAPTOP

A. Contractor shall provide one powerful laptop (Maintenance Laptop) for control system
logic upgrade and configuration:

1. Processor: Intel® Core™ i7

2. Operating System: Microsoft Windows® 8.1 Pro, 64-bit English
3. Chipset: Intel® Q57 Express Chipset
4. Memory: 4 DIMM slots, Dual-channel DDR 3 up to 16 GB
5. Memory Bandwidth: 1333MHz
6. Displays: 17” Outdoor-Readable Resistive Display with a resolution of
1920 x 1200.
7. Storage: Support of 2 Storage devices with RAID 1 configuration, 7200
RPM Free Fall Sensor Hard Drive up to 500GB.
8. Optical Drives: DVD+RW
9. Graphics Card: NVIDIA® Quadro FX 3800M with 1GB dedicated memory.
10. Connectivity: WLAN, Bluetooth®, 2.1 and UWB, Wireless 802.11g
11. Network Security: 802.11 Wi-Fi® Protected Access (WPA), 802.11i
(WPA2), VPN 802.1x
12. Multimedia: 2 speakers.
13. Expandability: Slots 8-in-1 card reader, Express Card 54, OC Card.
14. Docking: Advanced E-Port, Ergo Flat Panel Stand, E-View Notebook Stand
15. Three USB 3.0 ports
16. Power Supply: 210 Watt AC Adaptor, 9-cell extended life batteries

3.6 PLC RELAYS, TERMINAL BLOCKS, AND ACCESSORIES

A. Ethernet Switches:

1. Contractor shall provide managed Ethernet switches with the following minimum
requirements:
2. Port Type and Quantity: 8 ports of wire speed 10/100/1000 Mbit, 802.3af
(PoE), and 8 Gigabit SFP slots.
3. Power supply unit: Dual power supplies, a hot swappable fan tray with redundant
fans, and hot-swappable line cards.
4. Industry Standards:

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 16 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

a) Ethernet: IEEE 802.3, 10BASE-T

b) Fast Ethernet: IEEE 802.3u, 100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX
c) Gigabit Ethernet: IEEE 802.3z, 802.3ab d)
IEEE 802.3af PoE
e) IEEE 802.3 ad LACP
f) IEEE 802.1d CoS prioritization
g) IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
h) IEEE 802.1x user authentication
i) 1000BASE-SX
j) 1000BASE-LX/LH
k) 1000BASE-ZX
l) RMON I and II standards

5. Diagnostics: LED’s, log-file, syslog, signal contact, RMON, port mirroring,

topology discovery 802.1AB, disable learning
6. Security: Port security (IP and MAC), SNMP V3. (no encryption).
7. Redundancy functions for Master Control Panel: Ring structure, MRP (IEC- ring
functionality), RSTP 802.1D/w, redundant network/ring coupling, redundant 24 V
power supply
8. Services: QoS 8 classes, prioritization (IEEE 802.1D/p), VLAN (IEEE
802.1Q), multicast (IGMP snooping/querier), multicast detection unknown
multicast, broadcast limiter, fast aging
9. Operating temperature: -10º to +50ºC
10. Storage/transport temperature: -25º to +70ºC
11. Mounting: DIN rail mounting
12. Protection class: IP20
13. Inrush current: 2.2A maximum
14. Power dissipation: 2.6 W @ 60 °C (140 °F) max
15. Power requirements: 12 to 18 VDC Class 2/SELV 100mA @ 24 VDC
16. Approvals: c-UL-us, CE, C-Tick, Ex, c-ETL-us, EtherNet/IP.

B. Relays and Accessories:

1. General Purpose Relays – 24VDC Circuits

a) Relay shall be DIN rail mounted terminal block relay

b) Relay shall have screw terminal connections
c) Contacts shall be rated at 10 amps.
d) Quantity and type of contacts shall be DPDT relay contacts.
e) Relay shall have reverse polarity protection, surge protection and LED
indication.

2. Control Relays:

a) Control relays shall be four poles normally open relays with 120 VAC coils,
contacts rated at 600 VAC, and accept front and side-mounted auxiliary
contacts.
b) Control relays shall have finger-safe protection. c)
Operating temperature range: -25° to +60°C
d) Control relays shall be UL 508 listed.

C. Control Terminal Blocks and Accessories:

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 17 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Terminal blocks shall be DIN rail mounted modular blocks molded of high
dielectric material, with a minimum 25 amp current rating, 600 VAC
voltage rating.
2. Terminal blocks shall be capable of terminating from 12 AWG to 22AWG
wiring using ring tongue or compression terminals.
3. Terminal blocks shall accept pre-printed terminal markers. Each terminal shall be
identified.
4. All external connections to and from the control panels must be via terminal
blocks.
5. Terminal blocks for power and utility circuits shall be grouped in one
section of the cabinet.
6. Ground terminal blocks shall be electrically connected to the mounting rail by
means of a moveable foot and screw assembly tightened to provide a positive
connection.
7. Terminal blocks for I/O cabinets shall be compression clamp type, with knife
disconnect or approved equal.
8. Terminal blocks for power distribution, analog I/O, digital inputs externally
powered, and digital outputs powered by the PLC shall be compression clamp
type.
9. Terminal blocks shall be of a material that neither supports combustion nor
propagates flame.
10. Blade-Type disconnect terminal blocks shall be provided for all foreign input
voltages.
11. End plates, end stops, jumper bar and screw assemblies, and comb type jumper
bars shall be provided as required.
12. The control panel shop drawings shall group terminals by function (i.e. mains
power supply, neutral, ground, discrete input, discrete output, analog input,
etc.) mounted on DIN rail firmly affixed to the back panel.
13. The drawings shall include terminal blocks for all field connections in the panel;
there shall be no direct wiring from the field to panel components such as I/O
modules, relays, etc.
14. Terminals shall be identified to correspond with the markings on the wiring
diagrams.
15. Terminals shall be positioned so that the internal and external wiring does
not cross.

D. Control Circuit Breakers:

1. Control circuit breakers shall be provided and installed in accordance with

Division 26 Specification Section "26241 6– Panelboards". The following shall be
considered as a minimum guideline:

a) Control circuit breakers shall be DIN rail mounted.

b) Control circuit breakers shall have manual OPEN-CLOSE Switch.
c) Control circuit breakers shall be rated 250 VAC.
d) Control circuit breakers’ current ratings shall be as required.
e) Contractor shall provide a nameplate identifying each circuit breaker.

E. Thermal Management:

1. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide heat/cooling calculations in the

panel based on the minimum/maximum desired temperature allowed for the

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 18 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

equipment to be mounted in the control panel. The calculations shall include,

but are not limited to: highest/lowest ambient temperature, internal heat load,
dimensions of enclosure, direct exposure to sunlight, and humidity.

F. If the design determines that heating, cooling, or dehumidifying equipment is required to

maintain the control panel temperature and humidity within acceptable equipment
manufacturer’s tolerances, the Contractor shall include solid state air conditioning units
and/or thermostatically controlled strip heaters in the panel design. The inclusion of
these devices shall be such that installation shall not interfere with the integrity of the
panel’s rating.

G. Grounding System

1. All control panels, instruments, and equipment connected to the control panel shall
be grounded in accordance with Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems”.
2. The Contractor shall make provisions for terminating and grounding
individual shields and overall cable shields on terminal blocks. The PLC
system shall have an internal instrument ground system that is insulated from the
enclosure(s) structure.
3. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide appropriate
grounding methods both to and in the control panel, including but not limited to:
Equipment grounding conductors and terminals, enclosure and enclosure door
grounding terminals and methods, Signal 24VDC grounding terminals, Ground
bus with lugs for all equipment grounding wires. All ground wires and cables shall
be identified as such;
4. The grounding methods shall be sized and designed in accordance with
Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”.
5. Removing a device shall not interrupt the continuity of the equipment
grounding circuit.
6. Identify equipment grounding conductor terminals with the word
“GROUND,” or the letters “GND”, or the color green.
7. Connect the door stud on the enclosures to an equipment-grounding terminal
within the enclosure through an equipment-bonding jumper.
8. Signal 24 VDC Grounding:
9. Terminate each drain wire of a signal (shielded) cable to a unique grounding
terminal block, or common ground bus.
10. Bond multi-section panels together with equipment grounding conductor
or an equivalent grounding bus sized in accordance with Division 26
Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”.

3.7 PLC SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS

A. PLC Programming:

1. This section is not a design in itself; however it does contain valuable insight
as to the requirements and parameters. Therefore, it shall be incumbent upon the
Contractor to use, to the fullest extent possible, all applicable industry standards,
and to meet all safety compliance issues, when programming.
2. The PLC programming software shall be furnished and installed on a laptop
PC approved by Engineer. The PLC programming software shall support the
features and functions of the PLC.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 19 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. The programming software shall be provided by the PLC manufacturer.

4. Programming shall provide on-line and off-line programming capabilities.
The programming format shall be IEC 61131-3 compliant Ladder Diagram (LD),
Function Block Diagram (FDB), Sequential Function Chart (SFC), and Structured
Text (ST) languages; Function Block Diagram shall be used as the primary
method of programming. Structured Text shall be used primarily where
calculations are involved, and/ or where iterations of code can benefit by the use of
“do while” type of statements.
5. Tag naming convention shall adhere to specifications in IEC 61131-2.
6. The software shall allow online modifications without the need to stop the
processor.
7. At the request of the programmer, tags contained in the PLC system
memory shall be displayed using the programming software. This monitoring
feature shall be supported for all tags regardless of format or
sco
pe.
8. It shall be possible to simulate and test the logic without affecting the field devices.
9. The capability shall exist for adding, removing, or modifying ladder logic rungs
during program execution. When changes to ladder logic are made or new logic
rungs are added, it shall be possible to test the edits of such
rungs before removal of the prior logic rung is executed.
10. It shall be possible to manually set (force) either on or off, all hardwired digital
input or output points using the programming software. It shall also be possible to
manually set an analog input or output to a user specified
value. Removal of these forced I/O points shall be achieved either individually or
totally through selected keystrokes.
11. The system shall have the capability to enter rung comments above ladder diagram
rungs. These comments may be entered at the same time the
ladder logic is entered.
12. Any logic required for initializing the system, and or handling major faults within
the PLC system shall be placed within a dedicated initialization, and
fault routine, respectively. In the case of fault management, systems shall be
designed to fail in the best possible way. Outputs shall be set and reset
accordingly.
13. The program shall be designed and programmed in such a way as to avoid scan
dependent code structures. Also, jumping functions which are used to jump over
portions of logic within a program file (e.g. Jump to Label) shall not be used.
14. Transmitters shall be programmed to fail in a safe direction (high or low)
to generate process alarm and/or equipment shutdown.
15. Contractor shall develop in written a “finalized” Control Strategy, which shall
detail how the equipment shall be controlled. The control strategy document shall
be used as the primary impetus from which the PLC program design will be
developed.
16. All of the “real world” inputs and outputs, which originate from I/O
modules, require some general Handling. This comes primarily in two forms: I/O
Mapping, and I/O Scaling:

a) I/O Mapping: All of the analog inputs and outputs shall be linked to the real
world (where applicable) through mapping.
b) I/O Scaling: All of the real world analog inputs and outputs originate to or
from the I/O module in the form of unit-less counts. Whether it
is a read I/O point (analog input), or a write I/O point (analog
output), scaling is required.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 20 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.8 SIZING AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Contractor shall provide the number of individual controllers necessary within each
control location as per the software and hardware functionality specified in this
document; the number of controllers supplied shall comply with the spare capacity and
performance requirements.

B. Contractor shall provide all system components to allow for any future additions up to
the spare IO capacity.

C. The Contractor furnished control system shall be furnished with 20 percent spare
pre-wired hardwired I/O at FAT completion in each cabinet and for each I/O type. In
addition to hardware spare I/O, the Control supplied control system shall be furnished
with 20% spare I/O card slot capability; expansion card slots in the racks (or chassis)
installed in each cabinet. Spare card slot capability should be calculated after
partitioning, not on the global I/O count and at the completion of the Factory
Acceptance Tests.

D. Contractor shall provide at least 20% future hardware expansion space in the
panel/cabinet for future addition of equipment, without modifying the communications
cables or system operating software.

E. Contractor shall provide at least 40% spare processor memory and database capacity
and at least 30% spare power supply capacity. The loading shall include all
control functions, idle time, links between control units, serial data interfaces and any
other parameter that limits the configuration and/ or system performance. Loading shall
be calculated after partitioning and after completion of the Factory Acceptance Tests.

F. The above times include all I/O card-processing times and network transmission delays.

G. The maximum allowable rate shall be measurable from the change of state at the input
field marshaling terminals to the output field marshaling terminals. The maximum
response time shall be 2 seconds during normal operational circumstances and 10
seconds during a 10 minute re-synchronization period after a communication failure or
power failure.

H. Maximum action time - between an Operator input at the HMI and the
associated resulting action at the field device: 1 second.

3.9 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION (CO)

A. CO detection within the car park shall be accomplished by several CO sensors that are
connected through software communication interface with a CO Control Panel located at
each fan station.

B. The CO Control Panel shall provide the CPVCS with a feedback, for each group of CO
detectors, whenever the CO level reaches Low, Medium and High levels, with an
adjustable CO PPM threshold for each level.

C. The CO Control Panel shall be monitored by the CPVCS for alarms/ faults. D.
D . Carbon Monoxide Control Panel

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 21 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. The integrated timer may be used for periodic switching of relays, e.g., to activate
local fans in the monitoring zones at set times in the day
2. Different groups / zones may be programmed to specific relays
3. Relay functions are fully programmable (e.g., reset manual or automatic,
Energised, De-energised, NO/NC, max. ON time, etc.)
4. DIN-Rail mounted.
5. Metal enclosures with NEMA 4X protection rating for panels mounted
outside the MCCs
6. Integrated 24 VDC power supply (230 VAC as option)
7. History (visible on display); the integrated alarm events and error messages
are recorded
8. CE and EMC compliance after EN: 50270 (or equivalent standard)
9. The control unit shall display the detector gas concentration with name and
location
10. Optional expansion I/O modules.
11. 4-20mA detector inputs provided
12. User-Friendly programming mode by Configuration-Software.
13. Integrated MODBUS RTU interface.

E. Carbon Monoxide Detectors

1. Provide CO monitoring systems for the enclosed levels of the parking garage.
Provide complete coverage of the enclosed levels of the parking garage and
provide systems for each level. A CO monitoring system shall not cover an area
on more than one level and the failure of any component shall not affect
more than one level.
2. Sensors shall be of the electrochemical type.
3. Locate sensing points on walls and columns at 1.2 to 1.5m AFFL. Locate one
sensing point per 400 m2. Do not locate sensing points closer than 2m to traffic
lanes.
4. Sensor range shall be of 0 to 300 ppm for 7% accuracy cell or 500 ppm
for 3% accurate cell.
5. The sensors shall be provided with an RS-485 based communication
interface that is compatible with the car park BMS.
6. Unit shall be complete with 85 db audible alarm and have visual output
reading via an LCD of the gas sensed.
7. The proposed sensor locations shall be submitted at the shop drawing stage
and shall be amended as directed by the Employer and/or Engineer.
8. Sensor shall be factory calibrated and will only require calibration after a
minimum one (1) year service.

PART 4 - EXECUTION

4.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

4.2 INSTALLATION

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 22 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices

are specified in Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."

C. Suspend units from structure using threaded steel rods, vibration isolation springs
and seismic restraints. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."

4.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Sections.

Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final
duct connections with flexible connector.

B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.

C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals,

including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A - 486B.

4.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of fans,
including duct and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.

4.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B.

Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.

4.6 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and
construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and
abrasions.

B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean
fan wheel and cabinet.

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 23 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

4.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before
startup, and report results in writing:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify
that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors,
starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and
verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation.
Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers
in connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for procedures for air-
handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
Fix in final position after balancing is achieved.

4.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain axial fan units.

END OF SECTION 233413

CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM 23 34 20- Page 24 of 24

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 37 13

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling-, floor- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles as
applicable to design requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the
ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions
and planes.

B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be
located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.

C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate
construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for
each type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room
location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and
methods of assembly of components.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to show
locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items installed in
ceilings and walls.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - Page 1 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard

sizes, show the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for
the Work.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - Page 2 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Source quality-control reports.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers,

registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems selected.
Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered.

B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A,
"Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTRUCTION

A. Air-diffusion device construction and mounting shall preclude flutter, rattle, or vibration.
Devices shall have the modifications and accessories necessary for mounting in indicated
surface construction.

B. Color selection shall be as directed by the Engineer.

C. Supply diffusers shall be provided with combination damper and equalizing grid. Dampers
shall be extracting-splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.

D. Supply diffusers shall be selected to give required throw to nearest wall. Terminal velocity
is not to exceed 0.5 m/s at the specified air quantity. Velometer velocities through diffuser
are not to exceed 3.0 m/s. Supply diffusers are to be able to deliver air for cooling at 15 deg.
C below room temperature without causing objectionable conditions.

E. Air-diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments shall be made from the face of the
device. Volume adjustments shall be made by removable key.

F. Gaskets shall be provided for supply-terminal air devices mounted in finished surfaces.

G. Exterior and exposed edges shall be rolled, or otherwise stiffened and rounded.

H. For ductwork of pressure classes 1000 to 2500 Pa (4 to 10 inch water gage), provide
sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling.

I. Size air outlets for minimum noise levels, not to exceed 30 db at specified air quantity, as
measured on the A-scale of a standard noise level meter, unless specified otherwise.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled at the end of this Section.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - Page 3 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing the Performance
of Air Outlets and Air Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,

fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling
panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items
conflict with installation, notify Engineer for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service
and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed
surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that
have damaged finishes.

3.5 CEILING DIFFUSERS SCHEDULE

A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers :

1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

2. Material: Aluminum.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - Page 4 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by ID Engineer.

4. Face Size: 600 by 600 mm, 400 by 400 mm or 300 by 300 mm as per drawings.
5. Face Style: four cones.
6. Mounting: Surface and Mounting panel.
7. Pattern: Adjustable.
8. Dampers: Combination damper and grid.
9. Accessories:

a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
e. Sectorizing baffles.
f. Operating rod extension.

B. Perforated Diffuser:

1. Material: Steel back-pan and pattern controllers, with aluminum face.

2. Finish: [Baked enamel, color selected by ID Engineer.
3. Face Size: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm) or 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm) as
per drawings.
4. Duct Inlet: Round
5. Face Style: Flush.
6. Mounting: Surface.
7. Pattern Controller: Adjustable with louvered pattern modules at inlet.
8. Dampers: Combination damper and grid
9. Accessories:

a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
e. Sectorizing baffles.
f. Operating rod extension.

3.6 REGISTERS AND GRILLES SCHEDULE

A. Adjustable Bar Register

1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by ID Engineer
3. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch (19 mm) apart as scheduled.
4. Core Construction: Removable.
5. Rear-Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 1/2 inch (12 mm) apart.
6. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.
7. Mounting: Concealed
8. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade

B. Adjustable Bar Grille :

1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Finish: [Baked enamel, color selected by ID Engineer.
3. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 12 mm apart as scheduled.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - Page 5 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

4. Core Construction: Removable.

5. Rear-Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 1/2 inch (12 mm) apart.
6. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.
7. Mounting: Concealed

C. Linear Bar Grille

1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by ID Engineer.
3. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core.
4. Distribution plenum.

a. Internal insulation.
b. Inlet damper.

5. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.

6. Mounting Frame:
7. Mounting: Concealed
8. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade

END OF SECTION 233713

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - Page 6 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 37 23

HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of roof-mounting intake and relief ventilators:

1. Goosenecks.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Intake and relief ventilators shall be capable of withstanding the ef-
fects of gravity loads, wind loads, and thermal movements without permanent deformation
of components, noise or metal fatigue, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.

B. Water Entrainment: Limit water penetration through unit to comply with ASHRAE 62.1.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. For louvers specified to bear AMCA
seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certi-
fied Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For intake and relief ventilators. Include plans, elevations, sections, de-
tails, and ventilator attachments to curbs and curb attachments to roof structure.

C. Coordination Drawings: Roof framing plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers
of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which roof curbs and ventilators will be attached.

2. Sizes and locations of roof openings.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required for intake and relief ven-
tilators.

E. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 23 37 23 - Page 1 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain ventilators through one source from a single manufacturer
where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of intake
and relief ventilators and are based on the specific equipment indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explana-
tory data to Architect for review.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."

2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs and roof penetrations as per Architectural specification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M (ASTM B 221), Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as re-
quired for forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90) zinc coating, mill phospha-
tized.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. [4] [6] finish.

E. Fasteners: Same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.

1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

2. Use hex-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Post-Installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors,

made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load
equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry,
as determined by testing per ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent
testing agency.

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D

1187M.

2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL

HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 23 37 23 - Page 2 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Factory fabricate intake and relief ventilators to minimize field splicing and assembly. Dis-
assemble units to the minimum extent as necessary for shipping and handling. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Fabricate frames, including integral bases, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allow-
ances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and pe-
rimeter sealant joints.

C. Fabricate units with closely fitted joints and exposed connections accurately located and se-
cured.

D. Fabricate supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

E. Perform shop welding by AWS-certified procedures and personnel.

2.3 GOOSENECKS

A. Factory or shop fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 5-5; with a minimum of 1.3-mm- (0.052-inch-) thick, galva-
nized-steel sheet.

B. Roof Curbs: Galvanized-steel sheet; with mitered and welded corners; 40-mm- (1-1/2-inch-
) thick, rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 40-mm- (1-1/2-inch-) wood
nailer. Size as required to fit roof opening and ventilator base.

1. Configuration: Self-flashing with a cant strip, mounting flange.

2. Overall Height: minimum 200 mm (8 inches as per engineer approval.

C. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 12.7-mm- (1/2-inch-) mesh.

D. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 1.4-by-1.6-mm (18-by-16) mesh.

E. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finish:

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other contaminants. Clean
welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to
ASTM A 780/A 780M. Apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to
be applied over it.
2. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is
indicated, apply an air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
3. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufac-
turer's standard finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a min-
imum dry film thickness of 0.025 mm (1 mil) for topcoat and an overall minimum dry
film thickness of 0.05 mm (2 mils).

a. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 23 37 23 - Page 3 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Install intake and relief ventilators level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent
work.

B. Install goosenecks on curb base where throat size exceeds 230 by 230 mm (9 by 9 inches).

C. Install intake and relief ventilators with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Install perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indi-
cated.

E. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as installation progresses.
Comply with Division 7, Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during installation.

F. Label intake and relief ventilators according to requirements specified in Section "Identifi-
cation for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

G. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by ap-
plying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete,
masonry, or dissimilar metals.

H. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so
no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field
to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings in-
dicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

END OF SECTION 233723

HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 23 37 23 - Page 4 of 4

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 05 13

HEAT EXCHANGERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for domestic water systems:

1. Plate heat exchanger

2. Accessories

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of heat exchanger. Include rated capacities; shipping,
installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations,

remedies, limitations, and exclusions.

B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Heat exchangers.
2. Valves.
3. Thermometers.
4. Gages.
5. Vacuum Breakers.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail heat-exchanger assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of heat exchangers certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements.

E. Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in maintenance manuals.

F. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

HEAT EXCHANGERS 23 57 00 - Page 1 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of heat exchangers through one source from a single
manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of heat
exchangers and are based on specific units selected. Other manufacturers' products
complying with requirements may be considered.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to Engineer.

D. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed in ASHRAE 90.1,

"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to

repair or replace components of heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, as per approved vendor

list.

2.2 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Description: Commercial gasketed plate to plate heat exchangers for instantaneous cooling
for chilled water in air conditioning system, compact design, with 20% additional plates for
future use during maintenance, and utilizing chilled water from chillers. Design of plates to
allow for removal and replacement of single plate without removal of the plate on either
side

B. Frame: manufactured from carbon steel construction coated with two layer painting. Frame
assembly should be bolted construction and not welded frame assembly. Bolts shall be
provided with rolled threads to reduce galling and minimum high width hexagonal nuts to
adequately distribute the load. Critical bolts to strictly have ball bearing boxes.

C. Plates: one piece pressed type Stainless steel 316 plates with 0.6 mm thickness, with one
piece EPDM gaskets, painted by primer with Zinc Phosphate and coated by suitable
protective resin. Total paint thickness shall not be less than 120 microns. h) The plates
shall only contact with stainless steel surfaces.

D. The moveable cover shall have only stainless steel material roller for ease of movement
without additional rigging or handling equipment.

E. Provide lifting lugs to allow lifting of entire unit’s flooded weight

HEAT EXCHANGERS 23 57 00 - Page 2 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

F. Provide plastic covers over threaded rod extension for protection of threads

G. Connections to be studded port design with connection lining to be of constructed of same

plate material and elastomeric liner.

H. Plates shall be reinforced at the upper and lower mounting slots to prevent bending hangers
on the plate.

I. Units shall be sized to meet design conditions as specified in the schedule with a maximum
allowable pressure drop of 60- 70 KPa in each circuit.

J. Working Pressure / Temperature for both hot and cold side : 10 bar (150 psi)/45 deg C (113
F) or as per schedule. Test Pressure : 1.5 times the design pressure.

K. The design shall prevent intermixing and leakage of fluid to outside of unit.

L. The plate heat exchangers shall be performance certified in accordance with the AHRI
Liquid to Liquid Heat Exchangers Certification Program and applies to all plate heat
exchangers within the scope of the certification program and data sheets as per the
certification shall be provided with the submittals for verification.

2.3 HEAT-EXCHANGER ACCESSORIES

A. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: stamped and complied with ASME or EN
standard. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and include pressure
setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing
element that extends into tank.

1. Option: Combination temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of
individual ones.
2. Exception: Omit temperature and pressure relief valve for tankless heat exchanger,
and furnish pressure relief valve for installation in piping.

B. Vacuum Relief Valves: Comply with ASME or EN standards. Furnish for installation in
piping.

1. Exception: Omit if heat exchanger has integral vacuum-relieving device.

C. Thermometers: Rigid stem or remote sensing, dial type; aluminum, black metal, stainless
steel case, back connected; bi-metal actuated, with circular dial 90 mm (3-1/2 inches) in
diameter graduated from 4 to 100 C (40 to 210 F), with two-degree graduations
guaranteed accurate within one scale division. Socket shall be separable, double-seat,
micrometer-fittings, with extension neck not less than 65 mm (2-1/2 inches) to clear tank or
pipe covering. Size for 20 mm (3/4-inch) pipe threads. Thermometers may be console
mounted with sensor installed in separate thermometer well.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONCRETE BASES

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for heat exchangers
with coordination with Structural engineer.

HEAT EXCHANGERS 23 57 00 - Page 3 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.2 HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION

A. Install heat exchangers on concrete bases, level and plumb, according to layout drawings,
original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended
clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

B. Anchor heat exchangers to substrate.

C. Install pressure relief valves in water piping for heat exchangers without storage. Extend
relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto
closest floor drain.

D. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.

E. Install heat-exchanger drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor
drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for heat exchangers that
do not have tank drains. Refer to Divsion 23 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain
valves.

F. Install thermometers on heat-exchanger inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Divsion 23 Section
"Meters and Gages" for thermometers.

G. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger piping. Refer to Divsion 23 Section "Meters and
Gages" for pressure gages.

H. Fill heat exchanger with water.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Divsion 23 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions.

D. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.

E. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16
Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit servicing.

F. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the following:

HEAT EXCHANGERS 23 57 00 - Page 4 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
2. Verify that piping system tests are complete.
3. Check for piping connection leaks.
4. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping.
5. Check operation of circulators.
6. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices.
7. Energize electric circuits.
8. Adjust operating controls.
9. unless piping system application requires higher temperature.

3.5 LEAKAGE TEST

A. Before connections are made, test heat exchangers with hydrostatic pressure of 1.5 times
maximum working pressure and prove tight.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat-exchangers.

1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.

END OF SECTION 235700

HEAT EXCHANGERS 23 57 00 - Page 5 of 5

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 73 13

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes central-station air-handling units with chilled water cooling coils,
heating coil, heat recovery section, heat-pipe (wrap around coil), filters and kitchen exhaust
ecology units.

B. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at design cubic
meters per minute (cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent pressure as stated above.

C. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use of a
smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a deviation, a
smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation. Such a deviation
shall not qualify for any value engineering incentive claim or reward.

D. Select fan operating point to right hand side of peak static pressure point and near the peak
of static efficiency.

E. Operating Limits: AMCA 99.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of withstanding

133 percent of internal static pressures indicated, without panel joints exceeding a deflection
of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within completed casings.

C. Comply with EHS regulation and specification of local authorities having jurisdiction

D. Seismic Performance: Air-handling units shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 Retain subparagraph below to define the term
"withstand" as it applies to this Project. Definition varies with type of building and
occupancy and is critical to valid certification. Option is used for essential facilities where
equipment must operate immediately after an earthquake.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 1 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each central-station air-handling unit specified, including the following:

1. Submittals for AHUs shall include fans, drives, motors, coils, sound attenuators
(when needed to reduce sound level), filter housings, and all other related accessories.
Mixing box with outside air dampers shall be provided for units with return air
connections,
2. The Contractor shall provide custom drawings showing total air-handling unit
assembly including dimensions, access sections, diffusion plates, flexible
connections, door swings, and control penetrations, electrical disconnect, lights,
duplex outlets, switches, wiring, utility connection points, unit support system,
vibration isolators, drain pan, and rigging points. Submittal drawings of section or
component only, will not be acceptable. The Contractor shall also submit
performance data including performance test results, charts, curves or certified
computer selection data; data sheets; fabrication and insulation details; and the
number of pieces that each unit will have to be broken into to meet shipping and job
site rigging requirements.
3. Submit certified fan-sound power ratings showing sound power levels in each octave
band for fan and at entrance and discharge of AHUs at both present and future
scheduled conditions. Include sound attenuator capacities and itemized internal
component attenuation.
4. Provide certified fan curves showing cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per minute),
static pressure, efficiency, and horsepower for both present and future design point of
operation and at maximum of present and future design cubic meters per minute
(cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent of design static pressure.
5. Submit total fan static pressure, external static pressure, for AHU including total, inlet
and discharge pressures, and itemized specified internal losses and unspecified
internal losses. Refer to air-handling unit schedule on drawings.
6. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
7. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories.
8. Material gages and finishes.
9. Filters with performance characteristics.
10. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic restraints indicated to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,
rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

C. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.

D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

E. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Submit with
Shop Drawings. Show mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 2 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and
weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.

F. Field Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this

Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

G. Operation and Maintenance data for central-station air-handling units to include in the
operation and maintenance manual.

1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NFPA Compliance: Central-station air-handling units and components shall be designed,

fabricated, and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems."

B. Performance Characteristics: AHRI Certification Central-station air-handling units and their

components shall be factory tested according to the applicable portions of ANSI/AHRI 430,
"Performance Rating of Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and bear
the label of the Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI). Equivalent
Eurovent certificate is accepted.

C. Mechanical Characteristics (as per EN1886), or equivalent:

1. Casing Strength: D1
2. Casing Air Leakage: L1
3. Thermal Bridging Factor: TB2
4. Thermal Transmittance: T3
5. Filter Bypass Leakage: F8

D. AHU Fans shall be accordance with AMCA standards, or equivalent certified as per BS
6583, and tested and rated in accordance with British Standard BS 848.

E. Provide motors required as part of air-handling units that are listed and labeled by UL and
comply with applicable NEMA standards or equivalent characteristics in accordance with
applicable parts of IEC 60034.

F. Condensation: During first year guarantee period, if condensation forms on any section of
air handler when unit is operating at design conditions, the Contractor shall replace or repair
unit to correct the situation. Repairs shall not impair unit or component accessibility and
future reparability and inherent access for maintenance. All repairs shall be subject to the
Engineer’s approval.

G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in latest
and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.

H. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.

1.6 COORDINATION

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 3 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of central-station air-handling units with

piping and ductwork and with other installations.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver air-handling unit as a factory-assembled module with protective crating and

covering.

B. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
base.

B. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

B. Filters: Furnish 1 set for each central-station air-handling unit.

C. Fan Belts: Furnish 1 set for each central-station air-handling unit fan.

D. Gaskets: Furnish 1 for each sectional joint of each central-station air-handling unit.

E. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender, itemized schedules of spare parts to be
provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the manufacturer's
unit price including packaging and delivery to site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturer: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

B. Manufacturer's Approved Equal Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of

air handling units with characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

2.2 GENERAL

A. AHUs shall be entirely of double wall galvanized steel construction. Galvanizing shall be
hot dipped conforming to A653/A653M and shall provide a minimum of 0.275 kg of zinc
per square meter (0.90 oz. of zinc per square foot) (G90). Aluminum constructed units may

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 4 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

be provided subject to the Engineer’s approval and documentation that structural rigidity is
equal or greater than the galvanized steel specified.

B. General Description: Factory assembled, consisting of fans, motor and drive assembly,
coils, damper, plenums, filters, drip pans, mixing dampers, and discharge collars with
flexible duct connectors.

C. The Contractor and the AHU manufacturer shall be responsible for insuring that the unit
will not exceed the allocated space shown on the drawings, including required clearances for
service and future overhaul or removal of unit components. All structural, piping, wiring,
and ductwork alterations of units, which are dimensionally different than those specified,
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer.

D. AHUs shall be fully assembled by the manufacturer in the factory in accordance with the
arrangement shown on the drawings. The unit shall be assembled into the largest sections
possible subject to shipping and rigging restrictions. The correct fit of all components and
casing sections shall be verified in the factory for all units prior to shipment. Factory tested
units shall be fully assembled, tested and then split to accommodate shipment and job site
rigging. On units not shipped fully assembled, the manufacturer shall tag each section and
include airflow direction to facilitate assembly at the job site. Lifting lugs or shipping skids
shall be provided for each section to allow for field rigging and final placement of unit.

E. The AHU manufacturer shall provide the necessary gasketing, caulking, and all screws,
nuts, and bolts required for assembly.

F. The manufacturer shall provide a local representative at the job site to supervise the
assembly and to assure the units are assembled to meet manufacturer's recommendations
and requirements noted on the drawings. Provide documentation that this representative has
provided this service on similar jobs to the Engineer. If a local representative cannot be
provided, the manufacturer shall provide a factory representative.

G. Gaskets: All door and panel gaskets shall be high quality which seal airtight and retain their
structural integrity and sealing capability after repeated assembly and disassembly of bolted
panels and opening and closing of hinged components. Bolted sections may use a more
permanent gasketing method provided they are not disassembled.

H. Air-handling units intended for outdoor installation shall be of the weather proof type. They
shall have protective pitched roof and corrosion resistant paint finish.

2.3 BASE

A. Provide a heavy-duty steel base for supporting all AHU major components. Bases shall be
constructed of wide-flange steel I-beams, channels, or minimum 152 mm (6 inch) high 3.5
mm (10 gauge) steel base rails. Welded or bolted cross members shall be provided as
required for lateral stability. The Contractor shall provide supplemental steel supports as
required to obtain proper operation heights for cooling coil condense drain trap as shown on
drawings.

B. AHUs shall be completely self-supporting for installation on concrete housekeeping pad,

steel support pedestals, or suspended as shown on drawings.

C. The AHU bases not constructed of galvanized material shall be cleaned, primed with a rust
inhibiting primer, and finished with rust inhibiting exterior enamel.

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 5 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.4 CABINET

A. General: AHU shall be designed and constructed such that removal of any panel shall not
affect the structural integrity of the unit. Plug panels may be used to enhance structural
stability provided access space is not reduced.

B. Materials: Formed and reinforced, double wall construction, galvanized steel panels,
fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between
sections sealed. The outer walls of the double skin panel shall be pre-coated with oven
backed polyester paint finish. Units for outdoor installation shall have protective pitched
roof and corrosion resistant paint finish. Units with 100% outdoor air shall have internal
sides protected with corrosion resistant paint finish.

1. Outside Casing: Galvanized steel, 1.0 mm.

2. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 0.7 mm.
3. Floor Plate: Galvanized steel, 3.5 mm.
4. The outside of the outer skin shall be plastic coated to a thickness of 0.2 MM for
additional protection.
5. Inside and outside of panel walls shall be completely smooth.

C. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing panels shall not
exceed 0.68 W/square meter. K (0.12 Btu/ (h. square feet. degree F)).

D. Condensation Requirements: AHUs shall be designed to ensure that there is no condensation

on the exterior of the unit based on outside design conditions. Through metal connections
between inner and outer panels shall be kept to an absolute minimum. If tubular structural
members are used inside of tube shall be insulated equal to casing.

E. The AHU manufacturer shall guarantee that no condensation shall take place on the exterior
of panels. In the event that any condensation problems appear after installation, the
Contractor shall undertake all remedial measures to rectify and to the satisfaction of the
Consultant.

F. Unit sections shall be tightly joined in the field through the use of all-thread rod or casing
brackets and shall be gasketed to make airtight.

G. Exterior and interior panels shall be secured to the support channels with stainless steel
screws and gaskets installed around the panel perimeter. Screw spacing shall not be greater
than 229 mm (nine inches). Panels shall be completely removable to allow removal of fan,
coils, and other internal components for future maintenance, repair, or modifications.
Welded exterior panels are not acceptable.

H. Provide sealed sleeves, metal or plastic escutcheons or grommets for penetrations through
casing for power and temperature control wiring and pneumatic tubing. Coordinate number
and location with electrical and temperature control subcontractors. Coordinate lights,
switches, and duplex outlets and disconnect switch location and mounting. All penetrations
and equipment mounting shall be provided in the factory. All field penetrations shall be
performed neatly by drilling or saw cutting. No cutting by torches will be allowed. Neatly
seal all openings airtight.

I. Insulation: CFC free polyurethane insulation or equivalent, complying with NFPA 90A
flame spread and smoke generation requirements, "Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems," for insulation.

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 6 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. The walls, roof and floor of the AHU shall be insulated. Insulation shall be held
securely in position between the inner and outer skin of casing.
2. Thickness: 50 mm.
3. Insulation shall have 44 kg/cubic meter minimum density. Insulation shall meet
ASTM C1071 requirements.
4. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to
the internal surface of section panels downstream from and including the cooling coil
section.

J. Access Panels and Doors: Same materials and finishes as cabinet and complete with hinges,
latches, handles, and gaskets. Provide in each access section. Doors shall be a minimum of
600 mm (24 inches) wide and shall be the full casing height up to a maximum of 1850 mm
(6 feet). Doors shall be gasketed, hinged, and latched to provide an airtight seal. Each door
shall include a minimum 150 mm x 150 mm (6 inch x 6 inch) double thickness reinforced
glass or Plexiglas window in a gasketed frame.

1. Hinges: Manufacturers standard, designed for door size, weight and pressure
classifications. Hinges shall hold door completely rigid with minimum 45 kg (100
pound) weight hung on latch side of door.
2. Latches: Non-corrosive alloy construction, with operating levers for positive cam
action, operable from either inside or outside. Doors that do not open against unit
operating pressure shall be provided with safety "Vent lock"-style latches which
allow the door to open approximately 75 mm (3 inches) and then require
approximately 0.785 radian (45 degrees) further movement of the handle for
complete opening. Latch shall be capable of restraining explosive opening of door
with a force equal to a minimum of 2986 Pa (12 inches water) of differential static
pressure or 1-1/2 times operating differential pressure whichever is greater.
3. Gaskets: Neoprene, continuous around door, positioned for direct compression with
no sliding action between the door and gasket. Secure with high quality mastic to
eliminate possibility of gasket slipping or coming loose.
4. Fan section shall have inspection and access panels and doors sized and located to
allow periodic maintenance and inspections.

K. Floor:

1. Unit floor shall be level without offset space or gap and designed to support a
minimum of 488 kg/square meter (100 pounds per square foot) distributed load
without permanent deformation or crushing of internal insulation.
2. Provide adequate structural base members beneath floor in service access sections to
support typical service foot traffic and to prevent damage to unit floor or internal
insulation.
3. Unit floors in casing sections, which may contain water or condensate, shall be
watertight with drain pan.
4. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing floors
shall not exceed 0.68 W/square meter. K (0.12 Btu/ (h. square feet. degree F)).

L. Drain Pans: Formed sections of insulated stainless steel (316), sheet based. Fabricate pans
in sizes and shapes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping
connections and return bends) when units are operating at maximum cataloged face velocity
across cooling coil. Depth of drain pan shall be at least 43 mm (1.7 inches) and shall handle
all condensate without overflowing. Drain pan shall be sloped to drain. Drain pan shall be
continuous metal or welded watertight. No mastic sealing of joints exposed to water will be
permitted. Drain pan shall be placed on top of casing floor or integrated into casing floor

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 7 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

assembly. Maximum overall thermal conductance of floor/drain pan assembly shall not
exceed 0.68 W/square meter K (0.12 Btu/ (h. sq. ft. degree F)).

1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal
moisture tight.
2. Drain Connections: Both ends of pan.
3. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Elastomeric compound.
4. Units with stacked coils or double height coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to
collect condensate from top coil, such pans will be piped to the main drain, not into
the lower pan.
5. Cooling coil ends shall be enclosed by cabinet and shall be factory insulated against
sweating or shall drain to a drain pan.
6. All pans shall have a double slope to the drain point.

M. Electrical and Lighting: Wiring and equipment specifications shall conform to Division 26
Sections.

1. Provide factory installed vapor-proof lights using cast aluminum base style with glass
globe and cast aluminum guard shall be installed in each access section, fan, coil,
filter and mixing box sections.
2. A switch shall control the lights in each compartment with pilot light mounted outside
the respective compartment access door. Wiring between switches and lights shall be
factory installed. All wiring shall run in neatly installed electrical conduits and
terminate in a junction box for field connection to the building system. Provide single
point 230 volt - one phase connection at junction box.
3. Install compatible 100 watt bulb in each light fixture.
4. Provide a convenience duplex outlet next to the light switch.
5. Disconnect switch and power wiring: Provide factory or field mounted disconnect
switch. Coordinate with Electrical Specifications.

N. Inspection Windows: Provide factory installed 150 mm glass inspection windows on fan
and filter plenum section access panels of air-handling units.

2.5 FAN SECTION

A. Fan-Section Construction (supply and return fans sections as applicable): Belt-driven

centrifugal fans, consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect
switch, drive assembly, and support structure, equipped with formed-steel channel base for
integral mounting of fan, motor, and casing panels. Mount fan scroll, wheel, shaft, bearings,
and motor on structural-steel frame, with frame mounted on base with vibration isolation.

B. Housings: Fabricate from formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll
housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and access doors or panels to allow entry
to internal parts and components.

C. Fan Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous
operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor power. Fan wheel shall be double-width,
double-inlet type with [backward-curved] [airfoil blades] as indicated.

1. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with curved inlet flange, back
plate, backward-curved blades, and cast-iron or cast-steel hub.
2. Shafts: Hot-rolled steel; turned, ground, and polished, and having keyway to secure
to fan wheel hub.

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 8 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Shaft Bearings: Pre-lubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball or

roller bearings with the following:

a. Rated Bearing Life: ANSI/ABMA STD 9 or ABMA STD 11, L-50 of 200,000
hours.

4. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.

a. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5.

5. Pulleys: Cast iron or steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at
factory.
6. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch, selected so pitch adjustment is at middle of
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
7. Belts: Oil resistant, non-sparking, and non-static; matched for multiple belt drives.
8. Belt Guards: Fabricate to OSHA/SMACNA requirements, 2.7 mm thick, 20-mm
diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated.
9. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
10. Vibration Control: Install fans on open-spring vibration isolators, PVC coated,
minimum 25 mm static deflection, with side snubbers. Allowable vibration
tolerances for fan shall not exceed a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of
0.005 m/s (0.20 inch per second) RMS when measured with a vibration meter on
bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at
equipment mounting feet if bearings are concealed.

D. Fan-Section Source Quality Control: The following factory tests are required.

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to ANSI/AMCA
300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear
AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.
2. Factory test fan performance for flow rate, pressure, power, temperature, rotation
speed, and efficiency. Establish ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

2.6 MOTORS

A. General: Refer to Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for
general requirements.

B. Provide internally vibration isolated fan, motor and drive, mounted on a common integral
bolted or welded structural steel base with adjustable motor slide rail with locking device.
Provide vibration isolators and flexible duct connections at fan discharge to completely
isolate fan assembly. Fan drive and belts shall be factory mounted with final alignment and
belt adjustment to be made by the Contractor after installation.

C. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate driven loads satisfactorily.

D. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will
not require motor to operate in service factor range.

E. Motors shall be totally encased, foot mounted, fan cooled, IP54 with Class F insulation.

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 9 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

F. Fan bearing shall be re-lubricated type with extended lube lines to terminate outside the fan
section. The bearing shall be selected for life of 200,000 Hours operation (fan manufacturer
shall certify that the bearing selected for the particular duty shall be theoretically suitable for
this duration of operation).

G. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.

H. Overload Protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection.

I. Noise Rating: Quiet.

J. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled

according to IEEE 112, Test Method B. If efficiency is not specified, motors shall have a
higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" according to IEEE 112, Test
Method B.

K. Motors shall be inverter duty to suit variable speed applications, when required.

L. Nameplate: Indicate full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics,

construction, and special features.

M. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 26 Sections.

2.7 COOLING COILS

A. Coil Sections: Common or individual, insulated, galvanized steel casings for cooling coils.
Design and construct to facilitate removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to
assure full airflow through coils.

B. Coil Construction: Rigidly supported across full face, pitched to allow drainage.

1. Fins: Pre-coated Aluminum mechanically bonded to tubes.

2. Tubes: Seamless copper, minimum thickness: 0.035 inches.
3. Coil Casing: Galvanized steel.
4. Headers Water Coils: Steel, or copper with connections for drain valve and air vent,
and threaded piping connections.

C. Water Coils: Drainable with threaded plugs, serpentine with return bends in smaller sizes
and with return headers in larger sizes.

D. Coil face area velocity is not to exceed 2.5 meters per second at specified air quantity. Coil
to have number of rows and fins per cm to satisfy required capacity at specified condition,
with not more than 5 fins per cm.

E. Number of circuits to be such that water velocity satisfies specified conditions without ex-
ceeding specified maximum water pressure drop through coil. Water velocity through tubes
is not to exceed 1.8 meters per second and not less than 0.76 meters per second.

F. Provide moisture eliminator after cooling coil, if necessary.

G. Coil-Performance Tests: Factory-test cooling and heating coils, except sprayed surface coils
for rating according to ANSI/AHRI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating
Coils."

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 10 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

H. For Pressure Independent Balancing and Control Valves, and its Modulating Actuator, refer
to BMS specification section no 230900.

I. Coil pressure rating: 1000 or 1600 kpa as per air handling units’ schedules of equipment.

2.8 ELECTRIC HEATING COIL

A. General: Slip-in type, open-coil design with integral control box factory wired and installed, shall be
heavy construction of 304L stainless steel with absolute safety finned tubes. Provide
manufacturer's standard cataloged heating coil where indicated on the drawings. Include the
following features:

1. Primary and secondary over-temperature protection.

2. Minimum airflow switch.
3. Pneumatic-electric switches and relays.
4. Magnetic contactor for each step of control.

2.9 FIXED-PLATE TO PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Casing: galvanized steel with duct collars.

1. Insulation: 25-mm thick, foil-faced glass fiber.

2. Drain Pan: Same material as casing, with drain connections on exhaust and supply
side.

B. Plates: Construct with plates evenly spaced and sealed and arranged for counter airflow.

1. Plate Material: Embossed aluminum, Stainless steel or Polypropylene copolymer.

2. Plate Coating: Air-dried phenolic.

C. Bypass: Construct bypass plenum within casing, with gasketed face-and-bypass dampers
having operating rods extended outside casing.

D. Water Wash: Automatic system, with spray manifold to individual spray tubes or traversing
type with stainless-steel-screw operating mechanism and electric motor drive; activated by
time clock.

E. Accessories:

1. Filter: Electrostatic.
2. Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1 insulated.

2.10 HEAT-PIPE

A. Construction: Copper tubes and aluminum fins, fabricated with capillary wick structure,
filled with refrigerant, and sealed; mounted in galvanized steel flanged casing, with airtight
partition between airstreams.

1. Refrigerant: ASHRAE 15, Group 1.

B. Control: Provide integral plenum containing heat-pipe coil and gasketed face-and-bypass
opposed-blade dampers, with rods extended outside casing for damper operator and linkage.

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 11 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Control: Pivot center of bottom of heat-pipe coil on shaft and bearings to tilt coil
approximately 3 degrees in either direction from horizontal. Include tilt controls with
electronic controller, electric actuator and linkage, thermostats, sensors, and polyester fabric
with PVC-coated flexible connector for automatic supply temperature regulation,
summer/winter changeover.

D. Accessories:

1. Plenums with access doors.

2. Drain pans for condensate removal.
3. Weatherproofing for tilt-control system.
4. Protective epoxy-phenolic coating for corrosion resistance.
5. Flexible connector assembly for tilt control.

2.11 DAMPERS

A. General: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500-D, "Laboratory Methods of Testing

Dampers for Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 10-m/s (2000-fpm) face
velocity through damper and 1000-Pa (4-inch wg) pressure differential.

1. Damper operators shall be electrically operated.

B. Mixing Boxes: Parallel-blade galvanized steel damper blades mechanically fastened to steel
operating rod in reinforced, galvanized steel cabinet. Connect operating rods with common
linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.

C. Combination Filter/Mixing Box: Parallel-blade galvanized steel damper blades

mechanically fastened to steel operating rod in reinforced, galvanized steel cabinet.
Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate
simultaneously. Cabinet support members shall hold 50-mm thick, pleated, flat permanent
or throwaway filters. Provide hinged access panels or doors to allow removal of filters from
both sides of unit.

2.12 KITCHEN EXHAUST ECOLOGY UNIT

A. General: each kitchen area shall be provided with a dedicated kitchen exhaust system by the
tenant. Ecology units shall be provided complete with centrifugal kitchen exhaust fans to
UL762 and installed in accordance with NFPA 96.

B. This paragraph describes the design, performance and installation of the kitchen ecology
unit air purification system intended for use as a stand-alone air filtration system
incorporating multiple stages of filtration as necessary for the application and as specified
hereunder:

1. Configuration: draw-through air handling equipment, including base, cabinet, floor,

drain pan, fan section and motor.
2. Inspection windows, lighting bulbs and electrical wiring.
3. Filters stages: The filtration process of the ecology units works in multiple stages.
The exhaust has to go through electrostatic precipitator followed by aluminum panel
filter, secondary fine filter then finally activated carbon filters for the removal of
odour.
4. Control panel: contains the power supply and controls for the electrostatic precipitator
and the fan.

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 12 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

2.13 FILTER SECTIONS

A. Filters: Comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency

reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2, or equivalent in European standards.

C. Filter Housing: Provide filter media holding frames arranged for flat, angular orientation, or
pockets, minimum thickness, 14 gage galvanized steel with baked finish inside and out.
Joints shall be continuously welded. Flange shall have a fixed air-sealing gasket with
hollow cross section, closed cell rubber or resilient neoprene, suitable for repetitive reuse.
Cabinets shall have flanged ends for connection to adjacent ducts. Hinged access doors on
both cabinet sides. Provide access doors with fixed air sealing gaskets to be airtight at the
static pressure expected in service. Weld test ports into each filter cabinet or plenum. Test
port shall not penetrate to filter frame or media.

D. Panel Filters (Pre-filters): Washable, cleanable, 50 mm thick, with aluminum- or stainless-

steel media and metal frames, maximum clean airflow resistance of 50 Pa (0.2 inch wg) at
face velocity of 2.54 m/s (500 fpm), and ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 filter-arrestance efficiency of
60 to 80 percent.

E. Disposable Filters: Bag type, viscous coated fiber, 450 mm long with holding meal frames
and fasteners, maximum clean airflow resistance of 150 Pa (0.6 inch wg) at face velocity of
2.54 m/s (500 fpm) and ASHRAE filter-arrestance efficiency of 85% percent.

F. Construction Filters for pre-commissioning (Option): 25 mm thick, viscous-coated fibers

encased in fiberboard cell with perforated-metal media support, clean airflow resistance of
37 Pa at face velocity of 1.52 m/s and ASHRAE 52.1 filter-arrestance efficiency of 70 to 82
percent.

G. Electrostatic Precipitator ESP: The air clean Electrostatic Precipitator is manufactured from
1.5mm Galvanised Steel (16 Gauge) and finished with an Epoxy Powder Coat. The two
metal washable filters within the ESP are manufactured with an aluminium frame and an
aluminium knitted mesh filter pad. The Ioniser and Collector in the unit are combined in a
single aluminium cell, which can be removed to be cleaned and replaced as required by the
operator. The collection plates are constructed from metal plates that are charged with a
high voltage of electricity. The ionization wires made of aluminum and tungsten. The
maximum face velocity is 500 fpm.

H. Activated Carbon Filters: Factory fabricated activated carbon filters for odor control with
multiple cells of porous activated carbon media. Media impregnated with a high density of
granular 60 percent minimum activity. Frame constructed of high strength, moisture
resistant and constructed to prevent air leakage and spilling of media. Initial resistance of
500 FPM air velocity not to exceed 0.76 inch wg with rated average arrestance of 80
percent. Filter performance data shall conform to ASHRAE Standard 52.1 and pads
classified as Class 2 as per testing performed according to UL Standard 900.

I. Sand Trap Louvers: Louvers shall be constructed of aluminum to ASTM B209 and ANSI.1.
Blades shall be 1.6 mm thick and casing 2.0 mm thick. Maximum louver face velocity shall
be 1.2 m/s and maximum pressure drop 50 Pa:

1. Louvers shall be vertical fixed blade type with blades arranged to provide tortuous air
flow path and thus trap sand.
2. Louver shall have self-emptying drain holes.

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 13 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Louvers shall be provided with washable filter and an insect screen of aluminum 2
mm x 2 mm wire mesh mounted on a standard U type frame with miter corners.
Screens shall be secured to the interior face of the louver with self-tapping stainless
steel screws.
4. Louver shall have additional central bracing support as recommended by the
manufacturer.
5. Louvers shall have efficiency of 80% with coarse test dust (20 to 200 microns) and
50% efficiency with fine test dust (1 to 70 microns).

J. Filter Gage: Provide diaphragm type filter gauge in metal case downstream and upstream
each filter bank in air handling equipment, with the following provisions:

1. Dial diameter: 100 mm.

2. Vent valves.
3. Black figures on white background.
4. Front recalibration adjustment.
5. 2 percent of full-scale accuracy.
6. Range: 0 to 500 Pa (0- to 2.0-inch wg), or as per Engineer approval.
7. Mount gauge on outside of filter housing in accessible position; install tubing and
gauge valves between gauge and sensor tips. Adjust and level each gauge.

2.14 TESTING

A. General:

1. ARI certified AHUs: AHUs selected by the Engineer for testing shall be factory
assembled and tested prior to shipment and shall be shipped prior to any untested
units.
2. Non-ARI certified AHUs: All units shall be factory assembled and tested.
3. Units specified to be tested shall be factory assembled and tested in accordance with
specified Test Procedure to demonstrate compliance with required unit capacities,
ensure correct fit of all components and minimize field assembly labor.

B. Factory Test:

1. The test procedure, instrumentation and calculation shall use those methods specified
in Section “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing”; however test methods including
instruments used must be submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to initiating
testing. The AHUs shall be tested for air volume, static pressure for AHU and each
component, fan RPM and power consumption for the maximum of present or future
design conditions. Submit fan curves showing test results.

C. Approval:

1. Factory tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer’s and Employer’s representative. The
team will comprise at least three persons from the Client’s side. All expenses to be
borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a minimum
two-week notice prior to proposed schedule test.
2. Failure of AHU to meet test requirements shall require correction of deficiency and
re-testing of unit.
3. Submit written results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 14 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions to receive equipment, for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of central-station air-handling units.

B. Examine roughing-in of hydronic, condensate drainage piping, and electrical to verify actual
locations of connections before installation.

C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install central-station air-handling units level and plumb, according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

1. Floor-Mounted Units: Support on concrete housekeeping bases using neoprene pads.

Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete housekeeping base.
2. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded
steel rods and vibration isolation.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service
and maintenance.

3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES

A. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 100
mm larger in both directions than overall dimensions of supported unit.

B. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.

C. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement conforming to
ASTM C150/C150M, 27-MPa compressive strength, and normal-weight aggregate.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. The Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific
connection requirements:

1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connection piping to suspended air-handling units with flexible connectors.
3. Connect condensate drain pans. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain.
Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in
direction.
4. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section
"Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff or
balancing valve and union or flange at each connection.

B. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Sections. The
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with factory-provided duct collars and flexible connections.

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 15 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 26 Sections.

1. Connect fan motors to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors
and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A -
486B.
2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring is specified in Section "Building
Management System."

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction
debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean
fan wheels, cabinets, and coils entering air face.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

perform the following:

1. Inspect field assembly of components and installation of central-station air-handling

units including piping, ductwork, and electrical connections.
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.

B. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following before startup:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections
for piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify that proper thermal
overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify
free fan wheel rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system,
align belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended
lubricants.
6. Set outside-air and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.
7. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
8. Install clean filters.
9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control, and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

C. Starting procedures for central-station air-handling units include the following:

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 16 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated rpm.

a. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design

conditions. Fix in final position after balancing is achieved.

2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.

D. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air-handling system
testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain central-station air-handling units.

END OF SECTION 237313

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13 - Page 17 of 17

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 81 23

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies & indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of assembly, components, location & size of each connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Manufacturer Qualification Certification: Include the followings:

1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For A/C units to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.

B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."

C. Energy-Efficiency Ratio & Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed

by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings."

1.4 COORDINATION

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 23 - Page 1 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Coordinate layout and installation of computer-room air-conditioning units and suspension

system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including
light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate installation of A/C units with computer-room access flooring Installer.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.

B. Warranty Period for Humidifiers & Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less
than three years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: Two sets of filters for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
manufacturers specified.

2.2 FLOOR-MOUNTING UNITS 6 TONS (21 kW) AND LARGER

A. Manufacturers: as per approved vendor list.

B. Description and Assembly: Packaged, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped;

consisting of cabinet, fans, filters, humidifier, chilled water cooling coil, emergency direct
expansion cooling coil and controls.
1. Assembly: Upward air delivery, in draw-through configuration.

C. Cabinet and Frame: Welded steel, suitably braced for rigidity, supporting other mechanical
equipment and fittings; with floor stand with adjustable legs and vibration isolation pads.
1. Doors and Access Panels: Galvanized steel with polyurethane gaskets, hinges, and
concealed fastening devices.
2. Insulation: Thermally, acoustically insulate cabinet interior with 25-mm thick duct
liner.

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 23 - Page 2 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

3. Finish of Exterior Surfaces: Baked-on, textured vinyl enamel, color to match

computer equipment.
4. Floor Stand: Welded tubular steel, high to mach with architect.

D. Evaporator Fan: Double inlet, forward curved, centrifugal, statically and dynamically
balanced.
1. Drive: Direct drive or belt drive.
2. Motor: Refer to Division 23 Section 230513 for general motors requirements.
a. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so
driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
b. Noise Rating: Quiet.
c. Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.

E. Chilled-Water Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with modulating
control valve. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan having a condensate pump
unit with integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and condensate reservoir.

F. Direct Expansion Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with control
valve. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan having a condensate pump unit
with integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and condensate reservoir. The coil is
connected to outdoor air cooled compressor and connected to emergency to work at either
power failure or building air conditioning failure as a stand by for the normal chilled water
cooling coil.

G. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Enclosed finned-tube electric elements arranged for

minimum of three stages, with primary and secondary thermal switches, manual-reset
overload protection, and branch-circuit over current protection.

H. Filter: Pleated, lofted, nonwoven, reinforced cotton fabric; supported and bonded to
welded-wire grid; enclosed in cardboard frame with 50-mm thick, disposable, glass-fiber
prefilter.
1. Nominal Thickness: 50 mm.
2. Dust-Spot Efficiency: 65 percent.
3. Weight Arrestance: 90 to 92 percent.
4. Initial Resistance at 2.54-m/s Face Velocity: 75 Pa.
5. Recommended Final Resistance: 250 Pa.

I. Electrode Steam Humidifier: Self-contained, microprocessor-controlled unit with

disposable, polypropylene-plastic cylinders and having field-adjustable steel electrodes and
stainless-steel steam dispersion tube.
1. Plumbing Components and Valve Bodies: Plastic, linked by flexible rubber hosing,
with water fill with air gap and solenoid valve incorporating built-in strainer,
pressure-reducing and flow-regulating orifice, and drain with integral air gap on
drain.
2. Control: Fully modulating to provide gradual 0 to 100 percent capacity with field-
adjustable maximum capacity; with high-water probe.
3. Drain Cycle: Field-adjustable drain duration and drain interval.

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 23 - Page 3 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

J. Integral Electrical Controls: Unit-mounted electrical enclosure with piano-hinged door,

grounding lug, combination magnetic starters with overload relays, circuit breakers and
cover interlock, and fusible control-circuit transformer.

K. Disconnect Switch: Non-automatic, molded-case circuit breaker with handle accessible

when panel is closed and capable of preventing access until switched to off position.

L. Microprocessor-Control System: Continuously monitors operation of process cooling

system; continuously displays room temperature and room relative humidity; sounds alarm
on system malfunction and simultaneously displays problem. If more than one malfunction
occurs, system displays fault in sequence with room temperature and continues to display
fault when malfunction is cleared until system is reset.
1. Malfunctions:
a. Power Loss.
b. Loss of Airflow.
c. Clogged Air Filter.
d. High Room Temperature.
e. Low Room Temperature.
f. High Humidity.
g. Low Humidity.
h. Smoke/Fire.
i. Water-under-Floor.
j. Supply Fan Overload.
2. LCD Display:
a. Control Power On.
b. Humidifying.
c. Dehumidifying.
d. Heat Operating.
e. Economy Cooling.
3. Push buttons shall stop and start process cooling system, silence audible alarm, test
LCD indicators, and display room relative humidity.
4. Remote Signaling: Provide terminals for remote signaling of system status and
alarms.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install A/C units level and plumbing, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.
Install according to ARI Guideline B.

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 23 - Page 4 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Curb Support: Install and secure roof-mounting units on curbs and coordinate roof
penetrations and flashing with roof construction. Secure units to curb support with anchor
bolts.

C. Install suspended components level. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall
construction. Secure units to structural support with anchor bolts.

D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods & spring hanger, with
vertical-limit stop, having 25-mm deflection. Vibration-control devices & installation
requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic
Controls."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Water and Drainage Connections: Provide adequate connections for condensate drain, and
humidifier flushing system.

D. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26

Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.

E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
2. After installing A/C units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 23 - Page 5 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Verify that computer-room air-conditioning units are installed and connected according to
manufacturer's written instructions and the Contract Documents.

C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements in Division 26 Sections.

D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. After startup service and performance test, change filters and flush humidifier.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose,
without additional cost.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain A/C units.

END OF SECTION 238123

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 23 81 23 - Page 6 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 81 26

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate evaporator-

fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed mounting.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Evaporator-Fan Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a coil
for cooling and a fan to circulate air to conditioned space.

B. Compressor-Condenser Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains
a refrigerant compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant.

1.4 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in
terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor
requirements, and electrical characteristics.

1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations,

remedies, limitations, and exclusions.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of sections of
units showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 23 81 26 - Page 1 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in maintenance

manuals.

F. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-
system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems
with equal performance characteristics may be considered.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100.

C. Paint finish shall be suitable for hot and humid climates. Unit shall be capable and suitable
of working at outdoor ambient temperature of 45 deg. C.

D. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan operating
speed selected to meet the specified capacity. Sound level shall not exceed 40dBa at low
speed and 48dBa at high speed.

E. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance with the
test procedures specified in ANSI S12.23. Sound-power values apply to units provided with
factory-fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained for the standard
cabinet models will be acceptable for concealed models without separate tests provided
there is no variation between models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or
relative arrangement of parts. Each unit shall be fastened securely to the building structure.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork as per Engineer approval.

B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and
roof penetrations.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to

repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. A.Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged

in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and
workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or
industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 23 81 26 - Page 2 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for
sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or
brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable.
Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall be
environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.

1.10 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

A. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
insulation on back of panel.

1. Insulation: Faced, closed cell duct liner.

2. Drain Pans: Stainless steel, with connection for drain; insulated with polystyrene.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, and with thermal-
expansion valve.

C. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted.

D. Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.

E. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

1.11 WALL MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends, and discharge drain pans
with drain connection.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, and with thermal-
expansion valve.

C. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted.

D. Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.

1.12 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS

A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls,
weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves,
fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start
capacitor, relay, and contactor.

1. Compressor Type: Scroll.

C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, and with liquid
subcooler.

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 23 81 26 - Page 3 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. Refrigerant: 134A or any other environmentally friendly refrigerant.

E. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

F. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

G. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

1.13 ACCESSORIES

A. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator

fan, with the following features:

1. Compressor time delay.

2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.
3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
operating mode, and fan speed.
4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.

B. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely

fastened to building structure.

C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on minimum 100 mm thick,

reinforced concrete base; 100 mm larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement,
and formwork are specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor
installation with concrete base.

D. Install roof-mounted compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in

Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated
fasteners.

E. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum

static deflection of 25 mm. Refer to Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls."

F. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing

to allow access to unit.

2.2 CONNECTIONS

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 23 81 26 - Page 4 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to
be disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve
and specialty arrangements.

D. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

2.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections, and to prepare a written report of inspection.

B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.

C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new
components, and retest.

D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

2.4 COMMISSIONING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service, and report

results in writing.

B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

C. Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters.

D. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the

following:

1. Fill out manufacturer's checklists.

2. Check for unobstructed airflow over coils.
3. Check operation of condenser capacity-control device.
4. Verify that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen vibration
transmission to structure.

2.5 DEMONSTRATION

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 23 81 26 - Page 5 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain split-system air-conditioning units.

END OF SECTION 238126

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 23 81 26 - Page 6 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 81 26

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) air-conditioning units consisting of outdoor
unit, multiple indoor units of different configuration (cassette, ceiling and wall mounted, ducted,
floor standing), and individual or simple/advance control system.

1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) HVAC system shall be a variable capacity, direct expansion (DX)
field selectable Heat Pump or Heat Recovery engineered system unified within a single cabinet. The
outdoor unit shall consist of one or more frames connected though a common 2-pipe Heat Pump or
3pipe Heat Recovery refrigerant piping network and control communication wiring. Each system
shall have single or multiple, inverter compressor(s). Each system shall be connected to multiple
indoor units (ducted, non-ducted or mixed combinations) through a common refrigerant piping
network and integrated system controls and communication network. Each indoor unit shall be
controlled individually or as a group. Additionally, heat recovery systems shall be capable of
simultaneous heating and cooling of individual zone(s).

1.4 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of
capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and
electrical characteristics.

1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations, remedies,

limitations, and exclusions.

B. A complete submittal package shall be complied and 5 copies shall be forwarded to the general
contractor who shall supply the Engineer with the submittals for dissemination to all parties. The
submittal shall be a collection of documents that represent the technical aspects of each product or
collection of products to be used on the project. All performance submissions shall be calculated at
the design temperatures, nominal performance data shall not be allowed. The submission and
approval of said submittals does not relieve the contractor of supplying all requirements set forth in

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 1 of 17

APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

the specification and drawings. Any substitutions offered by the contractor shall include, as a
separate document, any and all differences between the submitted products and the specified
products including but not limited to, all dimensions, electrical, control, weights, warranties, country
of origin and a statement from the manufacture that no child labor has been used in the manufacture
or assembly of said products and a copy shall be supplied with the product outdoor unit submittal.

C. If submittals contain any proposed alternate equipment specifications, calculations, dimensions,

electrical specifications, sound specifications or any other mandated submission which are not
accepted, are noted or rejected for any reason the contractor shall be allowed to correct any
deficiency and re-submit a second time. Should there be any issues found on second submission, the
contractor will be directed to and agrees to submit on the original specified products, including any
changes or revisions, and provide those specified products without any additional compensation.

D. Manufacturer’s representative shall attend preconstruction meeting. Rep shall also verify that the
training certifications provided by the contractor are in order.

E. Upon job completion: Provide the owner with an commercially available tablet containing a copy of
approved submittal, Mobile service and diagnostic software (VRF system service diagnostics)
software, project mechanical and control drawings, all as-built piping drawings, O&M’s,
troubleshooting guides, service manuals and engineering manuals in PDF format. Provide any
specialized repair tools needed for system maintenance.

F. Heat Pump & Heat recovery Cooling and Heating VRF System

G. VRF (Unified Heat Pump & Heat recovery System)

Unified heating and cooling system shall be an air cooled system allowing user to configure in the
field a heat pump or a heat recovery system consisting of one to three outdoor unit modules,
conjoined to make a 6-42 ton single refrigerant circuit. Heat recovery systems, employing three
pipes, shall be connected to Heat recovery (heat recovery) unit(s) and indoor unit(s). Multi-port heat
recovery units shall allow simultaneous heating and cooling of individual zone(s) at various
capacities as required to satisfy their zone requirements. Heat pump systems shall require two pipes,
simultaneous heating and cooling shall not be supported. The heat recovery system shall consist of
three pipes, liquid, suction and hot gas pipes, two pipe heat recovery systems that cannot deliver, at
zero degrees outdoor ambient, 162F hot gas to the indoor coils for heat shall not be acceptable.

The heat recovery system shall be capable of operating with <208/230V>or<460V> 50Hz, 3 phase
power.

H. Shop Drawings: Diagram Refrigerant, power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

I. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of sections of units
showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.

J. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements.

K. Maintenance Data: For Variable Refrigerant Flow system to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.

L. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 2 of 17

APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of twenty-five years of HVAC experience in the Global market

B. VRF unified heating and cooling (variable refrigerant flow systems) shall have published
performance ratings certified by AHRI (Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute) and
listed in the AHRI Standard 1230 certified product directory.

C. All VRF system components shall be manufactured in production facilities maintaining the
following ISO certifications:
1. ISO 9001 Quality Management System
2. ISO 14001 Environmental Management System

D. All VRF system components shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1995 4th edition of
Heating and Cooling Equipment Standard for Safety and bear the Electrical Testing Laboratories
(ETL) mark.

E. All VRF system electrical power wiring shall be installed according to National Electrical Code
(NEC) or applicable state and local building codes.

F. Paint finish shall be suitable for hot and humid climates. Unit shall be capable and suitable of
working at outdoor ambient temperature of 50 deg. C.

G. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan operating speed
selected to meet the specified capacity. Sound level shall not exceed 40dBa at low speed and 48dBa
at high speed.

H. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance with the test
procedures specified in ANSI S12.23. Sound-power values apply to units provided with factory-
fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained for the standard cabinet models
will be acceptable for concealed models without separate tests provided there is no variation
between models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or relative arrangement of parts.
Each unit shall be fastened securely to the building structure.

I. The VRF system shall be installed by a manufacture authorized VRF dealer with extensive
manufacture installation and service training. The mandatory contractor service and install training
should be performed by the manufacturer.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations specified in Section "Roof Accessories."

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: VRF shall be provided with an industry leading, standard 10 year
warranty for compressors and mechanical parts. A standard 1 year labor warranty is provided+ an
additional 4 years labor warranty is required for this project, for a total of 5 years from date of
Substantial Completion. If an issues arises, the Owner of Equipment personnel will provide
diagnostic services to determine issues using VRF mfg. training and tablet with diagnostic software.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 3 of 17

APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. This warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship that appear under normal use and
maintenance

1.9 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The
standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to bid
opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years’ experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a
product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall
not be acceptable. Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall
be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.

B. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of twenty-five years of HVAC experience in the Global market.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

A. The air-conditioning system shall use R410A refrigerant.

B. The system shall be capable of an automatic refrigerant charge function for use in both the heat
mode and cool mode to ensure the proper amount of refrigerant is installed into the system

C. Each system shall consist of one, two or three air source outdoor unit modules conjoined together in
the field to result in the capacity specified elsewhere in these documents

D. Dual and triple frame configurations shall be field piped together using manufacturer’s designed and
supplied Y-branch kits and field provided interconnecting pipe to form a common refrigerant circuit.

E. System shall employ self-diagnostics function to identify any malfunctions and provide type and
location of malfunctions via fault alarms.

F. Cabinet weights and foot prints shall vary between 430 Lbs., 7.61 sq. ft. (1.27 sq. ft. per ton), for 6
ton cabinet to 662 Lbs., 10.14 sq. ft. (.51 sq. ft. per ton), for 20 ton cabinet for single cabinet
configurations. Multi cabinet configurations shall be per specifications and as listed in table below.
(Install setbacks and service areas not included).

G. Refrigerant circuit configuration for unified heat pump and Heat recovery Heat System:

1. The refrigerant circuit shall be constructed using field provided ACR copper, dehydrated,
refrigerant rated copper pipe, piped together with manufacturer supplied Heat recovery unit(s)
and Y- branches, as may be required, connected to multiple (ducted, non-ducted or mixed
combination) indoor units to effectively and efficiently control the heat pump or Heat
Recovery mode operations or simultaneous heating and cooling operation of the VRF system.
Other pipe materials, if used, shall perform, at a minimum, as well as that specified above,
shall not have any adverse reactions to any other components or materials also in use in the
system and shall be installed per manufactures instructions
2. All refrigerant pipe, y-branches, elbows and valves shall be individually insulated with no air
gaps. Insulation R-value (thickness) shall not be less than the minimum called for by the local

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 4 of 17

APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

building code, local energy code or as a minimum per manufacture installation requirements.
In no case shall the insulation be allowed to be compressed at any point in the system.
3. All joints shall be glued and sealed per insulation manufactures instructions to make an air
tight assembly.

H. Factory installed microprocessor controls in the outdoor unit(s), heat recovery unit(s), and indoor
unit(s) shall perform functions to optimize the operation of the VRF system and communicate in a
daisy chain configuration between outdoor unit and heat recovery unit(s) and indoor unit(s) via
RS485 network. Controls shall also be available to control other building systems as required from
the VRF control system. DIO/AIO capabilities shall be available as well as a central controller to
perform operation changes, schedules and other duties as required by this specification. Addition of
separate building control system shall not be required. Other control devices and sequences shall be
as specified in other sections of this project specification.

I. Inverter PCB cooling: Cooling of the inverter PCB shall be conducted by way of high pressure, sub-
cooled liquid refrigerant via heat exchanger attached to rear side of inverter PCB. The full capacity
flow of refrigerant shall pass though the heat exchangers to maximize the cooling effect of the PCBs
and to aid in the evaporation process and capacity of the outdoor coil during the heating mode. The
recovered heat of the PCBs must be used to enhance the overall heating process, other uses or
dissipation of heat to ambient shall not be permitted.

J. Compressor control: Fuzzy control logic shall establish and maintain target evaporating temperature
(Te) to be constant on cooling mode and condensing temperature (Tc) constant on heating mode by
Fuzzy control logic to ensure the stable system performance. Other compressor control capabilities
shall be available via special function controls as noted elsewhere in this specification.

K. Flexible Capacity Control: (Demand limiting ) The system shall allow for up to 5 steps of flexible
capacity control using an I/O controller or up to 8 steps of flexible capacity control using a BMS
control by others. This FCC shall be employed when electrical demand limiting, night time noise
reduction or any other flexible capacity control requirement based on any other requirement using
contact closures or 0-10vdc to engage.

L. Initial Test Run (ITR) (Heating) / Fault Detection Diagnosis (FDD) Code: This control mode shall
monitor and display positive or negative results of system initial startup and commissioning. It shall
monitor the following, but not be limited to, refrigerant quantity charge, auto-charge, stable
operations, connection ratios, indoor unit status, error status, and number of indoor units connected.
This control mode shall not replace the system error monitoring control system.

M. Integration: Each system shall be able to integrate via open protocol via BACnet IP, This gateway
converts between BACnet IP or Modbus TCP protocol and manufacturer’s protocol allowing third
party control and monitoring of the A/C system, or LonWorks gateways. See controls specification
for more detailed description of integration and points to be controlled and monitored.

N. Advanced Smart load control: Smart load control operation shall be available at any time during or
after system Commissioning. Smart load control shall be initiated by outdoor air temperature and
relativity humidity as sensed at the outdoor unit and shall automatically adjust the evaporator target
(condenser target for heat) pressure / temperature that the system will operate to in order precisely
load match the system to the building load as the outdoor ambient temperature and humidity
increases or decreases, by varying the compression ratios of the system and increase the operating
efficiencies and reducing energy consumption by adjusting the compressor lifts. The system shall
poll all indoor units’ data in real time and apply its algorithm to determine the optimal evaporating
temperature to satisfy varying loads. Systems that rely on the worst performing zone to reset the
system conditions shall not be sufficient and shall not be allowed.

O. Wi-Fi communication: The outdoor unit shall be Wi-Fi enabled and capable. Wi-Fi shall allow
service or maintenance personal access to the complete operating system, via mobile, without need
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 5 of 17
APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

of tools other than smart phone or tablet. Active live system review, collection of all system data for
a field determined duration presented in a .csv file format or collection of all operating conditions,
including all indoor units, valves, sensors, compressor speeds, refrigerant pressures, etc., by
snapshot of conditions and placing that snapshot into a power point slide to be reviewed at another
time. Systems that require computers, hard wire only connection or other devices to collect, review
or record operating conditions shall not be allowed.

P. Indoor unit connectivity: The system shall be designed to accept connection up to 64 indoor units of
various configuration and capacity, depending on the capacity of the system.

Q. Power and communication interruption: The system shall be capable of performing continuous
operation when an individual or several indoor units are being serviced; communication wire cut or
power to indoor unit is disconnected. Systems that alarm and/or shut down because of a lack of
power to any number of indoor units shall not be acceptable or allowed.

R. Connection Ratios: The maximum allowable system combination ratio shall be 130%. Systems
designed with combination ratio above 130% are not acceptable. The total nominal capacity of all
indoor units shall be no less than 50% and no more than 130% of outdoor unit’s nominal capacity.

S. Smart heat mode: Smart heating shall be initiated via a field setting at the outdoor unit. Smart
heating shall extend the heating operation by calculating the dew point of the outdoor coil surface
using the outdoor units’ temperature and Humidity sensors to maintain the coil surface temperature
above the dew point minimizing the frost build-up and delaying a defrost operation while
maintaining indoor space temperature. This feature shall be capable of eliminating several defrost
actions per day based on outdoor air temperature and humidity conditions.

T. The outdoor unit refrigerant circuit shall employ for safety a threaded fusible plug.

U. The unit shall be shipped from the factory fully assembled including internal refrigerant piping,
inverter driven compressor(s), controls, contacts, relay(s), fans, power and communications wiring
as necessary to perform both Heat Pump and Heat recovery operations.

V. Each outdoor unit refrigeration circuit shall include, but not limited to, the following components:
1. Refrigerant strainer(s)
2. Check valve(s)
3. Inverter driven, medium pressure vapor injection, high pressure shell compressors
4. liquid refrigerant cooled inverter PCB
5. Oil separator(s)
6. Accumulator - receiver(s)
7. 4-way reversing valve(s)
8. Vapor injection valve(s)
9. Variable path heat exchanger control valve(s)
10. Oil balancing control
11. Oil Level sensor(s)
12. Electronic expansion valve(s)
13. Sub-cooler (s)
14. High and low side Schrader valve service ports with caps.
15. Service valves

2.2 REFRIGERANT FLOW CONTROL

A. System shall have a variable flow and path outdoor heat exchanger function to vary the refrigerant
flow and volume and path. Control of the variable path circuits shall be based on system operating
mode and operating conditions as targeted to manage the efficiency and minimize the circulating
volume of the operating fluids of the system.
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 6 of 17
APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. System shall have a medium pressure gas vapor injection function employed in the heating and
cooling modes to increase system capacity when the outdoor ambient temperatures are low and
lower compressor lift when temperatures are high. The compressor vapor injection flow amount
shall be controlled by the vapor injection subcooling algorithm reset by discharge gas temperatures
of the compressor.

C. System shall have an active refrigerant control and multi section accumulator-receiver that
dynamically changes the volume of refrigerant circulating in the system based on operating mode
and operating conditions to ensure maximum system performance and efficiency.

D. The compressor design shall be of the high pressure shell scroll type where the internal pressure
below the suction valves of the compressor shall be at the same high pressure and high temperature.
The motor shall be cooled by high pressure gas at temperatures above saturation conditions and
prevents the mixing of refrigerant liquid with oil in the sump. Bearing surfaces are continually
coated with oil. The compressor shall employ an Aero bearing constructed with high lubricity
materials increasing operation time in case of low sump oil level. Compressor shall have a nominal
operating range from 15Hz to 150 Hz.

E. The VRF outdoor unit shall include a factory provided and mounted sub-cooler assembly consisting
of a double spiral tube-type sub-cooling heat exchanger and EEV providing refrigerant sub-cooling
modulation control by fuzzy logic of EEV and by mode of operation to provide capacity and
efficiency as required.

F. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.

G. System shall have following frame configurations vs. capacity.

1. 6 to 20 ton units shall be a single frame.
2. 22 to 36 ton units shall be dual frame.
3. 38 to42 ton heat recovery units shall be triple frame.

H. VRF Systems with Onboard Alternate Operating Mode Selection capability

1. All VRF systems which provide field selectable Alternate Operating Modes, for example,
High Heat or High Ambient Cooling, published data tables must be available to the public for
all modes offered. Table format must comply with section 2.03.
2. Acceptable Alternate Operating Modes must ship with all models of the VRF product offering
and must be factory embedded. Custom factory or field modifications to factory provided
algorithms created to meet scheduled requirements are not acceptable.
3. Provide a copy of instructions required to set the Alternate Operation Mode with the initial
submittal.
4. For systems that provide field selectable Alternate Operating Modes, ALL technical data
provided in the submittal data sheets showing product rated condition performance data, must
also provide separate data sheets that show product performance data at each field selectable
Alternate Operating Modes available. Capacity, power input, and acoustic performance data
for each mode offered shall be reported separately. Mixing of ODU, IDU, or VRF system
performance capability operating in one mode with for example the power consumption,
sound power rating, or electrical requirements of the same system operating in another mode
is not acceptable.

2.3 DEFROST OPERATIONS

A. The outdoor unit(s) shall be capable of Intelligent defrost operation to melt accumulated frost, snow
and ice that may have accumulated on the outdoor unit heat exchanger. The defrost cycle length and
sequence shall be based on outdoor ambient temperatures, outdoor unit heat exchanger temperature,
and various differential pressure variables.
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 7 of 17
APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Defrost Mode Selection: The outdoor unit shall be provided with a minimum of three field
selectable defrost operation modes; Normal, Fast, or Forced.
1. Fast Defrost operation intended for use in areas of the country with mild winter temperatures
and light to moderate humidity levels. The strategy minimizes defrost cycle frequency
allowing frozen precipitation to build longer in between cycles. Minimum time between
defrost cycles shall be 20 minutes. Intelligent Defrost shall choose between split coil/frame
and full system methods based on current weather conditions to minimize energy
consumption and maximize heating cycle time.
2. Normal Defrost operation intended for use in areas of the country that experience adverse
winter weather with periods of heavy winter precipitation and extremely low temperatures.
This strategy shall maximize the systems heating performance and maintain operational
efficiency. When the ambient temperature is either: a) above 32°F; b) below 32F with the
humidity level below 60% RH, Intelligent Defrost shall continue to heating irrelevant of ice
build-up on the coil until the quality of the heated air (i.e. discharge air temperature)
decreases. At temperatures below 4°F, a defrost cycle shall occur every two hours to optimize
system heating efficiency.
3. Forced Defrost operation shall be available for the service provider to test defrost operations
at any weather condition and to manually clear frozen water from the outdoor coil surfaces.

C. Defrost Method Selection: The outdoor unit shall be provided with two field selectable defrost
operation methods: Split Coil/Frame and Full System. Split Coil/Frame option provides
continuous heating of the occupied space during defrost operation.
1. Split Coil/Frame method shall be available when Normal Defrost mode is selected. Split Coil
method shall be available on all Heat Pump and Heat recovery single-frame VRF systems.
Split Frame defrost shall be available on all Heat Pump and Heat recovery multi-frame
outdoor units.
2. Split Coil method shall remove ice from the bottom half of the outdoor unit coil first for a
maximum time of six minutes, then the top half for a maximum of six minutes. Next the
bottom coil shall be heated again for an additional three minutes to remove any frozen water
that may have dripped onto the lower coil during the top coil defrost operation.
3. When Split Coil/Frame method is selected, a Full System defrost shall occur every 1-9 (field
selectable) defrost cycles to assure 100% of the frozen precipitation has been removed to
maintain efficient performance.
4. Full System method shall be available as a field selectable option. All outdoor units located in
areas of the country where large volumes of frozen precipitation are common, the
commissioning agent shall be able to select the Full System only defrost method.

D. Indoor Unit Fan Operation During Defrost

1. During partial defrost operation indoor units operating in cooling or dry mode shall continue
normal operation.
2. During partial defrost operation, indoor units that are commissioned with fans set for
continuous operation shall maintain normal fan speed unless the leaving air temperature
drops, then the fan speed will be reduced to low speed for the remainder of the defrost cycle.
3. During full system defrost operation indoor unit fans will cycle off and remain off during the
remainder of the defrost cycle.

2.4 OIL MANAGEMENT

A. The system shall utilize a high pressure oil return system to ensure a consistent film of oil on all
moving compressor parts at all points of operation. Oil is returned to compressor through a separate
high pressure oil injection pipe directly into the oil sump. Oil returned to the compressor via the
suction port of the compressor shall not be allowed.

B. Each compressor shall be provided with a high efficiency independent centrifugal oil separator,
designed to extract oil from the oil/refrigerant gas stream leaving the compressor.
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 8 of 17
APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. The system shall have an oil level sensor in the compressor to provide direct oil level sensing data to
the main controller.

D. The system shall only initiate an oil return cycle if the sensed oil level is below oil level target
values as determined by the microprocessor.

E. A default oil return algorithm shall automatically initiate the oil return mode if the system detects a
failure of the oil sump sensor. A fault code shall be reported by the system.

F. Timed oil return operations or systems that do not directly monitor compressor oil level shall not be
permitted.

G. Inverted refrigerant traps per VRF mfg. recommendations shall be provided between each ODU
outdoor unit module if unit are space more than 6 ft. apart for enhanced oil management control.

H. Indoor Unit Fan Operation During Oil Return Cycle

1. During oil return cycle indoor units operating in cooling or dry mode shall continue normal
operation.
2. During oil return, indoor units that are commissioned with fans set for continuous operation
shall maintain normal fan speed unless the leaving air temperature drops, then the fan speed
will be reduced to low speed for the remainder of the oil return cycle.
3. During oil return cycle indoor unit fans will cycle off and remain off during oil return cycle
while operating in all modes.

2.5 CABINET

A. Outdoor unit cabinet shall be made of 20 gauge galvanized steel with a weather and corrosion
resistant enamel finish. Outdoor unit cabinet finish shall be tested in accordance with ASTM B-117
salt spray surface scratch test (SST) procedure for a minimum of 1000 hours.

B. The front panels of the outdoor units shall be removable type for access to internal components.

C. A smaller service access panel, not larger than 7” x 7” and secured by a maximum of (2) screws,
shall be provided to access the following:
1. Service tool connection
2. DIP switches
3. Auto addressing
4. Error codes
5. Main microprocessor
6. Inverter PCB

D. The cabinet shall have piping knockouts to allow refrigerant piping to be connected at the front,
right side, or through the bottom of the unit.

2.6 FAN ASSEMBLY

A. 6 ton frames shall be equipped with one direct drive variable speed propeller fan with Brushless
Digitally Controlled (BLDC) motor with a vertical air discharge.

B. 8 to 20 ton frames shall be equipped with two direct drive variable speed propeller fan(s) with
BLDC motor(s) with a vertical air discharge.

C. The fan(s) blades shall be made of Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) material and incorporate
biomimetic technology to enhance fan performance and reduce fan generated noise.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 9 of 17

APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

D. The fan(s) motor shall be equipped with permanently lubricated bearings.

E. The fan motor shall be variable speed with an operating speed range of 0-1150 RPM cooling mode
and 0-1150 RPM heating mode.

F. The fan shall have a guard to help prevent contact with moving parts.

G. The cabinet shall have option to redirect the discharge air direction from vertical to horizontal with
the addition of optional factory provided air guides.

H. The fan controller shall have a DIP switch setting to raise external static pressure of the fan up to
0.32 in-wg to accommodate ducted installations.

I. The fan control shall have a function setting to remove excess snow automatically.

2.7 OUTDOOR UNIT COIL

A. Shall be comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing and shall be four sided
and 2 or 3 rows deep and 17 fins per inch.

B. The copper tubes shall have inner riffling to expand the total surface of the tube interior.

C. The aluminum fins shall have a factory applied Black Fin heat exchanger coating that is comprised
of a highly corrosion resistant epoxy resin coating, 1.6-2.0 um thick, designed to perform in
corrosive environments such as contaminated and humid conditions. The Black Fin heat exchanger
protection shall include a Hydrophilic coating which minimizes moisture buildup on the fin heat
exchanger. The “Black Fin” heat exchanger shall have been tested to the following conditions. 1)
ASTM B-117 Salt spray test – 1500 hours with no corrosion, 2) Acid salt test – 900 hours .02%
corrosion, 3) ASM corrosion test – 3,000 hours. The Black Fin coating shall be certified by
underwriters Laboratories and per ISO 21207. The above conditions shall establish the minimum
allowable performance which all alternates must comply. Shall have multiple circuits designed for
path isolation and variable velocity control.

D. Shall be designed, built and provided by the VRF outdoor unit manufacturer.

E. The outdoor unit coil, all indoor units and pipe network shall be field tested to a minimum pressure
of 550 psig. Manufacturers that do not specify and/or allow field testing at 550 psig shall not be
allowed.

F. The outdoor unit coil for each cabinet shall have lanced aluminum fins with a maximum fin spacing
of no more than 17 Fins per Inch (FPI). All the outdoor unit coils shall be a 2 or 3 rows consisting of
staggered tubes for efficient air flow across the heat exchanger. The outdoor unit shall be factory
tested to a minimum of 609 PSI and shall be so indicated on outdoor unit name plate.

G. The cabinet shall have a factory or field installed coil guard with cottonwood screen.

2.8 COMPRESSOR(S)

A. Each 6, 8, 10 ton frames shall be equipped with a single hermetically sealed, inverter driven, High
Side Shell (HSS) scroll compressor.

B. 12, 14, 16, 18 and 20 ton frames shall be equipped with dual hermetically sealed, inverter driven,
and High Side Shell (HSS) scroll compressors.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 10 of 17

APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Each inverter driven, HSS scroll compressor shall be capable of operating from 12 Hz up to 165 Hz
with control in 0.5 Hz increments in any and all modes (cooling, heating or simultaneous modes).

D. The compressor(s) shall be equipped with a 60 Watt crankcase heater controlled by oil temperature.

E. The compressor shall employ a factory metered charge of Polyvinyl Ether (PVE) oil.

F. The compressor shall be designed for a separate port for oil to be directly returned to the compressor
oil sump.

G. The compressor bearing(s) shall have Teflon™ coating and shall be an aero type design using High
lubricity materials.

H. The compressor(s) shall be protected with:

1. High Pressure switch
2. Over-current /under current protection
3. Oil sump sensor
4. Phase failure
5. Phase reversal
6. Compressor shall be capable of receiving injection of medium pressure gas at a point in the
compression cycle where such injection shall allow a greater mass flow of refrigerant at lower
outdoor ambient and achieving a higher heating capability. The VRF outdoor unit shall have
published performance data for heating mode operation down to -13F on both heat pump and
heat recovery systems.

2.9 INVERTER COMPRESSOR CONTROLLER(S)

A. Standard, non-inverter driven compressors shall not be permitted nor shall a compressor without
vapor injection or direct sump oil return capabilities

B. The VRF outdoor unit shall be provided with a separate inverter compressor controller PCB for each
compressor. Inverter compressor controllers that host more than one compressor shall not be
accepted.

C. The inverter compressor controller shall be designed and programmed to utilize the entire range of
operation of the connected compressor during cooling cycle operation and/or heating cycle
operation.

2.10 OPERATIONAL SOUND LEVELS

A. Each single frame outdoor unit shall be rated with an operational sound level not to exceed as listed
on below chart when tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO 3745 standard at the highest field
selectable heating operating modes available. Such documentation shall be presented in all
submittals, manufactures who elect to rate their equipment at other than tested in an anechoic
chamber under ISO 3745 standard at the highest field selectable heating operating modes available
and the highest field selectable conditions shall not be allowed. Rated sound pressure values shall
not exceed the tabled values per system size as below: 6-42 from 58 to 67 dB(A).

B. A field setting shall be available to program the outdoor unit to reduce sound levels at night, when
desired, to a selectable level while still able to meet building load requirement.

2.11 SENSORS

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 11 of 17

APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Each outdoor unit module shall have

1. Suction temperature sensor
2. Discharge temperature sensor
3. Oil level sensor
4. High Pressure sensor
5. Low Pressure sensor
6. Outdoor temperature sensor
7. Outdoor humidity sensor
8. Outdoor unit heat exchanger temperature sensors

2.12 FACTORY INSTALLED CONTROLS

A. Heat recovery unit(s) shall have factory installed unit mounted control boards and integral
microprocessor to communicate with other devices in the VRF system.

B. Heat recovery unit shall communicate with the indoor units via a 2-conductor shielded
communications cable terminated using a daisy chain configuration (see instructions regarding the
termination of the shield).

C. The contractor is instructed to review the Electrical and ATC drawings and specifications for other
items or tasks which this contractor is or may be responsible to provide materials and or labor under
this contract. Failure to do so will not relieve this contractor of their responsibility to provide such
materials and or labor and in no case shall this contractor be further compensated as a result.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. After becoming familiar with all details of the work, submit verification of existing conditions at
least 2 weeks prior to beginning construction, indicating the date the site was visited, confirming
existing conditions, and noting any discrepancies found.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. The VRF system must be installed by the contractor identified in Qualification Of Installer. The
contractor must install the VRF system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and Shop
Drawings.

B. Equipment General: Provide necessary supports for all equipment, appurtenances, and pipe as
required. Isolate outdoor units from the building structure. If mechanical vibration isolators are not
provided, provide vibration absorbing foundations. Each foundation must include isolation units
consisting of machine and floor or foundation fastenings, together with intermediate isolation
material. In lieu of concrete pad foundation, concrete pedestal block with isolators placed between
the pedestal block and the floor may be provided. Concrete pedestal block must be of mass not less
than three times the equipment weight. Concrete for foundations must be as specified in CAST-IN-
PLACE CONCRETE specification. Equipment must be properly leveled, aligned, and secured in
place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Air-source outdoor units must be installed per
manufacturer's recommendations and must not blow air in the direction of other outdoor unit
intakes.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 12 of 17

APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Safety Devices: Safety devices must be installed so that proper operation of equipment is not
impaired. Welding and cutting safety requirements must be in accordance with AWS Z49.1.

D. Controls: Install Controls in accordance with specifications, as indicated by the Points Schedule and
to provide the following functionality:
1. On/Off selection for each individual fan coil unit and group.
2. Temperature set point adjustment for each fan coil unit.
3. Fan speed adjustment for each fan coil.
4. Heat/cool/automatic changeover mode selection for indoor and outdoor units.
5. Priority settings for restriction of local access for start/stop, heat/cool mode and set point
adjustment.
6. Temperature limitation in both heating and cooling mode.
7. Weekly occupancy schedule with startup and shut off times, temperature settings and
operation modes. Yearly occupancy schedule for holidays and periods of non-use.
8. Reset for non-blocking malfunction codes and maintenance warnings.

E. Provide a Local Display panel as indicated on the points schedule and to provide access to the above
specified functionality. The Local Display Panel must additionally indicate current date and time.

F. Isolation Valves: Provide Isolation Valves in accordance with Section 15183 REFRIGERANT
PIPING. Provide with service ports on downstream side.

G. Electrical Equipment / Motors: Install electrical equipment, motors, motor efficiencies, and wiring
in accordance with INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM specifications.

H. Branch Selector Unit: Locate Branch Selector Units inside of the facility with full access for
inspection, maintenance and removal. Locate no more than 2 meters 6 feet above finished floor.
The unit must have a minimum clearance of 30 centimeters 12 inches from all serviceable sides and
be removable without modification to the surroundings.

I. Condensate Removal: Provide condensate removal through gravity flow where possible. Where
gravity flow is not possible, provide a condensate pump sufficient ensure complete removal of
condensate.

J. Access Panels: Provide access panels for all concealed equipment, valves, controls, dampers,
refrigerant fittings, and other fittings for inspection, maintenance and removal. Size panel large
enough as to be able to remove the part without modification or damage to the surroundings.

K. Air Filters: Allow access space for servicing filters. Install filters with suitable sealing to prevent
bypassing of air.

L. Flashing and Pitch Pockets: Provide flashing and pitch pockets for equipment supports and roof
penetrations and flashing where piping or ductwork passes through exterior walls in accordance with
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL specifications.

M. Identification Tags and Plates: Provide equipment, gages, thermometers, valves, and controllers with
tags numbers stamped or engraved into the material for their use. Provide plates and tags of brass or
suitable nonferrous rigid material, securely mounted or attached. Provide minimum letter and
numeral size of 3.18 mm 1/8 inch high.

N. Refrigerant Signs: Locate refrigerant signs with in reading distance of outdoor unit.

O. Field Applied Insulation: Apply field applied insulation as specified in THERMAL INSULATION
FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS specifications, except as defined differently herein.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 13 of 17

APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

P. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Design and fabrication of pipe hangers, supports, and welding
attachments must conform to MSS SP-58. Installation of hanger types and supports for bare and
covered pipes must conform to MSS SP-58 for the system temperature range. Unless otherwise
indicated, horizontal and vertical piping attachments must conform to MSS SP-58.

Q. Refrigerant Piping:
1. Cut pipe to measurements established at the site and work into place without springing or
forcing.
2. Install piping with sufficient flexibility to provide for expansion and contraction due to
temperature fluctuation and as indicated in shop drawings.
3. Where pipe passes through building structure pipe joints must not be concealed, but must be
located where they may be readily inspected.
4. Install piping to be insulated with sufficient clearance to permit application of insulation.
5. Install piping as indicated and detailed, to avoid interference with other piping, conduit, or
equipment.
6. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, run piping plumb and straight and parallel to
walls and ceilings.
7. Provide sleeves of suitable size for lines passing through building structure.
8. Braze refrigerant piping with silver solder complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
9. Inside of tubing and fittings must be free of flux. Clean parts to be jointed with emery cloth
and keep hot until solder has penetrated full depth of fitting and extra flux has been expelled.
10. Cool joints in air and remove flame marks and traces of flux.
11. During brazing operation, prevent oxide film from forming on inside of tubing by slowly
flowing dry nitrogen through tubing to expel air.
12. Make provisions to automatically return oil on halocarbon systems.
13. Installation of piping must comply with ASME B31.5.
14. All refrigerant lines external to units must have field applied insulation per specifications
unless otherwise indicated.
15. All refrigerant lines external to units must be isolated from system vibrations including those
generated by compressors, fans, or pumps, to minimize the risk of refrigerant leaks.

R. Solenoid Valve Installation: Install liquid solenoid valves in horizontal lines with stem vertical and
with flow in direction indicated on valve. If not incorporated as integral part of the valve, provide a
strainer upstream of the solenoid valve. Provide service valves upstream of the solenoid valve,
upstream of the strainer, and downstream of the solenoid valve. Remove the internal parts of the
solenoid valve when brazing the valve.

S. Auxiliary Drain Pans, Drain Connections, and Drain Lines: Provide auxiliary drain pans under units
located above finished ceilings or over mechanical or electrical equipment. Pan must extend beyond
the limits of the units. Provide separate drain lines for the unit drain and auxiliary drain pans. Trap
drain pans from the bottom to ensure complete pan drainage. Provide drain lines full size of drain
opening. Traps and piping to drainage disposal points must conform to specifications.

3.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING TESTS

A. Perform refrigerant piping tests as specified in Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING and per
manufacturer's recommendations in the presence of the contracting officer. Use electronic type leak
detector with a sensitivity of 3 grams/year 0.1 ounces/year and a calibrated reference leak rated at 5
grams/year 0.17 ounces/year. Submit current electronic refrigerant leak detector calibration
certificate prior to testing. Before testing the refrigerant piping system, perform a test of the leak
detector with the reference leak fitting in the presence of the Contracting Officer.

3.4 REFRIGERANT CHARGING

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 14 of 17

APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. After refrigerant piping test and before system performance test, perform evacuation and
dehydration procedures in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations and requirements and
REFRIGERANT PIPING specifications.

B. Evacuate system to a minimum of 100 microns 0.004 inches Hg for one hour or per manufacturers’
requirements.

C. Use fresh oil in the vacuum pump.

D. Connect electronic vacuum gauge to system piping for measurement. The refrigerant must be to the
weight specified in the shop drawing calculations. The supplemental refrigerant must be weighed in
with an electronic scale. Supplemental refrigerant must be introduced to the system in a liquid state
for refrigerant blends.

E. Conduct refrigerant charging in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Submit refrigerant charging
report before system performance test.

F. Outline refrigerant charging procedures in the report. Report must indicated who performed and
witnessed the task. Provide signatures from all parties.

3.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS

A. Before each VRF system is accepted, conduct tests to demonstrate the general operating
characteristics of the VRF as directed by COR/COTR. Submit [three] bound copies of the report .
The report must document compliance with the specified performance criteria upon completion and
testing of the system. The report must indicate the number of days covered by the tests and any
conclusions as to the adequacy of the system. Include manufacturer commissioning report for each
VRF system.

B. For equipment providing heating and cooling the system performance tests must be performed
during the heating and cooling seasons. For systems capable of simultaneous heating and cooling,
perform testing of this mode.
1. Submit a schedule, at least [2] weeks prior to the start of related testing, for the system
performance tests. The schedules must identify the proposed date, time, and location for each
test. Tests must cover a period of not less than [48] hours for each system and must
demonstrate that the entire system is functioning in accordance with the drawings and
specifications.
2. Make corrections and adjustments, as necessary, tests must be re-conducted to demonstrate
that the entire system is functioning as specified. Prior to acceptance, install and tighten
service valve seal caps and blanks over gauge points.
3. If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory system performance, correct deficiencies and retest the
system. Conduct tests in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Water and electricity
required for the tests will be furnished by the Government. Provide all material, equipment,
instruments, and personnel required for the test.

C. Submit [3] copies of the field test report. The report must document compliance with the specified
performance criteria upon completion and testing of the system. The report must indicate the
number of days covered by the tests and any conclusions as to the adequacy of the system. Submit
the report including the following information (where values are taken at least three different times
at outside dry-bulb temperatures that are at least 3 degrees C 5 degrees F apart):
1. Date and outside weather conditions.
2. The load on the system based on the following:
(a) The refrigerant used in the system.
(b) Condensing temperature and pressure.
(c) Suction temperature and pressure.
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 15 of 17
APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

(d) Ambient, condensing and coolant temperatures.

(e) Running current, voltage and proper phase sequence for each phase of all motors.

3. The actual on-site setting of operating and safety controls.

4. Electronic expansion valve superheat - value as determined by field test.
5. Subcooling.
6. High and low refrigerant temperature switch set-points
7. Low oil pressure switch set-point.
8. Defrost system timer and thermostat set-points.
9. Moisture content.
10. Capacity control set-points.
11. Field data and adjustments which affect unit performance and energy consumption.
12. Field adjustments and settings which were not permanently marked as an integral part of a
device.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Equipment must be wiped clean, with all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots removed. Temporary
filters must be provided for all fans that are operated during construction, and new filters must be
installed after all construction dirt has been removed from the building. System must be maintained
in this clean condition until final acceptance. Bearings must be properly lubricated with oil or
grease as recommended by the manufacturer. Belts must be tightened to proper tension. Control
valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment must be adjusted to setting indicated
or directed. Fans must be adjusted to the speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified
conditions.

3.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified, after approval of detail
drawings and not later than [2] months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. Include in the
data a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, a
recommended spare parts list for 1 year of operation, and a list of the parts recommended by the
manufacturer to be replaced on a routine basis.

3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROVIDERS

A. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations, which includes their addresses
and qualifications, for support of the equipment. The service organizations must be reasonably
convenient to the equipment installation and be able to render satisfactory service to the equipment
on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

3.9 VRF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Provide the following:

1. Condensed operating instructions listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup,
operation, abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and normal shutdown.
2. Manufacturer's Engineering Data.
3. Manufacturer's Instructions.
4. Shop Drawings.

3.10 TRAINING
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 16 of 17
APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

A. Provide training, for all items provided under this section, in addition to and accordance with
specifications. Also include refrigeration leak detection and leak detection response training. The
training period must consist of a total [8] hours of normal working time for items covered in this
section

END OF SECTION 23 81 26

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) UNITS 23 81 29 - Page 17 of 17

APRIL 2024-REV 0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

SECTION 23 82 19

FAN-COIL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties
and accessories for each unit type and configuration.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan-coil unit type and configuration:

1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of access panels in hard ceilings to provide access to concealed
units.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for units with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section.
Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in operation and
maintenance manuals. Include the following:

FAN-COIL UNITS 23 82 19 - Page 1 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and
filters.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in latest
and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6

- "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. Comply with EHS regulation and specification of local authorities having jurisdiction

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system components with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in

the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and
workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or
industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years’
experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for
sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or
brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable.
Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall be
environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.

B. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list or approved equal.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to AHRI 440 and ASHRAE 33, or
equivalent in European standards.

B. Units shall include an enclosure for cabinet models and casing for concealed models.

C. Units shall have three speeds switch and shall be selected at medium speed.

D. Units shall include electric heating coil if indicated on schedule of equipment.

FAN-COIL UNITS 23 82 19 - Page 2 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

E. Base unit shall be complete with galvanized casing, water-coil assembly with auxiliary
water coil, valve and piping package, drain pans, air filter, fan motor, and motor control.

F. All thermal and acoustical insulation shall be sealed with a coating that is impervious to
moisture.

G. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan operating
speed selected to meet the specified capacity, shall not exceed the following values at the
mid frequency of each octave band at fan medium speed:

OCTAVE BANDS

Frequency
(hertz) 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000

Power Level 40 41 37 36 33

H. Performance must be in line with acoustic consultants’ requirements.

I. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance with the
test procedures specified in ANSI/ASA S12.23. Sound-power values apply to units
provided with factory-fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained
for the standard cabinet models will be acceptable for concealed models without separate
tests provided there is no variation between models as to the coil configuration, blowers,
motor speeds, or relative arrangement of parts. Each unit shall be fastened securely to the
building structure.

J. Capacity of the units shall be as indicated, and shall be certified as complying with AHRI
440 or Equivalent in European standards.

2.3 CONFIGURATION

A. Horizontal Units: An assembly including cabinet, filter, chassis, coil, drain pan, fan, and
motor in blow-through configuration with hydronic cooling coil and electrical heating coil.

B. Concealed Units: An enclosed, horizontal type assembly including cabinet, filter, chassis,
coil, drain pan, fan, and motor in blow-through configuration with hydronic cooling coil and
electrical heating coil with inlet and outlet duct collars.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Chassis: Galvanized steel, with flanged edges.

B. Coil Section Insulation: minimum 13-mm (1/2-inch) duct liner (coated glass fiber or foil-
covered, closed-cell foam) complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive
complying with ASTM C 916.

1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Duct liner and adhesive shall have a combined maximum
flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency.
2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

FAN-COIL UNITS 23 82 19 - Page 3 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain. Drain pan shall be insulated with
polystyrene or polyurethane insulation. Drain pan shall extend to underside of valves,
strainers and accessories, and be formed to slope from all directions to drain connection.

D. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, with removable panels.

1. Vertical Unit Front Panels: Removable, galvanized steel, with galvanized steel
discharge grilles] and channel-formed edges and with insulation on back of panel.
2. Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and hinge and
attached with safety chain; with [cast-aluminum discharge grilles].

E. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer with
manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Engineer, applied to factory-assembled
and -tested fan-coil unit before shipping.

F. Enclosure shall be constructed of not lighter than 18-gage, 1.3 millimeter, and galvanized
steel, properly reinforced and braced. Front panel of enclosure shall be removable and
provided with 1/2-inch (13 millimeter) thick insulation conforming to NFPA 90A, to
prevent condensation. Discharge louvers shall be four-way adjustable and shall be designed
to properly distribute air throughout the conditioned space. All ferrous-metal surfaces shall
be galvanized. All exposed-to-view enclosure corners and edges shall be rounded.
Discharge louvers shall be mounted in a top panel that is removable for coil cleaning.
Access doors shall be hinged and shall be provided for all piping and control compartments.
Enclosure finish shall be manufacturer's standard in color selected by the Engineer.

2.5 WATER COILS

A. Cooling Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer
than 2.5 mm and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a minimum working pressure
of 11200 kPa and a maximum entering water temperature of 50 deg C.

2.6 Electric heat

A. Coils are of high grade single-phase, nichrome resistance wire, insulated by ceramic
insulators in plated steel brackets.

2.7 FAN

A. Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of galvanized
steel or thermoplastic material; directly connected to or V-belt driven from motor. Fan shall
be suitable for these speed operations. Fan-coil capacity shall be based on medium speed.
The noise level shall not exceed NC30 unless otherwise specified.

2.8 FAN MOTORS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."

B. Motors for Direct-Drive Units: Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with integral
thermal-overload protection and resilient mounts.

FAN-COIL UNITS 23 82 19 - Page 4 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

C. Motors for Belt-Drive Units: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled, with hinged mount, adjustable
motor pulley and permanently lubricated bearings.

D. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes of connecting power circuit.
Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Outdoor-air aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect screen, for fan-coil
units with outdoor-air intake.

B. Steel subbase, height as indicated.

C. Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan-coil units into ceiling or wall.

D. Filter: 25-mm thick, washable type, Aluminum filter and frame.

E. Flexible connections: stainless steel corrugated core which permits bending, surrounded by
a stainless steel braid which allows the connector to be pressurized.

2.10 CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. Wall-mounted electronic thermostat, with manual three-speed fan-speed switch and

electronic cycling of valves, suitable to be connected to the central building control system
specified in Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for public areas. Tenants FCUs
shall not be connected to BMS.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and rate units according to AHRI 440 or equivalent in European standards.

B. Test unit coils according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410 or equivalent in European
standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before
fan-coil unit installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fan-coil unit’s level and plumb.

FAN-COIL UNITS 23 82 19 - Page 5 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0
 CITY OF JUSTICE
NEW ADMINISTARTIVE CAPITAL

B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber
hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Section "Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping
and Instruments."

D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls at heights to match lighting controls.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

C. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

D. Ground equipment.

E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A - 486B.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:

1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or

replacements are made.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. After installing units, clean fan-coil units internally according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

C. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units.

END OF SECTION 238219

FAN-COIL UNITS 23 82 19 - Page 6 of 6

APRIL 2024 - REV.0